Page 1

HARMAN PROFESSIONAL GROUP Full-Line Catalog

.11


Table of Contents:

Introduction: Corporate Overview Harman Pro’s HiQnet® finally enables system components to reach beyond themselves. From microphone to speaker, the whole is at last greater than the sum of the parts. With a single software application at its heart, HiQnet® is complex enough to handle system-wide configuration, routing, and control, flexible enough to traverse any cable, and intelligent enough to be truly plug ‘n’ play. Now we all speak one language. With HiQnet® it simply is as simple as connect, configure and control.

BSS Audio has amassed an international reputation for providing reliable equipment that addresses the real needs of musicians. BSS’s name can also be found in recording studios and in broadcast studio output. Their products, either live sound systems or fixed installations, are thoroughly researched and tested. The results are powerful, ergonomically packaged equipment. The complete reliability gained through the excellent design and quality assurance is why top performing artists and theatres throughout the world regularly choose BSS Audio systems.

Intelligent Power. Unleased. For 60 years, Crown has designed and manufactured professional power amplifiers, microphones and computer-controlled audio components and software with pride and innovation. Crown products are developed for a wide range of uses, from

Page 2

What makes dbx the most well-respected dynamics processing company? Besides years of leadership and expertise in the processing field, we have combined our detection and summing methods, known as True RMS Level Detection and True RMS Power Summing, to be “true” to the sounds that are heard by the human ear. dbx has patented integrated circuit designs that can detect and then process natural sounds over a broad range of signals. Wouldn’t all musicians want their voices to be heard at their best?

Playback the last 60 years of music and motion picture recording and one name stands alone: JBL. Before THX and Dolby, before stereo and even hi-fi, there was JBL. Today, JBL’s well-earned reputation has placed its speakers in all types of professional institutions, including legendary recording studios, famous concert venues and premier movie houses. Throughout those 60 years of technical breakthroughs, award winning designs and continuing innovations the facts still remain: JBL loudspeakers continue to be the one benchmark for quality, the singular reference for accuracy in the playback of recorded sounds; the leader, the innovator, the authority.

Selenium offers a wide range of professional drivers, tweeters, subwoofers, woofers and horns for a number of different applications. With more than 50 years of experience, the company is considered one of the most important manufacturer’s of professional transducers and exports it’s products to more than 70 countries world wide. With the latest technologies available, unique features and high reliability, Selenium is the right solution when it comes to professional transducers.

Lexicon measures its success by the simple fact that they are the world-wide choice in digital processing by engineers, producers and performers. Their uncompromised integrity has proven to be extremely successful over the years. History was made when our Reverb line was introduced at the 1978 AES Convention. It was considered the first commercially viable digital reverb system. Lexicon’s innovations haven’t stopped since. We continue to forge strategic partnerships that will ensure that our systems are always compatible with our customers’ needs.

Drawing from a heritage of over 30 years in mixing console design and manufacture, Soundcraft has developed a unique insight into professional audio requirements. From live sound to recording and broadcast, Soundcraft mixing consoles are built to perform and are responsible for delivering thousands of events day after day all around the world. With professional features, intuitive operation and uncompromised sound quality, Soundcraft has built a global reputation for delivering optimum performance every time.

Section:

Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Section:

Section:

Section:

Section:

Section:

Section:

HiQnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 01 Full Line Catalog Acoustics . . . . . . . . . . . 21 02 AKG Full Line Catalog BSS Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 03 Full Line Catalog International . . . . . . . .191 04 Crown Full Line Catalog Professional Products . . . 261 05 dbx Full Line Catalog JBL Professional . . . . . . . . . 293 06 Full Line Catalog 363 07 Selenium . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00 Full Line Catalog Lexicon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 08 Full Line Catalog 401 09 Soundcraft . . . . . . . . . . . . Full Line Catalog 447 10 Studer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full Line Catalog Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 11 Complete Product Listing Section:

Section:

Section:

For over 60 years, the Studer name has been synonymous in the world of professional audio with innovation, elegant design and unsurpassed excellence in engineering. Today, Studer is acknowledged as the leader is Digital Mixer Technology and offers the widest range of digital broadcast consoles and system components available from any manufacturer.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 00 Introduction Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Harman Professional Group | 2011

AKG’s remarkable microphones and headphones are a synthesis of leading-edge industrial design, innovative electronics and world-class acoustics. AKG is also a technological powerhouse with over 1,500 international patent applications and the largest, best-equipped research and development facilities in the world. For over 60 years, AKG has used its considerable expertise and know-how to develop products that serve markets as diverse as music, recording and broadcast to permanent installation. For its many customers, “it all comes back to the sound” and as long as good sound and long, useful product life are important, they will keep coming back to AKG.

mobile PA systems for musicians and DJs to large installations in stadiums and arenas. Incorporating the best of proven technologies and state-of-the-art advances, including the latest in integrated, network-controlled audio, Crown continues to be the intelligent choice for professional audio.

Section:

Section:

Section:

AKG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dbx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JBL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selenium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lexicon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soundcraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Studer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

464 464 464 464 465 466 466 466 466

Page 3


Introduction: Contact Information hiqnet.harmanpro.com

HiQnet

8760 South Sandy Parkway, Sandy, Utah 84070, USA, Tel: (801) 566-8800, Fax: (801) 568-7662 For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: hiqnet.harmanpro.com

www.akg.com

AKG Acoustics

AKG Acoustics GmbH Lembรถckgasse 21-25, A-1230 Vienna/AUSTRIA, Tel: (+43 1) 86 654-0,* www.akg.com, e-mail: sales@akg.com, Hotline: (+43 676) 83200 888, hotline@akg.com AKG Acoustics, U.S. 8400 Balboa Boulevard. Northridge, CA 91329, U.S.A., Tel: (+1 818) 920-3212, e-mail: akgusa@harman.com

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.akg.com

www.bssaudio.com

BSS Audio

8760 South Sandy Parkway, Sandy, Utah 84070, USA, Tel: (801) 566-8800, Fax: (801) 568-7662 For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.bssaudio.com

www.crownaudio.com

Crown Audio, Inc.

1718 W. Mishawaka Road, Elkhart, IN 46517, USA, Tel: (574) 294-8000, www.crownaudio.com For other products and distributors worldwide, see our website: www.crownaudio.com

Section:

01

www.dbxpro.com

dbx Professional Products

Section:

01 00

8760 South Sandy Parkway, Sandy, Utah 84070, USA, Tel: (801) 566-8800, Fax: (801) 830-7662 International Fax: (801) 568-7583, web: www.dbxpro.com, www.driverack.com, email: customer@dbxpro.com For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.dbxpro.com

www.jblpro.com

JBL Professional

8500 Balboa Blvd, Northridge, CA 91329, USA Tel: (818) 894-8850, Domestic Sales Fax: (818) 830-7801, International Sales Fax: (818) 830-7801, Customer Service Fax: (818) 830-7881, web: www.jblpro.com For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.jblpro.com

Electronica Selenium

www.seleniumloudspeakers.com

BR 386, km 435 - 92480-000, Nova Santa Ritas/RS, Brasil, Tel: 55 51 3479 4000, Fax: 55 51 34791150 For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.seleniumloudspeakers.com

Lexicon

www.lexiconpro.com

8760 South Sandy Parkway, Sandy, UT 84070, USA, Tel: (801) 566-8800, Fax: (801) 568-7662, web: www.lexicon.com For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.lexiconpro.com

Soundcraft

www.soundcraft.com

Cranborne House, Cranborne Road, Potters Bar, Herts EN6 3JN UK Tel: +44 (0) 1707 665000, Fax: +44 (0) 1707 660742, e-mail: info@soundcraft.com For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.soundcraft.com

Studer Professional Audio GmbH

www.studer.ch

Althardstrasse 30, CH-8105 Regensdorf-Zurich Switzerland, Tel: +41 44 870 75 11, Fax: +41 870 71 34, e-mail: info@studer.ch For other products and distributors worldwide see our website: www.studer.ch

Page 4

Page 5


overview

System Architect version 2 brings with it a new system design philosophy centered on workflow, and the use of a diagrammatic representation of the installed or live sound venue. Devices understand both their physical and logical placement - in racks, arrays and rooms - ‘educating’ System Architect about how they are to be used. System Architect can then begin automating many of the laborious system design tasks for free. Panels for monitoring and grouped–device control are Harman Professional Group | 2011

created automatically. Harman Professional Group | 2011

With the widest range of audio devices at your disposal in a single software interface, you’ll be amazed at how the world suddenly becomes a calmer place.

Section:

01

Let System Architect work for you.

Section:

01

Work faster and better than ever before. Meet the perfect partner to the audio system designer and let HiQnet System Architect™ transform your life. Seize the benefits of the only configuration and control application to address the entire audio system.

Page 6

Page 7


yourworkflow

venuedefinition

System Architect version 2 features a new system design philosophy centered on workflow. Tell the application which stage of the design process you are currently configuring, and the interface will tailor itself for that function, giving you the tools you need and hiding the tools you don’t.

Step one is to define the Venue.

process begins – by considering the layout of the venue. To help, the first stage of the design process

Within the dedicated ‘Draw Venue’ mode,

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Instead of jumping straight in at the device level, System Architect now begins where your thought

an existing venue plan can be imported, and

is literally to draw a diagrammatic representation of the installed or live sound space.

traced with the simple building blocks. Vertices can be added and removed, and snapped to grid easily for quick and simple replication of the venue within System

With this information, System Architect will now know the areas of the venue:

Section:

01

• where devices can be physically located

• which contain loudspeakers to which amplifier channels are connected

• which need monitoring

• which need control panels

Architect.

Section:

01

The subsequent stages of the design process allow the HiQnet devices to be arranged by both their physical and logical placement. In essence System Architect allows you, the designer, to instruct it

about how devices are to be used – their responsibilities and their behavior. Care has been taken to make the process as simple as possible so that, within a matter of minutes, a complete plan

And with that knowledge, System Architect is able to provide automation of many of the once laborious system design tasks for free.

view of the venue becomes the space in which you work. System Architect is now ready for you to start informing it about where devices physically belong…

We know how you design audio systems. Now so does your software.

Page 8

Page 9


addingdevices

automatedcontrol

So now sit back and relax while System Architect turns the Venue into a system monitoring panel. If a device exhibits an error condition – System Architect Devices are now added to System Architect

knows where it is and so can turn the rack room yellow

by their physical location, literally replicating

or red, depending on the level of the condition. Simple.

where they will be found in the real world. Drag from the vast array of HiQnet devices

Harman Professional Group | 2011

into the appropriate rack room in the building,

Harman Professional Group | 2011

for example. Inside the room rackmount devices can be racked, or loudspeakers arranged in arrays.

Each and every area of the Venue to which amplifier channels have been associated, has an automatically-generated control panel accessible directly from the Venue, grouping the

Section:

appropriate parameters on your behalf.

01 associatingamplifiers

Section:

01

In order for System Architect to understand the last detail of how the devices and the building interact, the last stage of design is to instruct the application how amplifiers are used. By dragging-and-dropping the amplifier channels from the intelligent filter list to the areas in the venue, you educate System Architect about how they are wired to the loudspeakers in the physical domain. System Architect can now group these logical channels and start automating control.

Page 10

For any rack and array with one or more of the same device type, System Architect will automatically create a Master Panel for grouped control and make it instantly accessible. Additional Custom and Master Panels can be added to different Areas, tuning the Venue into the main control panel for the system.

Page 11


installedsound Use multiple connection methodologies such as USB, serial or Ethernet simultaneously. Regardless of the interface on the device, HiQnet enables System Architect to unite the system.

Configure and control all devices in the system from multiple computers running System Architect. Automatically discover devices

space space science. science. space science.

and synchronize parameter values without needing to have the original design file loaded.

for control from a remote computer and set up email

Personalize control interfaces with the

alerting from a single window.

integrated control panel designer without

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Configure the entire system

the need for a secondary application. Customize your design from a pre-installed library of controls and backgrounds, or

Design the complete

Section:

01

audio

system

with

HiQnet System Architect’s familiar

and

friendly

drag-and-drop interface. Configure all devices and route audio seamlessly across the entire

Lock down control of all the devices in the system with System Architect’s comprehensive security configuration pages.

create and add your own. Drag and drop controls from device default panels or design first and associate with device parameters later. Create control panel

Section:

shortcuts to launch the panel automatically.

01

Restrict access to authorized personnel only – password protect the software and configure device front panel control for multiple users.

network. Customize control interfaces for multiple computer and touch screen control with the integrated designer. Set up security and remote access for the entire system. All this from a single application. Upload and go. Optimize custom-designed control interfaces for touch screen computer use. Maximize the window space and hide the operating Set device or system presets to recall automatically. Use the integrated

system and background applications.

Scheduler to recall presets at different times of the day, with daily, weekly, monthly or even annual recurrences. Or use the Logic Rules Wizard to trigger presets based on detailed conditions – right down to the individual parameter level.

Page 12

Page 13


performancespaces

Configure preset settings for all devices within the system and assign these Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

to the production console’s internal cue list. Take command of the complete system as you step through the show. Better still, let the front-of-house engineer run HiQnet System

Address all devices in the signal path from a single interface – from microphone to speaker. Manually drag and drop devices into the Venue View or

Section:

01

allow System Architect discover and load devices automatically.

Launch individual device interface panels directly from the device

Architect on a laptop and tweak each device in

in the Venue for offline configuration, or real-time control of live

the system all the way from microphone to speaker

devices. Access separate processing and monitoring functions

without leaving the best seat in the house.

directly from the device’s main panel swiftly and easily. The uniform

Section:

processing lock icon design allows immediate familiarity across

01

different device types.

Organize devices into Racks to Configure device presets within System Architect and recall any combination of these directly from the console’s internal cue list. The Soundcraft Vi6 and Studer Vista series of consoles can now be masters of the show and the system.

replicate how they are used in the real world. Once in Racks, two or more like-devices will be treated as a group and can be controlled from automaticallygenerated Master Panels, instantly accessible from the Rack itself. Organizing

Configure and control all connected devices by running System Architect on a laptop computer at the front-of-house position.

Page 14

devices into Racks also

stage stage manager. manager.

stage manager.

assists with searching for devices and parameters during system configuration.

Page 15


livesound Discover all connected devices and let them automatically negotiate their own network addresses. The plug-and-play architecture employed by the HiQnet communications language and System Architect makes system setup a breeze.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Configure and control each device with the wireless tablet computer display

1, 2, 3, 4...

Section:

01

1,1, 2,2, 3,3, 4... 4...

mode, optimized to make use of the full tablet screen. Switch between the standard desktop and tablet layout with

Enter data directly into context-sensitive alphanumeric keypads when

the dedicated button located in the

using a Tablet PC. These keypads appear automatically when the data

application Ribbon for convenient access

entry field is touched with the stylus, and disappear when the data is

with the tablet stylus.

entered. Each keypad understands the properties of the parameter from

Section:

01

which it was called, enabling system tuning with precision on a Tablet PC and putting control literally at your fingertips.

...and counting. With now over 90 HiQnet models currently Organize compatible loudspeakers

addressable from System Architect - and with more to come -

into separate Arrays, mirroring their

you can truly take control over the full audio system. Let

use in the real world. Just as with

System Architect discover all connected devices with its plug-

Racks, two or more like-devices

and-play architecture. Replicate the real world by organizing

group and can be controlled from

within an Array will be treated as a

loudspeakers into arrays. Walk the venue with a wireless tablet computer

Log and archive all system events. Use

automatically-generated Master

and address each device with the dedicated tablet mode. Log and archive

the powerful view filters to narrow

Panels, instantly accessible from

down system events quickly and easily.

the Array itself. And just as with

Sort and view events by type, name,

Racks, organizing devices into

date, time, priority, details or device

Arrays also assists with searching

address. Manually archive and export

for devices and parameters during

a complete log in standard database

system configuration.

system events. All the control without the fuss. Sit back and enjoy the show.

format or configure the application to archive logs automatically.

Page 16

Page 17


systemdevices

Harman Professional Group | 2011

AKG HUB 4000 Q – enables connection to DMS 700, WMS 4500/4000

Crown CDi Series – cinema amplifiers which deliver perfectly matched

and IVM 4. Offers wireless system frequency coordination with 1 Click

performance with each award-winning JBL SrceenArray® loudspeaker

Setup, environment scan and wireless connection monitoring.

system and include integrated speaker management and EQ.

BSS Soundweb London – freely-configurable DSP platform,

Crown DSi Series – cinema amplifiers which deliver perfectly matched

parameters of which can be exported from design application HiQnet

performance with each award-winning JBL ScreenArray® system.

Crown I-Tech HD Series / VRACK – Class I touring amplifier with networked audio and a new DSP engine co-developed with BSS Audio, including Linear Phase FIR filters and LevelMax™ limiters.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

London Architect™ for control from System Architect Custom Panels.

Crown XTi Series – rugged and lightweight amplifiers designed for portable PA with on board DSP and USB connectivity. Also controllable from dedicated PA software application HiQnet Band Manager™.

Section:

01

Section:

Crown Macro-Tech i Series – ruggedly-constructed Class I amplifiers built to withstand years of abuse on the road, while continuing the Macro-Tech legacy of unparalleled sonic accuracy and detail.

Crown 2-channel CTs Series – exceptional performance, flexibility and value for installed sound applications, with optional speaker management, EQ, networked audio System Architect control.

Crown multi-channel CTs Series – four-channel and eight-channel variants of the acclaimed CTs Series, including fully integrated speaker management, EQ, networked audio System Architect control.

Page 18

01

JBL VP Series – the ultimate in power, fidelity, reliability and control perfectly suited for a variety of demanding, professional applications with standard networked control, and optional networked audio.

JBL VerTec® DP Series / DPDA – powered line arrays with superb audio quality, robust amplification and integral digital signal processing with networked control, and optional networked audio.

Lexicon PCM Series – an artful blend of heritage and innovation, the PCM92, PCM96 and PCM 96 Surround deliver new and legendary Lexicon reverbs, delays and modulation effects.

Page 19


Anna F. AKG Acoustics GmbH Lemböckgasse 21–25 P.O.B. 158 A-1230 Vienna, Austria Tel: +43 (1) 86654-0 www.akg.com

AKG Acoustics, U.S. 8500 Balboa Boulevard Northridge, CA 91329, USA Tel: (818) 920.3212

Professional Audio Catalog Portable PA Recording & Broadcast

BSS Audio 8760 South Sandy Parkway, Salt Lake City, Utah, 84070, USA Tel: (801) 566-8800 www.bssaudio.com

Installed Sound Tour Sound

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Crown Audio, Inc. 1718 W. Mishawaka Road Elkhart, IN 46517, USA Tel: (574) 294-8000 www.crownaudio.com

dbx Professional 8760 South Sandy Parkway Sandy, Utah 84070, USA Tel: (801) 568-7660 www.dbxpro.com

Section:

01 02

JBL Professional 8500 Balboa Blvd Northridge, CA 91329, USA Tel: (818) 894-8850 www.jblpro.com

Section:

01 02

Lexicon Pro 8760 So. Sandy Parkway Sandy, Utah 84070, USA Tel: (801) 568-7567 www.lexiconpro.com

Soundcraft Cranborne House Cranborne Road Potters Bar Herts EN6 3JN, United Kingdom Tel: +44 (0)1707 665000 www.soundcraft.com

Harman Pro North America 8500 Balboa Boulevard Northridge, CA 91329, USA Tel: (818) 920.3212

Studer Professional Audio Harman Pro North America Studer Professional Audio GmbH 8500 Balboa Boulevard Riedthofstrasse 214 Northridge, CA 91329, USA CH-8105 Regensdorf,www.akg.com Switzerland Tel: (818) 920.3212 Tel: +41 (0)44 870 75AKG 11Acoustics GmbH www.studer.ch Lemböckgasse 21–25, 1230 Vienna /AUSTRIA, phone: + 43 1 86654 0 e-mail: sales@akg.com AKG Acoustics, U.S. 8400 Balboa Boulevard, Northridge, CA 91329, U.S.A., phone: + 1 818 920 3212 e-mail: akgusa@harman.com For other products and distributors worldwide visit www.akg.com Specifications subject to change without notice.

01/11 PROA016020

harmanpro.com Page 20

Page 21


Content

Technical Grammy Award 2010

®

“And the award goes to... AKG!”

Recording

Stage

Installed

Recording

Handheld Microphones

Gooseneck Microphones

Microphones

Microphones

C 12 VR C 451 B C 414 XLS C 414 XL II

26 27 28 29

Recording & Broadcast 30 31 32 32 33 33

ULS Series 34 34 34 34 35

AKG Blue Line CK 91, CK 92, CK 93, CK 94 C 391 B, SE 300 B, CK 98

36 37

Perception

02

46 47 48 48 49 49 50

Instrument Microphones D 112, D 40 C 430, C 411

51 52

Clip-on Microphones

CK 61-ULS CK 62-ULS CK 63-ULS C 480 B CK 69-ULS

Section:

C 535 EB, C 5 D 7, D 7 S D 5, D 5 S D 770 D 88 S/XLR, D 88 S/Jack D 77 S/XLR, D 77 S/Jack D 55 S, D 44 S

Perception Series - Introduction 38 Perception 820 Tube 39 Perception 420 40 Perception 220 40 Perception 170 41 Perception 120 41 Perception 120 USB 42

C 518, C 519 C 516 ML, C 544 L

53 54

Head-worn Microphones C 520, C 555 L HC 577 L

55 56

Reference Projects

65

Architectural Microphone Series Architectural Microphones

66

Modular Series Installation, System Description 69 Modular Series 70 GN Series 71 GN E Series 72 GN ESP Series 73 GN E 5Pin Series 74 HM 1000 75 GN 155 Set 75

CK 77 WR C 417, CK 99 L

56 57

Perception Live Perception Live - Introduction P 5/P 5 S P 4, P 3 S P 2, Groove Pack

58 59 60 61

C 747 V11 C 547 BL PCC®-160 PZM®-30D PZM®-6D PCC®-170, PCC®-130/130SW PZM®-185, Sound Grabber II MB 3, MB 4 C 562 CM PZM®-10, PZM®-10LL PZM®-11, PZM®-11LLWR C 568 B CK 98

82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 90 91 92 93

Microphone Mixer

Capsule Modules CK 31, CK 32, CK 33 CK 47 CK 80

76 77 77

AMM 10 DMM 4/2/2 DMM 4/2/4

94 96 97

Conference System

99er Series

Lavalier Microphones

Shotgun and Boundary Layer Microphones

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

C 214 C 4000 B, C 3000 C 2000 B C 1000 S C 4500 B-BC D 230

Microphones

99er Series - Introduction CGN 99 C/S, CGN 99 C/L CGN 99 H/S, CGN 99 H/L CHM 99 DGN 99, DGN 99 E, DST 99 S CK 99 L, CBL 99

78 78 79 79 80 81

CS 5 - Introduction CS 5 BU CS 5 DU, CS 5 VU CS 5 IU, CS 5 IRT/IRT2 CS 5 IRR7, CS 5 CU50

98 100 101 102 103

Section:

02

Please note that some of these products may not be available in your country. For details, please contact your local dealer or national AKG distributor or visit our website at: www.akg.com

Wireless

Systems

DMS 700 DSR 700 DHT 700 DPT 700 CU 700

106 107 107 107

WMS 4500 SR 4500 HT 4500 PT 4500 CU 4000/BP 4000

System ArchitectTM HUB 4000 Q Wireless iPhone App HiQnet® System Components Multi-Channel Systems

112 112 113 113 114 115

SR 450 WMS 450 Sets HT 450 PT 450

SR 470 WMS 470 Sets HT 470 PT 470

118 118 119 119

Alejandro Sanz

Perception Wireless

WMS 450 108 109 110 111

WMS 470

116 116 117 117

SR 45 Perception Wireless Sets HT 45 PT 45

120 120 121 121

Headphones Headphones

Headsets 128 128 129 129 130 130

SST 4 IVM 4 Sets SPR 4 IP 2 IVM 4 Accessories IVM 4 Multi-Channel Systems

122 122 123 123 124 125

Appendix

Headsets

K 271 MK II K 171 MK II K 240 MK II K 141 MK II K 181 DJ K 81 DJ

IVM 4 Wireless In-Ear Monitoring

K 702 K 77 K 99 K 44 K 10

131 132 132 133 133

HSC 271 HSC 171 HSD 271 HSD 171

134 134 135 135

Accessories Accessories Matrix Application Guide Patents Key to Product Names Specifications – comparison chart Alphabetical Index

136-139 140-141 142-143 144 145 146-164 165

Content

Page 22

Page 23


Recording C 12 VR C 451 B C 414 XLS C 414 XL II

26 27 28 29

Recording & Broadcast C 214 C 4000 B C 3000 C 2000 B C 1000 S C 4500 B-BC D 230

30 31 31 32 32 33 33

ULS Series 34 34 34 34 35

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

CK 61-ULS CK 62-ULS CK 63-ULS C 480 B CK 69-ULS

AKG Blue Line CK 91, CK 92, CK 93, CK 94 C 391 B, SE 300 B, CK 98

36 37

Perception

Section:

02

Perception Series - Introduction Perception 820 Tube Perception 420 Perception 220 Perception 170 Perception 120 Perception USB 120

38 39 40 40 41 41 42

Recording

Section:

02

Microphones

AKG – a brand that has built an enviable world-wide reputation for performance, dependability and service. A microphone for every

requirement – television studios, motion-picture production centers, theaters, stadiums, concert halls, opera houses, communication links, schools, home tape recorders. The personal choice of hundreds of performers.

Page 24

Page 25


Recording Recording Vocals Strings Brass

Recording Percussions Lectern Drums • Identical acoustics to the legendary C 451 EB + CK1

• Recreates the performance of the legendary C 12 microphone • A special edge-terminated dual-large-diaphragm AKG transducer

• Accurate, ruler-flat on-axis response with life-like transient response

42

• Transformerless output circuit delivers wide dynamic range and loss-free low-end response

• Nine remotely-selectable pickup patterns from omni to figure-eight • Comes complete with all accessories and all-metal carrying case 221

02

• Polar pattern: • Frequency range: • Sensitivity: • Max. SPL for 3% THD: • Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): • Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): • Preattenuation pad: • Bass cut filter:

6

Responding to growing demand, AKG has recreated the sonic performance of the legendary C 451 EB + CK 1 combination in a modern new microphone. The new C 451 B has dramatically improved specifications and reliability. The new non-modular microphone has an extremely light diaphragm for insensitivity to handling noise, and still retains the incredible transient response of the original. The nickel-plated, all-metal chassis is attractive and provides excellent protection from RF interference and the rigors of handling. The C 451 B transformerless output section ensures it is an excellent tool for capturing transient-rich signals such as drums, percussion and acoustic guitar.

2221Z00040

cardioid

Page 26

C 451 B

The C 12 VR is a perfect reincarnation of the legendary C 12 microphone including its famous “voice-friendly” sound. True to the original design, the mic uses the same 6072A dual-triode tube, hand-selected for the lowest noise and optimum sonic characteristics. The sound of the C 12 VR can be described as the perfect blend of warmth, clarity and presence. The C 12 VR comes complete with windscreen, all-metal shock-mount, power supply/remote control unit, connecting cable and individually-measured response graphs. Item number: C 12 VR

160

• Also available as factory-matched stereo pairs complete with accessories and metal “Sound Tools Case”

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Separate 3-position pre-attenuation pad and bass roll-off switch

C 12 VR

Section:

19

Item numbers: C 451 B C 451 B/ST

omnidirectional

cardioid, omnidirectional, figure-eight, and 6 intermediate positions, remotely selectable 30 to 20,000 Hz 10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV); 10-dB increase, selectable by internal switch 128/138/148 dB 22 dB-A 72 dB 10 dB, 20 dB, selectable 6 dB/octave at 100 Hz, 12 dB/octave at 130 Hz

figure-eight

• • • • • • • • • • •

Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

≤200 ohms ≥1,000 ohms from supplied N 12 VR power supply from supplied N 12 VR power supply 12-pin DIN 10 m (33 ft.) green/gold 42 dia. x 225 mm (1.7 dia. x 8.9 in.) 680 g (24 oz.)/4.5 kg (9.9 lbs.) H 15/T, MK-Tube, N 12 VR, W 42 PF 80

Section:

02

2895Z00010 2895Z00210 (Matched stereo pair)

cardioid

• • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 0.5% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Preattenuation pad: Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 9 mV/Pa (-41 dBV) 135/145/155 dB (0/-10/-20 dB) 18 dB-A 76 dB 0 dB, 10 dB, 20 dB selectable flat, 12 dB/octave at 75 or 150 Hz, selectable ≤200 ohms ≥1,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power

• • • • • • •

Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

≤2 mA 3-pin XLR satin nickel plated 19 dia. x 160 mm (0.75 dia. x 6.3 in.) 125 g (4.4 oz.)/760 g (1.7 lbs.) SA 60, Sound Tool Case, W 90 B 18, H 30, H 50, H 85, H 300, PF 80, ST 305, W 32

Recording & Broadcast

7

Page 27


Recording Professional Studio Recording Choir Miking Professional Stage Miking Drum Overhead Miking Classic Music Recording

Lead Vocals Lead Instruments Choir Miking Drum Overhead Miking Classic Music Recording

• AKG C 414 – A legend since 1971

• AKG C 414 – A legend since 1971

• Nine selectable pickup patterns enable to choose the perfect setting for every application

• Nine selectable pickup patterns enable to choose the perfect setting for every application

• Lock Mode: all controls can be disabled easily for trouble-free use

• Lock Mode: all controls can be disabled easily for trouble-free use

• Peak Hold LED even detects shortest overload peaks

• Peak Hold LED even detects shortest overload peaks

• Incredible Dynamic Range of 152 dB

02

• Designed, engineered and built in Vienna, Austria

• Designed, engineered and built in Vienna, Austria

159

• Three switchable different bass cut filters and three pre-attenuation levels • Leading-edge technology and state-of-the-art components ensure shortest signal path and extra protection against moisture 159

• Three switchable different bass cut filters and three pre-attenuation levels • Leading-edge technology and state-of-the-art components ensure shortest signal path and extra protection against moisture

C 414 XLS

C 414 XL II

For over 60 years, leading musicians and engineers have used legendary AKG microphones to capture their sound so their audience hears every nuance. The C 414 family has been one of the world’s most widely-used and respected studio and stage microphones. AKG has continually set new benchmarks for useful features, improved technical specifications and ease of use to answer requests from everdemanding recording studios, broadcast stations and audio engineers. The new models C 414 XLS and C 414 XL II offer nine pickup patterns which enable to choose the perfect setting for every application. For live-sound applications and permanent installations all controls can be disabled easily for trouble-free use. A Peak Hold LED displays even shortest overload peaks. The C 414 XLS maintains the sonic character of the legendary C 414 B-ULS, the longest-lived C 414 model. Engineered for highest linearity and neutral sound, it is the most universal and versatile large diaphragm microphone for decades. Widely used for accurate, beautifully detailed pickup of any acoustic instrument the new C 414 XLS combines proven reference quality, leading-edge technology and state-of-the-art components.

The C 414 XL II is the successor of the famous C 414 B-TL II. It shows the unique sonic signature of the highly sought after AKG C 12 which enables lead vocals and solo instruments to be placed even in a dense mix. The unrivalled up-front sound is also well-known for distant miking applications like classic music recording or drum ambience miking. The XL II version differs from the XLS version in one major respect – the capsule. Both, the slight presence boost and the impressive spatial reproduction is similar to the legendary C 12 microphones. The new models C 414 XLS and C 414 XL II offer nine pickup patterns which enable to choose the perfect setting for every application. For live-sound applications and permanent installations all controls can be disabled easily for trouble-free use. A Peak Hold LED displays even shortest overload peaks. The C 414 comes complete with carrying case, pop filter, windscreen, and spider-type shock mount.

Item number: C 414 XLS C 414 XLS Stereo Set

Item number: C 414 XL II C 414 XL II Stereo Set

3059Z00050 3059Z00230

C 414 B-XLS: cardioid

C 414 B-XLS: wide cardioid

C 414 B-XLS: hypercardioid

• Polar pattern: • Frequency range: • Sensitivity: • Max. SPL for 0.5% THD: • Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): • Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): • Preattenuation pad: • Bass cut filter slope: • Electrical impedance: • Recommended load impedance:

8

Page 28

omnidirectional, wide cardioid, cardioid, hypercardioid, figure eight and 4 intermediate Settings 20 to 20,000 Hz (see frequency response traces) 23 mV/Pa (-33 dBV) ± 0.5 dB 200/400/800/1600 Pa = 140/146/152/158 dB (0/-6/-12/-18 dB) 6 dB-A (0 dB preattenuation) 88 dB -6 dB, -12 dB, -18 dB, switchable 12 dB/octave at 40 Hz and 80 Hz; 6 dB/octave at 160 Hz ≤200 ohms ≥2,200 ohms

C 414 B-XLS: figure-eight

• • • • • • • •

Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

48 V phantom powe approximately 4.5 mA 3-pin XLR to IEC dark grey/silver 50 x 38 x 160 mm (2.0 x 1.5 x 6.3 in.) 300 g (10.6 oz.) H 85, PF 80, Soundtool Case, W 414 H 50, ST 305

Section:

02

3059Z00060 3059Z00240 Stereo Set – selected with AKG’s sophisticated matching method.

Stereo Set – selected with AKG’s sophisticated matching method.

C 414 B-XLS: omnidirectional

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

49

• Incredible Dynamic Range of 152 dB

49

C 414 B-XL II: omnidirectional

C 414 B-XL II: cardioid

C 414 B-XL II: wide cardioid

C 414 B-XL II: hypercardioid

• Polar pattern: • Frequency range: • Sensitivity: • Max. SPL for 0.5% THD: • Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): • Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): • Preattenuation pad: • Bass cut filter slope: • Electrical impedance: • Recommended load impedance:

omnidirectional, wide cardioid, cardioid, hypercardioid, figure eight and 4 intermediate Settings 20 to 20,000 Hz (see frequency response traces) 23 mV/Pa (-33 dBV) ± 0.5 dB 200/400/800/1600 Pa = 140/146/152/158 dB (0/-6/12/-18 dB) 6 dB-A (0 dB preattenuation) 88 dB -6 dB, -12 dB, -18 dB, switchable 12 dB/octave at 40 Hz and 80 Hz; 6 dB/octave at 160 Hz ≤200 ohms ≥2,200 ohms

C 414 B-XL II: figure-eight

• • • • • • • •

Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

48 V phantom power approximately 4.5 mA 3-pin XLR to IEC dark grey/gold 50 x 38 x 160 mm (2.0 x 1.5 x 6.3 in.) 300 g (10.6 oz.) H 85, PF 80, Soundtool Case, W 414 H 50, ST 305

Recording & Broadcast

9

Page 29


Recording & Broadcast Recording Vocals Concert hall Strings

Guitar and bass amps Lead instruments Lead vocals Professional stage miking Professional studio recording

• One of the most silent condenser microphones available today

• AKG’s legendary 1” edge-terminated large diaphragm sound

• Up front sound in the mix

• Outstanding dynamic range (up to 156 dB SPL, ultra-low noise)

• Selectable cardioid, hypercardioid and omnidirectional polar patterns for every recording situation

• Roadworthy design • Integrated suspension to reduce mechanical noise

• Diaphragm with patented Edge-Terminated Back-Plate Technology • Proven performance for more than 15 years 53 for both studio and stage

58

• Handles extremely high SPLs up to 155 dB • Complete with accessories in “Sound Tool Case”

• All-metal die-cast body with shock- and scratch-resistant finish • Spider-type shock mount H 85 included

• Switchable attenuation pad enables for high SPL up to 150 dB • Switchable low cut filter (500 Hz, 6 dB/octave) eliminates proximity effect

• Metal carrying case included

• Comes complete with H 85 spider-type shock mount and metal carrying case

• Designed, engineered and built in Vienna, Austria

Section:

02

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Rugged double mesh grill for high RF immunity but unaffected acoustics

182

• Switchable 20 dB attenuation pad and low cut switch

161

Professional studio recording Lead vocals Lead instruments Ensemble recording Professional stage miking

C 3000

C 214

C 4000 B

AKG's industry-leading C 414 microphones are already a permanent fixture in the world's biggest recording studios and a highly respected work horse for independent artists, broadcasting, and on-stage miking as well.

The genuine 1-inch dual-diaphragm condenser transducer with selectable cardioid, omnidirectional and hypercardioid polar patterns will enchant you with its unique state-of-the-art sound. Designed for miking up vocals, brass, acoustic and electric guitar and kick drum, the C 4000 B can handle every recording situation. Exceptionally high headroom and extremely low self noise put the C 4000 B among the condenser microphones with the widest dynamic range available today and it will give equally excellent results in the studio and on stage.

The new C 214 is designed as a cost-effective alternative to the high-end, industry-leading C 414 family. It captures sound combining one side of the legendary C 414 dual-capsule system and AKG’s patented Back-Plate Technology which results in an outstanding performance close to the famous C 414 B-XLS. Like the C 414 models, the C 214 is capable of handling the rigors of high-pressure sound such as loud brass instruments and guitar amps, with a sensitivity perfect for voice and orchestral instruments as well. Additionally, the microphone offers a 20 dB Attenuation pad, 13 dB noise floor, and a low cut switch—all in an elegant but rugged package. Additional features include an integrated suspension, a double mesh grill high RF immunity without affecting acoustics. The circuitry in the C 214 provides maximum SPL capability with minimum noise and the gold-plated XLR-type output connector offers loss-free signals.

Stereo Set – selected with AKG’s sophisticated matching method.

Item number: C 214 3185Z00010 C 214 Stereo Set 3185Z00110

Item number: C 4000 B 2820Z00110 cardioid

Since its introduction in 1993 our C 3000 has become a standard for a wide range of both studio and onstage applications. The new redesigned C 3000 is a cost-effective and aesthetically pleasing product update which maintains the popular characteristics of the C 3000, however a new sleek and classy finish showcases AKG’s new Corporate Design. It is a great selection for both recording and live sound applications, where maximum sound quality and robustness are a must, and the competitive price makes the C 3000 a must-have. The new C 3000 features a cardioid pickup pattern, a 20 Hz to 20 kHz frequency response, low noise electronics, high SPL capability and an internal shock mount, which drastically reduces handling noise from mic stands or cables. The switchable 10 dB preattenuation pad increases the SPL capability by 10 dB and accommodates loud instruments like brass instruments or guitar amplifiers with ease. The switchable firstorder 500 Hz low frequency filter eliminates the proximity effect for close-miking.

Section:

02

Item number: C 3000 2785X00230

The C 214 comes complete with a robust metal carrying case, windscreen, and spider-type suspension mount included. Available also as a computer matched stereo pair. Niere

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 0.5 % THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Preattenuation pad: Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption:

10

Page 30

Cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 20 mV/Pa 136 / 156 dB SPL 13 dB-A 81 dB 0/-20 dB, switchable 160 Hz, 6 dB/Octave, switchable ≤200 ohms ≥1,000 ohm 12 to 52 V ≤2 mA

• • • • • •

Dynamic range: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories:

• Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

123/143 dB (0/-20 dB) (A-weighted) 3-pin XLR matte grayish blue 160 x 56 mm (6.3 x 2.2 in.) 280 g (9.9 oz.) / 1450 g (3.2 lbs.) H 85 Shock Mount, W 214 Windscreen, Metal Carrying Case H 85, Sound Tool Case, W 214 B 18 PF 80, SA 61, ST 305

hypercardioid

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 0.5% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Preattenuation pad: Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

omnidirectional

omnidirectional, cardioid, hypercardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 25 mV/Pa (-32 dBV) 145/155 dB 8 dB-A 86 dB 10 dB, switchable 12 dB/octave at 100 Hz ≤200 ohms ≥1,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2 mA 3-pin XLR silver grey 58 dia. x 183 mm (2.3 dia. x 7.2 in.) 450 g (1 lb.)/1 kg (2.2 lbs.) H 85, Sound Tool Case, W 4000 B 18, PF 80, SA 61, ST 305

cardioid

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 0.5% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Preattenuation pad: Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions 19 dia. x 160 mm (0.75 dia. x 6.3 in.): Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 20 mV/Pa (-32 dBV) 140/150 dB 14 dB-A 80 dB 10 dB, switchable 6 dB/octave below 500 Hz ≤200 ohms ≥1,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2 mA 3-pin XLR matte grayish blue max. 53 mm (2.1 in.), length: 162 mm (6.4 in.) 320 g (11.3 oz.)/950 g (2.1 lbs.) Sound Tool Case, H 85 B 18, PF 80, SA 61, ST 305, W 414

Recording & Broadcast

11

Page 31


Recording & Broadcast Recording Vocals Brass Percussions

Recording Live sound TV, motion picture, video production ENG/EFP (Outdoor)

Vocals Radio/on air Brass Drums

• Entry-level home recording microphone

Recording TV, motion picture, video production ENG/EFP (Outdoor)

• Ideal multitrack recording “workhorse” thanks to very low self noise

• Known as “the Swiss Army mic” for its incredible flexibility

• Large-diaphragm condenser capsule with cardioid pickup and “voice-friendly” tuning

• Cardioid polar pattern for multiplicity of applications

• Battery status LED for accurate monitoring of battery life

• Unique acoustical design and minimal proximity-effect

• Integrated windscreen 50 58

• Integrated pop screen for minimum blowing noise

• Included PB 1000 presence boost adapter adds high-end brilliance to sound

215

• Transformerless output circuit ensures zero susceptibility to RF and EMI

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

160

• Long shaft for ease of handling

• Switchable 20-dB pad and 120-Hz bass roll-off filter

• Included PPC 1000 allows the microphone to be switched from cardioid to hypercardioid pickup

• High SPL capability • Complete with accessories in “Sound Tool Case”

33,5

• Rugged all-metal body

182

53

• Can be powered by internal 9-V battery or by phantom power

230

• Exceptionally smooth frequency response

• Omnidirectional reporter’s microphone

• Comes in metal “sound tools” carrying case

C 1000 S

C 2000 B

Section:

02

One of the basic rules of recording is that the quality of the recorded signal is determined by the weakest link in the signal chain. Today, any microphone needs to match the high quality of 24-bit recording media. One of the most important requirements for the C 2000 B was therefore high sensitivity. This allows you to lay clean, noise-free tracks with no risk of noise levels from many individual tracks combining in the mix. Its high SPL capability makes the C 2000 B a highly versatile microphone that can be used even for extremely loud instruments. The C 2000 B will give perfect results for demo recordings, in the rehearsal room, as well as in the best recording studios. Item numbers: C 2000 B

2786Z00110

C 4500 B-BC

D 230

The versatility of the C 1000 S makes it extremely popular and it’s ideally suited for all kinds of recording and live sound applications. If phantom power isn’t available, this mic can be powered by a standard 9 V battery, making it perfect for ENG or location recording. With its new battery monitoring electronics, the C 1000 S now features an LED warning light that warns when battery life falls below 45 minutes. The pickup pattern can be quickly switched from cardioid to hypercardioid simply by attaching the PPC 1000 polar pattern converter provided to the microphone capsule. The PB 1000 Presence Boost Adapter supplied with the C 1000 S adds 3 to 5 dB of high-end enhancement between 5 and 9 kHz, improving speech clarity and adding definition to instrument sounds.

The AKG C 4500 B-BC is a front-address, large-diaphragm condenser microphone designed for critical on-air broadcast work as well as for recording of high-SPL instruments such as bass drum, various brass instruments and guitar amps. Thanks to its innovative acoustical design and patented internal multi-layer pop filter, the C 4500 B-BC has minimal proximity effect enabling close-up use without bass build-up and its front-address format makes it easy to position for best results. Comes complete with H 85 spider-type shock mount, W 4000 windscreen and metal carrying case.

This rugged dynamic ENG microphone delivers exceptional sensitivity and clarity in the demanding news gathering field. The extended shaft allows for easy placement of station flags without typical handling problems. The body is made of extremely rugged diecast metal with a non-reflective surface for low-profile on-camera operation. Stand adapter included.

Item number: C 1000 S

Item number: C 4500 B-BC 2820Z00120

Item number: D 230 2558X00020

2331X00070

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 5% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Preattenuation pad: Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

12

Page 32

cardioid 30 to 20,000 Hz 20 mV/Pa (-34 dBV) 140/150 dB 20 dB-A 74 dB 10 dB, switchable 6 dB/octave below 500 Hz ≤200 ohms ≥1,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2 mA 3-pin XLR silver grey 53 dia. x 159 mm (2.1 dia. x 6.3 in.) 325 g (11.5 oz.)/950 g (2 lbs.) H 85, Sound Tool Case B 18, PF 80, SA 61, ST 305

cardioid

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

02

omnidirectional

cardioid

cardioid

Section:

hypercardioid (with PPC 1000 mounted)

cardioid, hypercardioid (with PPC 1000 mounted) 50 to 20,000 Hz 6 mV/Pa (-44 dBV) 137 dB 21 dB-A 73 dB ≤200 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power or internal 9 V battery approx. 2 mA 3-pin XLR matte silver enamel 34 dia. x 220 mm (1.4 dia. x 8.7 in.) 320 g (11.3 oz.)/650 g (1.4 lbs.) PB 1000, PPC 1000, SA 63, Sound Tool Case, W 1000 H 30, PF 80, ST 305

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 0.5% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Preattenuation pad: Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

cardioid 30 to 20,000 Hz 20 mV/Pa (-34 dBV) 145/155 dB 8 dB-A 86 dB 20 dB, switchable 6 dB/octave at 120 Hz ≤200 ohms ≥1,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2 mA 3-pin XLR silver grey 58 dia. x 183 mm (2.3 dia. x 7.2 in.) 450 g (1 lb.)/1 kg (2.2 lbs.) H 85, Sound Tool Case, W 4000 B 18, PF 80, SA 61, ST 305

• • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

omnidirectional 40 to 20,000 Hz 2.5 mV/Pa (-52 dBV) ≤320 ohms ≥1,000 ohms 3-pin XLR dark grey 50 dia. x 218 mm (2 dia. x 8.3 in.) 225 g (7.9 oz.)/840 g (1.9 lbs.) SA 44 H 30, SA 61, W 23, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

Recording & Broadcast

13

Page 33


ULS Series

Ultra Linear Series

Recording Theater, onstage miking TV, motion picture, video production BC-ENG/EFP

A line of small diaphragm modular condenser microphones The AKG Ultra Linear Series is a line of small diaphragm modular condenser microphones with the highest technical performance standards. The ULS system is a universally acclaimed and accepted tool for high-end digital recording, film and video production as well as serious live sound reinforcement.

CK 62-ULS

CK 61-ULS

• Two shotgun capsules in one, using two-partinterference tube

21

21

• Ultra-low noise

27

23

27

23

27

23

21

CK 63-ULS dB

Hz

+6 0 -10

lin 70 150

150

• Long shotgun for recording from medium distances 317

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Short shotgun for close-up video recording

176

21

21

P 48 MADE IN AUSTRIA

CK69-ULS

CK 61-ULS

Section:

02

CK 61-ULS Cardioid Capsule The ruler-flat frequency response and consistent polar pattern of the CK 61-ULS make it ideal for critical recording and live sound applications where consistent suppression of off-axis sound is an important requirement. Includes foam windscreen.

cardioid

Specifications (measured with C 480 B) • Polar pattern: • Frequency range: • Sensitivity: • Max. SPL for 0.5% THD: • Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): • Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): • Preattenuation pad: • Powering (IEC 61938): • Current consumption: • Finish: • Dimensions: • Net/shipping weight: • Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

CK 62-ULS

CK 63-ULS

CK 62-ULS Omnidirectional Capsule Identical to CK 61ULS, except for omnidirectional polar pattern. For more reverberant sounding recordings. Includes foam windscreen.

CK 63-ULS Hypercardioid Capsule Identical to CK 61ULS, except for hypercardioid polar pattern. Better off-axis rejection provides better channel separation and higher gain-before-feedback. Includes foam windscreen.

omnidirectional

hypercardioid

CK 61-ULS: CK 62-ULS: cardioid omnidirectional 20 to 20,000 Hz 40/20/6.3 mV/Pa (-28/-34/-44 dBV) 134/140/144 dB

CK 63-ULS: hypercardioid

13/11/17 dB-A 81/83/77 dB +6/0/-10 dB, selectable through C 480 B through C 480 B matte black 21 dia. x 23/27 mm (0.8 dia. x 0.9/1.1 in.) 25 g ( 0.9 oz.)/150 g (5.3 oz.) W 32 windscreen A 61

• Optional accessories for C 480 B comb ULS/61: A 61, H 30, H 50, H 85, H 300, PF 80, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

14

Page 34

C 480 B

CK 69-ULS

The C 480 B is part of a system designed specifically for excellent audio quality and maximum flexibility. Its electronic circuitry coupled to a transformerless output stage assures completely linear transfer characteristics across the entire audio bandwidth, while achieving self-noise figures close to the theoretical minimum. This, in combination with a typical SPL handling capability of 140 dB broadband means a dynamic range exceeding 125 dB, making the system suitable for the most critical digital recording applications. Gold plated switch and connector contacts guarantee consistent performance. A specially designed output stage drives difficult loads (e.g. excessively long cables) with no signal degradation. Two sets of switches offer a two-step highpass filter and two gain manipulation stages of either -10 dB or +6 dB. Also available: C 480 B comb-ULS/61comprising a C 480 B preamplifier, CK 61-ULS cardioid capsule, foam windscreen and stand adapter.

CK 69-ULS Shotgun Capsule Two shotgun capsules in one, with quick and easy conversion from long to short shotgun applications, from hypercardioid to directional polar patterns.In its long shotgun configuration, the CK 69-ULS will deliver perfect results for film/TV outdoor applications or indoor front of stage recording from approximately 20 to 24 feet (6 to 8 m). If you unscrew the front half of the interference tube, the same capsule becomes a short shotgun for use in TV, film and video close-up work. Additionally, the short shotgun mode is ideal for interviews in noisy environments. The CK 69-ULS operates flawlessly in high humidity environments and windscreens are provided for both long and short configurations.

C 480 B comb ULS/61 • Polar pattern: • Frequency range: • Sensitivity: • SPL capability: • Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): • Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): • Preattenuation pad: • Bass cut filter: • Impedance: • Recommended load impedance: • Powering (IEC 61938): • Current consumption: • Connector: • Finish: • Dimensions: • Net/shipping weight: • Standard accessories:

Specifications (measured with C 480 B) • Polar pattern: • Frequency range: • Sensitivity: • Max. SPL for 0.5% THD: • Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): • Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): • Preattenuation pad: • Powering (IEC 61938): • Current consumption: • Finish: • Dimensions: • Net/shipping weight: • Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 40/20/6.3 mV/Pa (-28/-34/-44 dBV) 134/140/144 dB 13/11/17 dB-A 81/83/77 dB +6/0/-10 dB, selectable 12 dB/octave at 100 Hz ≤150 ohms ≥2,000 ohms/1000 pF 48 V phantom power ≤2 mA 3-pin XLR matte black 21 dia. x 173 mm (0.8 dia. x 6.9 in.) 140 g (4.9 oz.)/500 g (1.1 lbs.) SA 60, Sound Tool Case, W 32

Section:

02 W 48, W 49

Response in long shotgun mode

Response in short shotgun mode

C 480 B + CK 69-ULS

Item numbers: CK 61-ULS CK 62-ULS CK 63-ULS C 480 B C 480 B comb-ULS/61 CK 69-ULS

2231Z00210 2231Z00220 2231Z00250 2180Z00150 2200Z00330 2669Z00010

CK 69-ULS hypercardioid/directional 20 to 18,000 Hz 54/27/8.5 mV/Pa (-25/-31/-41 dBV) 134/140/142 dB 11/9/15 dB-A 83/85/79 dB +6/0/-10 dB, selectable through C 480 B through C 480 B matte black 21 dia. x 176/317 mm (0.8 dia. x 6.9/12.5 in.) 70 g (2.5 oz.)/500 g (1.09 lbs.) W 48, W 49 A 61, H 30

Recording & Broadcast

15

Page 35


AKG Blue Line

AKG Blue Line

Recording Theater, onstage miking TV, motion picture, video production Percussions

Moderately-priced modular condenser microphone system The AKG Blue Line is a moderately-priced modular condenser microphone system with extraordinary performance and flexibility. With five different microphone capsules and lots of accessories to choose from, you can customize a Blue Line system to get perfect results on any recording or sound reinforcement job. The basic element of the Blue Line system is the SE 300 B preamp module that transforms the phantom power for the capsule and matches the output impedance to your mixer. The SE 300 B uses AKG’s High Density Surface Mount Device electronics to deliver higher sensitivity, lower noise, better phase and frequency response plus lower distortion than older designs. The transformerless output electronics preserve the full fidelity of the audio spectrum and has extremely low LF distortion. Each precision AKG mic capsule has active transducers with ultra-low mass, gold-sputtered diaphragms. The bayonet coupling system on the SE 300 B and each capsule makes it easy to change modules even under difficult conditions and has self-cleaning contacts to maintain perfect signal integrity even after years of use in hostile environments.

• AKG Blue Line cardioid microphone • Switchable bass cut filter and 10-dB preattenuation pad • Insensitive to handling noise 19

110

43 59 36

36

CK94

51

51

36

lin 75 Hz -10 dB

CK98

CK93

19

P12-48 MADE IN AUSTRIA

19

Section:

02

CK 91

CK 92

CK 93

CK 94

C 391 B

CK 91 Cardioid Capsule Flat frequency response and a consistent cardioid polar pattern make the CK 91 an ideal tool for applications where good off-axis rejection is required. Foam windscreen included.

CK 92 Omnidirectional Capsule Since the frequency of omnidirectional microphones does not change with the distance from the sound source for physical reasons, the CK 92 omni capsule has no proximity effect. Instead, it offers exceptionally neutral presentation of a source in its ambient sound field, providing consistent results regardless of the distance between microphone and source. Includes foam windscreen.

CK 93 Hypercardioid Capsule Similar to the CK 91, the CK 93 features a consistent hypercardioid polar pattern. A hypercardioid provides a much higher ratio of direct to ambient sound than a cardioid does. With this high separation, the CK 93 is an excellent choice for multitrack recording. High gain before feedback makes the CK 93 a very useful tool in live sound applications, too. Includes foam windscreen.

CK 94 Figure-Eight Capsule This figure-eight capsule prefers sound arriving from opposite directions and efficiently suppresses off-axis sounds. The CK 94 is a perfect tool for situations where sound sources face each other. Recommended applications include interviewing, choir miking, drum overheads as well as M/S stereo techniques in combination with a cardioid or hypercardioid microphone. Includes foam windscreen.

AKG Blue Line Microphone Combination, C 391 B Cardioid Versatile cardioid condenser microphone comprising an SE 300 B powering/output module and CK 91 cardioid capsule. Foam windscreen and stand adapter included.

cardioid

Specifications (measured with SE 300 B) • Polar pattern: • Frequency range: • Sensitivity: • Max. SPL for 1% THD: • Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): • Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): • Powering (IEC 61938): • Current consumption: • Connector: • Finish: • Dimensions: • Net/shipping weight: • Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

16

Page 36

Harman Professional Group | 2011

51

SE300B

• Capsule mounts directly on SE 300 B powering unit

19

CK92

CK91

AKG

262

19 19

247

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• High resistance to RF interference

omnidirectional

CK 91: cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV) 132/142 dB 17 dB-A 77 dB through SE 300 B through SE 300 B bayonet mount dark grey 19 dia. x 36/51 mm (0.7 dia. x 1.4/2 in.) 35 g (1.2 oz.)/ 200 g (7.1 oz.) W 90 A 91

hypercardioid

CK 92: omnidirectional 20 to 20,000 Hz 10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV) 132/142 dB 17 dB-A 77 dB through SE 300 B through SE 300 B bayonet mount dark grey 19 dia. x 36/51 mm (0.7 dia. x 1.4/2 in.) 35 g (1.2 oz.)/ 200 g (7.1 oz.) W 90 A 91

figure-eight

CK 93: hypercardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV) 132/142 dB 17 dB-A 77 dB through SE 300 B through SE 300 B bayonet mount dark grey 19 dia. x 36/51 mm (0.7 dia. x 1.4/2 in.) 35 g (1.2 oz.)/ 200 g (7.1 oz.) W 90 A 91

CK 94: figure-eight 20 to 20,000 Hz 10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV) 132/142 dB 22 dB-A 72 dB through SE 300 B through SE 300 B bayonet mount dark grey 19 dia. x 43/59 mm (0.7 dia. x 1.7/2.3 in.) 45 g (1.9 oz.)/ 200 g (7.1 oz.) W 90 A 91

SE 300 B

CK 98

AKG Blue Line SE 300 B Transformerless Powering/Output Module. The SE 300 B operates from any 9 to 52 V phantom power supply. It incorporates a switchable 12 dB/octave bass cut filter at 75 Hz to eliminate footfall noise and a switchable 10-dB preattenuation pad for high-SPL sound sources. A transformerless output stage ensures pristine full-range audio and prevents low-frequency distortion. Stand adapter included.

Item numbers: CK 91 CK 92 CK 93 CK 94 C 391 B SE 300 B CK 98

2439Z00010 2439Z00020 2439Z00030 2439Z00060 2442Z00010 2439X00080 2439Z00040

Specifications • Polar pattern: • Frequency range: • Sensitivity: • Max. SPL for 1% THD: • Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): • Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): • Preattenuation pad: • Bass cut filter: • Impedance: • Recommended load impedance: • Powering (IEC 61938): • Current consumption: • Connector: • Finish: • Dimensions: • Net/shipping weight: • Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

Section:

02

hypercardioid/directional

cardioid

C 391 B cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV) 132/142 dB 17 dB-A 77 dB 10 dB, switchable 12 dB/octave at 75 Hz ≤200 ohms ≥1,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2 mA 3-pin XLR dark grey 19 dia. x 146 mm (0.7 dia. x 5.7 in.) 115 g (4 oz.)/420 g (14.8 oz.) SA 60, W 90 A 91, B 18, H 30, H 50, H 85, H 300, PF 80, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

CK 98 Short Shotgun The CK 98 combines high sensitivity and controlled directivity. It offers excellent reach, thanks to a very tight polar pattern and exceptionally low self noise. Small size and low weight make the CK 98 ideal for boom applications. The smooth, wideband frequency response makes it a superb choice for edge-of-stage and ceiling placement in theaters. Includes foam windscreen.

Specifications • Polar pattern: • Frequency range: • Sensitivity: • Max. SPL for 1% THD: • Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): • Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): • Powering (IEC 61938): • Current consumption: • Connector: • Finish: • Dimensions: • Net/shipping weight: • Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

CK 98 hypercardioid/directional 20 to 20,000 Hz 25 mV/Pa (-32 dBV) 124/134 dB 17 dB-A 77 dB through SE 300 B through SE 300 B bayonet mount dark grey 19 dia. x 247/262 mm (0.7 dia. x 9.7/10.3 in.) 80 g (2.8 oz.)/500 g (1.1 lb.) W 98 A 91, H 30

Recording & Broadcast

17

Page 37


Perception

The Perception Series First-rate audio for everyone from up-and-coming musicians to seasoned pros Studio recording Broadcast Live sound Podcasting

Professional studio recording Lead vocals Lead instruments Guitar and bass amps Brass • An ECC 83 dual-triode tube circuitry emphasizes even-order harmonics for rich, smooth and three-dimensional sound • The elegant remote control unit allows selection of 9 different pickup patterns from omnidirectional to cardioid to figure 8 • The switchable bass cut filter (80 Hz, 12 dB/oct) reduces unwanted rumble or footfall noise • A 20 dB allenuation pad enables for high SPL applications up to 155 dB

• Solid, roadworthy construction

• A ground lift switch prevents unwanted hum if necessary

• Designed and engineered in Vienna, Austria

• Designed and engineered in Vienna, Austria

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Professional condenser microphones

• Outstanding price-performance ratio

Perception 820 Tube

Section:

02

AKG’s PERCEPTION microphones have built a strong following among musicians and engineers, proving to be among the best affordable true condenser microphones on the market today. Building on this reputation, AKG now introduces four new PERCEPTION models providing superb audio quality and performance at a competitive price. The AKG Perception Series includes the Perception 120, Perception 120 USB, Perception 170, Perception 220, Perception 420, and Perception 820 Tube – each offering a switchable 20 dB attenuation pad and a low-cut switch for an even wider range of miking capabilities including vocals, acoustic instruments, classical music, electric guitar amps, and drums across multiple application areas in studio recording, live sound, and broadcasting. The Perception line offers AKG’s signature “up-front” sound quality in a rugged precision-tooled zinc/aluminum alloy body with a dent-resistant stainless steel front grill. The Perception 820 Tube delivers real tube sound. It is not only the flagship of the Perception Series but also raises the bar in its class of affordable tube microphones. The Perception 120 USB is AKG's first microphone with a USB interface, offering studio-level audio performance with no need to install any drivers. Being about as easy to use as a USB stick, this new microphone puts even users with limited recording experience in a position to make professional-quality recordings at home. It is a true plug-and-play tool enabling users to create podcasts, voiceovers, and studio-quality demo recordings quickly and easily. The entire PERCEPTION line has been designed and engineered by AKG in Vienna, Austria. The microphones are manufactured in China under strict quality control by AKG. The result is unique, innovative Austrian technology and exceptional build quality at a uniquely reasonable price.

In 2005 AKG has launched the very first Perception models – a completely new series of microphones showing legendary AKG Sound & Quality at an outstanding price level. The brand-new Perception 820 Tube delivers real tube sound quality. It is not only the new flagship model of the Perception Series but also raises the bar in its class of affordable tube microphones. In contrast to many other affordable tube microphones, the Perception 820 Tube delivers real tube sound quality thanks to the dual one-inch large diaphragm capsule and the sophisticated ECC 83 dual-triode circuitry. The elegant remote control unit allows selection of 9 different pickup patterns and controls the switchable bass-cut filter and the preattenuation pad. Moreover, a ground lift switch prevents unwanted hum if necessary. It comes complete with a spider-type shock mount and a metal carrying case. AKG’s industry-leading Perception Series of condenser microphones are recognized for their outstanding quality and versatile capabilities at an affordable price. The Perception 820 Tube raises the bar in its class – It shows real tube sound, the highest dynamic range, the most comprehensive features and comes complete with useful accessories at an unbeatable price. Item numbers: Perception 820 Tube

• Type • Polar pattern:

• • • • • • • •

02

3101H00100 cardioid

• • • •

Section:

Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 0.5 % THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Preattenuation pad: Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector:

1-inch dual-diaphragm, true condenser pressuregradient omnidirectional, cardioid, figure eight plus six intermediate patterns (selectable on Remote Control Unit) 20 to 20,000 Hz 20 mV/Pa (-34 dBV ±3 dB) 135/155 dB SPL (0/-20 dB) 16 dB-A 78 dB -20 dB (switchable on Remote Control Unit) 12 dB/Oktave, 80 Hz (switchable on Remote Control Unit) ≤200 ohms ≥1.000 ohms via Remote Control Unit dedicated 7-pin male XLR

omnidirectional

• • • •

Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Remote Control Unit:

• Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

figure eight

53 dia. x 212 mm high (2 x 8.3 in.) 870 g/5.4 kg / 1.9/11.9 lbs. Audio/control input: dedicated 7-pin female XLR connector Audio output: standard 3-pin male XLR connector, balanced, pin 2 hot Polar pattern selector: 9-position detented rotary switch Bass cut filter switch: 2-position toggle switch Preattenuation switch: 2-position toggle switch Power voltage: 210-240 VAC or 110-120 VAC, selectable Primary fuse: 125 mA / 250 V slow-blow Sound Tool Case, Mic/power cord EU/UK/US, spider suspension PF 80, ST 305, W 4000

Recording & Broadcast

Page 38

Page 39


Perception Orchester and Ensemble recording A/B, X/Y, and M/S stereo recording Ambience recording Grand piano, woodwinds, brass Percussions

Vocals Drums and percussions Acoustic instruments Guitar and bass amps • One-inch large-diaphragm, true condenser cardioid transducer • Rugged all-metal body • Roadworthy construction

• True condenser technology

• Switchable bass cut filter

• High sensitivity and 155 dB maximum SPL capability

• Legendary AKG sound quality

• Switchable 20 dB preattenuation pad

• Designed and engineered by AKG in Vienna, Austria

• Heavy-duty, roadworthy, all-metal construction

• Complete with spider-type shock mount and aluminum carrying case

• AKG sound quality

• Switchable bass cut filter • Legendary, pristine AKG sound quality

02

Perception 220

Perception 420 is a multi-pattern large-diaphragm condenser microphone for more demanding professional studio recording applications. Offering high sensitivity and 155 dB maximum SPL, the Perception 420 delivers a warm transparent sound quality ideally suited for ensemble recording, grand piano, woodwind and brass instruments as well as drums and percussion instruments. In addition, three selectable polar patterns – cardioid, omnidirectional or figure-eight – allow a wide range of stereo miking techniques and ambient recording. The microphone's chassis is made of figure-eight precision-tooled zinc/aluminum alloy and boasts a dent resistant stainless-steel wire-mesh front grille. It comes complete with a spider-type shock mount in an cardioid aluminum carrying case.

The Perception 220 is a large-diaphragm true condenser microphone offering outstanding build quality and excellent value. Its many useful features and included accessories make this microphone uncommonly versatile. It delivers a classic warm, clear sound and conforms to the stringent standards defined for AKG recording products. These standards are based on AKG’s six decades of experience in making microphones and on input from sound engineers around the world who use AKG products every day. Its 1-inch large-diaphragm true condenser transducer brings AKG studio quality to the project studio as well as all other areas of recording and live sound applications. A switchable bass cut filter and preattenuation pad make it perfectly suited even for loud sound sources producing sound pressure levels up to 155 dB SPL. The rugged and roadworthy design makes it also a perfect choice for on-stage applications.

Item number: Perception 420 3101H00200 (8 units multipack version)

Item number: Perception 220 3101H00190 (8 units multipack version)

• Capsule: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 0.5% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Preattenuation pad: Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering: Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/Shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

20

Page 40

Dual-capsule,1-inch large-diaphragm, true condenser pressure-gradient microphone Cardioid, omnidirectional, figure-eight 20 to 20,000 Hz 28 mV/Pa (-31 dBV) 135/155 dB SPL (0/-20 dB) 16 dB-A 78 dB 0 dB, -20 dB 12 dB/octave, 300 Hz ≤200 ohms ≥1,000 ohms 48 V phantom power to DIN/IEC ≤2 mA 3-pin XLR metallic blue/nickel grille 53 dia. x 160 mm/2 x 6.3 in. 525 g (18.5 oz.)/1,970 g (4.3 lb.) metal case, spider suspension PF 80, ST 305, W 4000

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Roadworthy construction • Switchable 20 dB preattenuation pad • Switchable bass cut filter • Designed and engineered by AKG in Vienna, Austria

• Designed and engineered by AKG in Vienna, Austria

Perception 420

omnidirectional

• General-purpose cardioid recording microphone

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Switchable 20 dB preattenuation pad

Vocals Instruments Home recording Podcasting

• Extended frequency response

• Professional small-diaphragm, true condenser cardioid microphone

• Back-to-back multi-pattern transducer

• Switchable 20 dB preattenuation pad

Section:

Drums and percussions Acoustic instruments Ensemble recording A/B and X/Y stereo miking Perfect for live and studio use

Perception 120

The Perception 170 is a small-diaphragm true condenser microphone offering outstanding build quality and excellent value. Its ½-inch capsule delivers outstanding clarity and transient response and conforms to the stringent standards defined for AKG recording products.

The Perception 120 is a 2/3-inch diaphragm condenser microphone that offers solid build quality, outstanding performance, and excellent value. The low-mass diaphragm delivers a clear sound with accurate sonic detail. A switchable 20 dB preattenuation pad and bass cut filter make the Perception 120 an excellent choice for a wide range of recording and live sound applications.

The Perception 170’s design is based on AKG´s six decades of experience in making microphones and on input from sound engineers around the world who use AKG products every day. A switchable preattenuation pad enable the Perception 170 to be used close to sound sources delivering SPLs up to 155 dB. The heavy-duty, all-metal chassis and reliable gold-plated XLR-type output make the PERCEPTION 170 an excellent choice for a variety of live sound applications, too.

Item number: Perception 170 3101H00180 (8 units multipack version)

cardioid

Capsule: Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 0.5% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Preattenuation pad: Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/Shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

Perception 170

1" Large Diaphragm True Condenser cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 18 mV/Pa (-35 dBV) 135 dB/155 dB (0/-20 dB) 16 dB-A 78 dB 0 dB, -20 dB 12 dB/octave at 300 Hz <200 ohms ≥1,000 ohms 48 V phantom power <2 mA 3-pin XLR metallic blue/nickel grille 53 dia. x 165 mm (2.1 dia. x 6.5 in.) 525 g (18.5 oz.)/1,970 g (4.3 lb.) metal case, spider suspension PF 80, ST 305, W 4000

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Capsule: Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 0.5% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted) Preattenuation pad: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/Shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

0.5 inch diaphragm, externally polarized condenser cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 12 mV/Pa (-38 dBV) 135 / 155 dB SPL (0 / -20 dB) < 21 dB-A 73 dB 0 dB, -20 dB ≤200 ohms ≥1,000 ohms 48 V phantom power ≤2 mA 3-pin XLR-type (pin #2 hot) metallic blue 22 dia. X 160 mm/0.09 x 6.3 in. 130 g (4.6 oz.)/455 g (16 oz.) stand adapter H 30, H 50, H 300, SA 60, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305, PF 80, W 32

02

Backed by AKG's six decades of experience in making microphones and input from sound engineers around the world, the Perception 120 now brings AKG studio quality to musician and project studio applications.

Item number: Perception 120 3101H00160 (8 units multipack version)

cardioid

Section:

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

cardioid

Capsule: Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 0.5% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Preattenuation pad: Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/Shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional Accessories:

2/3" Diaphragm True Condenser cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 22 mV/Pa (-33 dBV) 130/150 dB (0/-20 dB) 22 dB-A 72 dB 0 dB, -20 dB 12 dB/octave at 300 Hz <200 ohms ≥1,000 ohms 48 V phantom power <3 mA 3-pin XLR metallic blue 53 dia. x 165 mm (2.1 dia. x 6.5 in.) 525 g (18.5 oz.)/955 g (33.7 oz.) stand adapter PF 80, ST 305, W 4000

Recording & Broadcast

21

Page 41


Perception Home Recording Podcasts Voice Overs Rehearsal Recording

Weave (D), 03/2010 What you get is good sound quality and low ambient noise. The new affordable AKG Perception 120 USB is the editor’s choice. This condenser microphone showing an USB interface is available as Plug-and-Play-Package which comes complete with a robust tripod and a sufficient long cable. Especially the low noise of this microphone is convincing in its price range. The integrated windscreen and pop filter reduces breath noise and plosives surprisingly well.

• Switchable attenuation pad for close-up miking and loud instruments

• Real Plug-and-Play (no installation, no drivers, no reboot required) • Supports Windows 7, Windows XP, Windows Vista and Mac OS

• Switchable bass-cut filter reduces mechanical vibration and wind noise

• Two-third-inch condenser capsule with a low-mass diaphragm delivers sonic details • Tripod table stand, swivel mount and USB cable included • Designed and engineered in Vienna, Austria

Perception 120 USB

Section:

02

In 2005 AKG has launched the very first Perception models – A completely new series of microphones showing legendary AKG Sound & Quality at an attractive price level. In 2008 the new Perception Series continued this success story with four new models. In April 2009 the highly anticipated Perception 820 Tube microphone is not only the new flagship model of the Perception Series but also raises the bar in its class of affordable tube microphones. The Perception 120 USB is the very first USB-equipped microphone from AKG, offering studio-quality sound performance without requiring any installation or drivers. With the widespread USB standard and its ease of use, this new model allows users without any recording experience to make professional-quality recordings from their home. It is a real plug-and-play device enabling customers to do podcasts, voiceovers, and studio-quality rehearsal-recordings quickly and easily. The USB is a widely known interface for audio equipment like sound cards, active monitors and outboard equipment, which makes the Perception 120 USB one of the most versatile microphones available.

• • • • • • • •

Capsule: Polar pattern: Frequency range: Preattenuation pad: Bass cut filter: USB Support: Sampling Rates: Analog-to-Digital Converter:

• Oversampling: • Supported Operating Systems:

22

Page 42

2/3" Diaphragm True Condenser cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 0 dB, -20 dB 6 dB/octave at 120 Hz USB 1.1, 2.0 44.1 and 48 kHz Built-in high-quality 24-bit ADC 128 x Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Mac OS

In its class, the Perception 120 USB is the only USB microphone with an integrated Analogue-toDigital Converter with 24-bit and 128x oversampling. Instead of sual one-chip-solutions, the high-quality Analogue-to-Digital Converter provides convincing sound quality and low noise. The Perception 120 USB includes a two-third-inch condenser capsule with a low-mass diaphragm delivering accurate sonic details, an integrated pop filter that avoids plosives, a switchable bass cut filter, and an attenuation switch.

Item number: Perception 120 USB 3101H00060

• • • • •

Finish: Dimensions: Net/Shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional Accessories:

Voice Overs, Podcasts

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Integrated pop filter avoids plosives effectively

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Flashforum.de (D), 03/2010 Even for small purses the production of good quality podcasts is no longer a problem because the ingredients for a good sound are clear: in addition to a PC and the corresponding software only a microphone is necessary. The most uncomplicated and cost-effective variants include a USB port prepared to “plug-and-play” because usually the corresponding drivers are already part of the operating system. This is also true for the Austrian AKG´s brand new Perception 120 USB we have tested. The sound quality of this condenser microphone is really convincing. The pop filter provides excellent suppression of breath and pop sounds without compromising the sound quality. And considering the expected street price of € 150 the noise floor is unequalled. AKG provides an impressive overall package that even includes a convenient tripod as well as a sufficiently long USB cable.

• Blue LEDs indicate operation

• Integrated high-quality Analogue-to-Digital Converter (24-bit, 128x oversampling) for convincing sound quality and low noise

Home Recording, Rehearsal Recording

Integrated high-quality Analogue-to-Digital Converter (24-bit, 128x oversampling) for convincing sound quality and low noise

Section:

It supports Windows XP, Windows Vista and MAC OS X but also the new Windows 7. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

The Perception 120 USB comes complete with everything you need:

Table Stand

Stand Adapter

USB Cable

02 Studio performance for your desktop

Quick Start Guide

matte grayish blue 53 dia x 165 mm (2.1 dia x 6.5 in.) 460 g (18.8 oz.)/1050 g (37.0 oz.) stand adapter, table stand, USB cable PF 80, W 4000

Recording & Broadcast

23

Page 43


Handheld Microphones C 535 EB, C 5 D 7, D 7 S D 5, D 5 S, D 770 D 88 S/XLR/Jack D 77 S/XLR/Jack D 55 S, D 44 S

46 47 48 49 49 50

Instrument Microphones D 112, D 40 C 430, C 411

51 52

Clip-on Microphones C 518, C 519 C 516 ML, C 544 L

53 54

C 520, C 555 L HC 577 L

55 56

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Head-worn Microphones

Lavalier Microphones CK 77 WR C 417, CK 99 L

56 57

Perception Live

Section:

02

Perception Live Introduction P 5, P 5 S P 4, P 3 S P 2, Groove Pack

58 59 60 61

Stage

Section:

02

Microphones

Sound engineers and artists appreciate microphones as valuable instruments for achieving exactly the sound they have in mind.

AKG offers exactly the right microphones for every application and any kind of acoustic environment-microphones that have been known to provide the high level of quality and ruggedness needed to stand up to the rigors of day-to-day usage on stage.

Page 44

Page 45


Handheld Microphones Recording Vocals Sound/AV company Drums

Vocals Recording Live sound Sound/AV company

• Classic vocal and instrument microphone • Rugged metal body • Switchable bass cut filter ø ~46

Vocal Recording Live PA/rental company

• Condenser vocal microphone for onstage use

• Dynamic reference microphone

• XLR connector module with 24-carat gold plated pins for optimized connectivity

• Hum compensation coil

• 24-carat gold plated transducer case for optimum conductivity and resistance to corrosion and humidity

• Patented AKG Laminated VarimotionTM diaphragm • New acoustical design of inner windscreen 51

5

• Precision metal dust filter

Hum compensation coil 51

5

~184

Metal dust filter Mechanical-pneumatic suspension

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Internal elastic suspension

185.2

185.2

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Spring steel wire-mesh grill for extreme ruggedness incl. reliable control of pops and wind noise • Innovative mic design based on professional user research 23.5

C 535 EB

Section:

02

23.5

C5

The professional vocal/instrument microphone from AKG for stage and studio use, the C 535 EB provides the ultimate combination of excellent, highly detailed audio and exceptional ruggedness. Perfect weight distribution ensures fatigue-free handling – another asset for discriminating vocalists! Bass cut/rolloff filters and a switchable preattenuation pad let you match the frequency response and output level to the most diverse recording and onstage miking situations. The C 535 EB is one of the great, legendary microphones.

This professional condenser vocal microphone will make your voice cut through the loudest mix – on any stage. Its cardioid polar pattern ensures maximum gain before feedback and has been optimized for use with in-ear monitor systems. The gold plated transducer case does not only give the microphone a sophisticated esthetic touch but also makes the transducer extremely resistant to corrosion and humidity. The result is superior audio performance. The design of the all new AKG C 5 reflects the latest results of AKG’s longstanding research with professional users optimizing handling and ease-ofuse whilst providing outstanding premium audio performance.

C 535 WL 1: C 535 EB microphone element with threaded connection for use with various AKG WMS handheld transmitters. Item numbers: C 535 EB C 535 WL1

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Item numbers: C 5: 3138X00160 (6 units multipack version) C 5 WL1 3082X00020

2135X00030 2782X00150

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Preattenuation pad: Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 7 mV/Pa (–43 dBV) 130/144 dB 21 dB-A -14 dB 12 dB/Oktave bei 100 Hz ≤200 Ohm ≥600 Ohm 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2.5 mA 3-pin XLR matte black 46 dia. x 184 mm (1.8 dia. x 7.25 in.) 300 g (10.6 oz.) / 800 g (1.8 lbs.) Microphone bag, SA 61 B 18, H 30, H 50, SA 44, W 23, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: cardioid Frequency range: 65 to 20,000 Hz Sensitivity: 4 mV/Pa (-48 dBV ) Max. SPL for 1%/3% THD: 140/145 dB SPL Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): 25 dB-A Impedance: ≤200 ohms Recommended load impedance: ≥2000 ohms Powering (IEC 61938): 9 to 52 V phantom power Current consumption: typ. 3 mA Connector: 3-pin XLR Finish: matte grayish blue Dimensions: length: 185.2 mm (7.3 in.); diameter: 51 mm (2 in.) Net/shipping weight: 345 g (12.2 oz.) / 660 g (1.5 lbs.) Standard accessories: Microphone bag, SA 51, PB 1000 Optional accessories: B 18, H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305, W 23, W 880

23.5

23.5

D7

D7S

AKG`s new reference dynamic microphone delivers high end performance and noble sound in every studio and on every stage. The new Laminated VarimotionTM diaphragm deep-drawing process allows the diaphragm itself to be fine-tuned with no extra tuning resonators. This leads to a quantum leap in audio performance under each surrounding conditions and sound volume. D7 creates that subtle and opened sound in all frequency ranges condenser mics are famous for, but it also has the powerful resonance from a dynamic microphone. The integrated high-pass filter eliminates permanent all handling noises and the new coustical designed inner windscreen makes you feel more secure in live use. The precision metal dust filter provides a consistent objection to the diaphragm. The original inner windscreen can be replaced with the extra windscreen supplied with the microphone, this offers a clear sound for a long time.

Section:

02

Available versions: D 7: standard version D 7 S: version with on/off switch D 7 WL 1: D 7 microphone capsule for WMS 4500 Item numbers: D7 D7S D 7 WL 1

• • • • • • • • • • •

3139X00010 3139X00020 3082X00030

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1%/3% THD Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Buss cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load Impedance: Humbucking coil: Connector:

Supercardioid 70 to 20,000 Hz 2.6 mV/Pa (-52 dBV) 147 / 156 dB SPL 18 dB-A 76 dB 80 Hz, 6 dB/octave, always active ≤ 600 ohms ≥ 2000 ohms Integrated on capsule 3-pin XLR

• • • • •

Finish: Dimensions: Net / shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

matte grayish blue length: 185.2 mm (7.3 in.); diameter: 51 mm (2 in.) 340 g (12 oz.) / 655 g (1.45 lbs.) Microphone bag, SA 61, replacement inner windscreen H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305, W 23, W 880, W 3004

Stage Microphones

Page 46

Page 47


Handheld Microphones Live sound Brass Woodwinds Drums • Extremely rugged instrument/vocal microphone

• Available with or without on/off switch

• Highly efficient windscreen

02

0 52.5

Section:

AKG made the first microphone diaphragm ever whose thickness varies across its diameter. The new Laminated Varimotion diaphragm deep-drawing process allows the diaphragm itself to be fine-tuned with no extra tuning resonators, leading to a quantum leap in audio performance. The dual shock mount eliminates any kind of mechanical noise for trouble-free live use. The audience will hear nothing but the pristine sound of your voice!

• Sturdy die-cast metal body

53

180

23.5

D 770 Dynamic microphone for miking instruments and backing vocals in tough night-after-night onstage use. The D 770 features a cardioid polar pattern and uses a patented AKG Varimotion diaphragm. The D 770 is fitted with a shock absorbing steel wire-mesh inner grill to protect the transducer from damage, and further protection is provided by the rugged die-cast housing and a wire-mesh outer grill. The outer grill and a layer of special fabric beneath it form a very effective windscreen that will suppress pop and breath noise as well as sibilance. The extended frequency response of the D 770 slightly emphasizes the mid and treble ranges to ensure good intelligibility. Item number: D 770

Available Versions D 5: for standard applications. D 5 S: with on/off switch.

D 88 S/XLR D 88 S/Jack

D 77 S/XLR D 77 S/Jack

The D 88 S is a dynamic handheld microphone for lead vocalists. The super cardioid polar pattern guarantees for utmost gain before feedback and makes the voice cut through the mix more easily. Its heavy duty metal body will take some tough handling. The microphone comes with an integrated on/off-switch, stand adapter and the choice of 5 m (16 ft.) XLR/XLR or XLR/JACK cable.

The D 77 S microphone is ideal for backing vocals, guitar, wind instruments and many other applications. Metal case and wire mesh grill for exceptional ruggedness.

Item numbers: D 88 S/XLR D 88 S/Jack

Item numbers: D 77 S/XLR D 77 S/Jack

3100H00080 3100H00090

Section:

02

The microphone comes with an integrated on/off-switch, stand adapter and the choice of 5 m (16 ft.) XLR/XLR or XLR/JACK cable. 3100H00060 3100H00070

2696X00010

Item numbers: D5 3138X00190 D5S 3138X00200 3082X00010 D 5 WL 1 (6 units multipack version)

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1%/3% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

• On/off switch

186

23.5

The D 5 dynamic vocal microphone for lead and backing vocals delivers a powerful sound even on the noisiest stage. Its frequency independent supercardioid polar pattern ensures maximum gain before feedback. The D 5 stands for a crisp sound that cuts through every mix.

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Available with 16 foot (5 m) XLR/XLR cable or 16 foot (5 m) XLR/jack cable

• Sturdy die-cast metal body

5

185.2

D5S

• On/off switch

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

51

• For smooth frequency response and maximum gain before feedback

D5

• Rugged performance microphone designed for backing vocals and instruments

• Available with 16 foot (5 m) XLR/XLR cable or 16 foot (5 m) XLR/jack cable

• High performance Varimotion diaphragm (AKG patent)

• Spring steel wire-mesh grill for extreme ruggedness and reliable control of pops and wind noise • Innovative mic design based on professional user research

• Rugged performance microphone designed for lead vocals

• Frequency response optimized for intelligibility

• Patented AKG Laminated Varimotion diaphragm

Backing vocals Live Sound Instruments

186

• Extremely rugged vocal/speech microphone

Lead vocals Live Sound

0 52.5

Vocals Recording Live sound Sound/AV company

supercardioid

supercardioid 70 to 20,000 Hz 2.6 mV/Pa (-52 dBV) 147/156 dB SPL 18 dB-A ≤600 ohms ≥2000 ohms 3-pin XLR matte grayish blue length: 185.2 mm (7.3 in.); diameter: 51 mm (2 in.) 340 g (12 oz.)/ 655 g (1.45 lbs.) 655 g (1.45 lbs.) Microphone bag, SA 51 H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305, W 23, W 880, W 3004

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1%/3% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

cardioid 60 to 20,000 Hz, at 1 cm (0.4 in.): 20 to 20,000 Hz 2.5 mV/Pa (-52 dBV) 147/156 dB 22 dB-A ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 3-pin XLR matte black 50 dia. x 181 mm (2 x 7.1 in.) 290 g (10.4 oz.)/650 g (1.4 lbs.) microphone bag, SA 44 H 30, H 50, SA 61, W 23, W 880, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

• • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Impedance: Net/shipp. weight: Finish: Dimensions:

• Standard accessories:

• Optional accessories:

supercardioid 40 to 20,000 Hz 2.5 mV/Pa 300 ohms 260 g (0.57 lbs.)/1,200 g (2.65 lbs.) black length: 186 mm (7.3 in.) diameter: 52.5 mm (2.07 in.) stand adapter D 88 S/XLR: 5m (16.5 ft.) XLR to XLR cable D 88 S/Jack: 5m (16.5 ft.) XLR to 1/4" jack cable W 23, W 880, H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

• • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Impedance: Net/shipp. weight: Finish: Dimensions:

• Standard accessories:

• Optional accessories:

cardioid 40 to 20,000 Hz 2.5 mV/Pa 600 ohms 260 g (0.57 lbs.)/1,200 g (2.65 lbs.) black length: 178 mm (7 in.) diameter: 52.5 mm (2.07 in.) stand adapter D 77 S/XLR: 5m (16.5 ft.) XLR to XLR cable D 77 S/Jack: 5m (16.5 ft.) XLR to 1/4" jack cable W 23, W 880, H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

Stage Microphones

Page 48

Page 49


Instrument Microphones Vocals Karaoke

Vocals Karaoke

Bass instruments Live sound Recording

• Vocal/general-purpose microphone

• Vocal/general-purpose microphone

• Sturdy die-cast metal body

• On/off switch

• On/off switch

• Rugged wire mesh cap with internal protective basket

• 16 foot (5 m) cable w/mini jack and 1/4" adapter

Instruments Live sound • Dynamic microphone designed for drums and percussions, wind instruments, and guitar amps

• Large-diaphragm dynamic microphone for bass instruments

• 16 foot (5 m) cable w/mini jack and 1/4" adapter

• Extremely high SPL capability

• Patented AKG Varimotion diaphragm technology

• Classic microphone for stage and studio applications

• Custom built capsule mounting • Spring steel wire-mesh cap • Rugged all-metal body withstands typical tough handling on stage

0 52.5 0 53

44

243

226

104

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

D40

Section:

02

D 55 S

D 44 S

D 112

D 40

Easy to use microphone for jobs ranging from hi-fi recording and karaoke to didacting or other speech recording applications. The true allround microphone with an impact resistant plastic body and fixed cable with mini jack plug and 1/4" adapter.

Easy to use microphone for jobs ranging from hi-fi recording and karaoke to didacting or other speech recording applications. The true allround microphone with an impact resistant rugged full metal microphone housing and fixed cable with mini jack plug and 1/4" adapter.

The D 40 with its solid all-metal body will stand up to the hardships of nightafter-night onstage use "with a smile".

Integrated ON/OFF switch; cardioid polar pattern.

Integrated ON/OFF switch; cardioid polar pattern.

Item number: D 55 S

Item number: D 44 S

The D 112 has earned a well-deserved reputation worldwide as the best kick drum microphone ever made. Heavy-footed drummers won’t faze it, because the D 112 handles up to 160 dB SPL with no audible distortion. A specially engineered diaphragm with a very low resonance frequency maintains solid and powerful response below 100 Hz, while a narrow band presence rise at 4 kHz punches through dense mixes with little or no added EQ. The result is a kick drum sound that ideally balances precise definition and forceful impact. The D 112 is also an excellent choice for use with bass cabinets, trombones, etc.

3100H00040

3100H00030

cardioid

• • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Impedance: Net /shipp. weight: Finish: Dimensions:

• Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

cardioid 70 to 18,000 Hz 2.5 mV/Pa 600 ohms 380 g (0.84 lbs.)/920 g (2.03 lbs.) black length: 243 mm (9.6 in.) diameter: 52.5 mm (2.07 in.) fixed 5 m (16.5 ft.) cable, w/mini jack plug, mini to 1/4" adapter plug W 23, W 880, H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

Built-in windscreen, SA 60 stand adapter included.

The Varimotion diaphragm deep-drawing process allows the diaphragm itself to be fine-tuned with no need for tuning resonators, leading to a quantum leap in audio performance. The transducer is protected by a sturdy wire-mesh cap and takes extremely high sound pressure levels with ease. An integrated stand adapter and standard H 440 mounting bracket for snare drums, tom-toms, etc. make the D 40 a highly versatile tool for use on drums, percussions, wind instruments, and guitar amps.

Drum-Set with D 112 Drum-Set Big II: 1 x D 112, 2 x C 1000 S, 4 x C 519

Drum-Set with D 112 and D 40 Rhythm-Pack: 1 x D 112, 2 x C 430, 3 x D 40

Item number: D 112 Drum-Set Big II

Item number: D 40 Rhythm-Pack

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Impedance: Net/shipp. weight: Finish: Dimensions:

• Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

cardioid 70 to 18,000 Hz 2.5 mV/Pa 600 ohms 290 g (0.64 lbs.)/820 g (1.81 lbs.) black length: 226 mm (8.9 in.) max. diameter: 53 mm (2.1 in.) fixed 5 m (16.5 ft.) cable, w/mini jack plug, mini to 1/4" adapter plug W 23, W 880, H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 0.5% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

cardioid 20 to 17,000 Hz 1.8 mV/Pa (-55 dBV) outside measurement range 21 dB-A 73 dB ≤210 ohms ≥600 ohms 3-pin XLR dark grey metallic enamel 150 x 70 x 115 mm (5.9 x 2.8 x 4.5 in.) 380 g (13.4 oz.) / 990 g (2.2 lbs.) SA 60 ST 1, ST 45, ST 305

02

2815X00050 2581X00130

omnidirectional

cardioid

• • • • • • •

2220X00010 2581X00120

Section:

omnidirectional

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1/3 % THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

cardioid 75 to 20,000 Hz 4 mV/Pa (-48 dBV) 144/156 dB SPL 18 dB-A ≤200 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 3-pin XLR dark stage blue length 104 mm (4.1 in.) height (incl. stand adapter): 79 mm (3.1 in.) max. dia.: 44 mm (1.7 in.) 245 g (8.6 oz.) / 380 g (13.4 oz.) H 440 ST 1, ST 45, ST 305

Stage Microphones

Page 50

Page 51


Clip-on Microphones 9,7

• Ultra-light vibration pickup • Condenser transducer in sealed enclosure

• Phantom or battery powering options • Mounts securely on all commercial microphone stands

• Cable with lockable mini XLR connector • Ideal for miking up acoustic guitars and other string instruments

Brass Drums Percussions Woodwinds

• Miniature cardioid condenser clamp-on microphone with shock mounted capsule

• Miniature condenser clip-on microphone for wind instruments, drums, and percussions

• Ideal for miking drums and percussions

• Miniature gooseneck for accurate microphone alignment

• Including wireless direct adapter for easy use with AKG PT 40 PRO and PT 450

• Including wireless direct adapter for easy use with AKG PT 40 PRO and PT 450

• Detachable microphone cable

• Detachable microphone cable

• Integrated gooseneck

• Transducer shock mount for high mechanical-noise rejection

• Continuously adjustable vise type clamp

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

79

Brass Drums Percussions Recording

212

• Miniature condenser microphone for cymbal and overhead miking

14,2

199

Recording Strings Concert hall Sound/AV company

26,7

Cymbals and overhead Live sound Recording

47 46

0 19

C 430

Section:

02

C 411

Specifically designed for cymbal and overhead miking, the frequency response of the C 430 ensures a uniquely crisp sound. With its extremely compact external dimensions, this microphone will keep a low profile in any application without compromising audio quality. The major benefits of the C 430 include: • Easy to use with any mixer, with no need to use the EQ • Trouble-free use on open-air stages • Mounts securely on all commercial microphone stands.

C 518

Weighing only 18 grams (0.6 oz.), this ultra-light condenser pickup is ideal for acoustic guitar, mandolin, violin and most other stringed instruments. The C 411 will give a clear and uncolored sound without changing the balance of the instrument. Attaching the C 411 on or near the bridge is easy with the included non-marring, reusable, solvent-free adhesive compound. You can also fix the C 411 anywhere else on the instrument, depending on the desired sound and the vibration performance of the instrument. C 411 L: For use with the B 29 L battery power supply, AKG WMS Series bodypack transmitters, or the MPA V L adapter for external phantom powering. C 411 PP: For hardwire applications, with standard XLR connector for phantom powering.

Item number: C 430

Item number: C 411 L C 411 PP

2795X00010

• • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% /3% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering: (IEC 61938) Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 7 mV/Pa (-43 dBV) 126/130 dB 33 dB-A 61 dB ≤200 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2 mA 3-pin XLR matte black 19 dia. x 79 mm (0.7 x 3.1 in.) 23 g (1.1 oz.) / 192 g (6.8 oz.) microphone bag, SA 60, W 32 B 18, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

• • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

• • • • • • • •

Current consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

The ultimate miniature condenser microphone for drums and percussions. Its cardioid polar pattern rejects overspill from nearby instruments. A continuously adjustable vise-type clamp makes it easy to fix the microphone securely on the top hoop of most drums or percussion instruments. An external shock mount provides high mechanical-noise rejection. A special snap-on stabilizer knee will keep the gooseneck bent at a defined angle. The C 518 M features an integrated, switchable bass cut for adjusting the microphone’s frequency response to your instrument’s sound. The unique adapter plate A 400 allows easy attachment of the AKG pocket transmitters PT 450 and PT 40 PRO. Versions C 518 M for external phantom powering C 518 ML for use with the B 29 L battery power supply, AKG WMS Series bodypack transmitters, or the MPA V L adapter for external phantom powering.

figure-eight (vibration pickup) 10 to 18,000 Hz 2 mV/ms-2 (incl. MPA V L) 100 dB ≤200 ohms unbalanced ≥1,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L or AKG bodypack transmitter ≤2 mA 3-pin mini XLR 1.5 m (5 ft.) matte black 27 x 14 x 9.5 mm (1.1 x 0.5 x 0.3 in.) 18 g (0.7 oz.)/150 g (5.5 oz.) adhesive compound, microphone bag B 29 L, MPA V L, B 18

• • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1%/3% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

Current consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight (microphone and cable): • Standard accessories:

• • • • • •

• Optional accessories:

The C 519 clips onto the bell of a trumpet, saxophone, trombone, tuba, or any other wind instrument (e.g. didgeridoo). Room to move for the wind section at last! Its tight cardioid polar pattern makes the C 519 an ideal tool for use near monitor wedges, and its flat frequency response delivers a natural, powerful, and clear sound.

Section:

02

The C 519 M features an integrated, switchable bass cut for adjusting the microphone’s frequency response to your instrument’s sound. The unique adapter plate A 400 allows easy attachment of the AKG pocket transmitters PT 450 and PT 40 PRO. Versions C 519 M for external phantom powering C 519 ML for use with the B 29 L battery power supply, AKG WMS Series bodypack transmitters, or the MPA V L adapter for external phantom powering. Item numbers: C 519 M 3065X00110 C 519 ML 3065X00120 (6 units multipack version)

Item numbers: C 518 M 3064X00110 C 518 ML 3064X00120 (6 units multipack version)

2571Z00030 2571Z00040

cardioid

• • • • •

C 519

cardioid 60 Hz to 20,000 Hz 5 mV/Pa (-46 dBV) 130/132 dB SPL 31 dB-A 63 dB ≤200 ohms ≥2000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L, or AKG bodypack transmitter ≤ 2 mA 3-pin mini XLR 1.5 m (5 ft.) matte black length: 200 mm (7.9 in.); max. width: 47 mm (1.9 in.) C 518 M: 220 g (7.8 oz.) / 450 g (15.9 oz.) C 518 ML: 110 g (3.9 oz.) / 330 g (11.7 oz.) H 518, microphone bag, W 44; C 518 ML: A 400 adapter for AKG PT 40 or PT 450 B 18, for C 518 ML: B 29 L, MPA V L

• • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1%/3% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

Current consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight (microphone and cable): • Standard accessories:

• • • • • •

• Optional accessories:

cardioid 60 Hz to 20,000 Hz 5 mV/Pa (-46 dBV) 130/132 dB SPL 31 dB-A 63 dB ≤200 ohms ≥2000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L, or AKG bodypack transmitter ≤ 2 mA 3-pin mini XLR 1.5 m (5 ft.) matte black length: 213 mm (4.8 in.); max. width: 47 mm (1.9 in.) C 519 M: 195 g (6.9 oz.) / 430 g (15.2 oz.) C 519 ML: 85 g (3 oz.) / 310 g (11 oz.) microphone bag, W 44; C 519 ML: A 400 adapter for AKG PT 40 or PT 450 B 18, for C 519 ML: B 29 L, MPA V L

Stage Microphones

Page 52

Page 53


Head-worn Microphones

• Including wireless direct adapter for easy use with AKG PT 40 PRO and PT 450

• External shock mount for high mechanical-noise rejection

• Miniature gooseneck for precise positioning near the user’s mouth • Microphone arm provides choice of left or right-hand use

Section:

02

Lightweight cardioid miniature microphone for use on accordions, guitar speakers, piano and keyboard/organ cabinets. The included screws and double-sided, solvent-free adhesive pads make it easy to install the microphone on your instrument or amp exactly where you need it. Using two C 516 MLs (one on the bass and one on the treble side) and an optional B 29 L battery power supply is an ideal way to mic up an accordion. The C 516 ML is the only version available and can be used with the B 29 L battery power supply, AKG WMS Series bodypack transmitters, or the MPA V L adapter for external phantom powering. The unique adapter plate A 400 allows easy attachment of the AKG pocket transmitters PT 450 and PT 40 PRO.

Item number: C 516 ML 3063X00120 (6 units multipack version)

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1%/3% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

cardioid 60 Hz to 20,000 Hz 5 mV/Pa (-46 dBV) 130/132 dB SPL 31 dB-A 63 dB ≤200 ohms ≥2000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L, or AKG bodypack transmitter Current consumption: ≤ 2 mA Connector: 3-pin mini XLR Cable: 1.5 m (5 ft.) Finish: matte black Net/shipping weight (microphone and cable): 46 g (1.6 oz.) / 320 g (11.3 oz.) Standard accessories: A 400 adapter for AKG PT 40 or PT 450, 2 doublesided adhesive rubber plates, 3 countersunkbolts (3 x 30 mm), 3 self-tapping screws (2.9 x 13 mm), elastic adhesive compound, H 516, microphone bag, W 44 Optional accessories: B 18, B 29 L, MPA V L

102

• Optimum audio and intelligibility even at high ambient noise levels • Microphone arm provides choice of left or right-hand use

C 520

C 544 L

C 555 L

The C 544 L is a head-worn miniature condenser microphone with a convenient behind-the-neck headband. The microphone has a cardioid polar pattern and therefore “prefers” sounds arriving from the front (the user’s mouth). The microphone body containing the condenser transducer is shock mounted on the microphone arm in order to suppress cable and mechanical noise. The microphone arm will place the microphone in front of the corner of your mouth to minimize pop noise and protect the microphone from contamination. The supplied windscreen makes the microphone even less susceptible to wind and pop noise. A special moisture shield on the microphone capsule makes it difficult for moisture and makeup to penetrate into the microphone. This barrier prevents the microphone sound entries from being clogged by sweat or makeup which would make the sound dull and reduce the sensitivity of the microphone. Therefore, never remove the moisture shield from the microphone.

Head-worn condenser microphone with maximum dynamic range for perfect vocal sound. Its cardioid polar pattern effectively rejects unwanted ambient noise. An ideal choice for frontmen, singing keyboardists, drummers, guitarists, and dancers. The microphone arm mounts either on the left or right side of the headband as desired. The C 520 provides the perfect solution for any performer needing a handsfree microphone. A transducer shock mount reduces handling noise to a minimum. The moisture shield prevents perspiration from penetrating into the transducer element, ensuring a high degree of humidity protection for the microphone.

The new C 555 L head-worn microphone from AKG is rugged, extremely easy to use, and offers outstanding price/performance. The C 555 L is the ideal microphone for any handsfree application including gymnastics instruction, presentations, or onstage performance. The C 555 L rests securely and comfortably on the head, and can be attached to the left or right side of the behind-the-neck headband as desired. A transducer shock mount reduces handling noise to a minimum. The moisture shield prevents perspiration from penetrating into the transducer element, ensuring a high degree of humidity protection for the microphone.

Versions C 520 for external phantom powering C 520 L for use with the B 29 L battery power supply, AKG WMS Series bodypack transmitters, or the MPA V L adapter for external phantom powering.

The C 555 L is the only version available and can be used with the B 29 L battery power supply, AKG WMS Series bodypack transmitters, or the MPA V L adapter for external phantom powering.

Item number: C 544 L 2793H00070 (6 units multipack version)

Item numbers: C 520 3066X00050 C 520 L 3066X00060 (6 units multipack version)

Item number: C 555 L 3066H00200 (6 units multipack version)

• • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1%/3% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

Current consumption: Environment: Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight (microphone and cable): • Standard accessories: • Optional accessories: • • • • • •

cardioid 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz 40 mV/Pa (-28 dBV) 126/130 dB SPL 22 dB-A ≤200 ohms, electronically balanced ≥2000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L, or AKG bodypack transmitter ≤ 2 mA -20°C to +60°C, R.H. at +20°C: 99% 1.5 m (5 ft.) matte black dia. 130 mm (5.2 in.) 30 g (1.1 oz.) / 200 g (7.1 oz.) moisture shield, W 444 B 18, B 29 L, MPA V L

• • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1%/3% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

• • • • •

Current consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions:

• Net/shipping weight: • Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

Harman Professional Group | 2011

C 516 ML

47

134

• Moisture shield

235

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Ideal for miking up accordions and guitar, piano, keyboard, or organ amplifiers

Head-worn microphone for lectern Handsfree use Aerobics Speech • Head-worn microphone with continuously adjustable behind-the-neck headband

• External shock mount for high mechanical-noise rejection

• Moisture shield

• Detachable microphone cable

134

195

• Head-worn microphone with continuously adjustable behind-the-neck headband

• Ergonomically optimized behind-the-neck headband

• High mechanical-noise attenuation

Head-worn microphone Handsfree use Lead and backing vocals

102

• Cardioid instrument microphone with miniature mounting bracket

110

195

Speech Head-worn microphone Aerobics

145

Live sound Sound/AV company

cardioid 60 to 20,000 Hz 5 mV/Pa (-46 dBV) 130/132 dB SPL 31 dB-A 63 dB ≤200 ohms ≥2000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L, or AKG bodypack transmitter ≤2 mA C 520: 3-pin male XLR; C 520 ML: 3-pin mini XLR C 520: 3 m (10 ft.); C 520 ML: 1.5 m (5 ft.) matte black length: 195 mm (7.7 in.); max. diameter: 134 mm (5.3 in.) C 520: 26 g (0.9 oz.) / 380 g (13.4 oz.) C 520 L: 26 g (0.9 oz.) / 260 g (9.2 oz.) W 44 B 18, B 29 L, MPA V L

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Section:

02

Polar pattern: cardioid Frequency range: 80 to 20,000 Hz Sensitivity: 35 mV/Pa (-29 dBV) Max. SPL for 1%/3% THD: 126/130 dB SPL Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): 22 dB-A Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): 72 dB Impedance: ≤200 ohms Recommended load impedance: ≥2000 ohms Powering (IEC 61938): 9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L, or AKG bodypack transmitter Current consumption: ≤ 2 mA Connector: 3-pin mini XLR Cable: 1.5 m (5 ft.) Finish: matte black Dimensions: length: 195 mm (7.7 in.); max. diameter: 134 mm (5.3 in.) Net/shipping weight: 26 g (0.9 oz.) / 260 g (9.2 oz.) Standard accessories: W 444 Optional accessories: B 18, B 29 L, MPA V L

Stage Microphones

Page 54

Page 55


Lavalier Microphones Theater, Lectern Recording Broadcast

Clip-on microphone for lectern (handsfree use) Houses of worship Recording Theater, onstage miking

145

205

• Head-worn microphone with continuously adjustable behind-the-neck headband and microphone arm • Excellent comfort

• Excellent tool for recording and broadcast applications

• Inconspicuous clip-on microphone

• Excellent audio quality across the full bandwith

• Natural, airy sound

15,5

5,5

• Dual-diaphragm transducer for suppression of cable noise

• Dual-diaphragm transducer for cable noise suppression

Houses of worship Lectern Tour guide TV, motion picture, video production

• Extremely light, inconspicuous lavalier microphone

• Resistant to moisture, perspiration, and salts

• Insensitive to moisture, perspiration, and salts

Clip-on microphone for lectern (handsfree use) Houses of worship

• High ambient noise rejection

CK77

• Superior sound, compatible to all popular wireless transmitters

• Microphone arm provides choice of left or right-hand use

8

References: GERMANY: Musical Bonifazius

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Compatible with all standard wireless systems

15

23

7,5

HC 577 L

Section:

02

CK 77 WR

The new AKG HC 577 L has been designed to be invisible in the limelight. It is so small it will virtually disappear on stage or on camera, while providing perfect mobility and pristine audio quality. A patented body design protects the microphone’s dual-diaphragm transducer from moisture and perspiration. Mechanical noise, cable noise, etc. are reduced to a minimum. The microphone uses a CK 77 omnidirectional transducer that has been an industry standard for lavalier capsules for years and ensures superior audio performance. The HC 577 L uses dual-ear temple pieces for extreme stability and optimum comfort.

Extremely small omnidirectional lavalier microphone. The patented dualdiaphragm capsule has been designed specifically to protect the transducer from moisture and perspiration. The capsule uses two vertical diaphragms mounted back to back and connected out of phase to cancel out mechanical and cable noise, etc. Available versions: C 577 WR black, with phantom adapter CK 77 WR L black, with mini-XLR connector CK 77 WR L/P flesh-tone, with mini-XLR connector Item numbers: C 577 WR CK 77 WR L CK 77 WR L/P

Item number: HC 577 L (Single pack)

2441Z00310 2441Z00390 2441Z00400

C 417

CK 99 L

Affordable professional miniature condenser microphone. Its broadband, flat audio reproduction in an omnidirectional format is ideal for all types of broadcast and theatrical applications. The sound is extremely open and natural, making it ideal for wireless or hardwire multi-mic situations. An attachment clip, tiepin and windscreen are supplied with each C 417. C 417 PP: For hardwire applications, with standard XLR connector for phantom powering. C 417 L: With mini XLR connector for use with B 29 L battery operated power supply, MPA V L external phantom power adapter, or AKG WMS bodypack transmitters.

Low-profile, cost efficient clip-on microphone for applications including houses of worship, lecturers, etc. Connects to AKG bodypack transmitters.

Item numbers: C 417 PP C 417 L

The CK 99 L provides a natural sound, with a slight rise above 10 kHz for added clarity. Its cardioid polar pattern and bass rolloff combine to suppress unwanted ambient noise. Item number: CK 99 L

Section:

02

6000H51040

2577X00120 2577X00080

3141Z00010

HC 577 L 3141Z00110 (6 units multipack version)

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

omnidirectional 20 Hz to 20 kHz 8 mV/Pa (-42 dBV) 133 dB 26 dB-A 68 dB ≤3.5 kohms ≥10 kohms 1.5 to 12 V ≤0.6 mA 3-pin mini XLR 1.5 m (5 ft.) flesh tone 205 mm (8.1 in.), max. diameter: 145 mm (5.7 in.) 28 g (0.99 oz.) / 150 g (5,3 oz.) PB 77, W 77 B, moisture shield B 18, MPA V L, W 77 M/P, W 77 M, W 77

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight:

• Standard accessories:

• Optional accessories:

Page 56

omnidirectional 20 to 20,000 Hz 8 mV/Pa –42 dBV) 133 dB SPL 26 dB-A 68 dB CK 77 WR (C 577 WR) (≤3,500 (≤400) ohms) CK 77 WR (C 577 WR) (≥10,000 (≥2.000) ohms) CK 77 WR: 1.5 to 12 V; C 577 WR: 9 to 52 V to DIN/IEC ≤0,6 mA CK 77 WR: 3 -pin mini XLR “L”, C 577 WR: 3-pin XLR 1.5 m (5 ft.) various matte colors 5.5 dia. x 14 mm (0.2 dia. x 0.55 in.) CK 77 WR: 0.4/85 g (0.014/3 oz.) C 577 WR: 0.4/146 g (0.014/5.2 oz.) CK 77 WR: adhesive compound, H 40/1, H 41, moisture shield, PB 77, W 77; C 577 WR: adhesive compound, H 39, H 40/1, H 41, moisture shield, PB 77, W 77 W 77 M, W 77 M/P, W 77 Set, W 77 M/P Set

• • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1%/3% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

• • • • • •

Current consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight:

• Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

omnidirectional 20 to 20,000 Hz 17 mV/Pa (-35 dBV) 118/126 dB 34 dB-A 60 dB ≤200 ohms ≥1,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L or AKG bodypack transmitter ≤2mA C 417 PP: 3-pin XLR, C 417 L: 3-pin mini XLR C 417 PP: 3 m (10 ft.), C 417 L: 1.5 m (5 ft.) matte black 7.5 dia. x 15 mm (0.3 x 0.6 in.) C 417 PP: 68/220 g (2.5/8.1 oz.) C 417 L: 8/160 g (0.3/5.9 oz.) H 40/1, H 41, microphone bag, W 407 B 18, for C 417 L: B 29 L, MPA V L

• • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

• • • • • • •

Current consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories:

cardioid 15 to 18,000 Hz 8.8 mV/Pa (-41 dBV) 118 dB 34 dB-A 60 dB ≤200 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 1.5 to 10 VDC or 9 to 52 V phantom power using MPA V L ≤2 mA 3-pin mini XLR 1.6 m (5 ft. 4 in.) matte black dia.: 8 x 23 mm (0.3 x 0.9 in.) 2.5/115 g (0.08/4 oz.) Clip, W 55

Stage Microphones

Page 57


Perception Live

The Perception Live Series First-rate audio for everyone from up-and-coming musicians to seasoned pros Vocal/ Speech Instrument Amp Miking Drums and Percussion

Vocals / Speech Amp Miking • Supercardioid polar pattern designed for lead vocals • Rugged wire mesh cap with internal protective wiremesh cap • Die-cast metal body • Complete with stand adapter and zip bag

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Die cast full metal body • Gold plated XLR pins • Hum compensation coil (P 2 and P 4) • Cardioid and supercardioid polar patterns provide best feedback protection (P 3 S, P 5)

P5

P5S

The P 5 is a dynamic handheld microphone for lead vocals. The supercardioid polar pattern guarantees for utmost gain before feedback and makes the voice cut through the mix more easily.

Section:

02

Section:

02

Its heavy duty metal body will take some tough handling. This microphone is available with or without on/off switch.

Item numbers: P5 P5S

Detailed information and application notes are available in the new Perception folder:

3100H00110 3100H00120

Perception condenser microphones have already found their way onto the stage for live applications. The “Perception Live” series from AKG now offers dedicated tools for all onstage applications, including two new dynamic instrument microphones called the P 2 and P 4 as well as two dynamic vocal microphones, the P 3 S and the P 5, available with or without an on/off switch. The new "Groove Pack" for drum and percussion miking contains a selection of drum and percussion microphones along with all required mounting brackets and clips. Perception microphones provide the perfect answer to all miking needs on stage. Perception does it all.

• • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Recommended load impedance: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

supercardioid 40 to 20,000 Hz 2.5mV/Pa 144 dB ≥2,000 ohms protective bag, SA 45 H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 305, ST 45, ST 46, W 23, W 3004, W 880

Stage Microphones

Page 58

Page 59


Perception Live Drums and percussion Instrument amps Wind instruments Live sound • Dynamic microphone designed for drums, percussions, wind instruments and guitar amps • Response tailored for neutral reproduction of instrument sounds • Integrated stand adapter and external bracket

Backing vocals Live sound • Rugged performance microphone designed for backing vocals and instruments • Rugged wire mesh cap with internal windscreen • Die-cast metal body

• Dynamic microphone designed for low-pitched instruments

• Complete drum-kit microphone pack

• Powerful sound with great bass range

• Roadworthy in a rugged aluminium carrying case

• Handles highest sound pressure levels

• Comes complete with all microphone clamps and stand adapters

• Rugged all-metal body withstands typical tough stage use

• Complete with carrying case

• Complete with carrying case

P4

P3S

P2

Groove Pack

The P 4 microphone with its solid metal case will stand up to typical stage use.

The P 3 S microphone is ideal for backing vocals, guitar, wind instruments and many other applications.

Rugged all metal microphone for bass instruments such as bass drum, trombone or bass amplifier.

AKG’s Groove Pack is a start-up kit for drummers. It contains 6 microphones from the new Perception live series:

Metal case and wire mesh grill ensure exceptional ruggedness.

It delivers powerful sound with a high energy low end.

An integrated stand adapter and a mounting bracket for snare, tom tom etc. make this microphone highly versatile for use on drums, percussion, wind instruments and guitar amps. Item number: P4

Item number: P3S

3100H00130

Item number: P2

3100H00140

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Humbucking coil rejects EMC noises

• Humbucking coil rejects EMC noises

02

Drums Percussion

• Integrated stand adapter

• Complete with stand adapter and zip bag

• Rugged all-metal body withstands typical tough stage use

Section:

Live sound Bass instruments

Section:

1 x P 2 bass microphone 2 x P 17* for overheads 3 x P 4 for toms and snare

3100H00150

02

This complete set comes in a protective aluminium carrying case. *P 17 is technically identical to P 170 and not available as a single unit. Item numbers: Groove Pack

• • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Recommended load impedance: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

cardioid 20 to 16,000 Hz 2.5mV/Pa 157 dB ≥2,000 ohms H 440, protective case ST 1, ST 305, ST 45

• • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Recommended load impedance: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

cardioid 40 to 20,000 Hz 2.5mV/Pa 144 dB ≥2,000 ohms protective bag, SA 45 H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 305, ST 45, ST 46, W 23, W 3004, W 880

• • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Recommended load impedance: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

3100H00200

cardioid 20 to 16,000 Hz 2.5mV/Pa 152 dB ≥2,000 ohms carrying case ST 1, ST 305, ST 45

Stage Microphones

Page 60

Page 61


Gooseneck Microphones Reference Projects

65

Architectural Microphone Series Architectural Microphones

66

Modular Series Installation, System Description Modular Series GN Series GN E Series GN ESP Series GN E 5Pin Series HM 1000, GN 155 Set CK 31, CK 32, CK 33 CK 47, CK 80

69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77

Introduction, CGN 99 C/S, CGN 99 C/L CGN 99 H/S, CGN 99 H/L, CHM 99 DGN 99, DGN 99 E, DST 99 S CK 99 L, CBL 99

78 79 80 81

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

99er Series

Shotgun and Boundary Layer Microphones

Section:

02

C 747 V11 C 547 BL PCC®-160 PZM®-30D PZM®-6D PCC®-170, PCC®-130/PCC®-130 SW PZM®-185, Sound Grabber II MB 3, MB 4 C 562 CM, PZM®-10/PZM®-10LL PZM®-11, PZM®-11LLWR C 568 B CK 98

82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93

Microphone Mixer AMM 10 DMM 4/2/2 DMM 4/2/4

94 96 97

Conference Systems CS 5 Introduction CS 5 BU CS 5 DU, CS 5 VU CS 5 IU, CS 5 IRT/CS 5 IRT 2 CS 5 IRR7, CS 5 CU50

42

Page 62

98 100 101 102 103

Installed

Section:

02

Microphones

Creating sound systems that ensure optimum intelligibility even in difficult acoustic environments is a major challenge to innovative

designers. AKG offers products at several budget levels that are easy to install and unobtrusive in appearance providing premium AKG solutions to help designers meet their unique challenges.

43

Page 63


Installed Sound

China

Hungary

Switzerland

Syria

China

Austria

Thailand

USA

Office of the Telecommunication Authority, Hong Kong

Section:

02

Installed Sound

St. Ann's Church

SWX Swiss Exchange in Zurich

Academy Fantasia, Bangkok

Opera House in Damascus

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

St. Anthony Church, Hong Kong

Hungarian and Ukrainian Presidents Rely on AKG Sound Quality

County Council Chambers, Los Alamos, New Mexico

Section:

02 Austria

Germany

Austria

Norway

USA

Austria

Canada

USA

Piarist Church, Vienna

Düsseldorfer Landtag

St. Martin's Cathedral in Eisenstadt

Conference Centre in Stord

Intelligent, high-performance sound systems have become a prerequisite for any kind of event today where intelligibility and excellent sound are of paramount importance. Regardless of the scale of an event, the acoustics of a venue, or the type of sound system to be designed, AKG has the right products. It is obvious that the acoustical requirements of a stadium differ greatly from those of a place of worship, a theater, or a business conference. AKG’s experience gained in more than six descades of successful activities in the professional audio industry will help you find the best solutions for your application. CourtSmart Courtroom, Massachussetts

Page 64

Bank Austria in Downtown Vienna

Ministère de la Justice du Québec

Ford Motor Company, Regional Trade Show Displays, Dearborn, Michigan

Page 65


Gooseneck Microphones Legislative assembly, conference center Lecture hall, lectern House of worship Boardroom Courtroom

Design your own mic

Step 1: Select the pickup pattern. Three high quality Blue Line Series studio microphone capsules with different pickup patterns have been specifically styled for the Architectural Series to provide the perfect choice for any kind of room acoustics and every microphone position. Blue Line microphones are used by professionals in the motion picture, recording, broadcasting, and sound reinforcement industries worldwide. Their ultra-light diaphragms reduce mechanical noise to a minimum. High rejection of RF and electromagnetic interference make these capsules ideal tools for every application.

CK 92: Omnidirectional

Omni capsule with smooth, well-balanced sound.

Read more about the Blue Line Series on page 36/37. CK 91: Cardioid

CK 93: Hypercardioid

Consistent cardioid polar pattern and high off-axis rejection throughout frequency range.

Consistent hypercardioid polar pattern, high off-axis rejection throughout frequency range.

High resistance to RF interference

Gold sputtered ultra-low mass diaphragms

Switchable bass cut filter and preattenuation pad

Bayonet coupling system with self-cleaning contacts

3 different polar patterns to match different room acoustics

Flat frequency response for excellent acoustic performance

More than 6,840 different body styles for unlimited freedom of design

Section:

02

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Architectural Microphone Series

Step 2: Select the body style. Each capsule is available in five different body styles from soberly geometrical to softer, rounder shapes, so Architectural Series microphones will perfectly match any environment. Responding to the needs and imagination of architects and designers, all Architectural Series capsule modules are available in five different body styles.

Section:

02

Here are some examples:

Architectural Series microphones will match any interior design perfectly. A variety of capsule body styles, goosenecks in selectable lengths, various colors and finishes are available, a range of mounting modules allow proper installation. It has never been so easy to design a sound system that blends in perfectly with any architecture! Architectural Series microphones use the same transducers as the classic AKG Blue Line microphones famous for ruler-flat frequency response, low self-noise, and consistent studio-grade polar patterns. The Architectural Series includes three highly accurate transducers, a cardioid, an omni, and a hypercardioid. All capsules use the tried and tested bayonet coupling of the AKG Blue Line Series. It allows every capsule to be replaced quickly and easily if, for instance, a different pickup pattern is required for acoustical reasons. The self-cleaning contacts of the bayonet coupling maintain perfect signal integrity even after years of use in hostile environments. Architectural Series goosenecks are the same proven modules as those available for the Discreet Acoustics Modular Series. Each gooseneck must pass extremely severe quality tests designed to ensure that the gooseneck will bend precisely to the desired shape and resist unintentional bending. A complete line of mounting and installation accessories makes installing and positioning the microphones child's play at any venue. All shock mounts are made of a special rubber mixture with a high damping factor for reliable minimization of mechanical noise.

Capsule • Type: • Frequency range: • Polar pattern: • Sensitivity @ 1000 Hz: • Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): • Max. SPL for 1% THD: • Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): • Electrical impedance: • Recommended load impedance: • Powering (IEC 61938): • Connector: • Finish: • Dimensions:

CK 91

CK 92 CK 93 Prepolarized condenser microphone 20 Hz to 20 kHz 20 Hz to 20 kHz Omnidirectional Hypercardioid 10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV) 10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV) -17 dB-A -17 dB-A 132 dB 132 dB 77 dB 77 dB <200 ohms <200 ohms >1000 ohms >1000 ohms 9 to 52 VDC phantom power 9 to 52 VDC phantom power Depending on selected connector module Selectable Depending on selected gooseneck model and capsule body style

20 Hz to 20 kHz Cardioid 10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV) -17 dB-A 132 dB 77 dB <200 ohms >1000 ohms 9 to 52 VDC phantom power

Installed Microphones

Page 66

Page 67


Gooseneck Microphones

GN-Series: Installation

Step 3: Select the gooseneck installation module. Installation requirements and possibilities vary from venue to venue. For mobile use on a table stand, permanent installation in a conference table, with an automatic microphone mixer, or on a discussion system microphone station, the Architectural Series installation modules provide a perfect solution for every application.

The programmable switch can be configured with a variety of applications using jumpers.

Hidden cable duct

Tabletop installation

Naturally the LED ring and bass cut can also be activated and deactivated on an individual basis.

Step 4: Select a gooseneck. To ensure optimum audio quality, the microphone capsule needs to be placed as close to the talker's mouth as possible. The closer the microphone sits to the sound source, the higher the usable gain before feedback will be and the less unwanted noise will be picked up. No matter whether you will mount the microphone on a lectern or conference table, the Architectural Series provides a gooseneck of suitable length. All you need to do is specify the required length when ordering.

Optional installation hardware MF-DA Mounting flange The MF-DA mounting flange is the modular solution for situations where it is impractical to fix a gooseneck from below. The rugged, all-metal MF-DA can be screwed on permanently and allows you to route the cable above or below the tabletop. This installation method is very popular for altars and lecterns.

MF-DA

Optional installation hardware ST 45 Table stand Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

All modules of the 3 and 5-pin versions are supplied with an integral connector. The 5-pin XLR connector is used for the separate transmission of audio and control signals for the lighting ring.

For permanent installation, a 3/8" screw is mounted from below. Two supplied rubber buffers reduce structure-borne noise. The screw requires a 14 mm (0.6 in.) opening.

Possible functions are: On/Off Push-to-Talk Push-to-Mute

3 or 5-pin XLR module (E type):

Standard installation hardware

The ST 45 table stand is the modular solution for mobile applications or installations where supporting surfaces must not be changed. GN Series goosenecks screw directly onto the ST 45. Rugged construction and shock absorbing rubber feet ensure optimum stability and reduce footfall noise.

3-pin XLR module with switch (ESP type):

ST 45

The programmable mute switch means that these modules are suitable for a wide variety of applications.

GN E + GN ESP-Series: Installation

Flush mount module:

PS 3 F-LOCK Classic theft-proof fixture for easy, material-friendly installation. Required mounting hole: 17 mm (0.7 in.)

Section:

02

Section:

02

Theft-proof lock

The particularly elegant look of the Flash Mount module makes it perfect for installation in desktops.

Online Configurator: Designing your personal mic was never so much fun! It is very easy to assemble your individual gooseneck microphone with the online configurator: Select the acoustics, design and required technology for your project and see the results immediately.

ST 45 + SA 60 For easiest installation and takedown of mobile sound systems, the ST 45 table stand can be teamed up with the SA 60 stand adapter. The massive base plate and shockabsorbing rubber feet eliminate footfall noise. Step 5: Select the color or finish. Architectural Series microphones are available in different colours and finishes and fit in perfectly with any environment. Here are some examples:

H 600 The H 600 offers optimum attenuation of structure-borne noise, high flexibility, and a theft-proof lock. Required mounting hole: 53 mm (2.1 in.) Including reduction socket A 608

RAL 8023

RAL 8016

RAL 8011

RAL 7032

RAL 7024

RAL 7016

RAL 6029

RAL 6000

RAL 5012

RAL 5002

RAL 4008

RAL 3003

RAL 2000

RAL 1013

RAL 1004

Gold plated

Chrome plated

Silk white

Silk black

â&#x20AC;Ś

www.akg.com

H 500 The H 500 is the most cost efficient solution for easy installation and takedown of sound systems. Required mounting hole: 50 mm (2 in.)

ST 1 + SA 60 The ST 1 table stand can be teamed up with the SA 60 stand adapter. It is especially useful for uneven surfaces where the ST 45 base plate cannot be used.

Installed Microphones

Page 68

Page 69


Gooseneck Microphones

Modular Series

Conference Houses of worship Lectern

Fully modular system for maximum requirements The Modular Series from AKG Acoustics is being used worldwide and has proven its worth for many years. It brilliantly fulfils the three key requirements that are essential for sound system applications.

Low profile: The extremely compact design and matte finish underscore the inconspicuous appearance of the Modular Series. The low-profile installation modules ensure quick setup and takedown of all versions of the Modular Series.

Modularity: Depending on the specific purpose, “special wishes” can often be fulfilled only by modular systems. The Modular Series offers a choice of five capsule modules with different polar patterns and frequency responses. A wide range of goosenecks and installation modules is also available. Besides, there are special-purpose modules for applications that are not covered by any other products available. They can be used as wireless or lavalier microphones as well as for single-user applications.

The excellent response and extremely good intelligibility make the Modular Series the first choice whenever quality and reliability have top priority. Small wonder that decision makers all over the world appreciate AKG as a professional partner.

• Rugged construction • Compatible with all Modular Series capsules • Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules • Integrated LED ring status indicator 500

• Integrated switchable bass rolloff 305

• Attached XLR connector or unterminated cable ends 160

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Reliability: A wide range of features minimizes the risk of operating errors, material fatigue, or signal dropouts. The LED ring and self-cleaning gold-plated contacts for the threaded connections are standard, the switchable bass rolloff filter too.

Some References: The deep groove of the thread prevents the capsule from being misaligned.

Added reliability: maximum contact area The size of the contact area between the microphone capsule and the gooseneck determines the reliability of the entire installation. Instead of the failure-prone conventional point contacts, all Modular Series products use large-area, selfcleaning gold plated contacts that engage in groove-andtongue fashion. In addition, a hard, rugged thread stabilizes the

joint. The extremely deep groove of the thread prevents misalignment and ensures long useful life of all Modular Series products even if they are used in installations that are frequently reconfigured or in mobile systems. A seemingly small detail, this feature will make your work definitely easier.

Long strips of self-cleaning, gold plated contacts fit together seamlessly.

Added reliability: tested for stability A high quality gooseneck bends precisely into the desired shape and is resistant to inadvertent readjustment. This stability of shape depends entirely on consistent resilience of the springs inside the gooseneck. Therefore, all Modular Series Gooseneck Modules are subjected to a rigorous quali-

GN 50

GN 15

20

GN 30

20

20

GN Series For permanent screw-on installation, AKG offers goosenecks in various lengths: GN 15: approx. 15 cm (6 in.); GN 30: approx. 30 cm (12 in.); GN 50: approx. 50 cm (20 in.). Except for the GN 30 oc with unterminated cable ends, all come with a DPA in-line XLR phantom power adapter with integrated 250 Hz bass rolloff and LED ON/OFF jumper. The DPA connects to any standard mixer input with 9 to 52 V power supply. The mini XLR connector will thread through any hole from 11 mm (0.44 in.) in diameter. This eliminates the need for large holes or awkward unsoldering and resoldering of the much larger phantom power adapter during installation.

Section:

02

SWEDEN: Hässleholms Kulturhus, Varberg Town Hall CHINA: Tong Zhou Qu Financial Department NEW ZEALAND: Parliament NORWAY: Froland Church, Stord Conference Centre

ty test during which they are bent into extreme shapes and must keep their shape until bent again. Any gooseneck that does not pass this test is rejected immediately.

Section:

02

Standard accessory: Phantom power adapter The external phantom power adapter of the GN series makes setting up the goosenecks much easier, since a small hole will suffice for threading through a mini XLR connector. Having disconnected the cable, the integrated bass cut can be set quite easily inside the phantom power adapter. The phantom power adapter will operate off any available phantom power supply from 9 to 52 V, powering both the condenser capsule and the LED ring.

Added reliability: useful indicator LED All Installation Modules provide an LED ring. A world first, it uses special circuitry to operate off standard phantom power or a separate power supply. The LED ring indicates system status:

GN 15

• Off: If none of the above functions is desired, the LED ring can be deactivated. In this mode, it is practically invisible.

Item numbers: GN 15 GN 30 GN 30 OC GN 50

• Mic on: The LED ring glows to indicate that the system has been wired correctly and phantom power is on.

GN 50

2765H00010 2765H00030 2765H00050 2765H00080

Standard installation hardware included

Thus, the operator will know at a glance whether the hardware has been installed correctly. There is no need to test each microphone.

Mic On

Added reliability: hidden controls The phantom power adapter contains two jumpers that let you activate a 250 Hz bass rolloff and deactivate the LED ring. Since the jumpers are hidden inside the adapter case they cannot be realigned unintentionally.

GN 30

Hidden inside the case, the two jumpers are protected from unintentional misalignment.

Off

• • • • • • • • •

Bass rolloff filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions:

• Net/shipping weight • Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤3 mA 3-pin male XLR; GN 30 OC: stripped and tinned leads 1.5 m (5 ft.) matte dark grey max. dia.: 20 mm (0.8 in.), length: 160/305/500 mm (6.3/12/20 in.) 72/400 g (2.5/14.1 oz.), 110/522 g (3.9/18.4 oz.), 120/495 g (4.2/17.5 oz.) DPA phantom power adapter, screw set with rubber bush B 18, MF-DA installation flange, H 600, ST 1, ST 45

Installed Microphones

Page 70

Page 71


Gooseneck Microphones Conference Houses of worship Lectern

Conference Houses of worship Lectern Paging Applications

• Rugged construction • Programmable mute switch

• Compatible with all Modular Series capsules

• High RFI (Radio Frequency Interference) immunity

• Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules

• Rugged construction

• Integrated LED ring status indicator

• Compatible with all Modular Series capsules

• Integrated, switchable bass cut

• Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules

235

405

• Integrated, gold-plated XLR connector

260

572

• Integrated, switchable bass cut

380

SWEDEN: Hässleholms Kulturhus, Varberg Town Hall CHINA: Tong Zhou Qu Financial Department NEW ZEALAND: Parliament NORWAY: Froland Church

600

• Integrated LED ring status indicator

Some References:

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Integrated gold-plated XLR connector

GN 50

GN 15 GN 30

GN E Series

Section:

02

MADE IN AUSTRIA

MADE IN AUSTRIA

20

20

GN ESP Series

MADE IN AUSTRIA

20

All E-Series modules come with an integrated connector for quick setup and takedown.The goosenecks are available in various lengths. GN 15 E: 23.5 cm (9.2 in.); GN 30 E: 38 cm (15 in.); GN 50 E: 57.2 cm (22.3 in.). Of course the GN E series also has an integrated 250 Hz bass rolloff filter and LED ON/OFF jumper.

• • • • • • • •

Bass rolloff filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions:

• Net/shipping weight: • Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

52

Page 72

250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤3 mA 3-pin male XLR matte dark grey max. dia.: 20 mm (0.8 in.), length: 235/380/572 mm (9/14.9/22.3 in.) 112/396 g (3.9/13.9 oz.), 160/530 g (5.6/18.7 oz.), 160/535 g (5.6/18.8 oz.) DPA phantom power adapter (integrated) B 18, H 500, H 600, PS 3 F-lock, SA 60, ST 1, ST 45

Section:

02

The mode selection jumpers are hidden inside the housing so they cannot be realigned unintentionally. An LED Ring provides a clearly visible MIC ON/OFF indication. The bank of jumpers also allows the LED Ring and the integrated bass rolloff filter to be enabled or disabled. In addition, the new electronic circuit design provides high immunity to radio-frequency interference.

Fig. 2

GN 30 E

GN 50 E

Programmable Mute Switch

Item numbers: GN 15 ESP GN 30 ESP GN 50 ESP

2765H00020 2765H00040 2765H00090

20

• on/off • push-to-talk • push-to-mute

GN 15 E

Item numbers: GN 15 E GN 30 E GN 50 E

20

The new GN ESP Series features a programmable mute switch to cover a wide range of applications. A bank of jumpers makes it easy to select the desired switch function for every situation:

Optimum suppression of structure-borne noise An essential feature of the installation hardware described below is the attenuation of structure-borne noise that prevents the transmission of unwanted noise (footfall etc.). The amount of attenuation is determined by the material mix of the rubber shock mount. Modular Series installation modules use a mixture that is extremely efficient at frequencies below 250 Hz (e.g., knocking noise). Unlike standard rubber mixturees (fig.1) that respond to vibrations very slowly, the special AKG rubber mixture (fig. 2) absorbs vibrations practically immediately. This prevents successive shocks from adding up. This rubber mixture is used in the H 600 and H 500.

Fig. 1

20

• • • • • • • •

GN 15 ESP

GN 30 ESP

GN 50 ESP

2765H00450 2765H00460 2765H00470

Bass rolloff filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions:

• Net/shipping weight: • Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

250 Hz, -10 dB bei 50 Hz ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤3.5 mA 3-pin male XLR matte dark grey max. dia.: 20 mm (0.8 in.), length: 260/405/600 m (10.2/15.9/23.6 in.) 140/430 g (4.9/15.2 oz.), 184/516 g (6.5/18.2 oz.), 194/573 g (6.8/20.2 oz.) DPA phantom power adapter (integrated) B 18, H 500, H 600, PS 3 F-lock, SA 60, ST 1, ST 45

Installed Microphones

53

Page 73


Gooseneck Microphones

Conference Houses of worship Lectern

Conference Houses of worship Surveillance Theater, onstage miking

• Gooseneck with gold-plated 5Pin XLR connector

Conference Houses of worship Lectern • Elegant floor stand

• Hanging module with rugged thread connection and self-cleaning, gold plated contacts

• Compatible with all Modular Series capsules

• Compatible with all Discreet Acoustics Modular capsules

• Integrated LED ring

• Extra large controllable LED ring • Highly reliable contacts for capsule modules

• Integrated switchable LED ring

• Screw-on extension tube

• Compatible with all Modular Series capsules

• Integrated bass rolloff filter Some References:

• Rugged all-metal construction 380

• 95° pickup angle

107

235

Harman Professional Group | 2011

SWITZERLAND: SWX Swiss Exchange, Zurich

USA: Austrian Embassy in Washington AUSTRIA: Kaiserebersdorf Parish

• Non-reflective anthracite finish

110

Some References:

50

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Some References:

1490

572

• Integrated switchable bass cut

• Rugged all-metal construction

24

NORWAY: Stord Conference Centre 13,5 20

20

20

GN E 5Pin Series

Section:

02

HM 1000

19

Similar to the GN E Modules, the GN E 5Pin Modules come with an integrated connector with phantom power adapter. One special feature is the 5-pin XLR connector, which ensures that the extra-large LED ring can be activated and deactivated using a separate power supply, e.g., a Logic out from any automatic mixer. The LED ring is extra large for enhanced visibility. Of course the GN E 5Pin also has the same features as all Modular Series installation modules, such as a gold-plated thread for screwing on the capsule, integrated switchable bass cut, and extremely strong joints that will withstand the toughest kind of usage.

Using microphones flown from the ceiling to record music or speech in houses of worship, conference rooms, or on theater stages is becoming more and more popular. A 10 m (33 ft.) special cable that is treated specially to reduce twisting to a minimum even if the temperature varies and a spring steel hanging clamp for precise microphone alignment will keep the microphone securely in its position.

5-pin connector The 5-pin XLR connector allows the audio signal and the control voltage for the LED ring to be fed separately.

A switchable LED ring helps the sound engineer to check system function during the soundcheck.

Connector pinout 1 – Audio ground 2 – LED ring + 3 – Audio inphase 4 – LED ring – 5 – Audio return Item numbers GN 15 E 5Pin GN 30 E 5Pin GN 50 E 5Pin

Item number: HM 1000

GN 15 E 5Pin

GN 30 E 5Pin

GN 155 Set Elegant gooseneck module with integrated LED ring status indicator and heavy, shock-mounted floor stand in matte gray finish for use with all Discreet Acoustics capsule modules. Suitable for standalone use on stage or placed in front of a lectern. Two flexible gooseneck sections allow optimum alignment with users in different positions.

Section:

02

A supplied screw-on extension tube can be used to raise the microphone for tall users. The attached 10 m (33 ft.) cable with XLR phantom power adapter is long enough to reach the edge of most stages without using an extension cable. Excellent for use as a lectern microphone in houses of worship, meeting halls, etc.

Item number: GN 155 Set

2765H00100

2765H00180

GN 50 E 5Pin

2765H00390 2765H00400 2765H00410

GN 155 Choir*

WMS 450/155 Choir*

Compatible with all Discreet Acoustics Modular Capsules.

This combines the best of the WMS 450 wireless system with the GN 155 Choir for specialized wireless choir mic applications.

5-pin XLR connector

*Available only in the USA. For more details please visit www.akg.com/usa

• • • • • • • • •

Bass rolloff filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight

• Optional accessories:

54

Page 74

250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤3 mA 5-pin male XLR matte dark grey 20 Ø x 235/380/572 mm, (0.8 Ø x 9/14.9/22.4 in.) 112/396 g (3.9/13.9 oz.) 160/530 g (5.6/18.7 oz.) 160/535 g (5.6/18.8 oz.) H 500, H 600, SA 60, ST 1, ST 45

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Bass rolloff filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current Consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2 mA 3-pin male XLR 10 m (33 ft.) matte dark grey 13.5 dia. x 50 mm (0.5 dia. x 2.0 in.) 400/600 g (14.1 oz./1.3 lbs.) spring steel hanging clamp B 18

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Bass rolloff filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current Consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimension: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤3 mA 3-pin male XLR 10 m (33 ft.) matte dark grey 180 x 1,490 mm (7.1 in. x 4 ft. 11 in.) 3.6/4.8 kg (8/10.6 lbs.) ST 305, extension tube B 18

55

Page 75


Capsule Modules Conference Houses of worship Lectern Theater, onstage miking

Recording Surveillance • Screw-on Capsule module • Omnidirectional polar pattern

Conference Houses of worship Lectern Theater, onstage miking

Conference Houses of worship Lectern Theater, onstage miking

• Suited for recording or surveillance use • Screw-on Capsule module

• Screw-on Capsule module

• Wide frequency range

• Hypercardioid polar pattern

• Hypercardioid polar pattern

• Hypercardioid polar pattern

• 360° pickup angle

• Suited for use in acoustically critical rooms/situations

• Provides optimum audio for speech miking

• Provides excellent intelligibility in acoustically difficult environments • Directional design

• Highly efficient windscreen

• Studio quality directional design

• 125° pickup angle

• Wide frequency range

• Wide frequency range

• Speech optimized frequency response

• 80° pickup angle

• 80° pickup angle

SWEDEN: Hässleholms Kulturhus, Varberg Town Hall

Some References:

Some References:

Some References:

CANADA: Ministère Justice, Québec GERMANY: Bavarian State Chancellery USA: Austria’s Embassy in Washington AUSTRIA: St. Martin's Cathedral, Eisenstadt

GERMANY: Düsseldorf Land Parliament SWEDEN: Hässleholms Kulturhus, Varberg Town Hall NORWAY: Froland Church

USA: Austria’s Embassy in Washington, CourtSmart 123

Some References:

CHINA: Hong Kong Office of the Telecommunication Authority, Tong Zhou Qu Financial Department GERMANY: Hannover Town Hall NEW ZEALAND: Parliament Building, Wellington SWITZERLAND: SWX, Swiss Exchange, Zurich

13,5

153 146

Some References:

• 95° pickup angle

9

13,5

13,5

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Wide frequency range

130

20

• Screw-on Capsule module

27

27

20

• Wide pickup angle

• Highly efficient windscreen 20

• Cardioid polar pattern

27

• Screw-on Capsule module

• Highly efficient windscreen

Conference Houses of worship Lectern Theater, onstage miking

CK 47

Section:

02

CK 31

CK 32

CK 33

Capsule modules have been designed for a wide range of applications in fixed or temporary sound systems and provide excellent audio as well as high gain before feedback. These rugged capsules provide a choice of polar patterns and can be combined as needed to obtain the optimum solution for every application. The CK 31 is the perfect choice for any application where more than one person would use the microphone or the user would talk into the microphone from widely varying angles.

The CK 32 is used primarily for recording or surveillance applications.

The CK 33 has been designed primarily for use in acoustically critical rooms/situations.

The CK 47 combines an 80° pickup angle, studio quality audio, and clean off-axis response.

Due to its high sensitivity in all directions, the CK 32 omnidirectional capsule is an excellent choice for all applications requiring ambience pickup. The body is identical to that of the CK 31 and CK 33.

Due to the narrow 95° pickup angle, the hypercardioid polar pattern is a good choice for all situations when noise typically arrives from the sides especially in houses of worship, where people talk into the microphone from greater distances, or where several talkers are grouped side by side. The body is identical to that of the CK 31 and CK 32.

It is an ideal tool wherever studio-standard sound quality is required or for inexperienced talkers. The CK 47 comes complete with a W 70 windscreen.

Item number: CK 31

Page 76

2765H00210

Item number: CK 33

13,5

CK 80

13,5

An 80° pickup angle and speech optimized frequency response provide excellent intelligibility in acoustically critical environments. Its outstanding price/performance ratio is just as convincing as its sound and high gain before feedback.

Section:

02

Complete with W 80 windscreen. Item number: CK 47

2765Z00230

Item number: CK 80

2765Z00240

2765X00220

2765H00200

• • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

• • • • • •

Current Consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories:

56

Item number: CK 32

CK 47

cardioid 50 to 20,000 Hz 20 mV/Pa (-34 dBV) 125 dB 21 dB-A 73 dB ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power, requires DPA adapter (supplied with most Installation Modules) ≤3 mA Modular Series standard matte dark grey 13.5 dia. x 20 mm (0.5 dia. x 0.8 in.) 5/88 g (0.17/3.1 oz.) W 30

omnidirectional 20 to 20,000 Hz 14 mV/Pa (-34 dBV) 125 dB 20 dB-A 74 dB ≤600 ohms ≤2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power, requires DPA adapter (supplied with most Installation Modules) ≤3 mA Modular Series standard matte dark grey 13.5 dia. x 20 mm (0.5 dia. x 0.8 in.) 5/88 g (0.17/3.1 oz.) W 30

hypercardioid 50 to 20,000 Hz 20 mV/Pa (-34 dBV) 125 dB 21 dB-A 73 dB ≤600 ohms ≤2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power, requires DPA adapter (supplied with most Installation Modules) ≤3 mA Modular Series standard matte dark grey 13.5 dia. x 20 mm (0.5 dia. x 0.8 in.) 5/88 g (0.17/3.1 oz.) W 30

• • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

• • • • • •

Current Consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories:

hypercardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 16.5 mV/Pa (-36 dBV) 133 dB 20 dB-A 74 dB ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power, requires DPA adapter (supplied with most Installation Modules) ≤3 mA Modular Series standard matte dark grey 13.5 dia. x 146 mm (0.5 dia. x 5.7 in.) 39/248 g (1.4/8.7 oz.) W 70

• • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

• • • • • •

Current Consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories:

hypercardioid 60 to 15,000 Hz 30 mV/Pa (-30 dBV) 125 dB 17 dB-A 77 dB ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power, requires DPA adapter (supplied with most Installation Modules) ≤3 mA Modular Series standard matte dark grey 13.5 dia. x 146 mm (0.5 dia. x 4.8 in.) 15/208 g (0.5/7.3 oz.) W 80

Installed Microphones

57

Page 77


The 99ers

• Hypercardioid polar pattern

• 30 or 50 cm (12 or 20 in.) long

• 30 or 50 cm (12 or 20 in.) long

• Condenser Hanging Microphone

• Subsequent changes made easy

• 125° pickup angle

• 95° pickup angle

• Cardioid polar pattern

• Architects’ and engineers’ specifications available via smartphone

• Especially suited for inexperienced talkers

• For acoustically difficult environments

• 10 m (33 ft.) cable

• Time saved

• Connects easily via gold-plated XLR connector

• Connects easily via gold-plated XLR connector

A special feature of the 99er Series is that the gooseneck and microphone capsule form an inseparable unit. The rugged metal front grill is joined permanently to the gooseneck, the contacts inside are soldered. This protects the delicate condenser capsule against mechanical stress and electromagnetic interference, and ensures maximum reliability and excellent audio.

580

580

• Integrated spring steel clamp for optimum alignment

55

• 125° pickup angle

Length of cable: 10 m

110 19

380

380

CGN 99 C/S

CGN 99 H/S

The cardioid polar pattern is the most popular because its uses are almost limitless. The 125° pickup angle is especially suited for inexperienced or very “vivacious” talkers who often fail to talk directly into the microphone.

The hypercardioid polar pattern with its narrow 95° pickup angle is suited best for situations where noise typically occurs from all sides (particularly in houses of worship), where people talk into the microphone from a greater distance, or where several talkers are grouped side by side.

CGN 99 C/L

The basis The gooseneck foot features an XLR connector with gold-plated contacts, making connecting and mounting incredibly easy. The metal case also houses the electronic components of the microphone. The extrastrong flexible section lets you position the microphone precisely as required.

• Especially suited for choir recordings

The choice of two different lengths and the flexible joint ensure optimum alignment of the gooseneck to any talker position. Numerous options for installation are available, such as mounting on a stand or tabletop, while optional accessories include a lockable mounting fixture. Item numbers: CGN 99 C/S CGN 99 C/L

CGN 99 H/L

Two different lengths are available. The flexible joint ensures optimum alignment of the gooseneck to any talker position. Several options are available for installation, i.e., stand, tabletop installation, and lockable.

CHM 99

Section:

02

The new CHM 99 Condenser Hanging Microphone provides both ease of use and a high level of functionality. There is hardly any more affordable and simpler solution for recording choirs at worship centers. Suspended from the ceiling or a beam, the hanging microphone is aligned and then fixed in the correct position. Now use the spring steel clamp to adjust the correct angle, and off you go! The CHM 99 is available in white or black.

2965H00110 2695H00130

Item numbers: CGN 99 H/S CGN 99 H/L

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

The integrated capsule

86

• Cardioid polar pattern

• Budgets met

Section:

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight:

• Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

Page 78

Conference Houses of worship Lectern Surveillance

Conference Houses of worship Lectern

• Planning simplified

Selecting microphones for sound installations is a complex task. Most systems require many different microphones that need to be matched carefully. Discussing the matter, AKG development engineers came up with a fascinating thought. Wouldn’t it make sense to have a line where each product had the same price? The result was the AKG 99er Series, a combination of time-tested high-end studio and Installed Sound microphones, all meeting the highest standards. AKG products have enjoyed an outstanding reputation for quality worldwide and are used every day in studios, on stages, or at conference centers. The AKG 99er Series makes planning for installed sound projects easier than ever. All 99ers having the same price, all you have to do is balance the number of microphones needed against the available budget. You can make any changes later on without changing the budget as long as you replace a 99er with another 99er model. Planning and discussions with clients now take much less time. With the 99ers, your job has never been easier – have fun!

02

Conference Houses of worship Lectern

15

The quick & affordable solution for any sound system

13,5

99er Series

cardioid 70 to 18,000 Hz 125 dB 21 dB-A 73 dB 250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤3 mA 3-pin male XLR matte black 13.5 Ø x 380/580 mm (0.5 Ø x 15/23 in.) CGN 99 C/S: 160/480 g (5.7/17 oz.), CGN 99 C/L: 170/500 g (6/17.7 oz.) windscreen B 18, PS 3 F-Lock, H 500, H 600, SA 60, ST 1, ST 45

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Item number: CHM 99 black CHM 99 white

2965H00120 2965H00140

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight:

• Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

hypercardioid 50 to 19,000 Hz 12 mV/Pa (-38 dBV) 125 dB 21 dB-A 73 dB ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤3 mA 3-pin male XLR black 13.5 Ø x 380/580 mm (0.5 Ø x 15/23 in.) CGN 99 HS: 160/480 g (5.7/17 oz.), CGN 99 HL: 170/500 g (6/17.7 oz.) windscreen B 18, PS 3 F-Lock, H 500, H 600, SA 60, ST 1, ST 45

• • • • • • • • • • • •

2965H00150 2965H00160

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Cable length:

cardioid 70 to 18,000 Hz 18 mV/Pa (-35 dBV) 125 dB 21 dB-A 73 dB ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤3 mA 3-pin male XLR 10 m (33 ft.)

• Finish: matte black or white • Dimensions: 13.5 Ø x 55 mm (0.5 Ø x 2.1 in.) • Net/shipping weight: 20/480 g (0.7/17 oz.) • Standard accessories: windscreen • Optional accessories: B 18

Installed Microphones

Page 79


The 99ers Houses of worship Ticket window Reception desk

Paging systems Ticket window Reception desk Restaurant

Houses of worship Lectern Tour guide Theater

Recording Houses of worship Conference Theater

34

• Frequency response optimized for intelligibility

• PA Microphone with rugged, all-metal body

• Long useful life even in tough day-to-day usage

• Frequency response optimized for intelligibility

• Frequency response tailored to speech use

• Long useful life even in tough day-to-day usage

• Natural, airy sound • High ambient noise rejection

120

• Delivers superior sound combined with outstanding ease of use • High sensitivity and low self-noise ensures generous headroom

160

• Frequency response tailored to speech use

300

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

3

34

• Extremely small and inconspicuous, lightweight yet rugged

• Inconspicuous clip-on microphone 345

• PA Microphone with rugged, all-metal body

13

Section:

02

5

65

80

160

DGN 99 DGN 99 E

DST 99 S

Rugged, affordable dynamic cardioid gooseneck microphone for general public address and communications use. The DGN 99 provides a frequency response tailored to speech use for optimum intelligibility as well as good offaxis rejection for high gain before feedback and suppression of unwanted ambient noise. The all-metal body ensures a long useful life for the microphone even in tough day-to-day use.

Rugged, affordable dynamic cardioid gooseneck microphone for general public address and communications use. The DST 99 S provides a frequency response tailored to speech use for optimum intelligibility as well as good offaxis rejection for high gain before feedback and suppression of unwanted ambient noise. The all-metal body ensures a long useful life for the microphone even in tough day-to-day use.

CK 99 L

CBL 99

Low-profile, cost efficient clip-on microphone for applications including houses of worship, lecturers, etc. Connects to AKG bodypack transmitters. The CK 99 L provides a natural sound, with a slight rise above 10 kHz for added clarity. Its cardioid polar pattern and bass rolloff combine to suppress unwanted ambient noise.

The DST 99 S is mounted on a table stand with an on/off switch and coiled cable with 3-pin XLR connector.

The CBL 99 is a high-quality boundary microphone designed to deliver superior results for a multitude of recording applications. The boundary layer technique is well-known for recording and offers non-directional pickup that is frequencyindependent.

Section:

02

Succeeding the proven CBL 99, the CBL 99 is small, lightweight and easy to place. No stand is needed. Since the transducer sits in a metal plate only 5 mm (0.2 in) thick, the plate doesn’t interfere with or color the sound. Frequency response is very uniform within its hemisphere and it captures the “room sound’’ of an instrument very accurately. Easy to use and sonically versatile, the CBL 99 is a great addition to the “mic locker’’ of any studio.

Item numbers: DGN 99 DGN 99 E

• • • • • • • • •

Item number: DST 99 S

6000H51010 6000H51020

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Connector:

• Cable: • Finish: • Dimensions: • Net/shipping weight: • Optional accessories:

cardioid 150 to 15,000 Hz 2.2 mV/Pa (-54 dBV) 133 dB 21 dB-A 73 dB ≤530 ohms ≥2,000 ohms unterminated cable ends DGN 99 E: 3-pin male XLR DGN 99: 2 m (6 ft., 4 in.) matte black microphone: 34 dia. x 345 mm (1.3 dia. x 13.5 in.) gooseneck: dia. 13 x 300 mm (0.51 x 11.8 in.) DGN 99: 275/422 g (9.6/14.8 oz.) DGN 99 E: 285/334 g (10.0/11.7 oz.) DGN 99 E: PS 3 F-Lock

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Item number: CK 99 L

6000H51030

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1 % THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions:

• Net/shipping weight:

cardioid 150 to 15,000 Hz 2.2 mV/Pa (–54 dBV) 133 dB 21 dB-A 73 dB ≤530 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 3-pin male XLR approx. 50 to 100 cm (20 to 40 in.), coiled matte black microphone: 34 dia. x 345 mm (1.3 dia. x 13.5 in.) gooseneck: dia. 13 x 300 mm (0.51 x 11.8 in.); table stand (l x w x h): 160 x 120 x 65 mm (6.3 x 4.7 x 2.5 in.) 805/1,125 g (1.8/2.5 lbs.)

Item number: CBL 99

6000H51040

• • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

• • • • • • •

Current consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories:

cardioid 15 to 18,000 Hz 8.8 mV/Pa (-41 dBV) 118 dB 34 dB-A 60 dB 200 ohms 2,000 ohms 1.5 to 10 VDC or 9 to 52 V phantom power using MPA V L ≤2 mA 3-pin mini XLR 1.6 m (5 ft. 4 in.) matte black dia.: 8 x 23 mm (0.3 x 0.9 in.) 2.5/115 g (0.08/4 oz.) Clip, W 55

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2762X00110

Polar pattern: omnidirectional (hemispherical) Frequency range: 20 to 20,000 Hz Sensitivity: 20 mV/Pa (-34 dBV) Max. SPL for 1% THD: 130 dB Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): 16 dB-A Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): 78 dB Bass cut filter: switchable flat or 150 Hz, 12 dB/octave Impedance: ≤600 ohms Recommended load impedance: ≥2,000 ohms Powering (IEC 61938): 9 to 52 V phantom power Current consumption: ≤2 mA Connector: 3-pin XLR Cable: 3 m (10 ft.) conn. cable with XLR connector, fixed Finish: matte black Dimensions: 80 dia. x 5 (10) mm (3.1 x 0.2/0.4 in.) Net/shipping weight: 56 g (2 oz.) (without cable) Standard accessories: adhesive compound Optional accessories: B 18

Installed Microphones

Page 80

Page 81


Shotgun and Boundary Layer Microphones Conference and lectern Houses of worship Theater Onstage miking Broadcast and recording

Houses of worship Lectern Theater Onstage miking • “Non-crush” case

• Immune to RF interference

• Inconspicuous and rugged

• Speech optimized frequency range

• Hypercardioid polar pattern

• Enhanced hypercardioid polar pattern

• Easy to repaint

• High SPL capability • Premium microphone for ubiquitous application 120

19

AKG

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

137

02

185

C 747

Section:

PA 621 PHANTOM POWER ADAPTER FOR 9 TO 52 VOLTS AUSTRIA

110

C 747 V11

C 547 BL

19 9

A History of Sound: The C 747, the so called „pencil microphone“, was first built in 1987. Due to its excellent technical specifications, especially the wide and flat frequency range, it was used for the recording of all kinds of musical instruments. Because of its brilliant sound reproduction and its inconspicuous optical appearance, it was quickly known as an ideal overhead microphone.

Hypercardioid, studio-quality boundary layer microphone with rugged, “non-crush” case and switchable bass-cut filter for reducing footfall noise, ideal for tough on-stage assignments. Other benefits include optimum acoustic properties, high directivity, and neutral sound. Having the same frequency response, the C 547 BL can be combined with the CK 47 with excellent results. Primarily designed for use in houses of worship, theaters, and conferencing, the C 547 BL is also a good choice for miking kick drums and other instruments.

Section:

02

This is one of many reasons why this microphone found its way into a great number of Broadcast Stations, Recording Studios, Theatres, Opera Houses, Churches, Conference Rooms and Lecture Halls. Another big advantage of the C 747 is that the microphone will not change the sound or level too much even when the person speaking is moving a lot. So it came that the C 747 finally found its way into installed sound systems as a perfect speech and lectern microphone. The C 747 is now one of the most versatile microphones in the AKG product range and over the years it has been available in various versions and model types such as hanging module, capsule for modular gooseneck microphones and in a boundary layer microphone. What’s New in V11: As it is more and more used in conference applications, we carefully redesigned the C 747 to better cope with some specific installed sound issues. The new C 747 V11 will have an integrated RFi shield to block out unwanted interference by mobile phones, wireless mics and the like. Also we have fine tuned the frequency response to give especially the spoken word an outstanding presence, without changing the flavour of the classic C 747 sound. An enhanced polar pattern provides consistent off-axis rejection to control ambient noise and feedback in acoustically difficult environments. This makes the C 747 V11 an excellent choice for noisy discussion groups or reverberant pulpits while it is forgiving enough to clearly pick up talkers moving around in front of the microphone. A switchable LF roll-off filter suppresses mechanical noise. The low-impedance transformerless preamp operates on 9 to 52 V phantom power. The C 747 V11 ships with an extensive accessory set including a shock mount/adapter, mini gooseneck, stand adapter, mounting clamp, thread link, and windscreen. Item number: C 747 V11

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Item numbers: C 547 BL

2226Z00110

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector:

hypercardioid 30 to 18,000 Hz 8.5 mV/Pa (-42 dBV) 133 dB 32 dB-A 73 dB 12 dB/octave at 150 Hz ≤400 ohms ≥1,500 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2 mA 3-pin XLR

• • • • •

Cable: Finish: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

3 m (10 ft.) stage blue 25/750 g (0.9 oz./1.7 lbs.) H 47, MSH 70, SA 47, SHZ 80, W 70 B 18, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

• • • • • • • • • • • •

2447Z00010

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Bass cut filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector:

hypercardioid 30 to 18,000 Hz 8.5 mV/Pa (-42 dBV) 133 dB 22 dB-A 72 dB 12 dB/octave at 150 Hz ≤400 ohms ≥1,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2 mA 3-pin XLR

• • • • • •

Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

3 m (10 ft.) matte dark grey 185 x 120 x 19 mm (7.3 x 4.7 x 0.8 in.) 160/420 g (5.6 /14.8 oz.) W 547 B 18

Installed Microphones

Page 82

Page 83


Boundary Layer Microphones Theater on stage miking Houses of worship Conference and lectern • Supercardioid polar pattern rejects the pit orchestra and offers an impressive gain before feedback

• Hemispherical polar pattern

• Phase coherent cardioid design prevents coloration from surface sound reflections

• Pressure Zone Microphone® design prevents coloration from surface sound reflections

• Finely crafted, rugged housing withstand the rigors of the stage

• Switchable dual-frequency response offers a choice of flat response or rising high-frequency response

• Low profile to be inconspicuously placed on the stage-floor

02

• Rugged detachable cable

PCC ®-160

PZM®-30D

The PCC®-160 is a surface-mounted supercardioid microphoneand an industry-standard for lecterns, conference tables, and news desks – wherever improved gain-before-feedback and articulation are important.

The PZM®-30D is a Pressure Zone Microphones® designed for professional recording, sound reinforcement and broadcasting. Fitting many applications, from miking full orchestras or individual musical instruments to security or teleconferencing, film and video productions.

Unlike the PZM®, the Phase Coherent Cardioid® uses a subminiature supercardioid mic capsule. Its directional polar pattern improves gain-before-feedback, reduces unwanted room noise and rejects sounds from the rear. The mic capsule ensures phase coherency up to the highest frequencies, resulting in a wide, smooth frequency response. Capable of withstanding up to 120 dB SPL with-out distorting, the PCC®-160 will never overload in practical use. A “bass tilt” switch allows the user to tailor the low-end response for particular applications. Thanks to its low profile and black finish, the microphone becomes almost invisible in use.

The PZM®-30D has a switchable dual frequency response: rising or flat. The “rising” position adds brilliance. This makes it useful wherever a crisp attack is desired, such as on percussion, drums, or piano.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Industry standard stage-floor microphone

Section:

Broadcast and recording Houses of worship Theater On stage miking

Section:

02

The capsule is mounted in the “Pressure Zone” just above the boundary, a region where sound coming directly from the sound source combines in phase with sound reflected off the boundary. The benefits are excellent clarity and “reach” a hemispherical polar pattern, uncolored off-axis response, and a wide smooth frequency response free of phase interference. The PZM®-30D is low profile, sturdy and reliable.

Item number: PCC160

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6000H50110

Polar pattern: supercardioid Frequency range: 50 to 18,000 Hz Sensitivity: 22 mV/Pa (-30 dBV) Max. SPL for 1% THD: 120 dB Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): 22 dB-A Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): 72 dB (A-weighted) Impedance: 150 ohms Recommended load impedance: 2,000 ohms Connector: Switchcraft TA3F Cable: 4.6 m (15 ft.) Finish: black Dimensions: 17 x 8 x 2 cm (6.7 x 3.2 x 0.8 in.) Net/shipping weight: 170 g (6 oz.), ROHS: Ok

Item number: PZM30D

• • • • • • • • • • • •

6000H50020

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: ROHS:

hemispherical 20 to 20,000 Hz 7 mV/Pa (-43 dBV) 150 dB 74 dB 250 ohms 3-pin XLR use 2-conductor shielded microphone cable black 15.2 x 12.7 x 1.9 cm (6 x 5 x 0.75 in.) 184 g (6.5 oz.) Ok

Installed Microphones

Page 84

Page 85


Boundary Layer Microphones Broadcast and recording Houses of worship Theater On stage miking • Hemispherical polar pattern • Pressure Zone Microphone® design prevents coloration from surface sound reflections • Switchable dual-frequency response offers a choice of flat response or rising high-frequency response

Section:

02

• Supercardioid polar pattern offers high-gain-before-feedback • Phase coherent cardioid® design prevents coloration from surface sound reflections • Wide and smooth frequency response • Three-position bass-tilt switch • Small and inconspicuous

Houses of worship Conference and lectern Distance learning Courtrooms • Cardioid polar pattern • PCC technologie (phase coherent cardioid) • Wide and smooth frequency responce • Exceptional performance and small size • Three-position bass-tilt switch

PZM®-6D

PCC ®-170

The PZM®-6D is a Pressure Zone Microphone® designed for professional recording, sound reinforcement and broadcasting. A smaller integral boundary makes the PZM®-6D even more inconspicuous than the PZM®-30D. It has many applications, from miking full orchestras or individual musical instruments to security or teleconferencing, as well as on television, film and video productions.

The Crown PCC®-170 is a surface-mounted supercardioid® microphone of professional quality. This handsomely styled unit is appropriate for use on the most elegant boardroom table or lectern. Other applications include churches, courtrooms and council chambers. Because of its highly directional pickup pattern, the PCC®-170 minimizes background noise and feedback. The microphone reproduces the voice with a clean, clear and natural sound.

The PZM®-6D has a switchable dual frequency response: rising or flat. The “rising” position adds brilliance. This makes it useful wherever a crisp attack is desired, such as on percussion, drums, or piano. The user can get a bright sound without boosting high frequencies on the recording console; the result is lower noise. The “flat” position provides a smooth, flat, high-frequency response for natural sound reproduction.

The mic capsule is small enough to ensure phase coherency up to the highest frequencies in the audible spectrum, resulting in a wide, smooth frequency response free of phase interference. Clarity and reach are also enhanced. Self-noise is low and sensitivity is very high and an RFI suppression is included. A bass-tilt switch allows the user to tailor the low-end response for particular applications. Item number: PCC170

6000H50100

PCC ®-130 PCC ®-130SW The Crown PCC®-130 and the PCC®-130SW are surface-mounted small cardioid microphones of professional quality. With its small size, the PCC®-130 is less conspicuous on a conference table than comparable mics. Because of its highly directional pickup pattern, the PCC®-130 minimizes background noise and feedback.

• • • • • • • •

Section:

02

The PCC®-130SW has a silent-operating membrane switch which is normally off. The switch can be configured for touch on/off, momentary on or momentary off. A high-intensity LED lights when the unit is on. The PCC®-130SW is intended for multiple-microphone use on a conference table where each person wants control of his or her microphone. The microphone attenuates 70 dB when the switch is in the off position. Item numbers: PCC130 PCC130SW PCC®-130

Item number: PZM6D

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Smaller, lighter, and has a permanently attached cable

Houses of worship Conference and lectern Distance learning Security

6000H50130 6000H50120 PCC®-130SW

6000H50010

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Connector: Cable:

• Finish: • Dimensions: • Net/shipping weight:

hemispherical 20 to 20,000 Hz 7 mV/Pa (-43 dBV) 150 dB 74 dB 240 ohms XLRM 4.58 m (15 ft.) black cable with XLRM connector Model PZM-6D: 1.83 m (6 ft.) cable black 7.62 x 6.35 x 0.95 cm (3 x 2.5 x 0.375 in.) 184 g (6.5 oz.)

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: supercardioid Frequency range: 50 to 20,000 Hz Sensitivity: 22 mV/Pa (-30 dBV) Max. SPL for 1% THD: 120 dB Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): 22 dB-A Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): 72 dB (A-weighted) Impedance: 150 ohms Powering (IEC 61938): 12 to 48 V phantom power to DIN/IEC Connector: Switchcraft TB3M Finish: black Dimensions: 8.6 x 12.3 x 2.3 cm (3.4 x 4.84 x 0.9 in.) Net/shipping weight: 170 g (6 oz.)

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Polar pattern: PCC-130: cardioid and PCC-130 SW: supercardioid Frequency range: 50 to 20,000 Hz Sensitivity: 22 mV/Pa (-30 dBV) Max. SPL for 1% THD: 120 dB Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): 22 dB-A Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): 72 dB (A-weighted) Impedance: 150 ohms Powering (IEC 61938): 12 to 48 V phantom power to DIN/IEC Connector: Switchcraft TB3M Finish: satin black Dimensions: 6.4 x 8.9 x 2.5 cm (2.5 x 3.49 x 0.988 in.) Net/shipping weight: 269 g (9.5 oz.) incl. cable

Installed Microphones

Page 86

Page 87


Boundary Layer Microphones Broadcast and recording Conference and lectern Home video production

Houses of worship Theater Conference Home video production

• Hemispherical polar patter • Clear, bright sound quality with excellent bass • Low-impedance XLR-type output • Boundary “paddle” can be detached • Works on AAA battery or phantom power

• PZM® design makes the sound clearer and more natural

Houses of worship Conference and lectern Security Fixed installed systems • Supercardioid polar pattern for extended reach and clarity

• Ideal for recording conferences, interviews, home videos • AAA battery powered • Medium-impedance unbalanced output

• PCC® technology (phase coherent cardioid) for clear and natural sound

• Supercardioid polar pattern and PCC® technology (phase coherent cardioid) for clear, natural sound and high gain before feedback

• Miniature design, virtually disappears when installed

• Miniature design, virtually disappears when installed

• LED indicator illuminates when mic is active

• Removable grille assembly can be painted

• Mounts easily into tabletops, walls and ceilings

02

• LED indicator illuminates when mic is active • Low-Z balanced output prevents hum and high-frequency loss

PZM®-185

Sound Grabber II

MB 3

MB 4

The PZM®-185 Pressure Zone Microphone® is a budget microphone designed for general-purpose use. Ideal for applications such as conferences, group discussions, interviews, broadcast, homevideo production, lectures, and recordings. The mic can be placed on a large surface such as a table, floor, wall, or lectern.

The Crown® Sound Grabber II utilizes the Pressure Zone Microphone® technology in which sound waves reinforce themselves in the area nearest a flat surface.

Featuring an incredibly small size, the MB Series of miniboundary ™, supercardioid microphones MB-3 offer a wide range of features and flexibility. The miniature, lowprofile designs virtually disappear when installed, yet provide the same great sound as our highly-acclaimed PCC® microphone series. Best of all, the MB Series provides substantial savings compared to traditional microphones.

Featuring an incredibly small size, the MB Series of mini-boundary ™, supercardioid microphones offer a wide range of features and flexibility. The miniature, low-profile designs virtually disappear when installed, yet provide the same great sound as our highly-acclaimed PCC® microphone series. MB-4 is a miniature boundary microphone for multi-miking applications such as teleconferencing, distance learning, boardrooms, courtrooms, and TV or theatrical applications. Doublesided sticky tape is provided for attaching the unit under shelves, on walls, etc. Thanks to its supercardioid pickup pattern, the MB-4 greatly reduces ambient noise and pickup of room reverberation. The result is a clearer sound. The MB-4 has an attached cable leading to an XLR-type output connector with built-in mic electronics. It is powered by 12-48 V phantom power, and is low-impedance balanced.

The PZM®-185 is powered either by an internal AAA 1.5 V battery or 12-48 V phantom power. The boundary “paddle” can be detached so the mic will fit in your pocket. It is nearly invisible on camera. The PZM®-185 minimizes pickup of vibration and handling noise. It provides a wide, smooth frequency response from 50 Hz to 16 kHz. The mic’s hemispherical polar pattern allows clear pickup of everyone surrounding the microphone. The PZM®-185 is protected against static and RFI. The output is balanced, low impedance, which allows long cable runs without hum pickup or high-frequency loss. Item number: PZM185

6000H50030

Because of this new technology, Sound Grabber II offers you the opportunity for vast improvement in the quality of your recordings. The Sound Grabber II will pick up sounds at distances you never thought possible and it will pick them up with a clarity that other microphones, because of the limitations of their construction, simply cannot match. The Sound Grabber II does not need to follow the action, since it has a wide-angle pickup pattern. So long as the mic “sees” the sound, in whatever direction or angle, it will pick it up clearly; it does not need to be between you and the other person. Speakers or vocalists can move freely around the Sound Grabber II without their tone quality changing.

The MB-3 is a miniature boundary microphone for multi-miking applications such as teleconferencing, distance learning, boardrooms, courtrooms, and security applications. This low-profile, circular mic permanently installs into a hole drilled in a table, lectern, or ceiling. Thanks to its supercardioid pickup pattern, the MB-3 greatly reduces ambient noise and pickup of room reverberation. The result is a clearer, more intelligible sound. On the bottom of the mic is a tubular power module with a 3-pin XLR-type output connector. It is powered by 12-48 V phantom power, and has a low-impedance balanced mic-level output.

Polar pattern: hemispherical Frequency range: 50 to 16,000 Hz Sensitivity: 0.8 mV/Pa (-62 dBV) Max. SPL for 1% THD: 120 dB Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): 21 dB-A Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): 73 dB (A-weighted) Impedance: 150 ohms Connector: 3-pin XLR Cable: 2.4 m (8 ft.) Finish: satin black Dimensions: 8.7 x 15 x 1.86 cm (3.409 x 5.9 x 0.732 in.) Net/shipping weight: 115 g (4 oz.)

Section:

02

Item number: SOUNDGRABBER2 6000H50000 Item number: MB3

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• 1/8” (3.5 mm) phone connector

Section:

Conference and lectern Security Distance learning

• • • • • • •

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Cable:

• Finish: • Dimensions: • Net/shipping weight:

hemispherical 50 to 16,000 Hz 20 mV/Pa (-54 dBV) 120 dB 73 dB (A-weighted) 1.600 ohms 10 ft. with mini phone plug, 1/4 phone plug and micro phone plug adapters satin black 8.7 x 15 x 1.86 cm (3.409 x 5.9 x 0.732 in.) 115 g (4 oz.)

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

6000H50150

Polar pattern: supercardioid Frequency range: 50 to 15,000 Hz Sensitivity: 22 mV/Pa (-33 dBV) Max. SPL for 1% THD: 120 dB Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): 22 dB-A Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): 72 dB (A-weighted) Impedance: 150 ohms Powering (IEC 61938): 12 to 48 V phantom power to DIN/IEC Connector: 3-pin XLR Finish: satin black Dimensions: 2.74 dia. x 8.4 cm (ø 0.974 x 3.324 in.) Net/shipping weight: 78 g (2.7 oz.) ROHS: Ok

Item number: MB4

• • • • • • • • • • • •

6000H50140

Polar pattern: supercardioid Frequency range: 50 to 15,000 Hz Sensitivity: 22 mV/Pa (-33 dBV) Max. SPL for 1% THD: 120 dB Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): 22 dB-A Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): 72 dB (A-weighted) Impedance: 150 ohms Powering (IEC 61938): 12 to 48 V phantom power to DIN/IEC Connector: 3-pin XLR Finish: satin black Dimensions: 3.8 x 1.5 cm (1.5 x 0.5 in.) Net/shipping weight: Microphone: 19 g (0.7 oz.) Power Module: 78 g (2.8 oz.)

Installed Microphones

Page 88

Page 89


Boundary Layer Microphones Recording Surveillance Ticket window Bank counter Restaurant

12

3

25

• Hemispherical polar pattern; clear, intelligible pickup of speech

• Wide frequency range • High sensitivity • Ideal for inconspicuous installation in a room

• Hemispherical polar pattern

• Excellent intelligibility

• Excellent intelligibity

• Low profile, cylindrical design, perfect for wall or tabletop installations

• Low frequency roll off to reduce HVAC rumble

• Inconspicuous

• Choice of mic level output (PZM®-10) or line-level output (PZM®-10LL)

• Mounts a standard wall plate

C 562 CM The C 562 CM flush-mount boundary microphone uses the same transducer as the C 542 BL. The C 562 CM has been designed specifically for permanent, “invisible” mounting in ceilings, walls, tables, stage props, etc. Owing to its high sensitivity, the C 562 CM is a perfect tool for surveillance or live recording since a single microphone can cover an entire room. The supplied XLR phantom power adapter connects to the microphone cable through a miniature connector so installation holes can be smaller than the diameter of the phantom power adapter. 2262X00030

• Screw terminal, no need for connectors

• Screw terminal, no need for connectors

PZM®-10 PZM®-10LL The PZM®-10 and PZM®-10LL, part of the Pressure Zone Microphone® line, are designed for security, surveillance, and conference-table use. Since they do not look like microphones, they are inconspicuous. The mics easily mount into tables, walls or ceilings. Like other Pressure Zone Microphones, the PZM-10 and PZM®-10LL use a miniature mic capsule mounted close to a sound-reflecting plate or boundary, in the pressure zone. In this zone, direct sound from the sound source combines in phase at all frequencies with reflected sound off the boundary. The benefits are many: 6 dB more sensitivity, 6 dB less noise, a wide smooth frequency response free of phase interference, excellent clarity and “reach”, and consistent pickup anywhere around the mic. The PZM®-10 and PZM®-10LL will pick up conversations or other desired sounds with extra clarity and definition. PZM®-10

Item numbers: PZM10 PZM10LL

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Cable: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

• Line-level output

• PZM®-10LL powered by 12-24 V/DC, unterminated wires

USA: CourtSmart

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• Weather-resistant

• Inconspicuous, resembles a light switch

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Some References:

Item number: C 562 CM

Outdoor intercoms Toll booths Surveillance and security Home automation

• Hemispherical polar pattern

• PZM®-10 powered by 12-48 V phantom power, inline XLR connector

• Suited for surveillance or recording

02

Ticket window Conferencing Security Surveillance

20

• Small, low-profile boundary layer microphone

Section:

Ticket window Conference Security Surveillance

omnidirectional (hemispherical) 20 to 20,000 Hz 25 mV/Pa (-32 dBV) 130 dB 16 dB-A 78 dB ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 Ohm 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2 mA 3-pin XLR 0.5 m (20 in.) matte nickel plated 20 dia. x 28 mm (0.8 dia. x 1.1 in.) 30/195 g (1.1/76.9 oz.) installation hardware, phantom power adapter B 18

• • • • • • • • •

6000H50070 6000H50060

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938):

• Connector: • • • •

PZM®-10LL

Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: ROHS:

hemispherical 80 to 20,000 Hz / 100 to 20,000 Hz 2.5 mV/Pa (-52 dBV) / 1.4 V/Pa (+3 dBV) 120 dB 26 dB-A 68 dB 240 ohms / 75 ohms ≥2,000 Ohm PZM 10: 12-48 V phantom power, inline XLR connector PZM 10 LL: powered by 12-24V DC, unterminated wires PZM 10: 3-pin XLR PZM 10 LL: stripped and tinned leads off-white (may be painted any color) 3.9 dia. x 7.2 cm (1.53 dia. x 2.829 in.) 74 g (22.6 oz.) / 93 g (3.3 oz.) Ok

PZM®-11

PZM®-11LLWR

The PZM®-11 present a low-cost solution for security and surveillance applications. Mounted on a standard wall plate the PZM®-11 doesn’t look like a microphone but rather an ordinary light switch. Like other Pressure Zone Microphones®, the PZM®-11 utilize the Pressure Recording Process™ in which a miniature condenser microphone capsule is mounted very close to a sound reflecting plate or boundary. The benefits are a wide, smooth frequency response free of phase interference, excellent clarity and “reach”, and consistent pickup anywhere around the microphone. Intelligibility is excellent, with low frequencies below the voice range rolled off to reduce the pickup of heating, ventilation or air-conditioning rumble (HVAC noise). The high-frequency response is boosted slightly to aid clarity and articulation. Electronics on the rear of the plate offer screw terminals, eliminating the need for connectors. The PZM®-11 has a mic-level output and is powered by 12-48 V phantom power.

The PZM®-11LLWR is a weather resistant Pressure Zone Microphone® based on the PZM®-11 with a balanced, line-level output. A plastic membrane inside the microphone protects the mic capsule from water damage. The microphone will work during and after rainfall. If water freezes on the membrane, the mic’s frequency response will change, but will return to normal when the ice melts and the membrane dries. Applications include fast-food restaurants, outdoor intercoms, toll booths, bridges, theme park security, home automation, and so on.

Item number: PZM11

Item number: PZM11LLWR

• • • • • • • • • • • •

6000H50050

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight:

hemispherical 80 to 20,000 Hz 5 mV/Pa (-46 dBV) 120 dB 26 dB-A 68 dB 225 ohms 12 to 48 V phantom power screw terminal off-white (may be painted any color) 11.506 x 7.05 x 2.946 cm (4.53 x 2.7 x 1.16 in.) 71 g (2.5 oz.)

Section:

02

The microphone can be plugged directly into a VCR line input – no costly mic preamp is needed. Output (via screw terminals) can be balanced or unbalanced. Because of its tailored response and PZM® construction, the PZM®-11LL WR will pick up conversations or other desired sounds with extra clarity.

• • • • • • • • • • • •

6000H50040

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight:

hemispherical 80 to 10,000 Hz 5 mV/Pa (-46 dBV) 100 dB 26 dB-A 68 dB 75 ohms 12-24 V AC or DC screw terminal silver (may be painted any color) 7.061 x 11.506 x 4.374 cm (2.78 x 4.53 x 1.722 in.) 71 g (2.5 oz.)

Installed Microphones

Page 90

Page 91


Shotgun Microphones Houses of worship Lectern Recording Theater, onstage miking TV, motion picture, video production

Houses of worship Lectern Recording Theater, onstage miking TV, motion picture, video production

• Compact, short shotgun microphone

• Short shotgun for use in noisy environments

• Integrated, switchable bass rolloff filter minimizes mechanical noise

• Mounts directly on SE 300 B powering unit or connects via 10 ft. (3 m) cable 21

• Quick-lock bayonet mount for easy connection to powering unit

• Suitable for camera-mounted use

262

247

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Ideal for theater, sound reinforcement, film, and TV applications

253 CK98

C 568 B

Section:

02

P 12-48 600 OHM MADE IN AUSTRIA

High directivity and wide frequency response in a relatively short shotgun make this microphone a perfect tool for theater, sound reinforcement, and film/TV applications. Due to its compact and lightweight design, the C 568 B is ideal for camera mount applications. Below 500 Hz it functions as a hypercardioid microphone; above 500 Hz the acoustic interference tube introduces increasing directivity. A switchable 12 dB/octave 120 Hz bass rolloff filter effectively suppresses impact and wind noise. The rugged, allmetal body contains the built-in preamp. Phantom powering (9–52 V) required; foam windscreen and stand adapter included.

Item number: C 568 B

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

The CK 98 combines high sensitivity and controlled directivity. It offers excellent reach, thanks to a very tight polar pattern and exceptionally low self noise. Small size and low weight make the CK 98 ideal for boom applications. The smooth, wideband frequency response makes it a superb choice for edge-of-stage and ceiling placement in theaters.Includes foam windscreen.

hypercardioid/directional 20 to 20,000 Hz 11 mV/Pa (-39 dBV) 128 dB 18 dB-A 76 dB 12 dB/octave at 120 Hz ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2 mA 3-pin XLR dark grey 21 dia. x 253 mm (0.8 dia. x 10 in.) 160/715 g (5.6 oz./1.6 lbs.) SA 60, W 68 B 18, H 30, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

Section:

02

The CK 98 is an AKG Blue Line Series capsule. For details, see pages 36/37.

Item numbers: CK 98 SE 300 B

2168Z00040

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: SPL capability: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Bass rolloff filter: Impedance: Recommended load impedance: Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

CK 98

19

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2439Z00040 243900080

Polar pattern: Frequency range: Sensitivity: Max. SPL for 1% THD: Equivalent noise level (IEC 60268-4): Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): Powering (IEC 61938): Current consumption: Connector: Finish: Dimensions: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessories:

hypercardioid/directional 20 to 20,000 Hz 25 mV/Pa (-32 dBV) 124/134 dB 17 dB-A 77 dB through SE 300 B through SE 300 B bayonet mount dark grey 19 dia. x 247/262 mm (0.7 dia. x 9.7/10.3 in.) 80/500 g (2.8 oz./1.1 lb.) W 98 H 30

Installed Microphones

Page 92

Page 93


Microphone Mixer Conference and lectern Houses of worship Boardrooms Courtrooms Clubs & pubs •

No rack or central unit needed

Fits in standard installation frames

Flush mount microphone mixing system

Easy to install due to CAT 5 connectivity

Trailblazing range of little problem solvers

C-Mic Input Module with Phantom Power: Input module for condenser microphones. The module provides a 24 V phantom power supply, input level control as well as a switch to define the designated panorama position (left, middle, right).

AUX Input Module: Input module for line level signals from CD, DVD, PC or MP 3 players. The module provides two cinch and one jack connector inputs and an input level control.

Recording Output Module: The recording output module works as a driver for recording devices like CD recorders, tape decks, PCs, MP3 recorders, etc. On the front panel the module provides 2 RCA connectors, a 3.5 mm jack connector output and an output volume control.

Headphone Output Module: The headphone output monitoring module provides an output volume control, a 2 x 4 step bargraph display and a 3.5 mm jack connector output.

Control and SUM Output Module: Stereo sum amplifier module with tone control for treble and bass as well as an output level control. The internal plug terminal provides the sum output and a separate recording output (with fixed output level). The plug terminal also provides terminals for the signal bus including strain relief and an insert point for a remote control (to be introduced later).

Speaker Out

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

AMM 10 Supermodular Mixer System

Mic/Line Input Module: Input module for dynamic microphones and symmetrical line level signals. The module provides an input level control as well as a switch to define the designated panorama position (left, middle, right).

3 x Mic Inputs

Section:

02

The AMM 10 is the perfect solution for small rooms: A distributed mixing system consisting of various input and output modules designed to fit standard installation frames. No need for a central unit or a rack for the sound equipment – the mixing modules are directly mounted into cable conduit, walls, ceilings, tables … Wherever you require a microphone input or an audio connector for your PC or CD player, the AMM 10 is the system of your choice. Each of the modules comes with a low noise, high efficient amplifier and a plug terminal connector. Connected via CAT 5 cables, the system is extremely flexible and easy to install.

AUX Input

Sum Amplifier

Stereo Line Out Module: Break-out-box for Supermodular mixer system. The module provides 2 XLR Connectors for the connection of two active speakers.

PC/MP3 Input Wireless Mic Input

• Input: Nominal input level: Input impedance: Phantom power: • Output: Nominal output level: Output impedance: THD: S/N ratio: Current consumption:

AMM 10 REC Output Module • System input: Nominal input level: Input impedance: THD: S/N ratio • Output: Nominal output level: Output impedance: Current consumption:

Page 94

AMM 10 Mic/Line Input Module 3-pin female XLR, balanced -60/0 dBu, switchable 5 kohms @ 1kHz systembus, balanced, stereo +6 dBu 6.6 kohms (Sum Output) < 0.08% @ 1 kHz/-40 dBu 80 dB (0 dBu), 60 dB (-60 dBu) 16 mA

stereo, unbalanced +6 dBu 11 kohms (Sum) < 0.08% @ 1 kHz > 80 dB unbalanced, stereo; 1 x 3,5mm Jack; 2 x RCA -20….+6 dBu 50 ohms 12 mA

AMM 10 C-Mic Input Module 3-pin female XLR, balanced -60/-40 dBu, switchable 2 kohms @ 1kHz +24 V DC systembus, balanced, stereo +6 dBu 6.6 kohms (Sum Output) < 0.08% @ 1 kHz/-40 dBu 80 dB (-40 dBu), 60 dB (-60 dBu) 20 mA

AMM 10 Headphone-Output Module • Output: Nominal output level: Output impedance: THD: S/N ratio: Audio bandwidth : Treble control: • Bargraph Display: Display range: Display steps: Current consumption:

AMM 10 AUX Input Module 2 x RCA, unbalanced -20 … +6 dBu, switchable 20 kohms @ 1kHz

Mic/Line Input Module:

Mic Input Module:

AUX Input Module:

Item number: AMM 10 AUX/Line IN AMM 10 C-Mic IN AMM 10 D-Mic IN AMM 10 Input Transformer AMM 10 Monitoring OUT AMM 10 Output Transformer

SUM Output Module:

6000H21020 6000H21030 6000H21010 6000H21100 6000H21060 6000H21110

AMM 10 PSU AMM 10 Recording OUT AMM 10 Starter Pack AMM 10 Sum Amplifier AMM 10 USB IN AMM 10 XLR OUT

REC Output Module:

Section:

02

6000H21090 6000H21070 6000H21000 6000H21050 6000H21040 6000H21080

Headphone Output Module:

systembus, balanced, stereo +6 dBu 6.6 kohms (Sum Output) < 0.08% @ 1 kHz > 80 dB 12 mA

unbalanced, 3.5mm Stereo jack connector 0 dBu > 32 ohms < 0.1% @ 1 kHz > 80 dB 40Hz … 20 kHz 10 kHz, +/- 12 dB unbalanced, stereo -20….+3 dB -20, -10, 0, +3 dB 30 mA

AMM 10 Sum-Output Module • System input: Nominal input level: Input impedance: • System Output: Nominal output level: Output impedance: THD: S/N ratio: Bass control: Treble control:

stereo, balanced +6 dB 0 ohm (Sum) unbalanced, stereo +6 dBu 100 ohms < 0.08% @ 1 kHz/-40 dBu > 80 dB 100 Hz, +/-12 dB 10 kHz, +/- 12 dB

System (for all modules) • Signalbus connector type: Max cable cross-sect: Max cable cross-sect: • Operating voltage: Current consumption: Operating temperature range: • Dimensions (WxHxD): • Net weight:

2x9 pin strip terminal 0.5 mm2 / AWG 20 0.12 mm2 / AWG 26 +/-12 V (+/-10%) 20 mA 0°C … 55°C 50x50x55 mm (installation depth) 70 g

Installed Microphones

Page 95


Microphone Mixer Conference and lectern Houses of worship Boardrooms Courtrooms Broadcasting Studio

Conference and lectern Houses of worship Boardrooms Courtrooms Broadcasting Studio

• 4 microphone and 2 stereo AUX inputs

• 4 microphone and 2 stereo AUX inputs

• 1 recording output and 1 master output

• 1 stereo recording output and 1 stereo master output

• Digital signal processing including dbx® compressor/limiter

• Digital signal processing including dbx® compressor/limiter

• Intelligent mixing algorithm with noise sensitive threshold

• Intelligent mixing algorithm with noise sensitive threshold • 19” all-metal case with integrated power supply

DMM 4/2/2

Section:

02

DMM 4/2/4

The DMM 4/2/2 is a processor controlled digital automatic mixer with four balanced microphone inputs, two stereo AUX inputs and one master output. A unique and highly effective, intelligent mixing algorithm automatically allocates gain among the system microphones (NOM attenuation). A special noise detection function and the “Noise Sensitive Threshold” algorithm (NST) prevent accidental activation of input channels. The mixing algorithm also includes a “Last Mic On” function and a “Best Mic On” mode. Each input channel features low cut as well as LF and HF shelving filters. A dbx® compressor/limiter is included in the algorithm to compensate for level differences and provide a significant improvement in sound quality. Each channel offers switchable gain (Mic/Line, Mic-Lo/Mic-Hi), switchable phantom power, and an incremental level control with LED level and peak hold display. The automixing and ducking functions can be enabled and disabled for each microphone and AUX channel separately. An expansion connector enables multiple DMM 4/2/2 mixers to be daisy-chained for larger systems. A rear-panel control I/O port provides logic in and outputs for controlling external devices. The DMM 4/2/2 is housed a rugged 19” case with an integrated power supply. Item numbers: DMM 4/2/2

Page 96

The DMM 4/2/4 is a digital automatic stereo mixer with four balanced microphone inputs, two stereo AUX inputs and one stereo recording output and one stero master output. A unique and highly effective, intelligent mixing algorithm automatically allocates gain among the system microphones (NOM attenuation). A special noise detection function and the “Noise Sensitive Threshold” algorithm (NST) prevent accidental activation of input channels.

3-pin female XLR connector balanced -6 dB +15 dB 20 Hz – 16k Hz >90 dB >8 kohms 48 VDC 2x RCA jacks unbalanced ±0 dB +15 dB 20 Hz – 22 kHz >90 dB >15 kohms

OUTPUTS: LINE MONO: • Type: • Nominal level: • Max. level: • Frequency response:

1x 3-pin female XLR connector balanced ±0 dB +10 dB 20 Hz – 20 kHz

• Dynamic range: • Impedance:

>90 dB <100 ohms

RECORDING L/R: • Type: • Nominal level: • Max. level: • Frequency response: • Dynamic range: • Impedance:

2x RCA balanced ±0 dB +10 dB 20 Hz – 20 kHz >90 dB <100 ohms

CONTROL • Analog:

General • Sampling rate: • Format: • Operating temperature: • Max. humidity during operation: • Power supply: • Max. power requirement: • Size: • Color: • Weight:

I/Os on 26-pin. Sub-D connector for remote control via logic contacts and VCAs.

48 kHz 24 Bit +5 °C to +45 °C 83% 100 – 240 VAC/50-60 Hz 35 VA 483 x 44 x 203 mm (19.0 x 1.7 x 8.0 in.) black (RAL 9005) 3.5 kg (7.8 lbs.)

Section:

02

The mixing algorithm also includes a “Last Mic On” function and a “Best Mic On” mode. Each input channel features low cut as well as LF and HF shelving filters. A dbx® compressor/limiter is included in the algorithm to provide a significant improvement in sound quality. Each channel offers switchable gain (Mic/Line, Mic-Lo/Mic-Hi), switchable phantom power, and an incremental level control with LED level and peak hold display. The automixing and ducking functions can be enabled and disabled for each channel separately. An expansion connector enables multiple DMM 4/2/4 mixers to be daisy-chained for larger systems. A rear-panel control I/O port provides logic in and outputs for controlling external devices. Also available on the rear side is a RS 232 interface for PC connectivity. The DMM 4/2/4 is housed a rugged 19” case with an integrated power supply.

Item numbers: DMM 4/2/4

6000H18990

INPUTS: MIC/LINE 1-4: • Type: • Nominal level: • Max. level: • Frequency response: • Dynamic range: • Impedance: • Phantom power: AUX 1-2: • Type: • Nominal level: • Max. level: • Frequency response: • Dynamic range: • Impedance:

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• 19” all-metal case with integrated power supply

6000H19000

INPUTS: MIC/LINE 1-4: • Type: • Nominal level: • Max. level: • Frequency response: • Dynamic range: • Impedance: • Phantom power: AUX 1-2: • Type: • Nominal level: • Max. level: • Frequency response: • Dynamic range: • Impedance:

3-pin female XLR connector balanced -6 dB +15 dB 20 Hz – 16k Hz >90 dB >8 kohms 48 VDC 2x RCA jacks unbalanced ±0 dB +15 dB 20 Hz – 22 kHz >90 dB >15 kohms

OUTPUTS: LINE Stereo: • Type: • Nominal level: • Max. level: • Frequency response: • Dynamic range: • Impedance:

1x 3-pin female XLR connector balanced ±0 dB +10 dB 20 Hz – 20 kHz >90 dB <100 ohms

RECORDING L/R: • Type: • Nominal level: • Max. level: • Frequency response: • Dynamic range: • Impedance:

2x RCA balanced ±0 dB +10 dB 20 Hz – 20 kHz >90 dB <100 ohms

CONTROL • Analog: • PC Connectivity:

I/Os on 26-pin. Sub-D connector for remote control via logic contacts and VCAs. RS 232

General • Sampling rate: • Format: • Operating temperature: • Max. humidity during operation: • Power supply: • Max. power requirement: • Size: • Color: • Weight:

48 kHz 24 Bit +5 °C to +45 °C 83% 100 – 240 VAC/50-60 Hz 35 VA 483 x 44 x 203 mm (19.0 x 1.7 x 8.0 in.) black (RAL 9005) 3.5 kg (7.8 lbs.)

Installed Microphones

Page 97


CS 5 Conference System

CS 5 Conference System

Flexibility, reliability, security. A conference system, and particularly its powering equipment, should be quick and easy to install. The CS 5 therefore uses a CAT 5 closed-circuit bus and distributed power supplies, saving cables, time, and design expense. The CS 5 uses CAT 5/RJ 45 cables only, so if you need to improvise, you can easily get the cables you need.

Communication is a matter of confidence.

London

CAT 5 bus Power wiring

Intelligibility – in any language.

Having specialized in audio for more than sixty years, AKG has accumulated a vast body of expert know-how, so you can be confident that the CS 5 will provide a professional, turnkey solution with the following benefits:

Depending on the number of working languages for your conference, you will need one or more interpretation booths with two CS 5 IU interpreter stations each. The CS 5 IU meets AIIC standards and provides all the functions your interpreters need in order to do a perfect job.

• dedicated systems for every application custom designed,

As an additional benefit, the wiring system allows you to connect the IUs to the CAT 5 bus at any point in the line, e.g., the point closest to the interpretation booth(s), to keep cables short.

• maximum reliability in terms of day-to-day operation and immunity to listening-in (for debates of sensitive issues), • compatibility with all AKG CS 5 Series modules and other equipment from AKG or other manufacturers for virtually unlimited expandability, • shielded CAT 5/RJ 45 standard wiring,

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Confidence is the basis of success in everyday life. When it comes to conferencing, confidence in the failsafe quality of the audio system is equally important – after all, the audio system must reliably handle incredible amounts of information for delegates, observers, and interpreters every second. Just as any conference begins with a spoken word, designing a conference system at AKG begins with careful research and consulting to find out exactly what your requirements are.

CAT 5 Bus Power wiring USB wiring

• voting function including documentation of results, • up to 63 interpretation channels using AKG microphone modules and DSP for excellent intelligibility.

Section:

02

Using digital technology and user friendly interfaces, the AKG CS 5 is an asset in any conference hall, for the most complex tasks.

Belgrade

With only a few but versatile components, the CS 5 ensures maximum flexibility at an outstanding price/performance ratio. And what's best, you will get an easy-to-use complete system that includes both the basic equipment and all the extras. Another essential feature, particularly in terms of cost, is full expandability. No matter how many microphone stations the system includes, it only needs a single Base Unit to control the entire setup. So if you are required to expand the system at a later date, you can simply add the extra stations and continue using all the existing components. Although there is a trend toward using wireless equipment in conferencing, AKG decided to play it safe. WiFi conference systems are quick to set up but the risk of radio dropouts or even total failure caused by smart phones with WiFi interfaces is high. The CS 5 is a sure success for speakers, delegates, financial decision makers, and system designers on more than one level: integrated software control allows operators to focus on the essentials of their job.

Russia

For more information on the AKG CS 5 visit www.akg.com.

It all begins with a word. The AKG CS 5 Conference System gets it across with confidence.

Large conference, many observers.

Section:

02

Observers too may need interpretation. The CS 5 IRT 1 or IRT 2 infrared radiators transmit up to seven language channels to any number of CS 5 IRR 7 infrared receivers. The IRR 7 operates for up to twelve hours on a single battery charge and is small enough to fit into every vest pocket.

CAT 5 bus Power wiring USB wiring XLR wiring Coaxial wiring

From zero to 500 in 100 minutes. There is always room for expansion. Whenever the need arises, you can add all AKG CS 5 components even to the largest existing system. The closed-loop bus saves lots of cabling over more conventional star wiring systems, and the time saved in the process will apreciably relieve your budget. The theoretical limit is 5.000 microphone stations.

CAT 5 bus Power wiring USB wiring XLR wiring Coaxial wiring

Installed Microphones

Page 98

Page 99


CS 5 Conference System Conferencing Interpreting Voting Discussion

Conferencing Interpreting Voting Discussion • Digital controller for any size systems • Ease of use • Complete with all inputs and outputs needed for complex systems • Integrated infrared signal modulator • Independent or computer controlled operation

Rear panel

Conferencing Interpreting Voting Discussion

• Choice of microphones for every kind of system and room acoustics.

• Choice of microphones for every kind of system and room acoustics.

• Ease of use.

• Display and multifunction soft keys for ease of use.

• 3 + 1 language channels independently selectable for two users.

• Up to 63 language channels independently selectable for two users.

• Aye/no voting function.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• 1, 3, 5-way voting/polling function.

Section:

02

CS 5 BU (Base Unit) The CS 5 BU ensures easy, user-friendly control of everything from a small discussion setup to a large conference system. The Base Unit provides all the inputs and outputs needed to manage a complex audio system. It controls 64 audio channels that can be individually programmed and assigned to interpretation channels or simultaneous active microphones. To ensure maximum reliability, all microphone stations and interpreter stations are "daisy-chained" together using two CAT 5/RJ 45 connectors each in a closedcircuit digital audio bus. Thus, the entire system will continue operating perfectly, with no interruption, even if one of the bus cables breaks. To power the system, a CS 5 PS 12 power supply is connected to every twelfth microphone station, ensuring consistent power levels. Unlike competitive techniques, AKG's approach to keeping consistent power levels throughout the system is uncommonly cost efficient. Item number: CS 5 BU 19col

CS 5 DU The CS 5 BU also provides many extra inputs and outputs: • LINE IN (XLR) • LINE OUT (XLR) • EXT. MIC IN • TAPE IN/OUT • TELEPHONE IN/OUT

– – – – –

• LANG. EXT. • INFRARED OUT

– –

input for an external mixer. output to an external mixer. input for a lectern microphone, audience microphone, etc. in/output for an audio source or recording device. in/output for connecting a teleconference system (mix minus signal). microphone input for consecutive interpretation direct output to infrared radiators (no extra modules required) for transmitting up to seven language channels.

Every CS 5 Conference System comes complete with a FREE basic control software package so the entire system can be controlled from a computer via USB 2.0.

7650X01000

• DC 48 V/3A IN Input Voltage: Power Requirement: Input Level: • LINE IN Impedance: • TELEPHONE IN Input Level: Impedance: Input Level: • EFFECT IN Impedance: Input Level: • TAPE IN Impedance: • EXT. LANG IN Input Level: Impedance: • EXT. MIC IN Input Level: Impedance: E.I.N.:

CS 5 VU

The CS 5 DU is the basic microphone station for use in discussion systems. Like all other CS 5 microphone stations, the CS 5 DU provides maximum acoustic flexibility. Choose from two goosenecks of different lengths and five microphones with different polar patterns to meet every requirement of any type of conference system. In addition to the usual PTT key, this microphone station offers two advanced features previously found on more expensive conferencing equipment only: A bank of dip switches allows each headphone output to be assigned independently to either the floor channel or one of three interpreted language channels. The PTT key also provides a simple aye/no voting function. Item numbers: CS 5 DU CS 5 MF

Nominal 48 0 20 0 20 0 20 -10 20 0 20 -40 20 -124

Maximum 55 4 +6 +6 +6 -4 +6 -34 -

Unit VDC W dBu kohms dBu kohms dBu kohms dBu kohms dBu kohms dBu kohms dBu

• OUTPUT LEVELS

• • • •

• • • •

Line Out: Telephone Out: Effect Out: Tape Out: OUTPUT Load Impedance: OUTPUT S/N Ratio (Ext. Mic. Vol. Red.): OUTPUT Frequency Range (-3 dB): HEADPHONE OUTPUT Power: Load Impedance: Frequency Range (-3 dB): S/N Ratio: Height: Width: Depth inc. Connector Protrusion: Weight:

Minimum 88 20 8 45 70

Nominal 0 0 0 -10 1 85 90 32 1/1.75/44 19/482 4.25/108 3.2/1450

Maximum Unit +6 dBu +6 dBu +6 dBu -4 dBu kohms dB 20k Hz 200 mW ohms 22k Hz dB rack unit/in./mm in./mm in./mm lbs./g

02

The CS 5 VU provides two operating modes, reducing the number of different components needed for a conference system. In a small discussion system with CS 5 DU microphone stations, the chairperson would typically use a CS 5 VU. In President mode, it provides a priority function and allows the user to start votes or polls. The display will then indicate the time left for voting and the results. In a larger conference system, the CS 5 VU can be used both by delegates and by the president. In Delegate mode, it provides all voting and language selection functions independently for two delegates.

Item numbers: CS 5 VU CS 5 ID10

2770Z00210 2770Z00100 (optional)

• POWER SUPPLY Supply Voltage: Power Consumption: • MIC INPUT Frequency Range (-3 dB): • LOUDSPEAKER OUTPUT Power: Frequency Range (-3 dB): Signal/Noise Ratio: • HEADPHONE OUTPUT Power: Load Impedance: Frequency Range (-3 dB): • Width: • Depth: • Height: • Weight:

Section:

A bank of dip switches allows the CS 5 VU to be set to President mode with priority and 1, 3, or 5-way voting/polling functions. In computer-controlled conference systems, chip-card identification is available as an option.

(exc. of microphone module and gooseneck)

Minimum 44 3 -

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Dip-switch selectable president and delegate operating modes.

2770Z00220 2770Z00100 (optional 10-pc. set of ID cards)

(exc. of microphone module, gooseneck, and chip card)

Minimum 44 100

Nominal 48 1.5 -

Maximum 50 3 16k

Unit V W Hz

200 70

0.3 -

1.2 22k -

W Hz dB

8 45

30 32 10.1/257 5.8/147 1.9/73 2.0/900

60 22k

mW ohms Hz in./mm in./mm in./mm lbs./g

• POWER SUPPLY Supply Voltage: Power Consumption: • MIC INPUT Frequency Range (-3 dB): • LOUDSPEAKER OUTPUT Power: Frequency Range (-3 dB): Signal/Noise Ratio: • HEADPHONE OUTPUT Power: Load Impedance: Frequency Range (-3 dB): • Width: • Depth: • Height: • Weight:

Minimum 44 100

Nominal 48 1.5 -

Maximum 50 3 16k

Unit V W Hz

45 70

0.3 -

1.2 22k -

W Hz dB

8 45

30 32 10.1/257 5.8/147 1.9/73 2.0/900

60 22k

mW ohms Hz in./mm in./mm in./mm lbs./g

Installed Microphones

Page 100

Page 101


CS 5 Conference System Interpreting

Monitoring Interpreting

Monitoring Interpreting

• Choice of microphones for every kind of system and room acoustics. • Headset interface. • Meets international interpretation equipment standards. • Intuitive, easy-to-use controls.

Storage case Trickle charger Quick charger

• Digital data transmission using PPM modulation.

• Digital data transmission using PPM modulation.

• Fully automatic operation.

• Rugged construction.

• Unlimited daisy-chaining.

• Easy, intuitive handling.

• Designed for use in large rooms.

• Standard NiMH rechargeable battery.

• A sturdy flightcase/charger for up to 50 CS 5 IRR 7 infrared receivers. • Intelligent charging circuitry.

• 12 hours battery life. • Auto shutoff feature.

02

CS 5 IU

CS 5 IRT 1 CS 5 IRT 2

CS 5 IRR7

The CS 5 IU interpreter station has been designed to conform to the relevant international standards and provides all the features that make life in the booth easy, from intuitive input selection to relay and cough buttons.

The AKG CS 5 IRT 1 and CS 5 IRT 2 wireless infrared radiators transmit up to seven language channels to observers, or anyone wishing to listen to the debates without asking for the floor.

The microphone input accepts a gooseneck in one of two different lengths with one of five different microphones. Alternatively, a headset can be connected to keep the microphone distance constant even if the interpreter moves about.

The CS 5 BU provides the first seven of its 64 audio channels at two BNC outputs driving CS 5 IRT 1 or CS 5 IRT 2 infrared radiators. You can daisy-chain as many radiators as needed.

With its seven selectable channels and extremely rugged case, the CS 5 IRR 7 infrared receiver is every attendee's reliable companion during the entire conference. The supplied NiMH rechargeable battery operates for more than 12 hours on a single charge.

AKG offers a wide choice of professional headsets such as the HSC 271 and many more…

The CS 5 IRT 1 and IRT 2 differ only in size and radiated power, and can be used in any desired combination. Item numbers: CS 5 IRT1 CS 5 IRT2

Item numbers: CS 5 DU

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

• Quick charging and trickle charging modes.

CS 5 CU50

Section:

02

The CS 5 CU 50 flightcase/charger from AKG can charge up to 50 pcs. of CS 5 IRR 7 receivers. This "intelligent" flightcase monitors the charge status of each NiMH battery and keeps the charging current at maximum for as long as necessary before automatically switching to trickle charging. The LEDs on each receiver indicate its battery status at any time.

The receiver will drive any headphones with a mini jack plug, of which AKG offers a wide selection. AKG currently recommends the K 77, a particularly light, circumaural model. Its leatherette ear pads are easy to clean, fit comfortably without pinching or causing fatigue even during prolonged working sessions.

The CS 5 CU 50 is also an ideal storage case for up to 50 pcs. of CS 5 IRR 7 infrared receivers.

Item numbers: CS 5 IRR7

Item numbers: CS 5 CU50

7650H00500 7650H00510

7650X00200

7650H00600

7650H00650

(exc. of microphone module and gooseneck)

• POWER SUPPLY Supply Voltage: Power Consumption: • MIC INPUT Frequency Range (-3 dB): • LOUDSPEAKER OUTPUT Power: Frequency Range (-3 dB): • HEADPHONE OUTPUT Power: Load Impedance: Frequency Range (-3 dB): • Width: • Depth: • Height: • Weight:

Minimum 44 100

Nominal 48 1.5 -

Maximum 50 3 16k

Unit V W Hz

45

0.3 -

1.2 22k

W Hz

8 45

180 32 6.0/125 3.4/86 12.2/310 2.2/1000

250 22k

mW ohms Hz in./mm in./mm in./mm lbs./g

• • • • •

IN: OUT: POWER VOLTAGE: POWER REQUIREMENT: COVERAGE VOLUME:

CS 5 IRT 0-5 V/50 ohms 0-5 V/50 ohms 230 VAC, 50 Hz 20 W 10,574-15,860 cu.ft./ 300-450 m3

CS 5 IRT 2 0-5 V/50 ohms in./mm in./mm lbs./g 15,860-26,434 cu.ft./ 450-750 m3

• GENERAL

• • • •

Number of channels: Receiving Angle: Power Supply: HEADPHONE OUTPUT Power: Load Impedance: Frequency Range (-3 dB): Width: Depth: Height: Weight:

7 140 degrees 9 V NiMH rechargeable battery

• GENERAL

Number of Charging/Storage Slots: 50 Charging Modes: Automatic selection of quick or trickle charging modes Power Supply: 230 VAC, 15 VDC, 4.6 A QUICK CHARGING Current: 80 mA, continuous TRICKLE CHARGING Current: 4 mA (avg.), pulsed Width: 23 in./585 mm Depth: 19 in./483 mm Height: 7.5 in./190 mm Weight: 3.1 lbs./1.4 kg

50 mW 32-64 ohms 100 Hz to 5.1 kHz 5.3 in./136 mm 2.7 in./70 mm 1.1 in./28 mm 4.9 oz./140 g

• • • • • •

Installed Microphones

Page 102

Page 103


DMS 700 DSR 700 DHT 700 DPT 700 CU 700

106 107 107 107

WMS 4500 SR 4500 HT 4500 PT 4500 CU 4000/BP 4000 AKG System Architect plug-in, HUB 4000 Q AKG Wireless iPhone App, HiQnet速 System Components Multi-Channel Systems

108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115

WMS 450 116 116 117 117

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

SR 450 WMS 450 Sets HT 450 PT 450

WMS 470 SR 470 WMS 470 Sets HT 470 PT 470

Section:

02

118 118 119 119

Perception Wireless SR 45 Perception Wireless Sets HT 45, PT 45

120 120 121

IVM 4 Wireless In-Ear Monitoring SST 4 IVM 4 Sets SPR 4 IP 2 IVM 4 Accessories Multi-Channel Systems

122 122 123 123 124 125

Wireless

Section:

02

Systems

AKG wireless microphone systems include several ranges of products for projects of any scale, from small club gigs to sports events to stadium concerts. To complete the line, AKG has designed the IVM 4, a first-rate wireless in-ear monitor system which features

Please note that some of these products may not be available in your country. For details, please contact your local dealer or national AKG distributor.

Page 104

ultra-precise modulation, full flexibility for any live environment, and a choice of 1,200 frequencies.

Page 105


DMS 700 Conference/Installation Courtrooms Houses of worship Live sound Sound/AV companies Broadcast

DMS 700

Professional digital wireless system for broadcast, installed and live sound applications. Premium audio quality, ultra-wide tuning range and proprietary signal encryption for sensitive information. DMS 700 - Digital Microphone System AKG’s revolutionary DMS 700 is designed to deliver the very best audio quality, channel quantity and quick and easy operation. It is the first professional digital wireless system that meets worldwide transmission regulations. Up to 155 MHz frequency range of transmitters and receiver gives the user the necessary flexibility even in a crowded RF environment and the state of the art encryption offers the necessary security for sensitive audio transmissions. Ideal for broadcast applications, conferences, courtrooms, houses of worship, stage and music performances. The digital audio transmission finally eliminates distortions and significant noise levels at high audio frequencies known from analogue wireless systems. It also protects you from bad audio performance due to low RF link quality.

• Rugged all-metal construction

• Rugged & compact metal construction

• Up to 50 mW software selectable RF-output power

• Up to 50 mW software selectable RF-output power

• D 5 or C 5 microphone element

• 8 hours battery life and 7-segment battery status display

• 8 hours battery life and 7-segment battery status information

• Infrared data link

• Infrared data link • Status data transmission to receiver • Integrated charging contacts for 2 hour quick-charging of rechargeable batteries inside transmitter

• Status data transmission to receiver • Integrated charging contacts for 2 hour quick-charging of rechargeable batteries inside transmitter • Connector for external mute switch • Professional mini-XLR audio input

• Digital true-diversity receiver with 19" all-metal case • Signal encryption prevents unintended signal reception for sensitive applications





• Ultra-wide tuning range of 155 MHz





Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Quick setup mode, spectrum analyzer and rehearsal functions for easy setup 

• Infrared link of all frequency and setup data to the transmitter • Transmitter batteries status monitoring • Low-cut filter, 3-band Equalizer, dbx® Compressor and dbx® Limiter included

DSR 700

Section:

02

DMS 700

155 MHz ultra-wide frequency range The DSR 700 digital true-diversity receiver offers an ultra-wide bandwidth of up to 155 MHz for a robust and most flexible operation. Select the receiving frequency from pre-programmed frequency groups and sub-channels of your receiver or set it directly in 25 MHz-increments. Each pre-programmed frequency group provides up to 40 intermodulation-free channels. It has a better resistance to interference to provide more channel security and reliable transmission.

Environment scan – Spectrum analyzer The Environment Scan function converts the receiver into a spectrum analyzer. It searches the receiver’s entire frequency band for active radio frequencies and shows them in a frequency spectrum graph in the display. Digital Signal Processing The built-in digital signal processor offers a variable low-cut filter, a semi-parametric equalizer, a dbx® limiter and compressor.

Encryption & digital transmission Digital transmission makes it possible to broadcast sensitive audio information with absolute confidence. The audio encryption offers you the highest security for courtroom, boardroom and other confidential meeting applications. The transmitter uses a digital data stream to transmit battery and mute status to the receiver.

Quick & easy setup Great attention was paid to ensure an easy and user-friendly operation with a quick setup feature. The receiver will find interference-free channels and transmit the related setup data to the transmitter via infrared.

DHT 700

DPT 700

DHT 700 is a professional handheld transmitter with a robust metal body. AKG’s legendary D 5 and D 7 dynamic and C 5 condenser microphone capsules for lead and backing vocals deliver a powerful sound even on the noisiest stage. The D 5’s and D 7’s patented laminate VariomotionTM diaphragm and the supercardioid pickup pattern ensure maximum gain-before-feedback. The ultra-wide bandwidth of up to 155 MHz, up to 50 mW output power and the built-in helical antenna provides the most flexible operation. An infrared data link sends all setup data to the assigned transmitter. The bright graphic display clearly shows channel, frequency, output power and battery status.

DPT 700 is a highly-professional bodypack transmitter with a rugged metal chassis. The ultra-wide bandwidth of up to 155 MHz and up to 50 mW RF output power provides the most flexible operation. An infrared data link will send all setup data to the assigned transmitter. The bright graphic display shows channel, frequency, output power and battery status information. The DPT 700 has a jack for an optional external mute switch that mutes the audio signal even when the transmitter is not easy to reach. The 3-pin mini-XLR audio input is compatible with any lavalier or headworn microphone and provides a bias voltage of 5 V (the connector has to be modified for non-AKG microphones)

Item number: Item number depends on RF output and frequency range. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on which combinations are available in your country.

Item number: Item number depends on RF output and frequency range. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on which combinations are available in your country.

Section:

02

CU 700

Item number: Item number depends on the frequency band. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on which combinations are available in your country.

• • • •

2-hour quick charging. Two slots that fit both DHT 700 and DPT 700. LED status information Optional 19-inch rack mount unit

Item numbers: CU 700 3158H00010

DSR 700 – Digital True-Diversity Receiver • Carrier frequency range Band 1: 548 to 698 MHz, Band 2: 710 to 865 MHz ≤ 155 MHz (country dependent) • Switching Bandwidth • Sensitivity 10 dBµV / -97 dBm • Diversity system digital true diversity • Modulation / Bit rate Digital / < 200 kbps • Audio bandwidth 25 – 20,000 Hz (±3dB) ≤ 0.05% • T.H.D. • Signal/noise ratio XLR typ. 115 dB(A), AES3 typ. 120 dB(A) (A-weighted) • Audio outputs 2 x analog: 3-pin XLR sockets balanced / 18 dBu (max.) 2 x analog: TS 1/4" / 6.3 mm jack sockets unbalanced / 12 dBu (max.) 1 x digital: AES3 XLR socket (48 kHz) with wordclock IN (BNC)

Page 106

• Audio sampling • Low cut • Equalizer Compressor Limiter Transmitter battery meter PC interface Power supply Dimensions Standard 1U-rack: • Net weight • Standard accessories • • • • • •

32 Bit / 44.1 kHz 0 – 300 Hz, variable 3 Band (Parameters: low gain, mid gain, mid frequency, high gain) dbx (parameters: gain, threshold, ratio, attack, release) dbx (parameter: threshold) 7-segment transmitter battery information Ethernet via HUB 4000 Q, HiQnet System Architect Software 90 – 240 VAC, 50–60 Hz, 0.4 A 480 mm (18.9 in.) × 43 mm (1.7 in.) × 200 mm (7.87 in.) (w x l x d) 2.3 kg (81 oz.) 2 UHF antennas

DHT 700 – Digital Handheld Transmitter • Carrier frequency range: Band 1: 548 to 698 MHz, Band 2: 710 to 865 MHz ≤ 155 MHz (country-dependent) • Switching Bandwidth: • RF output power: 50 mW max. (ERP) • Modulation / Bit rate: Digital / < 200 kbps • Audio bandwidth: 25 – 20,000 Hz (±3dB) ≤ 0.05% • T.H.D.: • Signal/noise ratio > 120 dB(A) (A-weighted): • Microphone capsules: D 5 and D 7 – dynamic (super cardioid) C 5 – condenser (cardioid) • Max. SPL: D 5 ≤ 140 dB SPL, C 5 ≤ 140 dB SPL ≥ 8 hours LR6 AA alkaline batteries • Battery life: ≥ 8 hours AA rechargeable batteries (NiMH, > 2100 mAh) • Dimensions: 231 mm (9.1 in.) length, 52 mm (2 in.) dia. • Net weight: 336 g (11.8 oz.) • Standard accessories: 2 AA size LR6 batteries, stand adapter, windscreen

DPT 700 – Digital Bodypack Transmitter • Carrier frequency range: Band 1: 548 to 698 MHz, Band 2: 710 to 865 MHz ≤ 155 MHz (country-dependent) • Switching Bandwidth: • RF output power: 50 mW max. (ERP) • Modulation / Bit rate: Digital / < 200 kbps • Audio bandwidth: 25 – 20,000 Hz (±3dB) ≤ 0.05% • T.H.D.: • Signal/noise ratio > 120 dB(A) (A-weighted): • Audio input: TB3M / 3-pole mini-XLR socket (max. 2.5 Vrms) ≥ 8 hours LR6 AA alkaline batteries • Battery life: ≥ 8 hours AA rechargeable batteries (NiMH, > 2100 mAh) • Dimensions: 83.5 mm (3.3 in.) × 64.1 mm (2.5 in.) x 22 mm (0.86 in.) (w x h x d) • Net weight: 82 g (2.9 oz.) without batteries • Standard accessories: 2 AA-size LR6 batteries, belt clip • Optional accessory: RMS 4000 external mute switch

Wireless Systems

Page 107


WMS 4500

WMS 4500

Wireless system with network capability for installed and live sound. Maximum performance – ultra-compact dimensions. • Up to 50 mW RF output for maximum immunity to interference and dropouts

Theater, onstage miking Conference Houses of worship Live sound Sound/AV companies

• Operates for up to 15 hours on AA size dry batteries, 12 hours on optional BP 4000 battery pack with integrated Smart Battery Management System • 30 MHz wide UHF band, up to 1200 selectable frequencies • Choice of six interchangeable microphone elements • Backlit display and jog switch for ease of use

• True diversity receiver with all-metal case

• output for controlling external devices

• Charging contacts for easy battery charging on optional charger

• Available in eight UHF bands 30 MHz wide • Integrated data interface for controlling and monitoring from a PC via System ArchitectTM each, with up to 1,200 selectable frequencies • Using several frequency bands allows up to 70 channels to be operated simultaneously

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Transmitter battery status monitoring and tone code squelch

• Backlit, programmable color display and jog wheel with selectable warning signal for ease of use

SR 4500

Section:

02

WMS 4500

The SR 4500 true diversity receiver provides maximum ease of use and the widest range of functions in its class. Its accurate battery life readout is a previously unavailable, invaluable advantage in live sound applications. A complete line of accessories makes the SR 4500 your first choice for every application.

The transmitter uses a pilot tone to transmit battery status data to the receiver that displays the remaining battery capacity. The pilot tone decoder also allows the detection and display of other important information including the current position of the transmitter MUTE switch.

Auto Setup and Environment Scan functions automatically analyze the local RF environment, find usable frequency groups, and set frequencies. The optional HUB 4000 Q integrates the SR 4500 into a HiQnet® system. With the PC control software System ArchitectTM setting up and monitoring highly complex systems is incredibly easy. A logic output allows remote control of external devices, e.g., an automatic microphone mixer.

HT 4500

Naturally, the SR 4500 operates in an extremely wide UHF band (30 MHz) and each frequency preset provides up to 19 intermodulation-free channels*. The maximum number of selectable frequencies is 1200. Using several frequency bands allows you to operate as many as 70 channels simultaneously.

A large, backlit color display and a jog wheel make the SR 4500 easy to use and a programmable LED ring indicates important system parameters at a glance. Housed in a half-rack, all-metal case, the SR 4500 is the most compact, reliable, and powerful UHF receiver in its price bracket.

Item number: The item number depends on the frequency band. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on which combinations are available in your country.

HT 4500 is a professional handheld transmitter with a rugged body and connects to a choice of six different microphone elements to cover a wide range of applications. Microphone elements include dynamic and condenser cardioid and hypercardioid models. The 30 MHz wide UHF band provides up to 1200* selectable frequencies, and several preset frequency banks for various countries help you set up a multichannel system very quickly. A backlit display makes it very easy to tune the HT 4500 to the same frequency as the SR 4500 receiver. A pilot tone system continuously sends transmitter status data including MUTE switch position and remaining battery life to the receiver. Integrated charging contacts let you charge the optional BP 4000 battery pack without having to remove it from the transmitter. After only one hour, the battery pack will be fully charged and you can use the transmitter for 12 hours continuously.

* The actual number of channels that can be used simultaneously depends on local frequency plans.

Item number: The item number depends on RF output and frequency band. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on which combinations are available in your country.

SR 4500 • RF carrier frequency ranges: • • • • •

Modulation: Audio bandwidth: THD: Signal/noise ratio: Audio outputs:

• Dimensions: • Weight: • Standard accessories:

500-530, 570-600, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 760 to 790, 790 to 820, 835 to 863 MHz FM 35 to 20,000 Hz <0.3% typical >120 dB(A) typical balanced 3-pin XLR; unbalanced TS 1/4" jack; output level adjustable to -30, 0, +6 dB 200 x 44 x 190 mm (7.8 x 1.7 x 7.4 in.) 972 g (2.2 lbs.) Prack mounting kit, 2 UHF antennas

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Auto Setup, Environment Scan, and Rehearsal functions for quick and easy setup

HT 4500 • Carrier frequency ranges: • • • • • •

Modulation: Audio bandwidth: THD: S/N ratio: RF radiation: Battery life:

• Dimensions: • Net weight: • Standard accessories:

Microphones for HT 4500:

D 5 WL 1

D 7 WL 1

Section:

02 C 5 WL 1

C 535 WL 1

To give you maximum flexibility in tailoring a WMS 4500 system to your voice, application and budget, there is a large selection of microphone capsules available. For handheld use, choose between the smooth, powerful sound of the D 5 or D 7 dynamic capsules and the clear articulate sound of the C 535 EB or C 5 condenser capsules.

Item numbers: D 5 WL 1 C 5 WL 1 D 7 WL 1 C 535 WL 1

3082X00010 3082X00020 3082X00030 2782Z00150

500-530, 570-600, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 760 to 790, 790 to 820, 835 to 863 MHz FM 35 to 20,000 Hz <0.3% typical >120 dB(A) 50 mW max. (ERP) 2 AA size dry batteries: 15 hours typ.; BP 4000: 12 hours typ. length: 247 mm (9.7 in.); diameter: approx. 39 mm (1.5 in.) 125 g (11.3 oz.) 2 AA size dry batteries, SA 63 stand adapter

Wireless Systems

Page 108

Page 109


WMS 4500 • Bodypack transmitter with rugged aluminium body

• Charger with two charging compartments for two HT 4500, PT 4500 transmitters, or BP 4000 battery packs

• 30 MHz wide UHF band, up to 1200 selectable frequencies

• Smart current management system permanently monitors battery parameters to prevent overcharging and suggest recovery cycle

• Backlit display and jog switch for ease of use • Up to 50 mW RF output for maximum immunity to interference and dropouts

• Microprocessor controlled charge/discharge monitoring function

• Operates for up to 15 hours on AA size dry batteries, 12 hours on optional BP 4000 battery pack with integrated Smart Battery Management System

• Fully charged BP 4000 battery pack lasts for 12 hours and can be charged more than 1000 times to keep operating cost low

• Charging contacts for easy battery charging on optional charger

• One-hour quick charging of two transmitters



9

• Optional remote mute switch



Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

173 85



WMS 4500 92

PT 4500

Section:

02

Bodypack transmitter with rugged die-cast magnesium body. The 30 MHz wide UHF band provides up to 1200* selectable frequencies, and several preset frequency banks for various countries help you set up a multichannel system very quickly.

CU 4000 BP 4000

Microphones for PT 4500: The lavalier and head-worn models listet below are compatible with the DPT 700, PT 4500, PT 470, PT 450 and PT 45 bodypack transmitters.

A backlit display makes it very easy to tune the PT 4500 to the same frequency as the SR 4500 receiver. A pilot tone system continuously sends transmitter data including MUTE switch position and remaining battery life to the receiver. Integrated charging contacts let you charge the optional BP 4000 battery pack without having to remove it from the transmitter.

After only one hour, the battery pack will be fully charged and you can use the transmitter for 12 hours continuously. The 3-pin mini XLR input with adjustable gain accommodates both portable instruments and a variety of AKG microphones for every application. An optional RMS 4000 remote mute switch allows the user to mute the transmitter without having to fumble for the on-board mute switch.

Item number: The item number depends on RF output and frequency band. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on which combinations are available in your country.

PT 4500 • Carrier frequency ranges: • • • • •

Modulation: Audio bandwidth: THD: S/N ratio: RF radiation:

HC 577 L

CK 97-C/L

C 520 L

C 411 L

C 417 L

C 518 ML

CK 99 L

C 519 ML

CK 77 WR L

C 516 ML

For lavalier and headset applications, you have a choice of broadcast/concert proven AKG models with a range of pickup patterns, size and other features. No other company gives you more options to customize a wireless system than the AKG WMS 4500. Item numbers: HC 577 L C 520 L C 555 L C 417 L CK 99 L CK 77 WR

3141Z00110* 3066X00060* 3066H00200* 2577X00080 6000H51040 L 2441Z00390 L/P 2441Z00400

• Battery life: 500-530, 570-600, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 760 to 790, 790 to 820, 835 to 863 MHz FM 35 to 20,000 Hz <0.3% typical >120 dB(A) typical 50 mW max. (ERP)

C 555 L

• • • •

Dimensions: Net weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessory:

CK 97-C/L C 411 L C 518 ML C 519 ML C 516 ML

2497Z00080 2571Z00030 3064X00120* 3065X00120* 3063X00120*

* (6 units multipack version)

2 AA size dry batteries: 15 hours typ.; BP 4000 rechargeable battery pack: 12 hours typ. 70 x 90 x 25 mm (2.8 x 3.5 x 1 in.) 95 g (3.4 oz.) 2 AA size dry batteries, belt clip RMS 4000 external mute switch

The CU 4000 charger provides two dedicated compartments for charging two HT 4000/4500, PT 4000/4500, or SPR 4 transmitters or two battery packs at the same time. The heart of the supply system is the BP 4000 rechargeable battery pack with built-in active monitoring circuitry. An integrated microprocessor continuously monitors battery status and accurately calculates the remaining battery life. This puts an end to the nightmare of batteries failing in the middle of a performance.

A processor controlled pulse charging system charges the battery pack quickly yet gently, and the integrated "Charge Balance Management" feature makes sure that only as much energy is fed to the battery pack as had previously been drawn from it. In addition, several monitoring circuits and a temperature sensor prevent the battery pack from being overcharged. A self-discharge counter does not only measure battery discharge during operation but also determines the charge level after prolonged storage periods. As charging begins, the BP 4000 circuitry sends all relevant data to the CU 4000 charger to "tailor" the charging process exactly to the needs of the battery pack.

To eliminate memory effect (that reduces the capacity of most rechargeable batteries over time), data communication between the BP 4000 and CU 4000 enables the charger to warn the user that the battery pack needs a recovery cycle. Pressing the front panel RECOVERY button starts an automatic sequence of charging/discharging cycles that refreshes the battery pack, determines its actual capacity, and resets the capacity counter for accurate battery life indication. The BP 4000 plus CU 4000 system is an investment that helps reduce battery cost from the start and reduces environmental hazards from used batteries.

CU 4000 • Charging current: • Operating voltage: • Charging time: • Recovery cycle: • Dimensions: • Weight: • Standard accessories:

Section:

02 CU 4000 charger with HT 4500 and PT 4500

BP 4000

Item numbers: CU 4000 w/o power supply EU power supply US power supply UK power supply

2887X00060 7801H00050 7801H00060 7801H00070

1.5 A 12 V DC, 1.3 A 1 hour typical approx. 8 hours approx. 92 x 173 x 85 mm (3.6 x 6.8 x 3.3 in.) 580 g (1.2 lbs.) 2 BP 4000 battery packs, power supply

Wireless Systems

Page 110

Page 111


HUB 4000 Q/HiQnet®

AKG System Architect plug-in • Control and monitor multichannel wireless systems from a PC

AKG Wireless iPhone App • Control and monitor multichannel wireless systems from an Apple iPhone, iPod touch, iPad via Wi-Fi™

connect. configure. control.

• User interface optimized for monitoring and setting up large wireless systems

• RF Monitor for checking the radio link on stage

• 1 Click Setup function provides automatic frequency setup and management for the wireless system with a single click.

• Single-touch frequency setup and management for the entire system • Wireless troubleshooting tool

Wireless System

• Tools like Device Manager, Environment Scan, RF Monitor, and Programmer Guide for manual system setup HUB 4000 Q

• Custom Control Panels for easy control interface customizing

02

System Architect

HUB 4000 Q

The AKG Wireless iPhone App enables you to monitor and control a complete AKG wireless system from your iPhone or iPod touch via Wi-Fi™. The AKG Wireless iPhone App is the fastest and easiest way to check the wireless connection between a transmitter and a receiver on stage. Its RF Monitor function lets you check and detect radio shadow areas right on stage. Finding dropouts is as easy as rotating the iPhone or iPod touch from portrait to landscape mode and pacing the stage. This starts RF Monitor that draws a graph of RF signal strength over time on the display, showing exactly where the RF signals drops below a usable level as you walk around. The App includes wireless troubleshooting functionality that helps you fix problems. It also lets you set up and configure the frequency management function for the entire wireless system with a single touch on your iOS device. Wireless devices are connected through an AKG HUB 4000 Q to the HiQnet® network, which is connected to a Wi-Fi™ router. The iPhone App controls and monitors the wireless system via Wi-Fi™ using the Harman HiQnet® protocol. The AKG Wireless iPhone App supports the DMS 700 professional digital wireless system, the WMS 4000/4500 analog wireless microphone systems, and the IVM 4 in-ear monitor system from AKG. The AKG Wireless iPhone app is available from the Apple iTunes Store. Visit www.akg.com/iphone for further information.

• HiQnet® is a communications protocol or language for audio devices

• Monitor and control a wireless system with Harman System Architect™ via HiQnet®

• System Architect™ is the software for central system control

• Monitor and control a wireless system with the AKG Wireless iPhone App via HiQnet®

The HUB 4000 Q enables you to connect up to eight AKG devices to any Harman Professional HiQnet® system. It is a true plug and play device, so all you need to do to install the HUB 4000 Q is connect it to your computer via a commercial CAT-5 network cable. For large wireless systems, you can of course add several HUB 4000 Qs using standard Ethernet switches (or routers, wireless hubs, etc.), allowing you to configure and monitor the entire setup from a single computer. The HUB 4000 Q quickly and easily integrates the DMS 700 and WMS 4500 wireless systems or the IVM 4 in-ear monitor system into any complex HiQnet® environment.

• • • • • • •

Power supply : Current consumption: Ambient temperature: Connectors for AKG devices : Connector for network card: Dimensions: Weight:

12 V DC +/- 2V 200 mA max. -10° C to +60° C RJ11 RJ45 200 x 190 x 44 mm (7.8 x 7.5 x 1.7 in.) 970 g (2.2 lbs.)

AKG HiQnet® iPhone application

System Architect / HiQnet ®

• HiQnet® Ethernet interface for connecting up to eight AKG devices to a HiQnet® network

44

200

Section:

02

connect. configure. control.

• System-wide intuitive configuration and monitoring • Built on standard network technologies

136

• Supports DSR 700 (DMS 700), SST 4 (IVM 4), and SR 4500 (WMS 4500)

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

The Harman System Architect™ PC software will automatically identify all HUB 4000 Qs connected to the computer. The channel-oriented user interface in System Architect™ provides intuitive monitoring of all wireless channels. 1 Click Setup makes frequency management for your wireless system as easy as giving a single click. 1 Click Setup performs an Environment Scan, calculates discrete frequencies that work best in the scanned radio frequency environment, and programs these frequencies into the wireless receivers, all with a single click. Additional tools including Device Manager, Environment Scan, RF Monitor, and Programmer Guide make setting up, monitoring, and managing your wireless system easy and straightforward.

Section:

connect. configure. control.

Item numbers: HUB 4000 Q w/o power supply: EU power supply: AC 12/EU US power supply: AC 12/US UK power supply: AC 12/UK

2999Z00140 7801H00010 7801H00020 7801H00030

HiQnet® is a communications protocol or language with which all device-types within the full audio signal path can communicate. The HiQnet® advantage: HiQnet® provides efficient configuration and control of complex audio systems as well as convenient monitoring of important parameters of all audio devices on the network. The HiQnet® protocol enables compatible devices from different manufacturers to be connected to the same HiQnet® network. For this purpose, HiQnet® uses standard network technology such as the Ethernet protocol or commercial CAT-5 network cables. The entire HiQnet® system is configured and controlled with a single software application – Harman Pro System Architect™. A comprehensive core PC application into which device-specific plug-ins developed by each Harman Pro brand can be loaded. System Architect™ has been written entirely from the ground up to achieve the goal of accommodating all requirements from all the links in a signal chain. System Architect™ has been optimized for use in both tour sound and installation environments and includes features enabling quick and easy system configuration for both disciplines. For more information, visit www.hiqnet.harmanpro.com

Product Panel

1 Click Setup

Wireless Systems

Page 112

Page 113


System Components/Multi-Channel Systems

Multi-Channel Systems

System Components (WMS 4500/450/470) PSU 4000

ASU 4000

Multi-Coupler • Supplies antenna signal and DC power for four SR 450, SR 470 or SR 4500 receivers • Two expansion outputs allow signal cascading up to 3 additional PS 4000s from one antenna feed • Eight BNC antenna signal + DC outputs • LED status indicators that show antenna and/or cable problems

Central power supply • Powers up to 3 PS 4000s for DC connecting 12 SR 450, SR 470, SR 4500 • Powers CU 4000, HUB 4000 • 3 DC outputs • IEC power cable with universal power supply that operates anywhere in the world

Remote power supply Remote power supply for complex antenna networks • BNC input and output • Locking DC input • Status LED • Water-resistant case

Item number: 2997H000401)

Item number: 3009H00100

02

Input voltage: Frequency: Output voltage: Max. output current: Weight: Size:

90 VAC to 264 VAC 47 to 63 Hz 3 outputs, 12 VDC each DC OUT 1: 2.5 A, DC OUT 2-3: 2 A 1.3 kg (3.2 lbs.) 200 x 190 x 44 mm (7.8 x 7.5 x 1.7 in.)

• • • • •

Carrier frequency range: RF input: RF output: Operating voltage: Dimensions:

• Weight:

500 to 865 MHz 1 BNC socket, 50 ohms 1 BNC socket, 50 ohms 12 V DC 78 x 50 x 50 mm (3.1 x 2.0 x 2.0 in.) 167 g (5.9 oz.)

AB 4000

SRA 2 W (Passive) SRA 2 B/W (Active)

RA 4000 W (Passive) RA 4000 B/W (Active)

High-performance antenna booster for inserting into long antenna cables. One AB 4000 can compensate for approx. 17 dB of cable attenuation. Up to three AB 4000 boosters can be used in series for extremely long cable runs. • BNC input and output • DC Input • Water-resistant case • Status-LED

Wideband directional antenna • For indoor or outdoor use, specifically, for setting up radio links for distances up to 300 m (1000 feet) • Integrated high-performance antenna booster for use with long cable runs (only SRA 2 B/W) • Water-resistant case, BNC output • Remote powering option and status LED

Omnidirectional wideband booster antenna • For indoor or outdoor use, specifically, for near-field antenna setups with no preferred direction • Integrated high-performance antenna booster for use with long antenna cables • Remote powering option and status LED • Rugged, water-resistant case, BNC output

Item number: SRA 2 W 3009H00150 SRA 2 B/W 3009H00160

Item number: 3009H00020

• • • • •

Carrier frequency range: Gain: Coverage angle: RF output: Operating voltage:

• Dimensions: • Weight:

500 to 865 MHz approx. 17.5 to 3.5 dB, selectable 1 BNC socket, 50 ohms 1 BNC socket, 50 ohms 8 VDC from PS 4000 W or ASU 4000 via connecting cable 110 x 35 mm (4.3 x 1.4 in.) 150 g (5.3 oz.)

w/o power cable 2997H00040 w/EU power cable 2997H00010 w/US power cable 2997H00020 w/UK power cable 2997H00030

• • • • • •

4000

• Weight: • Standard accessories: • Optional accessories:

500 to 865 MHz 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 dB switchable 2 BNC sockets, 50 ohms 10 BNC sockets, 50 ohms 12 VDC 200 x 190 x 44 mm (7.8 x 7.5 x 1.7 in.) 970 g (2.2 lbs.) RMU 4000 MK PS connecting cable

1) PSU

Carrier frequency range: Gain: RF inputs: RF outputs: Operating voltage: Dimensions:

• • • • •

Carrier frequency range: Antenna gain: Coverage angle: Booster gain: Operating voltage:

• Dimensions: • Weight:

Item number: RA 4000 W 2632H00310 RA 4000 B/W 2632H00320

500 to 865 MHz 4.5 dB 70° 17 dB 8 VDC from PS 4000 W or ASU 4000 via connecting cable (only SRA 2 B/W) 230 x 240 x 26 mm (9 x 9.4 x 1.0 in.) 250 g (8.8 oz.)

• • • •

Carrier frequency range: Gain: RF output: Operating voltage:

• Dimensions: • Weight:

500 to 865 MHz 17 dB 1 BNC socket, 50 ohms 8 VDC/46 mA from PS 4000 W or ASU 4000 via connecting cable 220 x 38.5 mm (8.7 x 1.5 in.) 65 g (2.3 oz.)

HUB 4000 Q

ZAPD 21

RMS 4000

RMS 4/SPORT

Network integrator for connecting up to eight devices (DSR 700, SR 4500, SST 4) to an Ethernet network for programming and monitoring.

2-into-1 antenna combiner for indoor and outdoor use of near-field antenna setups. Can be used either to split signals or combine them as needed.

Remote Mute Switch The RMS 4000 lets a user mute and unmute the PT 450, PT 470 or PT 4500 transmitters easily, discreetly and securely when the transmitter is under vestments or a costume. Cable length: 110 cm (43 in.)

Perfect for football referees. Available only in the USA. www.akg.com/usa

Item number: 2999Z001402)

Item number: SERVSON760

Item number: 3009Z00120

PS 4000 W

WMS 450

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• • • • • •

PS 4000 W

WMS 4500

Example: 10-Channel System for Tour Sound

PS 4000 W

10 x SR 4500 DC Out 1 DC Out 2 DC Out 3

PSU 4000 2) The HUB 4000 Q/HUB 4000 and PS 4000 W with the stated item numbers include no power supply. Please order the appropriate power supply for each unit separately: EU: AC 12/EU 7801H00010, US: AC 12/US 7801H00020, UK: AC 12/UK 7801H00030

Item number: 2996Z001002)

Section:

2 x SRA 2B/W

PS 4000 W

Fitting all components into flight cases as well as the shortest possible setup time are essential for festivals with several acts performing in succession. While one performer is on stage, backstage preparations for the following act must be completed so that it can be started without any drawn-out interruptions due to alterations or soundchecks. Wireless systems in particular require meticulous RF and audio performance tests to be carried out before they are connected to the FOH mixer. The advanced software of the SR 4000 receiver makes all this easy. Rehearsal Mode, Auto Setup, and Frequency Scan are just a few of the features that help set up all the RF connections quickly and efficiently. In the example shown above, a complete 10-channel wireless system including antenna splitters, power supply unit, and headphone amplifiers can be fitted into a compact 8-space-rack. You can also fit two small flight cases with five chargers each for the transmitters, so that all transmitters can be charged completely and simultaneously within just one hour. And, the complete tour sound package takes up so little space it can be transported in a standard station wagon – the ideal solution for any band on tour.

Specification: 10 x SR 4500 10 x HT/PT 4500 5 x CU 4000 1 x PSU 4000

True Diversity Receiver Handheld or bodypack transmitter Charging unit Central power supply

3 x PS 4000 W 2 x SRA 2 B/W 24 x MK PS 2 x MKA 20

Section:

Charging case including 5 CU

02

Another excellent choice for smaller touring sound systems is the WMS 450, which is compatible with many of the system expansion components of the WMS 4000 for cost-effective, yet state-of-the-art performance. For example, a complete 4-channel system including a PSU 4000 power supply unit and PS 4000 antenna multi-coupler with two front-mounted antennas will fit into a 3-space rack! All that’s necessary to hook it up is to connect a single power cable and the audio lines. All other components, such as the transmitter, can be stored in a 2-space-drawer.

Antenna splitter Active wideband directional antenna 0.65 m Antenna cable 20 m Antenna cable

Your dealer or the AKG Distributor for your country or region will be glad to help you in designing multichannel systems for your specific needs.

Wireless Systems

Page 114

Page 115


Live sound Club music

The WMS 450 diversity system is your best choice for cost-efficient, high-performance multichannel systems. Up to 12 channels can be used simultaneously within the same frequency band and even large systems will work smoothly in environments hostile to RF transmission. Being compatible with professional WMS 4000 antenna splitters, power supplies, and high quality remote antennas, the WMS 450 enables you to set up highly complex wireless systems.

• Diversity receiver with all-metal case • Up to 12 channels can be used simultaneously in each frequency band • Auto Setup and Rehearsal functions for quick and easy setup

44

• Quick infrared transmission of all frequency and setup data to the transmitter 177

202,4

• Extremely compact bodypack transmitter

• Infrared data download from receiver for instant setup

• Infrared data download for instant setup

• Long battery life (6 hours with single AA size dry battery, 8 hours with optional high performance rechargeable battery) for low operating cost

• Long battery life (6 hours with single AA size dry battery, 8 hours with optional high performance rechargeable battery) for low operating cost

• Battery status display and data transmission

• Battery capacity display and data transmission

• Integrated charging contacts for charging batteries inside transmitter

• Integrated charging contacts for charging batteries inside transmitter

• Ergonomically styled body with anti-slip finish for confident and easy handling

• Connector for external mute switch

60

30

• Professional mini XLR audio input

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Programmable warning functions using two-color display backlighting to indicate critical operating conditions

• Available with D 5 or C 5 microphone element

73,5

WMS 450

176,2

WMS 450

Highly flexible wireless system, easy to use and expandable for the most sophisticated applications.

2

SR 450

Section:

02

WMS 450 HT 450

In Auto Setup mode, the receiver will scan the available bands, find an interference-free channel, and transmit the related frequency data to the assigned transmitter via infrared. This technique reduces the time it takes to set up a multichannel system to a few minutes. A Rehearsal function,

SETS

WMS 450 Vocal Set D 5 • 1 HT 450 handheld transmitter with D 5 microphone element, 1 SR 450 receiver • 1 stand adapter, 1 AA size battery, 2 antennas, rack mounting kit, power supply

WMS 450 Vocal Set C 5 • 1 HT 450 handheld transmitter with C 5 microphone element, 1 SR 450 receiver • 1 stand adapter, 1 AA size battery, 2 antennas, rack mounting kit, power supply

a programmable display clearly indicating all important system parameters, two-color display backlighting warning the user of critical conditions from a distance, and a transmitter battery status display on the receiver enhance reliability and add to ease of use.

WMS 450 Headworn Set

• 1 PT 450 bodypack transmitter 1 SR 450 receiver 1 C 555 L head-worn microphone • 1 belt clip, 1 AA size battery, 2 antennas, rack mounting kit, power supply

Item number: SR 450: The item number depends on the frequency band and type of power supply. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on which combinations are available in your country.

WMS 450 Guitar Set

• 1 PT 450 bodypack transmitter 1 SR 450 receiver 1 MKG L cable 2 antennas • 1 belt clip, 1 AA size battery, 2 antennas, rack mounting kit, power supply

SR 450 • RF carrier frequency ranges: • • • • •

Modulation: Audio bandwidth: THD at 1 kHz: Signal-to-noise: Audio outputs:

• Dimensions: • Weight: • Standard accessories:

The HT 450 is a high-performance, compact handheld transmitter for a host of applications. It is available either with the well-balanced, powerful sound of the D 5 dynamic microphone or the detailed clarity of the C 5 condenser microphone. Many innovative features enhance both system reliability and user friendliness. An LC display indicates all important system data at a glance, including frequency, preset country code, available battery capacity, low battery capacity warning, as well as transmission status. An infrared transmission link will feed all frequency and setup data to the assigned transmitter within seconds. A noiseless ON-MUTE/PRG-OFF switch and status LED add to the transmitter's user-friendliness.

WMS 450 Presenter Set

The PT 450 is a high-performance, compact bodypack transmitter for a host of applications. Many innovative features enhance both system reliability and user friendliness. An LC display indicates all important system data at a glance, including frequency, preset country code, available battery capacity, low battery capacity warning, as well as transmission status. An infrared transmission link will feed all frequency and setup data to the assigned transmitter within seconds. The PT 450 bodypack transmitter uses a rugged case, and the mini XLR input allows you to connect a wide selection of AKG microphones or portable instruments. A special jack lets you connect an optional external mute switch enabling the user to mute the audio signal even if the transmitter is difficult to reach.

Section:

02

The available lavalier and head-worn microphones are listed on page 110.

CU 400 charger

• 1 PT 450 bodypack transmitter 1 SR 450 receiver 1 C 407 L lavalier microphone • 1 belt clip, 1 AA size battery, 2 antennas, rack mounting kit, power supply

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 600 to 630, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz FM 35 to 20,000 Hz <0.3% typ. >120 dB(A) typ. balanced XLR and unbalanced TS 1/4" jack, balanced level switchable to -30 or 0 dBm approx. 200 x 44 x 190 mm (7.8 x 1.7 x 7.4 in.) 972 g (2.2 lbs.) 2 antennas, power supply, rack mounting kit

PT 450

• • • •

Plug-in charging Two universal charging slots Charging time <2 hours Status LEDs

Item numbers: CU 400 2934H00040 w/o power cable 2934H00010 w/EU/US/UK power cable

HT 450 • Carrier frequency ranges: • • • • • •

Modulation: Audio bandwidth: THD: S/N Ratio (A-weighted) RF output: Battery life:

• Dimensions: • Weight: • Standard accessories:

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 600 to 630, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 790 to 820 and 835 to 865 MHz FM 35 to 20,000 Hz <0.7% typ. at rated deviation/1 kHz >120 dB(A) typ. max. 50 mW (ERP) 1.5 V LT6 AA size dry battery: 6 hours typ.; 1.2 V HR6 NiMH, 2,100 mAh AA size rechargeable battery: 8 hours typ. 236.9 x 51.1 mm max. dia. (9.3 x 2 in.) 240 g (8.5 oz.) 1 AA size dry battery, stand adapter

Item number: HT 450 and PT 450: Item numbers depend on RF output and frequency band. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on which combinations are available in your country.

PT 450 • Carrier frequency ranges: • • • • • •

Modulation: Audio bandwidth: THD: S/N ratio (A-weighted) RF output: Battery life:

• • • •

Dimensions: Net weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessory:

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 600 to 630, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 790 to 820 and 835 to 865 MHz FM 35 to 20,000 Hz <0.7% typ. at rated deviation/1 kHz >120 dB(A) typ. max. 50 mW (ERP) 1.5 V LR 6 AA size dry battery: 6 hours typ.; 1.2 V HR6 NiMH, 2100 mAh AA size rechargeable battery: 8 hours typ. 60 x 73.5 x 30 mm (2.4 x 2.9 x 1.2 in.) 90 g (3.2 oz.) 1 AA size battery, belt clip external mute switch

Wireless Systems

Page 116

Page 117


WMS 470

44

• Rugged and reliable for professional applications

177

202,4

• Long battery life (14 hours with lithium batteries, 6 hours with single AA size dry battery, 8 hours with optional high performance rechargeable battery) for low operating cost

• Long battery life (14 hours with lithium batteries, 6 hours with single AA size dry battery, 8 hours with optional high performance rechargeable battery) for low operating cost

A line of professional accessories including the WMS 4000 antenna splitter, power supplies, and remote directional antennas makes it easier than ever to set up large wireless systems.

The display backlighting changes in color to warn the user of such critical operating conditions as transmitter battery running low, audio peaks, or low RF signal strength.

• Connector for external mute switch

HT 470

PT 470

The HT 470 high-end handheld transmitter is a rugged tool built to take even very rough handling. It is available either with the legendary sound of the D 5 dynamic microphone or the detailed clarity of the C 5 condenser microphone. Up to 50 mW output power and the unique dipole transmitter antenna ensure reliable transmission and a long range even if the user covers the antenna with their hand.

The PT 470 is an extremely compact bodypack transmitter for high-end installed systems and onstage applications.

Item numbers: HT 470: Item numbers depend on RF output and frequency band. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on combinations available in your country.

WMS 470 Vocal Set D 5

WMS 470 Vocal Set C 5

• 1 HT 470 handheld transmitter with D 5 microphone element, 1 SR 470 receiver • 1 stand adapter, 1 AA size battery, 2 UHF antennas, rack mounting kit, power supply

• 1 HT 470 handheld transmitter with C 5 microphone element, 1 SR 470 receiver • 1 stand adapter, 1 AA size battery, 2 UHF antennas, rack mounting kit, power supply

WMS 470 Instrumental Set

• 1 PT 470 bodypack transmitter 1 SR 470 receiver 1 MKG L instrument cable • 1 belt clip, 1 AA size battery, 2 UHF antennas, rack mounting kit, power supply

Item number: SR 470: The item number depends on the frequency band and type of power supply. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on combinations available in your country.

WMS 470 Sports Set

WMS 470 Presenter Set

• 1 PT 470 bodypack transmitter 1 SR 470 receiver 1 C 544 L head-worn microphone • 1 belt clip, 1 AA size battery, 2 UHF antennas, rack mounting kit, power supply

• 1 PT 470 bodypack transmitter 1 SR 470 receiver 1 C 407 L lavalier microphone 1 C 555 L head-worn microphone • 1 belt clip, 1 AA size battery, 2 UHF antennas, rack mounting kit, power supply

SR 470 • RF carrier frequency ranges: • • • • •

Modulation: Audio bandwidth: THD at 1 kHz: Signal-to-noise: Audio outputs:

• Dimensions: • Weight: • Standard accessories:

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 600 to 630, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz FM 35 to 20,000 Hz <0.3% typ. >120 dB(A) typ. balanced XLR and unbalanced TS 1/4" jack, balanced level switchable to -30 or 0 dBm approx. 200 x 44 x 190 mm (7.8 x 1.7 x 7.4 in.) 972 g (2.2 lbs.) 2 antennas, power supply, rack mounting kit

176,2

• Extremely compact bodypack transmitter

WMS 470

The SR 470 lets you operate up to sixteen channels simultaneously within the same frequency band. You can even set up absolutely reliable systems with as many as 48 channels by using multiple frequency bands.

• Battery capacity display

• Professional mini XLR audio input

• Available with legendary D 5 or C 5 microphone element

• Programmable warning functions

• Infrared data download from receiver for instant setup

• Available with legendary D 5 or C 5 microphone element

• Integrated charging contacts for charging batteries inside transmitter

• Quick and easy transmitter setup via infrared

30

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

2

• AKG reference compander technology for superior sound

60

• Integrated charging contacts for charging batteries inside transmitter

• Battery status information transmitted to receiver

• Space diversity receiver with all-metal case for reliable reception

• Noiseless ON/OFF switch

• Battery status information transmitted to receiver

• Battery capacity display

• Pilot tone system prevents unwanted noise

SETS

• Noiseless ON/OFF switch

• Infrared data download from receiver for instant setup

• Up to 48 wireless channels and 16 channels within a single frequency band

02

• Up to 50 mW output power for long range

• Powered by a single dry or rechargeable AA size battery

• NEW automatic frequency setup function

Section:

• Up to 50 mW output power for long range

73,5

Seminar & Conference Houses of worship Theater Live sound

SR 470

WMS 470

Setting up a high-end wireless system has never been so easy. The WMS 470 combines the advantages of the high-end WMS 4500 electronics with the user friendliness of an entry-level system.

It features a sturdy case, and the professional mini XLR input provides a convenient interface for either an instrument or any compatible microphone from AKG or other manufacturers. A dedicated jack lets you connect an optional external mute switch enabling the user to mute the audio signal even if the transmitter is difficult to reach.

Section:

02

The available lavalier and head-worn microphones are listed on page 110. Item number: PT 470: Item numbers depend on RF output and frequency band. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on combinations available in your country.

CU 400 charger • • • •

Plug-in charging Two universal charging slots Charging time <2 hours Status LEDs

Item numbers: CU 400 2934H00040 w/o power cable 2934H00010 w/EU/US/UK power cable

HT 470 • Carrier frequency ranges: • • • • • •

Modulation: Audio bandwidth: THD: S/N Ratio (A-weighted) RF output: Battery life:

• Dimensions: • Weight: • Standard accessories:

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 600 to 630, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 790 to 820 and 835 to 865 MHz FM 35 to 20,000 Hz <0.7% typ. at rated deviation/1 kHz >120 dB(A) typ. max. 50 mW (ERP) 1.5 V LR6 AA size dry battery: 6 hours typ. 1.5 V FR6 AA size lithium battery: 14 hours typ. 1.2 V HR6 (NiMH) ≥2,100 mAh AA size rechargeable battery: 8 hours typ. 236.9 x 51.1 mm max. dia. (9.3 x 2 in.) 240 g (8.5 oz.) 1 LR6 AA size dry battery, stand adapter

PT 450 • Carrier frequency ranges: • • • • • •

Modulation: Audio bandwidth: THD: S/N ratio (A-weighted) RF output: Battery life:

• • • •

Dimensions: Net weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessory:

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 600 to 630, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 790 to 820 and 835 to 865 MHz FM 35 to 20,000 Hz <0.7% typ. at rated deviation/1 kHz >120 dB(A) typ. max. 50 mW (ERP) 1.5 V LR6 AA size dry battery: 6 hours typ.; 1.5 V FR6 AA size lithium battery: 14 hours typ. 1.2 V HR6 (NiMH) ≥2,100 mAh AA size rechargeable battery: 8 hours typ. 60 x 73.5 x 30 mm (2.4 x 2.9 x 1.2 in.) 90 g (3.2 oz.) 1 AA size battery, belt clip external mute switch

Wireless Systems

Page 118

Page 119


• 30 MHz selection bandwidth (depending on local frequency plans)

• 30 MHz selection bandwidth (depending on local frequency plans)

• Eight hours of operation with a single AA size battery

• Professional mini XLR connector

• Gain control

• Eight hours of operation with a single AA size battery

• Low battery status indicator

• Compatible with all AKG MicroMics

• Noiseless on/off/mute switch

• Low battery status indicator • Smallest and lightest bodypack transmitter in its class

• 30 MHz selection bandwidth (depending on local frequency plans)

• Noiseless on/off/mute switch

• Professional balanced XLR output • Audio clip LED on receiver

73,5

Live sound Houses of worship Conference Sound/AV company, Gyms

60

30

176,2

PERCEPTION WIRELESS

Perception Wireless

The plug and play wireless solution. Specifically tailored to your needs, from single-channel applications and individual configurations to multichannel systems

200 30

43,9

• Switched mode power supply • Adjustable squelch level

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Plug and play solution

Section:

02

The HT 45 handheld transmitter offers up to eight selectable carrier frequencies in a subband up to 30 MHz wide within the 500 to 865 MHz UHF carrier frequency range. It provides high gain before feedback and brilliant sound quality, as well as a built-in wind and pop filter to reduce wind and breath noise. Selecting preset frequencies is as easy as pressing a single button, and a dedicated slide switch lets you set the audio input gain to HI or LOW as required.

The Perception Wireless Systems delivers brilliant sound and is surprisingly easy to use. It is the optimum solution for small stages and clubs, places of worship, hotels, and gyms. The SR 45 receiver provides professional XLR and ¼” jack outputs as well as audio gain and squelch threshold controls.

The following complete Perception Wireless Systems are available:

Perception Wireless Vocal Set • 1 HT 45 handheld transmitter with dynamic microphone element, 1 SR 45 receiver • 1 stand adapter, 1 AA size battery, universal power supply with US/UK/EU adapter

Perception Wireless Instrumental Set • 1 PT 45 bodypack transmitter 1 SR 45 receiver 1 MKG L instrument cable • 1 AA size battery, universal power supply with US/UK/EU adapter

Item number: SR 45: The item number depends on the frequency band. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on combinations available in your country.

Perception Wireless Sports Set • 1 PT 45 bodypack transmitter 1 SR 45 receiver 1 C 544 L head-worn microphone • 1 AA size battery, universal power supply with US/UK/EU adapter

SR 45 • RF carrier frequency ranges: • • • • •

Modulation: Audio bandwidth: THD at 1 kHz: Signal-to-noise: Audio outputs:

• Dimensions: • Weight:

Harman Professional Group | 2011

SR 45 HT 45

SR 45

PT 45 You can use the PT 45 bodypack transmitter with all AKG MicroMic Series or other headworn and lavalier microphones. The MKG L instrument cable allows you to connect any electric guitar, bass, or portable keyboard, etc. A tiny screwdriver integrated in the battery compartment cover makes it very easy to adjust the hidden input gain control. The PT 45 provides up to eight selectable carrier frequencies in a subband up to 30 MHz wide within the 500 to 865 MHz UHF carrier frequency range.

Section:

02

The available lavalier and head-worn microphones are listed on page 110.

Perception Wireless Presenter Set

• 1 PT 45 bodypack transmitter 1 SR 45 receiver 1 CK 99 L lavalier microphone • 1 AA size battery, universal power supply with US/UK/EU adapter

530 to 560, 600 to 630, 748 to 778, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz FM 40 to 20,000 Hz <0.8% typ. >105 dB(A) typ. Balanced XLR and unbalanced 1/4" (6.3 mm) jack: adjustable from mic to line level. Output level at rated deviation: 500 mV rms approx. 200 x 44 x 150 mm (7.8 x 1.7 x 5.9 in.) 360 g (12.7 oz.)

Item numbers: HT 45: Item numbers depend on frequency band. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on combinations available in your country.

Item number: PT 45: Item numbers depend on frequency band. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on combinations available in your country.

HT 45 • Carrier frequency ranges:

PT 45 • Carrier frequency ranges:

• • • • • • • • •

Modulation: Audio bandwidth: THD: S/N Ratio (A-weighted) RF output: Battery life: Dimensions: Weight: Standard accessories:

530 to 560, 600 to 630, 748 to 778, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz FM 70 to 20,000 Hz <0.8% typ. at rated deviation/1 kHz >105 dB(A) typ. 10 mW (ERP) 1.5 V AA size battery: 8 hours typ. 229 x dia. 53 mm (9 x 2.1 in.) 214 g (7.5 oz.) 1 AA size dry battery, stand adapter

• • • • • • • • • •

Modulation: Audio bandwidth: THD: S/N ratio (A-weighted) RF output: Battery life: Dimensions: Net weight: Standard accessories: Optional accessory:

530 to 560, 600 to 630, 748 to 778, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz FM 40 to 20,000 Hz <0.8% typ. at rated deviation/1 kHz >105 dB(A) typ. 10 mW (ERP) 1.5 V AA size battery: 8 hours typ. 60 x 74 x 30 mm (2.4 x 2.9 x 1.2 in.) 60 g (2.1 oz.) 1 AA size battery, belt clip external mute switch

Wireless Systems

Page 120

Page 121


Live sound Sound companies Theater Places of worship

• Bodypack receiver with rugged magnesium case

• Excellent, wide-range audio reproduction

• Combined on/off and volume control for ease of use

70

24

207

44

200

• Operates for up to eight hours off two AA size dry batteries, seven hours off optional BP 4000 battery pack with integrated Smart Battery Management system.

• High isolation for ambient-noise rejection • Inconspicuous finish

• Auto Setup and Environment Scan functions for identifying clean frequencies

• Stereo transmitter with compact all-metal case • Professional digital signal processing: dbx compressor, EQ, binaural room, simulations for a natural listening experience

• High-quality, high-comfort earphones

105

IVM 4

IVM 4

Wireless in-ear monitor system with unique signal processing capabilities for live applications and professional installations

2

1 12 27

• Backlit display and jog control for ease of use

• RF output adjustable up to 100 mW • Available in four 30 MHz wide UHF bands with 1200 frequencies each

• Received signal strength and battery status metering • Bottom panel contacts for direct battery charging on optional charger

• Backlit display and jog control for ease of use

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• Preprogrammed frequency preset banks

• Individual mix function

SST 4

Section:

02

The SST 4 is the first stereo transmitter ever to combine all the features required for professional in-ear monitoring in a single, compact device. The SST 4 allows the input signal to be processed individually to meet the requirements of both the artist and the sound system environment. An integrated dbx compressor, many EQ settings, and optimized binaural room simulation algorithms provide outstanding high performance signal processing flexibility. Preprogrammed frequency preset banks ensure an easy and reliable startup. Up to 14 intermodulation-free channels* can be used within a 30 MHz wide UHF band. In addition, up to 1200 frequencies can be selected manually. These features allow the IVM 4 to be used together with any AKG WMS 400 or WMS 4000 wireless microphone system. The SST 4 lets you adjust the RF output within the approved range, which is particularly important when the in-ear monitor system is used together with a complex wireless microphone system. This allows optimum system matching for improved reliability. A complete line of accessories is available for multichannel applications. A large, backlit display gives a clear picture of all important settings and levels. When used in dark environments, the brightness of the display can be reduced. The input signal level is digitally adjustable within a range of ±20 dB. A pair of Loop Out jacks carries the unprocessed input signal for daisy-chaining several SST 4s. Unique integrated signal processing for a natural listening experience and a complete set of inputs and outputs make the SST 4 an ideal tool for professional applications.

SST 4 • RF carrier frequency range: • Modulation: • RF radiation: • Audio Bandwith: • THD: • Signal/noise ratio: • Audio Inputs: • Dimensions: • Weight: • Standard accessories:

Page 122

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz FM, MPX Stereo up to 100 mW 35 to 20,000 Hz <0.8% typical >90 dB(A) typical 2 x XLR/jack hybrid connector; max. 10 dBV 200 x 44 x 190 mm (7.8 x 1.7 x 7.4 in.) 1,070 g (2.36 lbs) Power supply, RMU 4000 rack mounting kit, Color Coding Kit, UHF antenna

IVM 4 Item number: The item number depends on the frequency band and type of power supply. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on which combinations are available in your country.

* The actual number of channels that can be used simultaneously depends on local frequency plans.

SETS**

SPR 4

IP 2

The SPR 4 bodypack receiver features a rugged die-cast magnesium case. Auto Setup and Environment Scan functions for finding clean frequencies make setting up extremely easy. The 30 MHz bandwidth allows manual selection of 1200 frequencies or the system chooses from preprogrammed frequency preset banks.The SPR 4 provides a backlit display and jog control for ease of use. The display indicates the received signal strength and battery status along with other parameters. Integrated charging contacts allow the optional BP 4000 battery pack to remain inside the receiver whilst being charged on the CU 4000 charger (optional).The BP 4000 will be charged to capacity in only one hour, and can power the SPR 4 for about seven hours.

The IP 2 earphones connect to the SPR 4 bodypack receiver. These high quality earphones provide a wide-range sound with sharply contoured bass reproduction as well as excellent isolation to suppress high ambient noise levels encountered, e.g., on a loud concert stage. An integrated sliding cable tie and the supplied soft-rubber earmolds in three different sizes enable the earphones to adapt to every shape of ear and head.

Section:

02

The IP 2 earphones are included in the IVM 4 Sets and in the SPR 4 Sets and are also available single packed.

The only control the artist needs to operate is an ergonomically shaped volume control with integrated on/off switch. Placed in the center of the SPR 4 top panel, the volume control with its clearly discernible detents can be operated intuitively even if it is positioned outside the user's field of vision.

IVM 4 Set

• 1 SST 4 stereo transmitter 1 SPR 4 bodypack stereo receiver 1 pair of IP 2 earphones • 1 rod antenna, 1 rack mounting kit, 2 AA size batteries, 12-pc. color code set, 1 AC adapter

SPR 4 Set

• 1 SPR 4 bodypack stereo receiver 1 pair of IP 2 earphones • 2 AA size batteries

An Individual mix function allows a personalized monitor mix to be set up even where only a small sound system with no separate monitor mixer is available. To accommodate the individual preferences of users, the SPR 4 has been designed to drive a large number of different types of earphones. Item number: The item number depends on RF output and frequency band. Your dealer will be glad to provide information on which combinations are available in your country.

Item number: 3052H00040

SPR 4 • RF carrier frequency ranges: • Modulation: • Audio Bandwith: • THD • Signal/noise ratio • Channel separation • Audio Output • Battery Life

IP 2 • Frequency Range: • Sensitivity: • Max. Input Power: • Rated impedance: • Connector: • Weight: • Cable:

**SST 4 also available separately.

• • • •

Dimensions Weight Standard accessories Optional Accessories

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz FM, MPX Stereo 35 to 20,000 Hz <0.8% typical >90 dB(A) typical >40 dB(A) 3.5 mm jack, 150 mW (rms)/16 ohms 6 to 10 hours, volume dependent, 2 AA batteries or BP 4000 70 x 90 x 25 mm (2.8 x 3.5 x 1 in.) 165 g (5.82 oz.) 2 AA size dry batteries, belt clip, Color Coding Kit BP 4000 with CU 4000 Charging Unit

12 to 23,500 Hz 121 dB SPL/V 25 mW 16 Ohm 3.5 mm stereo jack 3 g (0.11 oz.) 1.15 m/3.8 ft.

Wireless Systems

Page 123


IVM 4

Accessories/Multi-Channel Systems

Wireless in-ear monitor system with unique signal processing capabilities for live applications and professional installations

Multi-Channel Systems

2 x SRA 2B/W

Power cable Antenna cable

Accessories

Audio cable

2 x ZAPD 21

Example Drawing: 8 Channels IVM 4 and 16 Channels WMS 4500 PS 4000 W

SPC 4

SRA 2 W

RA 4000 W

Wide-band antenna combiner • Combines antenna signals of up to four SST 4 stereo transmitters • Powers transmitters via antenna lines • Daisy-chaining capability for setting up multichannel systems

Passive wide-band directional antenna • For indoor and outdoor use, preferred-direction coverage • Water-resistant, rugged case with BNC input

Passive wide-band omnidirectional antenna • For indoor and outdoor use, coverage with no preferred direction • Water-resistant, rugged case with BNC input

Item number: 3053Z00010

RF carrier frequency range: System Gain: RF Inputs: RF Output: Operating Voltage: Power Supply (for SST4): Dimensions:

• Weight: • Standard Accessories: • Optional Accessories:

500 to 865 MHz 0 dB 4 BNC sockets, 50 ohms 1 BNC socket, 50 ohms 12 VDC/900mA 12 VDC/2A 200 x 190 x 44 mm (7.8 x 7.5 x 1.7 in.) 1,193 g (2.63 lbs) Rack Mounting kit MK PS connecting cable

• • • • •

Carrier frequency range: Antenna gain: Coverage angle: RF Input: Dimensions:

• Weight:

PS 4000 W

Item number: 2632Z00310

500 to 865 MHz 4 dB 70° 1 BNC socket, 50 ohms 268 x 268 x 25 mm (10.6 x 10.6 x 1 in.) 287 g (10.1 oz.)

• • • • •

Carrier frequency range: Antenna gain: RF Input: Dimensions: Weight:

4 x SST 4

4 x SST 4

500 to 865 MHz 1 dB 1 BNC socket, 50 ohms 240 x 38.5 mm (9.4 x 1.5 in.) 65 g (2.3 oz.)

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4

IN 1

IN 2

DC-SPC 4 ANTENNA OUT

ANTENNA OUT

SPC 4

IN 1

IN 2

SPC 4

DC OUT 1

02

Example of a four-channel IVM 4 system SRA 2 W

Example of a four-channel IVM 4 system The SPC 4 wideband antenna combiner allows the set up of large wireless in-ear monitor systems. A single antenna combiner enables the output signals of up to four SST 4 stereo transmitters to be combined into one composite antenna signal. Besides this antenna management function, the SPC 4 powers the SST 4 stereo transmitters connected to it, thus reducing the number of plug-in AC adapters in the rack. You can use either an SRA 2 W passive directional antenna or an RA 4000 W passive omnidirectional antenna for the wireless monitor system. The four-channel in-ear monitor system shown in the example drawing occupies only 3 U of rack space.

4 x SST 4 IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

SPC 4

IN 4

DC-SPC 4

DC OUT 1 DC OUT 2

PSU 4000

Page 124

Stereo Transmitter Stereo Pocket Receiver Power Combiner Central Power Supply Passive Wide-Band Directional Antenna 0.65 m antenna cable 5 m antenna cable

PS 4000 W

16 x SR 4500 SRA 2 W

DC OUT 2

DC OUT 3

DC OUT 1

DC OUT 2

DC OUT 3

PSU 4000

DC OUT 1

DC OUT 2

DC OUT 3

PSU 4000

Example Drawing: 8 Channels IVM 4 and 16 Channels WMS 4500

Section:

02

Total mobility of performers on stage is not the only ingredient of a hot show. A personalized, true stereo CD-quality monitor mix makes every musician feel perfectly at ease. The minimal leakage of in-ear monitors makes crosstalk from onstage wedges a thing of the past. These benefits for both musicians and sound engineers make sure that every show will be a success. Using an IVM 4 wireless in-ear monitor system in conjunction with a WMS 4500 and/or WMS 450 wireless microphone system is a complete, single-source professional solution for any application including the most complex live acts. The PSU 4000 central power supply powers the rack mounted SPC 4 antenna combiners and PS 4000 antenna splitters. All transmitters and receivers in the system are powered via the internal antenna cables. What's more, this kind of multichannel system requires only a single transmitting antenna and two receiving antennas.

In the example drawing the entire wireless system including the SST 4 stereo transmitters, SPC 4 antenna combiners, SR 4500 and PS 4000 and PSU 4000 components occupies no more than 17 U of rack space.

Power cable Antenna cable

Equipment: 4 x SST 4 4 x SPR 4 1 x SPC 4 1 x PSU 4000 1 x SRA 2 W 4 x MK PS 1 x MKA 5

DC-SPC 4

In the example drawing shown on this page, the signals of eight SST 4 stereo transmitters are combined into a single antenna signal. The daisy-chaining capability of the antenna combiners allows up to 16 channels to be fed to a single antenna. The IVM 4 frequencies being coordinated with the wireless microphone frequencies, the setup-to-soundcheck time for a multichannel system including wireless in-ear monitors is not appreciably longer than for a conventional wireless microphone system alone.

ANTENNA OUT

DC-SST

DC-SST

ANTENNA OUT

SPC 4

Multi-Channel Systems

IN 4

DC-SPC 4

PSU 4000

Section:

IN 3

DC-SST

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

• • • • • • •

Item number: 3009Z00150

PS 4000 W

Illustration: Two channels of IVM 4 and four channels of WMS 450

Equipment: 8 x SST 4 Stereo Transmitter 8 x SPR 4 Stereo Pocket Receiver 2 x SPC 4 Power Combiner 16 x SR 4500 True Diversity Receiver 16 x HT/PT 4500 Handheld or Portable Transmitter 12 x CU 4000 Charging Unit

3 x PSU 4000 Central Power Supply 4 x PS 4000 W Antenna Splitter 2 x SRA 2 B/W Active Wide-Band Directional Antenna 2 x SRA 2 W Passive Wide-Band Directional Antenna 2 x MKA 5 5 m Antenna Cable 2 x MKA 20 20 m Antenna Cable 48 x MK PS 0.65 m Antenna Cable

Picture: 4 Channels IVM 4 and 8 Channels WMS 4500

Your dealer or the AKG Distributor for your country or region will be glad to help you in designing multichannel systems for your specific needs.

Page 125


Headphones K 271 MK II K 171 MK II K 240 MK II K 141 MK II K 181 DJ K 81 DJ K 702 K 77 K 99 K 44 K 10

128 128 129 129 130 130 131 132 132 133 133

Headsets

Section:

02

134 134 135 135

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

HSC 271 HSC 171 HSD 271 HSD 171

Headphones Headsets

Section:

02

Headsets and headphones from AKG have become the worldwide professional industry standards. The diversity of AKGâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s product range comprises optimum solutions for every application. Each headset or headphone includes the leading-edge technology, high-quality materials and exceptional performance AKG has been known for throughout the world.

Page 126

Page 127


Headphones

• Professional hi-fi stereo studio headphones

• Professional hi-fi stereo studio headphones

• Professional hi-fi stereo studio headphones

• For onstage and studio use

• For broadcast and DJ use

• Leatherette and velvet ear pads

• Leatherette and velvet ear pads

• Self-adjusting headband for optimum fit

• Undistorted sound even at high volume levels

• High noise attenuation

• High ambient noise attenuation

• Leatherette and velvet ear pads

• Leatherette and velvet ear pads

• Automute feature mutes headphones when they are taken off

• Rugged construction for tough handling

• Semi-open, circumaural design

• Semi-open supraaural earphones

• Patented Varimotion speakers

• Patented Varimotion speakers

• Single-sided, detachable 3 m cable and 5 m coiled cable

• Single-sided, detachable 3 m cable and 5 m coiled cable

• Single-sided, detachable 3 m cable and 5 m coiled cable

The K 271 MK II is the perfect choice for any application where sonic bleed could cause problems such as broadcast work. Another important feature of the K 271 MK II is the addition of a switch in the headband that mutes the audio just as soon as the headphones are taken off.

The newly designed K 171 MK II combines the benefits of a closed-back design with the lightweight and comfort of supra-aural headphones. The K 171 MK II is an excellent choice for DJ and broadcast applications where no sound can bleed from the headphones into live microphones. The closedback, loud and rugged design gives the K 171 MK II a different low-frequency character and maintains its comfort and flexibility.

190

K 240 MK II

Thanks to its lower impedance and improved sensitivity, it can be used with low-output audio sources to deliver its incredible sound. The detachable OFC cable has gold-plated plugs for easy transportation and years of loss-free signal transfer.

The gimbalsuspended earcups and self-adjusting headband makes these comfortable to wear. The detachable OFC cable has gold-plated plugs for easy transportation and years of loss-free signal transfer.

Item numbers: K 141 MK II

Item numbers: K 171 MK II

2908X00190

Item numbers: K 240 MK II

2058X00190

EK 300 EK 500 S Earpads velvet (pair) Earpads leatherette (single)

6000H10080 (Connecting cable: 3 m/10 ft.) 6000H10100 (Connecting cable: 5 m/16.5 ft., coiled) 2955M10020 2058Z10010

EK 300 EK 500 S Earpads velvet (pair) Earpads leatherette (single)

6000H10080 (Connecting cable: 3 m/10 ft.) 6000H10100 (Connecting cable: 5 m/16.5 ft., coiled) 2955M10010 2908Z13010

EK 300 EK 500 S Earpads velvet (pair) Earpads leatherette (single)

6000H10080 (Connecting cable: 3 m/10 ft.) 6000H10100 (Connecting cable: 5 m/16.5 ft., coiled) 2955M10020 2058Z10010

• • • •

Connector: Stereo Adapter: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories:

closed-back, dynamic headphones 91 dB/mW, 104 dB/V 16 to 28,000 Hz 200 mW 55 ohms leatherette, velvet 3 m single-sided, 5 m coiled cable (99,9% oxygen-free); plug-in cable on headphones (mini-XLR connector) gold plated stereo mini jack gold plated 1/8" to 1/4" screw-on adapter 240 g (8.5 oz.)/550 g (19.4 oz.) velvet earpads, 5 m coiled cable, 3 m single-sided cable

• • • • • • •

Type: Sensitivity: Audio Bandwidth: Max. Input Power: Rated Impedance: Earpads: Cables:

• • • •

Connector: Stereo Adapter: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories:

closed-back, dynamic headphones 94 dB/mW, 107 dB/V 18 to 26,000 Hz 200 mW 55 ohms leatherette, velvet 3 m single-sided, 5 m coiled cable (99,9% oxygen-free); plug-in cable on headphones (mini-XLR connector) gold plated stereo mini jack gold plated 1/8" to 1/4" screw-on adapter 200 g (7.1 oz.)/500 g (17.6 oz.) velvet earpads, 5 m coiled cable, 3 m single-sided cable

K 141 MK II

85

The K 141 MK II is a newly updated version of the AKG legend with XXL transducers with Varimotion technology to deliver higher sensitivity, wide dynamic range and higher SPL, plus its lower impedance also allows it to be used with computers and other devices with low-power output.

2470X00190

Type: Sensitivity: Audio Bandwidth: Max. Input Power: Rated Impedance: Earpads: Cables:

190

110

The K 240 MK II is a newly updated version of AKG’s most successful headphones with Varimotion technology and XXL transducers. The K 240 MK II’s semi-open ear cups have around-the-ear coupling to deliver solid bass, accurate mids and crystal-clear highs.

Item numbers: K 271 MK II

• • • • • • •

110

200

190

K 171 MK II

85

85

110

The newly designed AKG legend, K 271 MK II combines the benefits of AKG’s circumaural design for extreme comfort and a closed-back design for maximum isolation from ambient noise. Thanks to its XXL transducers, the K 271 MK II sounds clean, smooth and very rich.

108

Page 128

200

K 271 MK II

185

110

• • • • • • •

Type: Sensitivity: Audio Bandwidth: Max. Input Power: Rated Impedance: Earpads: Cables:

• • • •

Connector: Stereo Adapter: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories:

semi-open, dynamic headphones 91 dB/mW, 104 dB/V 15 to 25,000 Hz 200 mW 55 ohms leatherette, velvet 3 m single-sided, 5 m coiled cable (99,9% oxygen-free); plug-in cable on headphones (mini-XLR connector) gold plated stereo mini jack gold plated 1/8" to 1/4" screw-on adapter 240 g (8.5 oz.)/550 g (19.4 oz.) velvet earpads, 5 m coiled cable, 3 m single-sided cable

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

205

110

• Patented Varimotion speakers

• Single-sided, detachable 3 m cable and 5 m coiled cable

02

Studio

• Professional circumaural hi-fi stereo studio headphones

• Patented Varimotion speakers

Section:

Studio

85

Studio

200

Studio

Section:

02

2144X00190

EK 300 6000H10080 (Connecting cable: 3 m/10 ft.) EK 500 S 6000H10100 (Connecting cable: 5 m/16.5 ft., coiled) Earpads leatherette (single) 2144Z16010

• • • • • • •

Type: Sensitivity: Audio Bandwidth: Max. Input Power: Rated Impedance: Earpads: Cables:

• • • •

Connector: Stereo Adapter: Net/shipping weight: Standard accessories:

semi-open, dynamic headphones 101 dB/mW, 114 dB/V 18 to 24,000 Hz 200 mW 55 ohms leatherette, velvet 3 m single-sided, 5 m coiled cable (99,9% oxygen-free); plug-in cable on headphones (mini-XLR connector) gold plated stereo mini jack gold plated 1/8" to 1/4" screw-on adapter 225 g (7.9 oz.)/550 g (19.4 oz.) velvet earpads, 5 m coiled cable, 3 m single-sided cable

Headphones/Headsets

109

Page 129


Headphones Professional DJ use

Monitoring Mastering Mixing

DJ use Small clubs and parties

• Professional DJ headphones • Stereo/mono selector

• Semi-professional DJ headphones

• High sound pressure level

• Closed-back design

• Flat wire voice coil

• Professional 3D-Axis folding mechanism

• High sound pressure level

• Patented VarimotionTM two-layer diaphragm

• 3D-Axis folding mechanism

• “3D Form” ear pads for perfect fit • Individually tested and numbered

188

165

1

195

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

212

195

70 113

95

Section:

02

K 181 DJ

K 81 DJ

K 702

The K 181 DJ is the ultimate tool for professional DJs – high performance closed-back headphones with the best possible sound, and maximum SPL that should be exceptionally rugged and easy to bend or fold into any listening position.

Great sound for small venues. Semiprofessional DJs too need dependable equipment. The K 81 DJ fit the bill perfectly. Their closed-back earphones, for instance, provide optimum isolation from ambient noise.

The K 702 are the new reference for open-back dynamic AKG headphones. They combine an extremely accurate response with yet unseen agility and spaciousness. This is achieved by using revolutionary flat-wire voice coils and a patented VarimotionTM two-layer diaphragm. A totally open design and a high performance cable complete these reference headphones.

The K 181 DJ have been designed in cooperation with leading international DJs. Their distinguishing features include 3D-Axis professional folding mechanism, high sound pressure level, closed-back earphones, stereo/mono selector, bass boost switch, frequency range from 5 Hz to 30 kHz, detachable cable, and rubberized finish.

Item number: K 181 DJ

Type: Sensitivity: Audio Bandwidth: Max. Input Power: Rated Impedance: Cable:

• • • •

Connector: Stereo Adapter: Net/shipping weight: Optional accessories:

The K 81 DJ will take heavy usage easily, and their high SPL capability ensures excellent sound quality. Finally, their level of wearing comfort is as impressive as their powerful low end and accurate imaging. With AKG’s 3D-Axis folding mechanism for ease of handling the K 81 DJ fold down into a thin package and are ready for use anytime.

closed-back, dynamic headphones 120 dB/V 5 to 30,000 Hz 3,500 mW 42 ohms 1.8 m single-sided (99,9% oxygen-free); plug-in cable on headphones (mini-XLR connector) gold plated stereo mini jack gold plated 1/8“ to 1/4“ screw-on adapter 280 g (9.9 oz.)/597 g (21.1 oz.) coiled cable

Section:

02

Their comfortable, specially shaped “3D-form” ear pads and a padded genuine-leather headband ensure a perfect fit. They are individually tested and numbered. K 702 – experience pure perfection.

Item number: K 81 DJ

3103H00010

• • • • • •

110

Page 130

199

• • • • • •

Item number: K 702

3102H00010

Type: Sensitivity: Audio Bandwidth: Max. Input Power: Rated Impedance: Cable:

• Connector: • Stereo Adapter: • Net/shipping weight:

closed-back, dynamic headphones 115 dB/V 16 to 24,000 Hz 2,000 mW 32 ohms 2.5 m single-sided (99,9% oxygen-free); plug-in cable on headphones (mini-XLR connector) gold plated stereo mini jack gold plated 1/8“ to 1/4“ screw-on adapter 150 g (5.3 oz.)/343 g (12.1 oz.)

• • • • • • • • • •

2458Z00190

Type: Sensitivity: Audio Bandwidth: Max. Input Power: Rated Impedance: Cable: Connector: Stereo Adapter: Net/shipping weight: Optional accessories:

open-back, dynamic headphones 105 dB/V 10 to 39,800 Hz 200 mW 62 ohms 3 m single-sided (99,9% oxygen-free) gold plated stereo jack plug 6.3 mm (1/4“) gold plated convertible jack plug 3.5/6.3 mm (1/4“ to 1/8“) 235 g (8.3 oz.)/850 g (30 oz.) coiled cable

Headphones/Headsets

111

Page 131


Headphones Home recording Musical instruments Monitoring

Monitoring Noisy environment • Closed back circumaural headphones

• Semi-open hi-fi stereo headphones

• Excellent comfort

Conference Tour guide Interpretation system Language lab, language school

Project studios Home recording • Closed back circumaural headphones

• Low weight for excellent comfort • Skin compatible leatherette ear pads

• Extremely rugged, supraaural dynamic headphones

• Excellent price/performance

• Easy to clean, hygienic • Ideal conference headphones 170

86

185

106

200

215

215

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

165

Section:

02

K 77

K 99

The newly designed K 77 are cost-efficient headphones for various applications. These closed-back headphones are an all-round performer with solid bass and clean highs at a valuable price. A self-adjusting headband, leatherette earpads, and gimbal suspension ensure excellent comfort.

The newly designed K 99 are semi-open stereo headphones which combine excellent sound and optimum price/performance.

Item number: K 77

Item number: K 99

• • • • • • • • •

6000H09210

Type: Sensitivity: Audio Bandwidth: Max. Input Power: Rated Impedance: Cable: Connector: Stereo Adapter: Net/shipping weight:

112

Page 132

86

closed-back, dynamic headphones 115 dB/V 18 to 20,000 Hz 200 mW 32 ohms 3 m single-sided (99,9% oxygen-free) stereo mini plug convertible jack plug (1/8" to 1/4") 190 g (6.7 oz.)/400 g (14.1 oz.)

K 44

Self-adjusting headband, soft leatherette circumaural earpads, and low weight ensure pleasant fit. Large, high-performance 1.6 inch (40 mm) speakers provide a natural, uncolored sound.

• • • • • • • • •

6000H09230

Type: Sensitivity: Audio Bandwidth: Max. Input Power: Rated Impedance: Cable: Connector: Stereo Adapter: Net/shipping weight:

semi-open, dynamic headphones 112 dB/V 18 to 22,000 Hz 200 mW 32 ohms 3 m single-sided (99,9% oxygen-free) stereo mini plug convertible jack plug (1/8" to 1/4") 210 g (7.4 oz.)/400 g (14.1 oz.)

K 10

The K 44 are cost-efficient headphones for different applications, as Project Studios and Home Recording. These closed-back headphones are a true all-round performer with solid bass and clean highs at a value price. The AKG self-adjusting headband, leatherette ear pads, and gimbal suspension ensure good comfort.

Lightweight yet extremely rugged mono headphones. Plastic coated steel wire headband, individually adjustable supraaural earphones. Easy-to-clean, hygienic plastic earcups. Fully serviceable, single cable.

Item number: K 44

Item number: K 10

• • • • • • • • •

6000H09170

Type: Sensitivity: Audio Bandwidth: Max. Input Power: Rated Impedance: Cable: Connector: Stereo Adapter: Net/shipping weight:

closed-back, dynamic headphones 115 dB/V 18 to 20,000 Hz 200 mW 32 ohms 2.5 m single-sided (99,9% oxygen-free) stereo mini plug convertible jack plug 3.5/6.3 mm (1/8" to 1/4") 190 g (6.7 oz.)/400 g (14.1 oz.)

Section:

02

Ideal conference headphones.

• • • • • • • • • • •

2246Z00130

Type: Sensitivity: Frequency range: Impedance: Power handling capybility: THD: Headband pressure: Finish: Cable: Connector: Net/shipping weight:

Dynamic, supraaural/closed-back 98 dB SPL/1 mW 100 to 13,000 Hz 360 ohms 200 mW <1% 2.8 N black 1.5 m (5 ft.), single entry gold plated TS mini jack plug 72 g (2.5 oz.)/110 g (3.9 oz.)

Headphones/Headsets

113

Page 133


Headsets Studio and broadcast applications

On-air commentating on radio and TV

Recording studio and broadcast applications

• Professional headset derived from K 171 Studio headphones

• Closed-back earphones for optimum ambient-noise attenuation

• Closed-back earphones

• Professional headset derived from K 271 Studio headphones

• Shock mounted condenser microphone

• Closed-back earphones for optimum ambient-noise attenuation

• Switchable bass cut filter

• Dynamic microphone optimized for intelligibility of speech

• Complete with two pairs of replaceable ear pads (velour and leather)

• Microphone arm swiveling through 270 degrees for left or right-hand use

closed-back, circumaural dynamic headphones 91 dB SPL/mW, 104 dB/V 16 to 28,000 Hz 200 mW 55 ohms <0.3% 6-pin mini XLR connector 2 x 3-conductor, separable, 3 m (10 ft.) long, coiled section, with 6-pin female mini XLR connector, 1/4" TRS jack plug (headphones), and 3-pin XLR connector w/inte-grated HSC-PA phantom power adapter (microphone) matte black 300 g (10.6 oz.)/755 g (26.4 oz.)

• Finish: • Weight:

With its high quality dynamic microphone that is shock mounted to minimize mechanical noise, the HSD 271 is an ideal tool for high quality productions. AKG lightweight construction and the patented AKG self-adjusting headband ensure excellent comfort for many hours on end. Complete with two pairs of (velour and leather) ear pads that are easy to remove and clean. Item number: HSD 271

2955X00280

MICROPHONE: • Type: • Polar pattern: • Frequency range: • Sensitivity: • Max. SPL for 1% THD: • Equivalent noise level: • Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): • Impedance: • Recommended load impedance: • Power requirement: • Current consumption: HEADPHONES: • Type: • Sensitivity: • Frequency range: • Power rating: • Rated impedance: • T.H.D.: SYSTEM: • Connector: • Cable:

prepolarized condenser microphone cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 25 mV/Pa 126 dB 22 dB-A 72 dB ≤200 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2 mA closed-back, supraaural dynamic headphones 94 dB SPL/mW, 107 dB/V 18 to 26,000 Hz 200 mW 55 ohms <0.4% 6-pin mini XLR connector 2 x 3-conductor, separable, 3 m (10 ft.) long, coiled section, with 6-pin female mini XLR connector, 1/4" TRS jack plug (headphones), and 3-pin XLR connector w/inte-grated HSC-PA phantom power adapter (microphone) matte black 250 g (8.8 oz.)/720 g (25.2 oz.)

• Finish: • Weight:

dynamic hypercardioid 60 to 17,000 Hz 1 mV/Pa (-60 dB) 124/128 dB 15 dB-A ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms closed-back, circumaural dynamic headphones 91 dB SPL/mW, 104 dB/V 16 to 28,000 Hz 200 mW 55 ohms <0.3% 6-pin mini XLR connector 2 x 3-conductor, separable, 3 m (10 ft.) long, coiled section, with 6-pin female mini XLR connector, 1/4" TRS jack plug (headphones), and 3-pin XLR connector (microphone) matte black 305 g (10.8 oz.)/760 g (26.6 oz.)

85

85

HSD 171

Supraaural, closed-back earphones make this headset a truly professional tool for live sound use. Derived from the high quality, extremely accurate K 171 Studio headphones, the HSD 171 uses a speech optimized dynamic microphone that is shock mounted on a microphone arm swiveling through 270 degrees. Item number: HSD 171

2955X00270

MICROPHONE: • Type: • Polar pattern: • Frequency range: • Sensitivity: • Max. SPL for 1%/3% THD: • Equivalent noise level: • Impedance: • Recommended load impedance: HEADPHONES: • Type: • Sensitivity: • Frequency range: • Power rating: • Rated impedance: • T.H.D.: SYSTEM: • Connector: • Cable:

205

200

HSD 271

110

110

190

Supraaural, closed-back earphones make this professional headset the ideal choice for on-air use. Derived from the high quality, extremely accurate K 171 Studio headphones, the HSC 171 uses a speech optimized condenser microphone. Depending on your preferences or available space, you can place the microphone to the left or right of your mouth. The 3-pin XLR microphone connector provides an integrated phantom power adapter with a switchable bass cut filter. Item number: HSC 171

prepolarized condenser microphone cardioid 20 to 20,000 Hz 25 mV/Pa 126 dB 22 dB-A 72 dB ≤200 ohms ≥2,000 ohms 9 to 52 V phantom power ≤2 mA

205

85

110

200

2955X00290

HSC 171

85

200

185

110

This professional headset has been designed specifically for broadcast use. Its high quality condenser microphone is shock mounted to minimize mechanical noise. The phantom power adapter integrated in the 3-pin XLR microphone connector provides a switchable bass cut filter. Complete with two pairs of (velour and leather) ear pads that are easy to remove and clean.

MICROPHONE: • Type: • Polar pattern: • Frequency range: • Sensitivity: • Max. SPL for 1% THD: • Equivalent noise level: • Signal/noise ratio (A-weighted): • Impedance: • Recommended load impedance: • Power requirement: • Current consumption: HEADPHONES: • Type: • Sensitivity: • Frequency range: • Power rating: • Rated impedance: • T.H.D.: SYSTEM: • Connector: • Cable:

Page 134

• Complete with two pairs of replaceable ear pads (velour and leather)

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

HSC 271

114

• Noiseless microswitches for automatic microphone muting

• Headphone auto-mute function 205

• Finish: • Weight:

• Shock mounted dynamic microphone

• Shock mounted transducer

• Switchable bass cut filter

Item number: HSC 271

• Closed-back earphones

• Microphone arm swiveling through 270 degrees for left or right-hand use, with integrated mute switch

• Headphone auto-mute function

02

• Professional headset derived from K 171 Studio headphones

• Professional headset derived from K 271 Studio headphones

• Shock mounted condenser microphone optimized for intelligibility of speech

Section:

Live sound use

02

2955X00260

MICROPHONE: • Type: • Polar pattern: • Frequency range: • Sensitivity: • Max. SPL for 1%/3% THD: • Equivalent noise level: • Impedance: • Recommended load impedance: HEADPHONES: • Type: • Sensitivity: • Frequency range: • Power rating: • Rated impedance: • T.H.D.: SYSTEM: • Connector: • Cable:

• Finish: • Weight:

Section:

dynamic hypercardioid 60 to 17,000 Hz 1 mV/Pa (-60 dBV) 124/128 dB 15 dB-A ≤600 ohms ≥2,000 ohms closed-back, supraaural dynamic headphones 94 dB SPL/mW, 107 dB/V 18 to 26,000 Hz 200 mW 55 ohms <0.4% 6-pin mini XLR connector 2 x 3-conductor, separable, 3 m (10 ft.) long, coiled section, with 6-pin female mini XLR connector, 1/4" TRS jack plug (headphones), and 3-pin XLR connector (microphone) matte black 255 g (9 oz.)/725 g (25.4 oz.)

Headphones/Headsets

115

Page 135


Accessories

Accessories â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Windscreens W 23

W 30

W 32

W 44

W 407

W 414 X

W 444

W 547

For use with ball head microphones approx. 50 mm

For use with CK 31, CK 32, and CK 33

For use with microphones approx. 50 mm (2 in.) in diameter, e.g., CK 61-ULS

For use with C 520

For use with C 417

For use with C 414 XLS, C 414 XL II and C 3000

For use with C 555 L

For use with C 547 BL

Item number: 6000H06210

Item number: 2765H00300

Item number: 6000H06240

Item number: 2344Z01010

Item number: 2366Z06010

Item number: 2802Z05010

Item number: 2656Z10010

Item number: 2448Z00010

For use with CK 69-ULS

Item number: 2568Z40010

W 49

W 68

For use with CK 69-ULS

For use with C 568 B

Item number: 2568Z41010

W 1000

W 3001

W 3004

W 4000

For use with ball head microphones approx. 40 to 50 mm (1.6 to 2 in.) in diam.

For use with C 1000 S

For use with ball head microphones approx. 40 to 50 mm (1.6 to 2 in.) in diam.

D 5, D 7, D 5 WL 1, D 7 WL 1, P 3 S, P 5 and P 5 S

Item number: 6001H05120

Item number: 2331Z14010

Item number: 2630Z00010

Item number: 2630H00040

For use with C 4000 B, C 4500 B-BC, Perception 120, 220, 420 and 820

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

W 48

W 880

Item number: 2802Z02010

Item number: 2168Z30010

Section:

02

Accessories â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Supports W 70 For use with CK 47 and C 747 V11

Item number: 2421Z01010

Page 136

W 77 W 77/P

W 77 M

For use with CK 77 WR and C 577 WR

Wire mesh windscreens for use with CK 77 WR and C 577 WR

Item number: black: 9999N06240 flesh-tone (/P): 9999N06250

Item numbers: black: 6000H05760 flesh-tone (/P): 6000H05780

Section:

02

H 30

H 40/1

H 41

H 47

Universal shock mount

Tie clip for use with all lavalier microphones

Tie pin for use with all lavalier microphones

Shock mount for use with C 747 V11

Item number: 2183Z00010

Item number: 2544Z00030

Item number: 2544Z00020

Item number: 2423Z01010

W 77 Set

W 90

W 98

H 50

H 85

H 300

Windscreen-Set for use with CK 77 WR and C 577 WR

For use with AKG Blue Line capsules CK 91/92/93/94, and C 451 B

For use with CK 98

Stereo bar

Clip for X/Y or MS configurations

Item number: 6000H05750

Item number: 2496Z00010

Item number: 2439Z30010

Item number: 6000H05710

Universal shock mount for all microphones with shaft diameters from 19 to 26 mm (0.75 to 1 in.), e.g. C 414 XLS und C 414 XL II. Item number: 2803Z00080

Item number: 2595Z00010

Page 137


Accessories

Accessories â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Supports/Stand Adapters H 600

SA 44

ST 305

B 18

B 29 L

Shock mount for goosenecks with integrated XLR connector, e.g., CGN 321 E.

Shock mount for all goosenecks 8 mm (0.3 in.) in diameter including reducing socket A 608

For vocal microphones

Heavy-duty table stand dia.: 170 mm (6.7 in.), h: 95 mm (3.7 in.)

Battery operated phantom power supply for one condenser microphone

Battery operated power supply and mini mixer for one or two microphones with L-plug

Item number: 6000H01900

Item number: 2426X00030

Item number: 6001H06320

Item number: 6000H03050

Item number: 2198H00020

Item number: 6000H04620

SA 47

SA 60

SA 61

MPA V L

MKG L

For use with C 747 V11

For use with straight-shaft microphones

For use with conical-shaft microphones

Phantom power adapter with XLR connector for L type MicroMic microphones with integrated bass roll-off switch.

Instrument cable for wireless bodypack transmitters.

Item number: 2186Z00050

Item number: 6000H60010

Item number: 6000H61010

Item number: 3170H00020

Item number: 2455Z00500

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

H 500

Section:

02

Other Accessories

Section:

02

SA 63 For use with WMS handheld transmitters Item number: 6000H63010

Accessories â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Stands/Phantom Power Adapters/Cables

Page 138

GNS 36

MF-DA

MSH 70

360 mm (14 in.) gooseneck, black

Mounting flange for use with GN Series

Short gooseneck for use with C 747 V11

Item number: 6000H03440

Item number: 2647Z00010

Item number: 2419M01020

ST 1

ST 45

ST 46

PF 80

PS 3 F-LOCK

SHZ 80

Folding mini tripod dia.: 260 mm (10 in.), h: 85 mm (3.3 in.)

Low-profile table stand w/off-center threaded stub dia.: 115 mm (4.5 in.)

Miniature stand for small microphonesdia.: 70 mm (2.8 in.), h: 45 mm (1.8 in.)

Universal pop filter for use with vocal recording microphones

Lockable panel-mount XLR connector for goosenecks with integrated 3-pin XLR connector, e.g., CGN 321 E.

Slotted screw link for use with C 747 V11

Item number: 6000H04200

Item number: 6000H03080

Item number: 6000H06320

Item number: 2425Z00010

Item number: 2416Z01020

Item number: 6000H03060

Page 139


Accessories Matrix

Accessories Matrix

n n

n n

Recording and Broadcast Microphones

n

n n

n n

n

n n

n

n n

n

n

n

n

n n

n n

n n n n

n

n

n

n

n n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n Instrumental Microphones

n

Handheld Microphones

n

n

Clip-on Microphones

n n n n

n

Headworn Microphones

n n n

n

n n

n

n

n

n

Lavalier Microphones

n

n

n n

n

n

n n n

n

n

n n

n

n

n

n

n

SHZ 80

PS 3 F-LOCK

PF 80

MSH 70

MF-DA

Other Accessories

GNS 36

n

MPA V L

B 18

n

B 29 L

ST 305

Phantom Power Adapters

ST 46

ST 45

ST 1

SA 63

Stands

SA 61

SA 60

n

SA 47

n

C 12 VR C 451 B/C451 B/ST C 414 XLS, C 414 XL II C 214 C 4000 B C 3000 C 2000 B C 1000 S C 4500 B-BC D 230 C 480 B/ULS 61 CK 69-ULS C 391 B CK 98 Perception 820 Perception 420 Perception 220 Perception 170 Perception 120 Perception 120 USB C5 C 535 EB D 7/D 7 S D 5/D 5 S D 770 D 44 S,D 55 S,D 77 S,D 88 S P3S P 5/P 5 S D 112 D 40 C 430 P2 P4 C 518 M, C 519 M C 518 ML, C 519 ML C 411 L C 516 ML HC 577 C 544 L C 520 C 555 L CK 77 WR C 417 CK 99 L GN E/GN ESP Serie GN Serie GN E 5Pin Serie GN 155 Set CK 31, CK 32, CK 33 CK 47 CK 80 CGN 99 C/S, CGN 99 C/L CGN 99 H/S, CGN 99 H/L D 58 E DGN 99 E HM 1000, CHM 99 C 747 V11 C 547 BL CBL 99, C 562 CM C 568 B

SA 44

n

Product

n

H 600

n

H 500

H 300

n

H 85

H 47

H 41

H 40/1

n

H 50

n

H 30

W 4000

W 3004

W 3001

W 1000

W 880

W 547

W 444

W 414

W 407

W 98

W 90

W 77 Set

W 77 M

W 77, W 77/P

W 80

W 70

W 68

W 48/ W 49

W 44

W 32

W 30

W 23

n

Stand Adapters

Boundary Layer and Shotgun Microphones

Handheld Microphones Boundary Layer and Shotgun Microphones

Lavalier Microphones

Headworn Microphones

Clip-on Microphones

02

Instrumental Microphones

Section:

C 12 VR C 451 B/C451 B/ST C 414 XLS, C 414 XL II C 214 C 4000 B C 3000 C 2000 B C 1000 S C 4500 B-BC D 230 C 480 B/ULS 61 CK 69-ULS C 391 B CK 98 Perception 820 Perception 420 Perception 220 Perception 170 Perception 120 Perception 120 USB C5 C 535 EB D 7/D 7 S D 5/D 5 S D 770 D 44 S,D 55 S,D 77 S,D 88 S P3S P 5/P 5 S D 112 D 40 C 430 P2 P4 C 518 M, C 519 M C 518 ML, C 519 ML C 411 L C 516 ML HC 577 C 544 L C 520 C 555 L CK 77 WR C 417 CK 99 L GN E/GN ESP Serie GN Serie GN E 5Pin Serie GN 155 Set CK 31, CK 32, CK 33 CK 47 CK 80 CGN 99 C/S, CGN 99 C/L CGN 99 H/S, CGN 99 H/L D 58 E DGN 99 E HM 1000, CHM 99 C 747 V11 C 547 BL CBL 99, C 562 CM C 568 B

Supports

n n

n

n n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n n

n

n

n

n n

n

n

n n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n n

n n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n n

n

n

n

n

n n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n n

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Recording and Broadcast Microphones

Product

Windscreens

Section:

02

n n n

n

n

n

n n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n n n n

n n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

n n n

n

n

n

n

n

All accessories listed above are available separately. Accessories supplied as standard with specific products are listed in the specifications tables for the appropriate products.

Page 140

Page 141


Application Guide

Application Guide Recording Microphones Application Speech Lead/Solo Vocals

Advanced

Premium

C 1000, C 2000 B, Perception 120, Perception 120 USB

C 3000, C 4000 B, Perception 220, Perception 420, Perception 820

C 214, C 414 XL S, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR

Wind Instruments

C 1000 S, C 2000 B, Perception 120, Perception 120 USB

C 3000, C 4000 B, Perception 220, Perception 420, Perception 820

C 214, C 414 XL S, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR

C 3000, C 4000 B, Perception 220, Perception 420, Perception 820

C 12 VR, C 414 XLS

C 2000 B, Perception 170, Perception 120, Perception 120 USB

C 1000 S, C 3000, C 4000 B, Perception 220, Perception 420

C 214, C 414 XL S, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR, C 451 B

Guitar-Amp

C 2000 B, Perception 170, Perception 120, Perception 120 USB

C 1000 S, C 3000, C 4000 B, Perception 220, Perception 420, Perception 820

C 214, C 414 XL S, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR

Double Bass

C 4000 B

D 112, Perception 420, Perception 820

C 214, C 414 XL S, C 414 XL II

Perception 220

C 3000, C 4000 B, Perception 420, Perception 820

C 214, C 414 XL S, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR, D 112

Violin

C 451 B, C 1000 S, C 3000, C 4000 B, Perception 120, Perception 220, Perception 120 USB

C 214, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR, Perception 420, Pereption 820

C 414 XL S

Cello

C 451 B, C 1000 S, C 3000, D 112, Perception 220, Perception 820

C 4000 B, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR, Perception 420

C 214, C 414 XL S

Zither

C 2000 B, Perception 170, Perception 120, Perception 120 USB

C 1000 S, C 3000, C 4000 B, C 414 XL S, Perception 220, Perception 420, Perception 820

C 214, C 451 B, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR

C 3000, C 214, Perception 220

Perception 420, Perception 820, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR

C 414 XLS

Grand Piano (Rock & Jazz)

C 2000 B, Perception 170, Perception 120, Perception 120 USB

C 1000 S, C 3000, C 4000 B, C 414 XLS, Perception 220, Perception 420, Perception 820

C 451 B, C 214, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR

Upright Piano

C 2000 B, Perception 170, Perception 120, Perception 120 USB

C 1000 S, C 3000, C 4000 B, C 414 XLS, Perception 220, Perception 420, Perception 820

C 451 B, C 214, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR

C 2000 B, C 3000

C 4000 B, Perception 220, Perception 420, Perception 820

C 214, C 414 XL S, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR

C 2000 B, Perception 170, Perception 120, Perception 120 USB

C 3000, C 4000 B, C 414 XLS, Perception 220, Perception 420, Perception 820

C 214, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR

Trombone

C 3000

C 4000 B, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR, Perception 220, Perception 820

C 214, C 414 XLS, Perception 420

French Horn

C 3000

C 4000 B, Perception 220, Perception 820

C 214, C 414 XLS, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR, Perception 420

C 3000, Perception 220

C 4000 B, D 112, C 214, C 414 XLS, C 12 VR, Perception 420

C 414 XLS

C 3000, C 4000 B, C 214, Perception 220, Perception 420

C 414 XLS, 414 XL II, C 12 VR, C 451 B

Trompet Saxophone

Tuba Clarinet

C 1000 S, C 2000 B, Perception 820

C 2000 B, C 3000, C 4000 B, Perception 220, Perception 420

C 214, C 414 XLS, 414 XL II, C 12 VR, C 451 B

Harmonica

C 1000 S, Perception 820, Perception 170, Perception 120, Perception 120 USB

C 2000 B, C 3000, C 4000 B, C 414 XLS, Perception 220, Perception 420

C 214, C 414 XL II, C 451 B

C 2000 B, D 112, Perception 170

C 1000 S, C 3000, C 4000 B, Perception 220, Perception 420, Perception 820

C 451 B, C 214, C 414 XLS, C 414 XL II, C 12 VR

Kick Drum

C 3000, Perception 220

C 4000 B, Perception 420, Perception 820

D 112, C 214, C 414 XLS

Snare Drum

Perception 170

C 1000 S

C 451 B, C 214, C 414 XLS, C 414 XL II

TOM-TOMS

C 2000 B, Perception 170

C 451 B, C 1000 S, C 3000, C 4000 B, D 112, Perception 220, Perception 420, Perception 820

C 214, C 414 XLS, C 414 XL II

Perception 170

Perception 820

C 451 B

Perception 170, Perception 120

C 1000 S, C 2000 B, C 4000 B

C 451 B

HI-HAT

Stage Microphones Application

Page 142

Standard

Advanced

Premium

D 88 S, WMS 40 PRO, SO 40, Perception Wireless Vocal Set

D 5, C 5, C 520, WMS 450

Backing Vocals/Choir

D 77 S, D 88 S, P 3 S, P 5/P 5 S, Perception Wireless Vocal Set

D 5, C 5, C 520

D 7, C 535 EB

D 770 x2, C 430 x2, Perception 170, Perception 220

C 411 + C 1000 S, C 516 x2, C 391 B x2, C 3000 x2, C 542, C 214

C 4000 B x2, C 480 B/CK 61, C 414 XLS

D 77 S, D 770, C 430, Perception 170, P 3 S, Perception Wireless Instrumental Set

C 411, C 1000 S, C 3000, D 40, WMS 450, C 214

C 451 B, C 4500 B-BC, WMS 4500

Acoustic String Instruments

D 77, P 4, P 2, P 3 S, Perception 220, Perception Wireless Instrumental Set

C 519, C 1000 S, C 3000, D 40, WMS 450, C 214

C 4500 B-BC, WMS 4500

Guitar Amp

D 77 S, D 770, P 4, P 3 S, Perception 220

D 40, C 516, WMS 450, C 3000, C 214

C 4500 B-BC, WMS 4500, C 414 XL II

Bass-Amp

D 770, P 2, P 3 S, Perception 220

D 40, WMS 450, C 516, D 112, C 214

C 4500 B-BC, WMS 4500

P 2, Perception 220

C 411, C 516, C 214

D 112

D 88 S, D 770, P 5/P 5 S, P 4, P 2, C 430, Perception 120 Perception 170, Perception 220, Perception 420

D 5, D 40, D 112, C 1000 S, C 2000 B, C 3000, C 214

C 4000,C 4500 B-BC, C 480 B / CK 61

Snare Drum

D 77 S, P 4, P 3 S, Perception 170

D 40, C 518, C 214

C 451 B, C 747 V11, C 480 B / CK 61

Kick Drum

P2

CBL 99

D 112, C 4500 B-BC, C 547 BL

D 770, C 430, Perception 120, Perception 170

C 1000 S C 391 B, C 451, C 535 EB, C 3000, C 214

C 4000 B, C 414 XLS

D 77 S, P 4, P 2, P 3 S, Perception 170, Perception 420

D 40, C 518, C 519, C 451 B, C 3000, C 214

C 4000 B

Home Recording

Cymbals/Hi-Hat Tom-Toms/Percussion

Installed Microphones Standard

Advanced

Premium

Conferencing, Podium, Discussion Ceiling Mount/Choir – Flown

CBL 99

HM 1000 + CK 31/CK 33, PCC®-130

HM 1000 + CK 47, PCC®-170

Ceiling Mount/Choir – Boundary Mic

CBL 99

C 562 CM, PZM®-185

C 547 BL, PCC®-160

Handheld microphone – wireless

WMS 450 Vocal Set/D 5, WMS 470 Vocal Set/D 5

WMS 4500

DMS 700

Handheld microphone – hardwire

D5

C5

D 7, C 535

Application

Lavalier/Headset – wireless

WMS 450 Presenter Set, WMS 470 Presenter Set

WMS 4500

DMS 700, C 520 L

Lavalier/Headset – hardwire

CK 99 L + MPA V L

C 555 L + MPA V L

C 520

CBL 99, MB 3

PCC®-130, C 562 CM, MB 4

PCC®-170, C 547 BL

CGN 99 C/S

GN ESP + CK 31/CK 33

Architectural Series, C 747 V11

Stand/Table Mount – Boundary Mic Stand/Table Mount – Gooseneck Theatres and Multipurpose Halls Ceiling Mount/Choir – Flown

CHM 99

HM 1000 + CK 31/CK 33

HM 1000 + CK 47

CBL 99, PZM®-185

PZM®-60, PZM®-30D

C 547 BL, PCC®-160

Handheld microphone – wireless

WMS 450 Vocal Set/D 5, WMS 470 Vocal Set/D 5

WMS 4500

DMS 700

Handheld microphone – hardwire

D5

C5

D7, C 535 EB DMS 700, CK 77, HC 577 L

Lavalier/Headset – wireless

WMS 450 Presenter Set, WMS 470 Presenter Set

WMS 4500

Lavalier/Headset – hardwire

CK 99 L + MPA V L

C 417 L + MPA V L

C 577 WR

Stand/Table Mount – Boundary Mic

CBL 99, PZM®-185

PZM®-60, PZM®-30D

C 547 BL, PCC®-160

CGN 99 C/S

GN ESP + CK 31/CK 33

Architectural Series, C 747 V11

CBL 99

MB 3, MB 4, PZM®-185

C 547 BL, PCC®-160

CGN 99 C/S

GN ESP + CK 31/CK 80

Architectural Series, C 747 V11 HM 1000 + CK 47

Stand/Table Mount – Gooseneck Places of Worship Altar, pulpit – Boundary Mic Altar, pulpit – Gooseneck Ceiling Mount/Choir – Flown

CHM 99

HM 1000 + CK 31/CK 33

Handheld microphone – wireless

Perception Wireless Vocal Set

WMS 450 Vocal Set/C 5, WMS 470 Vocal Set/C 5

WMS 4500

Handheld microphone – hardwire

D5

C5

D 7, C 535 EB

Lavalier/Headset – wireless

Perception Wireless Sports Set

WMS 450 Headworn Set, WMS 450 Presenter Set, WMS 470 Headworn Set, WMS 470 Presenter Set

C 520 L, WMS 4500 + PT 4500

Lavalier/Headset – hardwire

CK 99 + MPA V L

C 417 L + MPA V L

HC 577 L + MPA V L

HM 1000 + CK 80

HM 1000 + CK 31/CK 33

HM 1000 + CK 47

CBL 99

PZM®-10, C 562 CM

PZM®-11

Perception Wireless Vocal Set

WMS 450 Vocal Set/C 5, WMS 470 Vocal Set/C 5

WMS 4500

Recreational Facilities, Restaurants, Clubs, Bars Ceiling Mount – Flown

Lead Vocals Piano

Premium

Ceiling Mount/Choir – Boundary Mic

C 1000 S, Perception 820, Perception 170, Perception 120, Perception 120 USB

Cymbals

Advanced

Double Bass

Flute

Bongos/Congas

Standard

Application

D 7, C 535 EB, WMS 4500

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

C 1000 S, C 2000 B, Perception 120, Perception 120 USB

Acoustic Guitar

Grand Piano (classical)

02

Standard

Backing Vocals

Bass-Amp

Section:

Stage Microphones

Ceiling Mount – Boundary Mic Handheld microphone – wireless Handheld microphone – hardwire Headset – wireless

D5

C5

D 7, C 535

Perception Wireless Sports Set

WMS 450 Headworn Set, WMS 470 Headworn Set

C 520 L, WMS 4500 + PT 4500

C 555 L + MPA V L

C 520

CBL 99

PCC®-130, MB 3, MB 4

PCC®-170, C 547 BL

CGN 99 C/S

GN ESP + CK 31/CK 80

Architectural Series, C 747 V11

Headset – hardwire Stand/Table Mount – Boundary Mic Stand/Table Mount – Gooseneck

Section:

02

Page 143


Patents/Key to Product Names

Patents

Key to AKG Product Names Here is a list of the prefixes and suffixes we use to designate the various types of products:

02

Page 144

Description

Related Products

AT 395.225 DE 4.103.784 JP 2.815.488

Electrostatic transducer

C 12 VR, C 214, C 414 XLS, C 414 XL II C 4000 B, C 4500 B-BC

AT 392.182 DE 4.021.661

Electrode support for condenser transducer

C 5, C 5 WL1, C 451 B, C 1000 S, C 2000 B, CK 91, CK 92, CK 93, CK 94, CK 98

AT 403.751 US 6,185,809 EP 814.637 (DE, DK, FI, FR, GB, IT, NL)

Varimotion â&#x20AC;&#x201C; multiple-thickness diaphragm for dynamic transducer

D 40, D 5, D 5 S, D 5 WL1, D 7, D 7 S, D 7 WL 1, D 230, D 770, K 141 MK II, K 171 MK II, K 240 MK II, K 271 MK II, K 702

AT 407.322 US 6,351,543

Pressure compensation cavity for condenser transducer

CK 77 WR, C 577 WR, HC 577

AT 411.513 US 6,510,231

Electrostatic transducer

C 2000 B

US 6,622,820

Pop filter

C 4500 B-BC

AT 408.706 US 6,639,991 ZL 01116806

Acoustics slot resistor for dynamic transducer

K 141 Studio MK II, K 171 Studio MK II, K 240 Studio MK II, K 271 Studio MK II

HSC

AT 408.280 GB 2.349.230 US 6,344,730

Remaining battery life

WMS 450, WMS 470, WMS 4500, IVM 4

HSD

AT 410.994 ZL 021302618 US 6,619,969

Plug

AT 414.198 JP 3.984.595 US 7,172,052 ZL 200410003774.6 RU 2.282.954

3D-Axis folding mechanism

AT 413.923 RU 2.282.953 JP 3.984.954 ZL 200410003773.1 US 7,072,483

3D-Axis folding mechanism

Microphone, Headphone, and System Prefixes:

Accessory Prefixes:

Microphone, Headphone, and System Suffixes:

C

B

B

Condenser microphone, e.g., C 5

Battery power supply, e.g., B 18, B 29 L

Bass rolloff or bass cut filter, e.g., C 568 B

CK

GNS

BL

Condenser microphone capsule, e.g., CK 98

Gooseneck system, e.g., GNS 36

Boundary microphone, e.g., C 400 BL

D

Support, e.g., H 30

CM

MPA

Ceiling mount microphone, e.g., C 562 CM

Phantom power adapter for microphones, e.g., MPA V L

E

Dynamic microphone, e.g., D 5

GB 40 FLEXX

K 181 DJ, K 81 DJ

GN Gooseneck for Discreet Acoustics Series microphones, e.g., GN 15 E

Headset with condenser microphone, e.g., HSC 271

IVM 4

EP 641.143 (AT, DE, DK, FR, GB, NL, SE) JP 3.565.908 US 5.544.249

Method of Simulating Sound Impression

SST 4, IVM 4

AT 412.682 ZL 02131918.9 US 6,789,311 JP 4271919

Flat wire voice coil

US 7,439,706

Battery control

HT 4500, PT 4500, CU 4000, BP 4000, SPR 4,

EP 1.923.994

Audio Compressor

IVM 4, DMS 700

Stand adapter, e.g., SA 60, SA 61

L

HT

Microphones or systems with miniature-XLR connector, e.g., C 417 L

Handheld transmitter for wireless microphone systems, e.g., HT 4500

W

M

PT

SE Powering module for modular microphones, e.g., SE 300 B

SR K 702

SA

Floor or table stand, e.g., ST 1, ST 45

Bodypack transmitter for wireless microphone systems, e.g., PT 4500 Stereo multiplex Encoder

Gooseneck for microphones, e.g., MSH 70

XLR connector. e.g., GN 15 E. Also used for some earlier microphone models, to distinguish versions with XLR connectors, e.g., C 535 EB, from versions with DIN connectors

ST

Headphones, e.g., K 240 MK II

ZL 0211301956

MSH

Headset with dynamic microphone, e.g., HSD 271

K K 181 DJ, K 81 DJ

H

Stationary receiver for wireless microphone systems, e.g., SR 4500

WMS

Windscreen, e.g., W 23, W 32

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

Patent Numbers

Section:

02

Modular System like D 3800 M or C 519 M

ML Microphones or systems with miniature-XLR connector, e.g., C 518 ML

/P Microphones in flesh-color finish, e.g., C 477 WR L/P

PP Microphones with phantom power adapter provided, e.g., C 417 PP

S On/off switch, e.g., D 5 S

Wireless microphone system, e.g., WMS 4500

Page 145


Comparison chart

Op tio na la cc es so rie s

ac ce ss or ies

6 dB/octave at 100 Hz, 12 dB/octave at 130 Hz

≤200 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

from supplied N 12 VR power supply

from supplied N 12 VR power supply

12-pin DIN

green/gold

42 dia. x 225 mm (1.7 dia. x 8.9 in.)

680 g (24 oz.)/ 4.5 kg (9.9 lbs.)

H 15/T, MK-Tube, N 12 VR, W 42

C 451 B

cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

9 mV/Pa (-41 dBV)

for 0.5% THD: 135/145/155 dB (0/-10/-20 dB)

18 dB-A

76 dB

0 dB, 10 dB, 20 dB selectable

flat, 12 dB/ octave at 75 or 150 Hz, selectable

≤200 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

satin nickel plated

19 dia. x 160 mm (0.75 dia. x 6.3 in.)

125 g (4.4 oz.)/ 760 g (1.7 lbs.)

SA 60, Sound Tool Case, W 90

C 414 XL S

omnidirectional, wide cardioid, cardioid, hypercardioid, figure eight

20 to 20,000 Hz (see frequency response traces)

23 mV/Pa (-33 dBV) ± 0.5 dB

for 0.5% THD: 200/400/800/ 1600 Pa = 140/146/152/ 158 dB (0/-6/ -12/-18 dB)

6 dB-A (0 dB preattenuation)

88 dB

-6 dB, -12 dB, -18 dB, switchable

12 dB/octave at 40 Hz and 80 Hz 6 dB/octave at 160 Hz

≤200 ohms

≥2,200 ohms

48 V phantom power

approximately 4.5 mA

3-pin XLR to IEC

dark grey/silver

50 x 38 x 160 mm (2.0 x 1.5 x 6.3 in.)

300 g (10.6 oz.)

H 85, PF 80, Soundtool Case, W 414 X

H 50, ST 305

C 414 XL II

omnidirectional, wide cardioid, cardioid, hypercardioid, figure eight

20 to 20,000 Hz (see frequency response traces)

23 mV/Pa (-33 dBV) ± 0.5 dB

for 0.5% THD: 200/400/800/ 1600 Pa = 140/146/152/ 158 dB (0/-6/ -12/-18 dB)

6 dB-A (0 dB preattenuation)

88 dB

-6 dB, -12 dB, -18 dB, switchable

12 dB/octave at 40 Hz and 80 Hz 6 dB/octave at 160 Hz

≤200 ohms

≥2,200 ohms

48 V phantom power

approximately 4.5 mA

3-pin XLR to IEC

dark grey/gold

50 x 38 x 160 mm (2.0 x 1.5 x 6.3 in.)

300 g (10.6 oz.)

H 85, PF 80, Soundtool Case, W 414 X

H 50, ST 305

Cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

20 mV/Pa

for 0.5 % THD: 136 / 156 dB SPL

13 dB-A

81 dB

0/-20 dB, switchable

160 Hz, 6 dB/ Octave, switchable

≤200 ohms

≥1,000 ohm

12 to 52 V

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

matte grayish blue

160 x 56 mm (6.3 x 2.2 in.)

280 g (9.9 oz.)/ 1450 g (3.2 lbs.)

H 85 Shock Mount, W 214 Windscreen, Metal Carrying Case H 85, Sound Tool Case, W 214

B 18, PF 80, SA 61, ST 305

C 4000 B

St an da rd

Ne t/s hi pp in g

we ig ht Di m en sio ns

10 dB, 20 dB, selectable

Cu rre nt

72 dB

Po we rin g

22 dB-A

Im pe da nc e

Fin ish

co ns um pt ion

61 93 8) (IE C

Re c loa omm d im end pe ed da nc e

Ba ss cu tf ilt er

pa d Pr ea tte nu at ion

Co nn ec to r

Recording Microphones

Si gn (A al/n -w o eig ise ht ra ed tio )

for 3% THD: 128/138/148 dB

PF 80

Section:

omnidirectional, cardioid, hypercardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

25 mV/Pa (-32 dBV)

for 0.5% THD: 145/155 dB

8 dB-A

86 dB

10 dB, switchable

12 dB/octave at 100 Hz

≤200 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

silver grey

58 dia. x 183 mm (2.3 dia. x 7.2 in.)

450 g (1 lb.)/ 1 kg (2.2 lbs.)

H 85, Sound Tool Case, W 4000

B 18, PF 80, SA 61, ST 305

C 3000

cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

20 mV/Pa (-32 dBV)

for 0.5% THD: 140/150 dB

14 dB-A

80 dB

10 dB, switchable

6 dB/octave below 500 Hz

≤200 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

silver grey

53 dia. x 162 mm (2.1 dia. x 6.4 in.)

320 g (11.3 oz.)/ 950 g (2.1 lbs.)

H 85, Sound Tool Case

B 18, PF 80, SA 61, W 414 X, ST 305

C 2000 B

cardioid

30 to 20,000 Hz

20 mV/Pa (-34 dBV)

for 5% THD: 140/150 dB

20 dB-A

74 dB

10 dB, switchable

6 dB/octave below 500 Hz

≤200 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

silver grey

53 dia. x 159 mm (2.1 dia. x 6.3 in.)

325 g (11.5 oz.)/ 950 g (2 lbs.)

H 85, Sound Tool Case

B 18, PF 80, SA 61, ST 305

C 1000 S

cardioid, hypercardioid (with PPC 1000 mounted)

50 to 20,000 Hz

6 mV/Pa (-44 dBV)

for 1% THD: 137 dB

21 dB-A

73 dB

≤200 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power or internal 9 V battery

approx. 2 mA

3-pin XLR

matte silver enamel

34 dia. x 220 mm (1.4 dia. x 8.7 in.)

320 g (11.3 oz.)/ 650 g (1.4 lbs.)

PB 1000, PPC 1000, SA 63, Sound Tool Case, W 1000

H 30, PF 80, ST 305

cardioid

30 to 20,000 Hz

20 mV/Pa (-34 dBV)

for 0.5% THD: 145/155 dB

8 dB-A

86 dB

≤200 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

silver grey

58 dia. x 183 mm (2.3 dia. x 7.2 in.)

450 g (1 lb.)/ 1 kg (2.2 lbs.)

H 85, Sound Tool Case, W 4000

B 18, PF 80, SA 61, ST 305

omnidirectional

40 to 20,000 Hz

2.5 mV/Pa (-52 dBV)

≤320 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

3-pin XLR

dark grey

50 dia. x 218 mm (2 dia. x 8.3 in.)

225 g (7.9 oz.)/ 840 g (1.9 lbs.)

SA 44

H 30, SA 61, W 23, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

C 480 B combULS/61

cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

40/20/ 6.3 mV/Pa (-28/-34/-44 dBV)

for 0.5% THD: 134/140/ 144 dB

13/11/17 dB-A

81/83/77 dB

+6/0/-10 dB, selectable

≤150 ohms

≥2.000 ohms// 1.000 pF

3-pin XLR

matte black

21 dia. X 173 mm (0.8 dia. x 6.8 in.)

140/500g (4.9 oz./1.1 lbs)

W 32 windscreen, SA 60, Sound Tool Case

H 30, H 50, H 85, H 300, PF 80, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

CK 61-ULS

cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

40/20/ 6,3 mV/Pa (-28/-34/-44 dBV)

(for 0,5% THD) 134/140/144 dB

13/11/17 dB-A

81/83/77 dB

+6/0/-10 dB, selectable

matte black

21 dia. x 23/27 mm (0.8 dia. x 0.9/ 1.1 in.)

25 g ( 0.9 oz.)/ 150 g (5.3 oz.)

W 32 windscreen

C 4500 B-BC

D 230

Page 146

Eq u (IE ival C ent 60 n 26 ois 8- e 4) le ve l

10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV) 10-dB increase, selectable by internal switch

M ax fo . SP rx L % TH D

30 to 20,000 Hz

Se ns iti vit y

cardioid, omnidirectional, figure-eight, and 6 intermediate positions, remotely selectable

20 dB, switchable

6 dB/octave at 120 Hz

12 dB/octave at 70 and 150 Hz

through C 480 B

through C 480 B

through C 480 B

through C 480 B

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

02

C 12 VR

C 214

Section:

Fr eq ue nc yr an ge

Po lar pa tte rn

Comparison chart

02

Page 147


Page 148

Op tio na la cc es so rie s

ac ce ss or ies

we ig ht

through C 480 B

through C 480 B

matte black

21 dia. x 23/27 mm (0.8 dia. x 0.9/ 1.1 in.)

25 g ( 0.9 oz.)/ 150 g (5.3 oz.)

W 32 windscreen

CK 63-ULS

hypercardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

40/20/6.3 mV/ Pa (-28/-34/ -44 dBV)

for 0.5% THD: 134/140/144 dB

13/11/17 dB-A

81/83/77 dB

+6/0/-10 dB, selectable

through C 480 B

through C 480 B

matte black

21 dia. x 23/27 mm (0.8 dia. x 0.9/ 1.1 in.)

25 g ( 0.9 oz.)/ 150 g (5.3 oz.)

W 32 windscreen

A 62

CK 69-ULS

hypercardioid/ directional

20 to 18,000 Hz

54/27/8,5 mV/ Pa (-25/-31/ -41 dBV)

134/140/142 dB (for 0,5% THD)

11/9/15 dB-A

83/85/79 dB

+6/0/-10 dB, selectable

through C 480 B

through C 480 B

matte black

21 dia. x 176/ 317 mm (0.8 dia. x 6.9./ 12.4 in.)

70/500g (2.4 oz./1.1 lbs.)

W 48, W 49

H 30

CK 91

cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV)

132/142 dB (for 1% THD)

17 dB-A

77 dB

through SE 300 B

through SE 300 B

bayonet mount

dark grey

19 dia. x 36/51 mm (0.7 dia. x 1.4/2 in.)

35 g (1.2 oz.)/ 200 g (7.1 oz.)

W 90

CK 92

omnidirectional

20 to 20,000 Hz

10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV)

132/142 dB (for 1% THD)

17 dB-A

77 dB

through SE 300 B

through SE 300 B

bayonet mount

dark grey

19 dia. x 36/51 mm (0.7 dia. x 1.4/2 in.)

35 g (1.2 oz.)/ 200 g (7.1 oz.)

W 90

CK 93

hypercardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV)

132/142 dB (for 1% THD)

17 dB-A

77 dB

through SE 300 B

through SE 300 B

bayonet mount

dark grey

19 dia. x 36/51 mm (0.7 dia. x 1.4/2 in.)

35 g (1.2 oz.)/ 200 g (7.1 oz.)

W 90

CK 94

figure-eight

20 to 20,000 Hz

10 mV/Pa (-40 dBV)

132/142 dB (for 1% THD)

22 dB-A

72 dB

through SE 300 B

through SE 300 B

bayonet mount

dark grey

19 dia. x 43/59 mm (0.7 dia. x 1.7/ 2.3 in.)

45 g (1.9 oz.)/ 200 g (7.1 oz.)

W 90

CK 98

hypercardioid/ directional

20 to 20,000 Hz

25 mV/Pa (-32 dBV)

124/134 dB (for 1% THD)

17 dB-A

77 dB

through SE 300 B

through SE 300 B

bayonet mount

dark grey

19 dia. x 247/ 262 mm (0.7 dia. x 9.7/10.3 in.)

80 g (2.8 oz.)/ 500 g (1.1 lb.)

W 98

H 30

C 391 B

cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

10 mV/Pa

132/142 dB (for 1% THD)

17 dB-A

77 dB

/- 10 dB, selectable

12 dB/octave at 75 HZ

≤200 ohms

≥1000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

dark grey

19 dia 146 mm (0.7 dia. x 5.7 in.)

80/500g (2.8 oz./1.1 lbs.)

W 98

H 30

Perception 820 Tube

cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

20 mV/Pa (-34 dBV ±3 dB)

135/155 0/-20 dB (0,5% dB) (for 0,5% THD)

16 dB-A

78 dB

/-20 dB (selectable via remote control)

12 dB/octave at 80 Hz (selectable via remote control)

≤200 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

via remote control

7-pin XLS (this product only)

53 dia. x 212 mm (2.1 dia. x 8.3 in.)

870/5400g (1.9/11.9 lbs.)

Sound Tool Case, EU/UK/US energyand microphone cable, spider suspension

PF 80, ST 305, W 4000

Perception 420

Cardioid, omnidirectional, figure-eight

20 to 20,000 Hz

28 mV/Pa (-31 dBV)

135/155 0/-20 dB (0,5% dB) (for 0,5 % THD)

16 dB-A

78 dB

0 dB, -20 dB

12 dB/octave at 300 Hz

≤200 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

48 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

metallic blue/ nickel grille

53 dia. x 165 mm/ 2 x 6.3 in.

525 g (18.5 oz.)/ 1,970 g (4.3 lb.)

metal case, spider suspension

PF 80, ST 305, W 4000

Perception 220

cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

18 mV/Pa (-35 dBV)

135 dB/155 dB (0/-20 dB) (for 0,5% THD)

16 dB-A

78 dB

0 dB, -20 dB

12 dB/octave at 300 Hz

<200 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

48 V phantom power

<2 mA

3-pin XLR

metallic blue/ nickel grille

53 dia. x 165 mm (2.1 dia. x 6.5 in.)

525 g (18.5 oz.)/ 1,970 g (4.3 lb.)

metal case, spider suspension

PF 80, ST 305, W 4000

Perception 170

cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

12 mV/Pa (-38 dBV)

135 / 155 dB SPL (0 / -20 dB) (for 0,5% THD)

< 21 dB-A

73 dB (re 1 Pa)

0 dB, -20 dB

12 dB/octave at 300 Hz

≤200 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

48 V phantom powe

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR-type (pin #2 hot)

metallic blue

22 dia. X 160 mm/ 0.09 x 6.3 in.

130 g (4.6 oz.)/ 455 g (16 oz.)

SA 45

H 30, H 50, H 300, SA 60, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305, PF 80, W 32

Perception 120

cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

22 mV/Pa (-33 dBV)

130/150 dB (0/-20 dB) (for 0,5% THD)

22 dB-A

62 dB

0 dB, -20 dB

12 dB/octave at 300 Hz

<200 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

48 V phantom power

<3 mA

3-pin XLR

metallic blue

53 dia. x 165 mm (2.1 dia. x 6.5 in.)

525 g (18.5 oz.)/ 955 g (33.7 oz.)

stand adapter

PF 80, ST 305, W 4000

Perception 120 USB

cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

0 dB, -20 dB

6 dB/octave at 120 Hz

USB

matte grayish blue

53 dia. x 165 mm (2.1 dia. x 6.5 in.)

460 g (18.8 oz.)/ 1050 g (37 oz.)

stand adapter, table stand, USB cable

PF 80, W 4000

power supply via USB

St an da rd

+6/0/-10 dB, selectable

Fin ish

81/83/77 dB

Co nn ec to r

13/11/17 dB-A

Cu rre nt

for 0.5% THD: 134/140/144 dB

Po we rin g

40/20/6.3 mV/ Pa (-28/-34/ -44 dBV)

Im pe da nc e

Ne t/s hi pp in g

co ns um pt ion

61 93 8) (IE C

Re c loa omm d im end pe ed da nc e

Ba ss cu tf ilt er

pa d Pr ea tte nu at ion

Si gn (A al/n -w o eig ise ht ra ed tio )

Eq u (IE ival C ent 60 n 26 ois 8- e 4) le ve l

20 to 20,000 Hz

M ax fo . SP rx L % TH D

omnidirectional

Se ns iti vit y

Di m en sio ns

Recording Microphones

02

CK 62-ULS

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

Fr eq ue nc yr an ge

Po lar pa tte rn

Comparison chart

Section:

02

Page 149


Mikrofonetui, SA 61

B 18, H 30, H 50, SA 44, W 23, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

≤200 ohms

≥2000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

typ. 3 mA

3-pin XLR

matte grayish blue

length: 185.2 mm (7.3 in.) diameter: 51 mm (2 in.)

345 g (12.2 oz.)/ 660 g (1.5 lbs.)

Microphone bag, SA 51, PB 1000

B 18, H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305, W 23, W 880

≤ 600 ohms

≥ 2000 ohms

3-pin XLR

matte grayish blue

length: 185.2 mm (7.3 in.) diameter: 51 mm (2 in.)

340 g (12 oz.)/ 655 g (1.45 lbs.)

Microphone bag, H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, replacement inner ST 46, ST 305, windscreen W 23, W 880, W 3004

18 dB-A

≤600 ohms

≥2000 ohms

3-pin XLR

matte grayish blue

length: 185.2 mm (7.3 in.) diameter: 51 mm (2 in.)

340 g (12 oz.)/ 655 g (1.45 lbs.)

Microphone bag, SA 51

H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305, W 23, W 880, W 3004

22 dB-A

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

3-pin XLR

matte black

50 dia. x 181 mm (2 x 7.1 in.)

290 g (10.4 oz.)/ 650 g (1.4 lbs.)

microphone bag, SA 44

H 30, H 50, SA 61, W 23, W 880, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

length: 186 mm 260 g (0.57 lbs.)/ (7.3 in.) diameter: 1,200 g (2.65 lbs.) 52.5 mm (2.07 in.)

stand adapter D 88 S/XLR: 5m (16.5 ft.) XLR to XLR cable D 88 S/Jack: 5m (16.5 ft.) XLR to 1/4" jack cable

W 23, W 880, H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

Zinc/alloy diecast

length: 178 mm 260 g (0.57 lbs.)/ (7 in.) diameter: 1,200 g (2.65 lbs.) 52.5 mm (2.07 in.)

stand adapter D 77 S/XLR: 5m (16.5 ft.) XLR to XLR cable D 77 S/Jack: 5m (16.5 ft.) XLR to 1/4" jack cable

W 23, W 880, H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

600 ohms

Zinc/alloy diecast

length: 243 mm (9.6 in.) diameter: 52.5 mm (2.07 in.)

380 g (0.84 lbs.)/ 920 g (2.03 lbs.)

fixed 5 m (16.5 ft.) cable, w/mini jack plug, mini to 1/4" adapter plug

W 23, W 880, H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

600 ohms

Plastics

length: 226 mm (8.9 in.) max. diameter: 53 mm (2.1 in.)

290 g (0.64 lbs.)/ 820 g (1.81 lbs.)

fixed 5 m (16.5 ft.) cable, w/mini jack plug, mini to 1/4" adapter plug

W 23, W 880, H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

C5

cardioid

65 to 20,000 Hz

4 mV/Pa (-48 dBV)

for 1%/3% THD: 140/145 dB SPL

25 dB-A

D 7/D 7 S

Supercardioid

70 to 20,000 Hz

2.6 mV/Pa (-52 dBV)

for 1%/3% THD 147/156 dB SPL

18 dB-A

D 5/ D 5 S

supercardioid

70 to 20,000 Hz

2.6 mV/Pa (-52 dBV)

for 1%/3% THD: 147/156 dB SPL

cardioid

60 to 20,000 Hz, at 1 cm (0.4 in.): 20 to 20,000 Hz

2.5 mV/Pa (-52 dBV)

for 1%/3% THD: 147/156 dB

D 88 S/XLR D 88 S/Jack

supercardioid

40 to 20,000 Hz

2.5 mV/Pa

300 ohms

Zinc/alloy diecast

D 77 S/XLR D 77 S/Jack

cardioid

40 to 20,000 Hz

2.5 mV/Pa

600 ohms

D 55 S

cardioid

70 to 18,000 Hz

2.5 mV/Pa

D 44 S

cardioid

70 to 18,000 Hz

2.5 mV/Pa

D 112

cardioid

20 to 17,000 Hz

1.8 mV/Pa (-55 dBV)

for 0.5% THD: outside measurement range

21 dB-A

D 40

cardioid

75 to 20,000 Hz

4 mV/Pa (-48 dBV)

for 1/3 % THD: 144/156 dB SPL

18 dB-A

C 430

cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

7 mV/Pa (-43 dBV)

for 1% /3% THD: 126/130 dB

33 dB-A

C 518/C 518 ML

cardioid

60 Hz to 20,000 Hz

5 mV/Pa (-46 dBV)

for 1%/3% THD: 130/132 dB SPL

31 dB-A

-14 dB

76 dB

12 dB/Oktave bei 100 Hz

80 Hz, 6 dB/octave, always active

Cu rre nt

21 dB-A

Po we rin g

M ax .S PL

for 1% THD: 130/144 dB

Page 150

Stage Microphones

Section:

≤210 ohms

≥600 ohms

3-pin XLR

dark grey metallic enamel

150 x 70 x 115 mm (5.9 x 2.8 x 4.5 in.)

380 g (13.4 oz.)/ 990 g (2.2 lbs.)

SA 60

ST 1, ST 45, ST 305

≤200 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

3-pin XLR

dark stage blue

length 104 mm (4.1 in.) height (incl. stand adapter): 79 mm (3.1 in.) max. dia.: 44 mm (1.7 in.)

245 g (8.6 oz.)/ 380 g (13.4 oz.)

H 440

ST 1, ST 45, ST 305

61 dB

≤200 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

matte black

19 dia. x 79 mm (0.7 x 3.1 in.)

23 g (1.1 oz.)/ 192 g (6.8 oz.)

microphone bag, SA 60, W 32

B 18, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

63 dB

≤200 ohms

≥2000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L, or AKG bodypack transmitter

≤ 2 mA

3-pin mini XLR

matte black

length: 200 mm (7.9 in.) max. width: 47 mm (1.9 in.)

220 g (7.8 oz.)/ 450 g (15.9 oz.) (microphone and cable): C 518 ML: 110 g (3.9 oz.)/ 330 g (11.7 oz.)

73 dB

Ca bl e

300 g (10.6 oz.)/ 800 g (1.8 lbs.)

7 mV/Pa (–43 dBV)

Section:

02

Op tio na la cc es so rie s

46 dia. x 184 mm (1.8 dia. x 7.25 in.)

20 to 20,000 Hz

D 770

ac ce ss or ies

Ne t/s hi pp in g

matte black

cardioid

St an da rd

Di m en sio ns

we ig ht Fin ish

3-pin XLR

(IE C

Co nn ec to r

co ns um pt ion

61 93 8)

loa d Re c im omm pe e da nd nc ed e

≤2.5 mA

Ba ss cu tf ilt er

9 to 52 V phantom power

Pr ea tte nu at ion

Im pe da nc e

pa d

Si gn (A al/n -w o eig ise ht ra ed tio )

Eq u (IE ival C ent 60 n 26 ois 8- e 4) le ve l

≥600 Ohm

C 535 EB

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

≤200 Ohm

Se ns iti vit y

Fr eq ue nc yr an ge

Po lar pa tte rn

Comparison chart

H 518, microphone B 18, for C 518 ML: bag, W 44 B 29 L, MPA V L C 518 ML: A 400 adapter for AKG PT 40 or PT 450

02

1.5 m (5 ft.)

Page 151


for 1%/3% THD: 126/130 dB SPL

22 dB-A

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Stage Microphones

HC 577 L

we ig ht

61 93 8)

loa d

pa d

195 g (6.9 oz.)/ 430 g (15.2 oz.) (microphone and cable): C 519 ML: 85 g (3 oz.)/ 310 g (11 oz.)

microphone bag, W 44 C 519 ML: A 400 adapter for AKG PT 40 or PT 450

B 18, for C 519 ML: B 29 L, MPA V L

1.5 m (5 ft.)

≤200 ohms unbalanced

≥1,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L or AKG bodypack transmitter

≤2 mA

3-pin mini XLR

matte black

27 x 14 x 9.5 mm (1.1 x 0.5 x 0.3 in.)

18 g (0.7 oz.)/ 150 g (5.5 oz.)

adhesive compound, microphone bag

B 29 L, MPA V L, B 18

1.5 m (5 ft.)

63 dB

≤200 ohms

≥2000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L, or AKG bodypack transmitter

≤ 2 mA

3-pin mini XLR

matte black

46 g (1.6 oz.)/ 320 g (11.3 oz.)

A 400 adapter for AKG PT 40 or PT 450, 2 doublesided adhesive rubber plates, 3 countersunkbolts (3 x 30 mm), 3 selftapping screws (2.9 x 13 mm), elastic adhesive compound, H 516, microphone bag, W 44

B 18, B 29 L, MPA V L

1.5 m (5 ft.)

72 dB

≤200 ohms

≥2000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L, or AKG bodypack transmitter

≤2 mA

3-pin mini XLR

matte black

30 g (1.1 oz.)/ 200 g (7.1 oz.)

moisture shield, W 444

B 18, B 29 L, MPA V L

1.5 m (5 ft.)

max. diameter: 130 mm (5.3 in.)

Section:

omnidirectional

20 Hz to 20 kHz

8 mV/Pa (-42 dBV)

for 1% THD: 133 dB

26 dB-A

68 dB

≤3.5 kohms

≥10 kohms

1.5 to 12 V

≤0.6 mA

3-pin mini XLR

flesh tone

205 mm (8.1 in.), max. diameter: 145 mm (5.7 in.)

28 g (0.99 oz.)/ 150 g (5,3 oz.)

PB 77, W 77 B, moisture shield

B 18, MPA V L, W 77 M/P,W 77 M, W 77

1.5 m (5 ft.)

C 520/C 520 L

cardioid

60 to 20,000 Hz

5 mV/Pa (-46 dBV)

for 1%/3% THD: 130/132 dB SPL

31 dB-A

63 dB

≤200 ohms

≥2000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L, or AKG bodypack transmitter

≤2 mA

3-pin mini XLR

matte black

max. diameter: 130 mm (5.3 in.)

30 g (1.1 oz.)/ 200 g (7.1 oz.)

W 44

B 18, B 29 L, MPA V L

1.5 m (5 ft.)

C 555 L

cardioid

80 to 20,000 Hz

35 mV/Pa (-29 dBV)

for 1%/3% THD: 126/130 dB SPL

22 dB-A

72 dB

≤200 ohms

≥2000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L, or AKG bodypack transmitter

≤ 2 mA

3-pin mini XLR

matte black

length: 195 mm (7.7 in.) max. diameter: 134 mm (5.3 in.)

26 g (0.9 oz.)/ 260 g (9.2 oz.)

W 444

B 18, B 29 L, MPA V L

1.5 m (5 ft.)

CK 77 WR/ C 577 WR

omnidirectional

20 to 20,000 Hz

8 mV/Pa (-42 dBV)

for 1% THD: 133 dB

37 dB / 26 dB-A

68 dB

CK 77 WR (C 577 WR) (≤3,500 [≤400] ohms)

CK 77 WR (C 577 WR) (≥10,000 [≥2.000] ohms)

CK 77 WR: 1.5 to 12 V C 577 WR: 9 to 52 V

≤0,6 mA

CK 77 WR: 3 -pin mini XLR “L”, C 577 WR: 3-pin XLR

various matte colors

C 417/C 417 L

omnidirectional

20 to 20,000 Hz

17 mV/Pa (-35 dBV)

for 1%/3% THD: 118/126 dB

34 dB-A

60 dB

≤200 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L or AKG bodypack transmitter

≤2mA

C 417 PP: 3-pin XLR, C 417 L: 3-pin mini XLR

matte black

7.5 dia. x 15 mm (0.3 x 0.6 in.)

C 417 PP: 68/ 220 g (2.5/8.1 oz.) C 417 L: 8/160 g (0.3/5.9 oz.)

H 40/1, H 41, microphone bag, W 407

B 18, for C 417 L: B 29 L, MPA V L

C 417 PP: 3 m (10 ft.), C 417 L: 1.5 m (5 ft.)

cardioid

15 to 18,000 Hz

8.8 mV/Pa (-41 dBV)

for 1% THD: 118 dB

34 dB-A

60 dB

≤200 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

1.5 to 10 VDC or 9 to 52 V phantom power using MPA V L

≤2 mA

3-pin mini XLR

matte black

dia.: 8 x 23 mm (0.3 x 0.9 in.)

2.5/115 g (0.08/4 oz.)

Clip, W 55

B 18, B 29 L, MPA V L

1.6 m (5 ft. 4 in.)

CK 99 L

Page 152

length: 213 mm (4.8 in.) max. width: 47 mm (1.9 in.)

Ca bl e

40 mV/Pa (-46 dBV)

Op tio na la cc es so rie s

20 to 20,000 Hz

ac ce ss or ies

cardioid

matte black

St an da rd

C 544 L

Section:

Ne t/s hi pp in g

31 dB-A

Di m en sio ns

for 1%/3% THD: 130/132 dB SPL

3-pin mini XLR

Fin ish

5 mV/Pa (-46 dBV)

≤ 2 mA

Co nn ec to r

60 Hz to 20,000 Hz

co ns um pt ion

cardioid

9 to 52 V phantom power or battery powering from B 29 L, or AKG bodypack transmitter

Cu rre nt

C 516 ML

(IE C

for 1% THD: 100 dB

≥2000 ohms

Po we rin g

2 mV/ms-2 (incl. MPA V L)

Re c im omm pe e da nd nc ed e

10 to 18,000 Hz

≤200 ohms

63 dB

Im pe da nc e

figure-eight (vibration pickup)

31 dB-A

Ba ss cu tf ilt er

for 1%/3% THD: 130/132 dB SPL

Pr ea tte nu at ion

5 mV/Pa (-46 dBV)

Si gn (A al/n -w o eig ise ht ra ed tio )

60 Hz to 20,000 Hz

C 411

02

Eq u (IE ival C ent 60 n 26 ois 8- e 4) le ve l

M ax .S PL

cardioid

C 519/C 519 ML

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Se ns iti vit y

Fr eq ue nc yr an ge

Po lar pa tte rn

Comparison chart

5.5 dia. x 14 mm CK 77 WR: 0.4/ CK 77 WR: adhesive W 77 M, W 77 M/P, (0.2 dia. x 0.55 in.) 85 g (0.014/3 oz.) compound, H 40/1, W 77 Set, C 577 WR: 0.4/ H 41, moisture W 77 M/P Set 146 g (0.014/ shield, PB 77, W 77, 5.2 oz.) C 577 WR: adhesive compound, H 39, H 40/1, H 41, moisture shield, PB 77, W 77

02

1.5 m (5 ft.)

Page 153


protective case, H 440

ST 1, ST 305, ST 45

P 3S

cardioid

40 to 20,000Hz

2.5 mV/Pa

for 1% THD: 144 dB

≥2,000 ohms

matte black

protective bag, SA 45

H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 305, ST 45, ST 46, W 23, W 3004, W 880

P 2

cardioid

20 to 16,000Hz

2.5 mV/Pa

for 1% THD: 152 dB

≥2,000 ohms

matte black

carrying case

ST 1, ST 305, ST 45

ac ce ss or ies St an da rd

we ig ht Ne t/s hi pp in g

Di m en sio ns

Fin ish

Co nn ec to r

Cu rre nt co ns um pt ion Cu rre nt

61 93 8) Po we rin g

(IE C

loa d Re c im omm pe e da nd nc ed e

Im pe da nc e

Ba ss cu tf ilt er

pa d Pr ea tte nu at ion

GN 15 E / GN 30 E / GN 50 E

250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤3 mA

3-pin male XLR

matte dark grey

GN 15 ESP / GN 30 ESP / GN 50 ESP

250 Hz, -10 dB bei 50 Hz

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤3.5 mA

3-pin male XLR

matte dark grey

max. dia.: 20 mm 140/430 g (4.9/ (0.8 in.), length: 15.2 oz.), 110/522 g 260/405/600 m (3.9/18.4 oz.), (10.2/15.9/23.6 in.) 194/573 g (6.8/20.2 oz.)

DPA phantom power adapter (integrated), PS 3 F-lock

B 18, H 500, H 600, A 608, SA 60, ST 45, PS 3 F-lock

GN 15 / GN 30 / GN 50

250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤3 mA

3-pin male XLR GN 30 OC: stripped and tinned leads

matte dark grey

max. dia.: 20 mm 72/400 g (2.5/ (0.8 in.), length: 14.1 oz.), 110/522 g 160/305/500 mm (3.9/18.4 oz.), (6.3/12/20 in.) 120/495 g (4.2/17.5 oz.)

DPA phantom power adapter, screw set with rubber bush

B 18, MF-DA installation flange, H 600, ST 1, ST 45

GN 15 E 5Pin / GN 30 E 5Pin / GN 50 E 5Pin

250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤3 mA

5-pin male XLR

matte dark grey

20 Ø x 235/380/ 112/396 g (3.9/ 572 mm, (0.8 Ø x 13.9 oz.) 160/530 g 9/14.9/22.4 in.) (5.6/18.7 oz.) 160/535 g (5.6/18.8 oz.)

max. dia.: 20 mm 112/396 g (3.9/ DPA (0.8 in.), length: 13.9 oz.), 160/530 g phantom power 235/380/572 mm (5.6/18.7 oz.), adapter (integrated) (9/14.9/22.3 in.) 160/535 g (5.6/18.8 oz.)

Ca bl e

matte black

Op tio na la cc es so rie s

≥2,000 ohms

St an da rd

for 1% THD: 157 dB

Fin ish

2.5 mV/Pa

Co nn ec to r

20 to 16,000Hz

Po we rin g

cardioid

Ca bl e

Op tio na la cc es so rie s

ac ce ss or ies

we ig ht Ne t/s hi pp in g

Di m en sio ns

(IE C

co ns um pt ion

61 93 8)

loa d Re c im omm pe e da nd nc ed e

Im pe da nc e

P 4

M ax .S PL

Ba ss cu tf ilt er

pa d

H 30, H 50, SA 44, SA 61, ST 1, ST 305, ST 45, ST 46, W 23, W 3004, W 880

Se ns iti vit y

Pr ea tte nu at ion

protective bag, SA 45

Po lar pa tte rn

Stage Microphones

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Installed Microphones

Si gn (A al/n -w o eig ise ht ra ed tio )

matte black

Si gn (A al/n -w o eig ise ht ra ed tio )

≥2,000 ohms

Section:

Page 154

Eq u (IE ival C ent 60 n 26 ois 8- e 4) le ve l

M ax .S PL

for 1% THD: 144 dB

Eq u (IE ival C ent 60 n 26 ois 8- e 4) le ve l

Se ns iti vit y

2.5 mV/Pa

Fr eq ue nc yr an ge

40 to 20,000Hz

Harman Professional Group | 2011

supercardioid

P 5/P5S

02

Fr eq ue nc yr an ge

Po lar pa tte rn

Comparison chart

Section:

B 18, H 500, H 600, SA 60, ST 1, ST 45, PS 3 F-lock

02 1.5 m (5 ft.)

H 500, H 600, SA 60, ST 1, ST 45

CK 31

cardioid

50 to 20,000 Hz

20 mV/Pa (-34 dBV)

for 1% THD: 125 dB

21 dB-A

73 dB

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power, requires DPA adapter (supplied with most Installation Modules)

≤3 mA

Modular Series standard

matte dark grey

13.5 dia. x 20 mm (0.5 dia. x 0.8 in.)

5/88 g (0.17/3.1 oz.)

W 30

CK 32

omnidirectional

20 to 20,000 Hz

14 mV/Pa (-34 dBV)

125 dB (for 1% THD)

20 dB-A

74 dB

≤600 ohms

≤2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power, requires DPA adapter (supplied with most Installation Modules)

≤3 mA

Modular Series standard

matte dark grey

13.5 dia. x 20 mm (0.5 dia. x 0.8 in.)

5/88 g (0.17/3.1 oz.)

W 30

CK 33

hypercardioid

50 to 20,000 Hz

20 mV/Pa (-34 dBV)

125 dB (for 1% THD)

21 dB-A

73 dB

≤600 ohms

≤2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power, requires DPA adapter (supplied with most Installation Modules)

≤3 mA

Modular Series standard

matte dark grey

13.5 dia. x 20 mm (0.5 dia. x 0.8 in.)

5/88 g (0.17/3.1 oz.)

W 30

Page 155


Page 156

Installed Microphones

02

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power, requires DPA adapter (supplied with most Installation Modules)

≤3 mA

Modular Series standard

matte dark grey

13.5 dia. x 146 mm (0.5 dia. x 5.7 in.)

39/248 g (1.4/8.7 oz.)

W 70

CK 80

hypercardioid

60 to 15,000 Hz

30 mV/Pa (-30 dBV)

for 1% THD: 125 dB

17 dB-A

77 dB

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power, requires DPA adapter (supplied with most Installation Modules)

≤3 mA

Modular Series standard

matte dark grey

13.5 dia. x 123 mm (0.5 dia. x 4.8 in.)

15/208 g (0.5/7.3 oz.)

W 80

Ca bl e

≤600 ohms

St an da rd

74 dB

Op tio na la cc es so rie s

ac ce ss or ies

we ig ht Ne t/s hi pp in g

20 dB-A

Fin ish

for 1% THD: 133 dB

Co nn ec to r

16.5 mV/Pa (-36 dBV)

Cu rre nt

20 to 20,000 Hz

Po we rin g

hypercardioid

Im pe da nc e

Di m en sio ns

co ns um pt ion

61 93 8) (IE C

loa d Re c im omm pe e da nd nc ed e

Ba ss cu tf ilt er

pa d Pr ea tte nu at ion

Si gn (A al/n -w o eig ise ht ra ed tio )

M ax .S PL

Eq u (IE ival C ent 60 n 26 ois 8- e 4) le ve l

Se ns iti vit y

CK 47

HM 1000

250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin male XLR

matte dark grey

13.5 dia. x 50 mm (0.5 dia. x 2.0 in.)

400/600 g (14.1 oz./1.3 lbs.)

spring steel hanging clamp

B 18

10 m (33 ft.)

GN 155 Set

250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤3 mA

3-pin male XLR

matte dark grey

180 x 1,490 mm (7.1 in. x 4 ft. 11 in.)

3.6/4.8 kg (8/10.6 lbs.)

ST 305, extension tube

B 18

10 m (33 ft.)a

CGN 99 C/S CGN 99 C/L

cardioid

70 to 18,000 Hz

18 mV/Pa (-35 dBV)

for 1% THD: 125 dB

21 dB-A

73 dB

250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤3 mA

3-pin male XLR

matte black

13.5 Ø x 380/ 580 mm (0.5 Ø x 15/23 in.)

CGN 99 C/S: 160/ 480 g (5.7/17 oz.), CGN 99 C/L: 170/ 500 g (6/17.7 oz.)

windscreen

B 18, PS 3 F-Lock, H 500, H 600, SA 60, ST 1, ST 45

CGN 99 H/S CGN 99 H/L

hypercardioid

50 to 19,000 Hz

12 mV/Pa (-38 dBV)

for 1% THD: 125 dB

21 dB-A

73 dB

250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤3 mA

3-pin male XLR

matte black

13.5 Ø x 380/ 580 mm (0.5 Ø x 15/23 in.)

CGN 99 H/S: 160/ 480 g (5.7/17 oz.), CGN 99 H/L: 170/ 500 g (6/17.7 oz.)

windscreen

B 18, PS 3 F-Lock, H 500, H 600, SA 60, ST 1, ST 45

CHM 99

cardioid

70 to 18,000 Hz

18 mV/Pa (-35 dBV)

for 1% THD: 125 dB

21 dB-A

73 dB

250 Hz, -10 dB at 50 Hz

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤3 mA

3-pin male XLR

matte black or white

13.5 Ø x 55 mm (0.5 Ø x 2.1 in.)

20/480 g (0.7/17 oz.)

windscreen

B 18

10 m (33 ft.)

DGN 99 DGS 99 E

cardioid

150 to 15,000 Hz

2.2 mV/Pa (-54 dBV)

for 1% THD: 133 dB

21 dB-A

73 dB

≤530 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

DGN 99: unterminated cable ends DGN 99 E: 3-pin male XLR

matte black

microphone: 34 dia. DGN 99: 275/422 g x 345 mm (9.6/14.8 oz.) (1.3 dia. x 13.5 in.) DGN 99 E: 285/334 g gooseneck: (10.0/11.7 oz.) dia. 13 x 300 mm (0.51 x 11.8 in.)

DGN 99 E: PS 3 F-Lock

DGN 99: 2 m (6 ft., 4 in.)

DST 99 S

cardioid

150 to 15,000 Hz

2.2 mV/Pa (-54 dBV)

for 1 % THD: 133 dB

21 dB-A

73 dB

≤530 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

3-pin XLR

matte black

microphone: 34 dia. x 345 mm (1.3 dia. x 13.5 in.) gooseneck: dia. 13 x 300 mm (0.51 x 11.8 in.) table stand (l x w x h): 160 x 120 x 65 mm (6.3 x 4.7 x 2.5 in.)

805/1,125 g (1.8/2.5 lbs.)

CK 99 L

cardioid

15 to 18,000 Hz

8.8 mV/Pa (-41 dBV)

118 dB

34 dB-A

60 dB

≤200 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

1.5 to 10 V or 9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin mini XLR

matte black

8 dia. x 23 mm (0.3 dia. x 0.9 in.)

2.5/115 g (00.8 oz./4 lbs.)

clip, W 55

C 747 V11

hypercardioid

30 to 18,000 Hz

8.5 mV/Pa (-42 dBV)

133 dB

32 dB-A

73 dB

12 dB/octave at 150 Hz

≤400 ohms

≥1,500 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

stage blue

9 dia. x 137 mm (0.35 dia. x 5.4 in.)

25/750 g (0.9 oz./1.7 lbs.)

H 47, MSH 70, SA 47, SA 80, SHZ 80, W 70

B 18, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

3 m (10 ft.)

C 547 BL

hypercardioid

30 to 18,000 Hz

8.5 mV/Pa (-42 dBV)

for 1% THD: 133 dB

22 dB-A

72 dB

12 dB/octave at 150 Hz

≤400 ohms

≥1,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

matte dark grey

185 x 120 x 19 mm (7.3 x 4.7 x 0.8 in.)

160/420 g (5.6 /14.8 oz.)

W 547

B 18

3 m (10 ft.)

CBL 99

omnidirectional (hemispherical)

20 to 20,000 Hz

20 mV/Pa (-34 dBV)

for 1% THD: 130 dB

16 dB-A

78 dB

switchable flat or 150 Hz, 12 dB/octave

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

matte black

80 dia. x 5 (10) mm (3.1 x 0.2/0.4 in.)

56 g (2 oz.)/ 45 g (8.6 oz.)

adhesive compound

B 18

3 m (10 ft.) conn. cable with XLR connector, fixed

C 562 CM

omnidirectional (hemispherical)l

20 to 20,000 Hz

25 mV/Pa (-32 dBV)

for 1% THD: 130 dB

16 dB-A

78 dB

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 Ohm

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

matte nickel plated

20 dia. x 28 mm (0.8 dia. x 1.1 in.)

30/195 g (1.1/76.9 oz.)

installation hardware, phantom power adapter

B 18

0.5 m (20 in.)

C 568 B

hypercardioid/ directional

20 to 20,000 Hz

11 mV/Pa (-39 dBV)

128 dB (for 1% THD)

29 dB

18 dB-A

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

3-pin XLR

dark grey

21 dia. x 253 mm (0.8 dia. x 10 in.)

160/715 g (5.6 oz./1.6 lbs.)

SA 60, W 68

B 18, H 30, ST 1, ST 45, ST 46, ST 305

CK 98

hypercardioid/ directional

20 to 20,000 Hz

25 mV/Pa (-32 dBV)

for 1% THD: 124/134 dB

17 dB-A

77 dB

through SE 300 B

through SE 300 B

bayonet mount

dark grey

19 dia. x 247/ 262 mm (0.7 dia. x 9.7/10.3 in.)

80/500 g (2.8 oz./1.1 lb.)

W 98

H 30

76 dB

12 dB/octave at 120 Hz

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

Fr eq ue nc yr an ge

Po lar pa tte rn

Comparison chart

Section:

02

approx. 50 to 100 cm (20 to 40 in.), coiled

1.6 m (5 ft. 4 in.)

Page 157


Page 158

Op tio na la cc es so rie s

ac ce ss or ies

we ig ht

184 g (6.5 oz.)

use 2-conductor shielded microphone cable

74 dB

≤240 ohms

XLRM

black

7.62 x 6.35 x 0.95 cm (3 x 2.5 x 0.375 in.)

184 g (6.5 oz.)

1.83 m (6 ft.) cable

22 dB-A

72 dB

≤150 ohms

12 to 48 V phantom power to DIN/IEC

Switchcraft TB3M

black

8.6 x 12.3 x 2.3 cm (3.4 x 4.84 x 0.9 in.)

170 g (6 oz.)

for 1% THD: 120 dB

22 dB-A

72 dB

≤150 ohms

12 to 48 V phantom power to DIN/IEC

Switchcraft TB3M

satin black

6.4 x 8.9 x 2.5 cm (2.5 x 3.49 x 0.988 in.)

269 g (9.5 oz.) incl. cable

0.8 mV/Pa (-62 dBV)

for 1% THD: 120 dB

21 dB-A

73 dB

≤150 ohms

3-pin XLR

satin black

8.7 x 15 x 1.86 cm (3.409 x 5.9 x 0.732 in.)

115 g (4 oz.)

2.4 m (8 ft.)

50 to 16,000 Hz

20 mV/Pa (-54 dBV)

for 1% THD: 120 dB

73 dB

≤1.600 ohms

satin black

8.7 x 15 x 1.86 cm (3.409 x 5.9 x 0.732 in.)

115 g (4 oz.)

3 m (10 ft.) with mini phone plug, 1/4 phone plug and micro phone plug adapters

supercardioid

50 to 15,000 Hz

22 mV/Pa (-33 dBV)

for 1% THD: 120 dB

22 dB-A

72 dB

≤150 ohms

12 to 48 V phantom power to DIN/IEC

3-pin XLR

satin black

2.74 dia. x 8.4 cm (0.974 dia. x 3.324 in.)

78 g (2.7 oz.)

MB 4

supercardioid

50 to 15,000 Hz

22 mV/Pa (-33 dBV)

for 1% THD: 120 dB

22 dB-A

72 dB

≤150 ohms

12 to 48 V phantom power to DIN/IEC

3-pin XLR

satin black

3.8 x 1.5 cm (1.5 x 0.5 in.)

Microphone: 19 g (0.7 oz.) Power Module: 78 g (2.8 oz.)

PZM-10

hemispherical

80 to 20,000 Hz

2.5 mV/Pa (-52 dBV)

for 1% THD: 120 dB

26 dB-A

68 dB

≤240 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

12 to 48 V phantom power to DIN/IEC, inline XLR connector

3-pin XLR

off-white (may be painted any color)

3.9 dia. x 7.2 cm (1.53 dia. x 2.829 in.)

74 g (22.6 oz.) / 93 g (3.3 oz.)

PZM-10LL

hemispherical

100 to 20,000 Hz

1.4 mV/Pa (+3 dBV)

for 1% THD: 120 dB

26 dB-A

68 dB

≤75 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

12-24 V DC, unterminated wires

stripped and tinned leads

off-white (may be painted any color)

3.9 dia. x 7.2 cm (1.53 dia. x 2.829 in.)

74 g (22.6 oz.) / 93 g (3.3 oz.)

20 to 20,000 Hz

7 mV/Pa (-43 dBV)

PZM-6D

hemispherical

20 to 20,000 Hz

PCC-170

supercardioid

PCC-130 / PCC-130 SW

≤150 ohms

for 1% THD: 150 dB

74 dB

7 mV/Pa (-43 dBV)

for 1% THD: 150 dB

50 to 20,000 Hz

22 mV/Pa (-30 dBV)

for 1% THD: 120 dB

cardoid/ supercardioid

50 to 20,000 Hz

22 mV/Pa (-30 dBV)

PZM-185

hemispherical

50 to 16,000 Hz

SOUND GRABBER II

hemispherical

MB 3

≥2,000 ohms

PZM-11

hemispherical

80 to 20,000 Hz

5 mV/Pa (-46 dBV)

for 1% THD: 120 dB

26 dB-A

68 dB

≤225 ohms

12 to 48 V phantom power

screw terminal

off-white (may be painted any color)

11.506 x 7.05 x 2.946 cm (4.53 x 2.7 x 1.16 in.)

71 g (2.5 oz.)

PZM-11LLWR

hemispherical

80 to 10,000 Hz

5 mV/Pa (-46 dBV)

for 1% THD: 100 dB

26 dB-A

68 dB

≤75 ohms

12-24 V AC or DC

screw terminal

silver (may be painted any color)

7.061 x 11.506 x 4.374 cm (2.78 x 4.53 x 1.722 in.)

71 g (2.5 oz.)

Ca bl e

15.2 x 12.7 x 1.9 cm (6 x 5 x 0.75 in.)

hemispherical

72 dB

St an da rd

black

PZM-30D

22 dB-A

Fin ish

3-pin XLR

for 1% THD: 120 dB

Co nn ec to r

≤250 ohms

22 mV/Pa (-30 dBV)

Cu rre nt

4.6 m ( 15 ft.)

50 to 18,000 Hz

Po we rin g

170 g (6 oz.)

supercardioid

Im pe da nc e

Ne t/s hi pp in g

co ns um pt ion

61 93 8) (IE C

loa d Re c im omm pe e da nd nc ed e

Ba ss cu tf ilt er

pa d Pr ea tte nu at ion

Si gn (A al/n -w o eig ise ht ra ed tio )

Eq u (IE ival C ent 60 n 26 ois 8- e 4) le ve l

17 x 8 x 2 cm (6.7 x 3.2 x 0.8 in.)

M ax .S PL

black

Se ns iti vit y

Di m en sio ns

Installed Microphones

02

Switchcraft TA3F

PCC-160

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

Fr eq ue nc yr an ge

Po lar pa tte rn

Comparison chart

Section:

02

Page 159


Page 160

DHT 700

Band 1: 548.1-697.9 MHz Band 2: 710.1-864.9

<=155 MHz (country-dependent)

DPT 700

Band 1: 548.1-697.9 MHz Band 2: 710.1-864.9

SR 4500

Op tio na la cc es so rie s

ac ce ss or ies

we ig ht Ou tp ut

Si gn (A al/n -w o eig ise ht ra ed tio )

Ba nd wi th

2 AA size dry batteries, windscreen, stand adapter

W 3004

typ. 8 h with 2 x 1,5 V (AA) 83.5 x 64.1 x typ. 8 h with 1 x 1,2 V-NiMH, 22 mm 2.100 mAh (3.2 x 2.5 x 0.8 in.) (AA rechargeable battery)

82 g (2.9 oz) without batteries

2 x AA size dry batteries belt clip

external Mute-Switch RMU 4000, MKG L

200 x 190 x 44 mm (7.8 x 1.7 x 7.4 in.)

972 g (2.2 lbs.)

Rrack mounting kit, 2 UHF antennas

SRA 2 B/W, SRA 2 W, RA 4000 W, RA 4000 B/W, PS4000W,PSU4000,MKA20, MKA 5, ASU 4000, AB 4000

typ. 15 h with 2 AA size dry batteries, typ. 12 h with BP 4000

length: 247 mm (9.7 in.): dia. approx. 39mm (1.5 in.)

125 g (11.3 oz.)

2 x AA size dry batteries, SA 63 stand adapter

typ. 15 h with 2 AA size dry batteries, typ. 12 h with BP 4000

70 x 90 x 25 mm (2.8 x 3,5 x 1 in.)

95 g (3.4 oz.)

2 x AA size driy batteries, belt clip

external Mute-Switch RMS 4000, MKG L

approx. 200 x 44 x 190 mm (7.8 x 1.7 x 7.4 in.)

972 g (2,2 lbs.)

2 antennas, power supply, rack mounting kit.

SRA 2 B/W, SRA 2 W, RA 4000 W, RA 4000 B/W, PS 4000 W, PSU 4000, MKA 20, MKA 5, ASU 4000, AB 4000

typ. >120 dB(A)

typ. 6 h with 1 x 1,5 V LR6 AA 236,9 x 51,1 mm size dry battery, typ. 8 h with max. dia. (9,3x2 in.) 1 x 1,2 V HR6 NiMH, 2.100 mAh AA size rechargeable battery

240 g (8.5 oz.)

1 x AA size dry battery, stand adapter

typ. <0,7 % (1 kHz)

typ. >120 dB(A)

typ. 6 h with 1 x 1,5 V LR6 AA 60 x 73,5 x 30 mm size dry battery, typ. 8 h with (2.4 x 2.9 x 1.2 in.) 1 x 1,2 V HR6 NiMH, 2.100 mAh AA size rechargeable battery

90 g (3.2 oz.)

1x AA size dry battery, belt clip

external Mute-Switch, RMS 4000, MGK L

35-20.000 Hz

typ. <0,3 %

typ. >120 dB(A)

approx. 200 x 44 x 190 mm (7.8 x 1.7 x 7.4 in.)

972 g (2,2 lbs.)

2 antennas, power supply, rack mounting kit.

SRA 2 B/W, SRA 2 W, RA 4000 W, RA 4000 B/W, PS 4000 W, PSU 4000, MKA 20, MKA 5, ASU 4000, AB 4000

FM

35-20.000 Hz

typ. <0,7 % (1 kHz)

typ. >120 dB(A)

typ. 6 h with 1 x 1,5 V LR6 AA size dry battery, typ. 8 h with 1 x 1,2 V HR6 NiMH, 2.100 mAh AA size rechargeable battery, typ. 14 h with 1 x 1,5 V FR6 AA size lithium battery

236,9 x 51,1 mm max. dia. (9,3x2 in.)

240 g (8.5 oz.)

1 x AA size dry battery, SA 63 stand adapter

FM

35-20.000 Hz

typ. <0,7 % (1 kHz)

typ. >120 dB(A)

typ. 6 h with 1 x 1,5 V LR6 AA size dry battery, typ. 8 h with 1 x 1,2 V HR6 NiMH, 2.100 mAh AA size rechargeable battery, typ. 14 h with 1 x 1,5 V FR6 AA size lithium battery

60 x 73,5 x 30 mm (2.4 x 2.9 x 1.2 in.)

90 g (3.2 oz.)

1x AA size battery, belt clip

Ba tte ry

Au di o

2 x analog: XLR sockets balanced, 2 x analog: Âź inch/ 6.3 mm jack sockets unbalanced, 1 x digital: AES/EBU XLR socket (48 kHz) with Wordclock IN (BNC, 48 kHz)

special FSK

25-20.000 Hz

<= 0,05 %

Analog: XLR balanced typ. 115 dB(A) Digital: AES3 typ. 120 dB(A)

max. 50 mW (ERP)

special FSK

25-20.000 Hz

<= 0,05 %

analog: XLR balanced typ. 115 dB(A) digital: AES3 typ. 120 dB(A)

max. 140 dB/SPL

<=155 MHz (country-dependent)

max. 50 mW (ERP)

special FSK

25-20.000 Hz

<= 0,05 %

typ. >120 dB(A)

TB3M/3-pol. Mini-XLR (max. 2,2 Vrms)

500-530, 570-600, 650-680, 680-710, 720-750, 760-790, 790-820 und 835-863 MHz

<=30 MHz (country-dependent)

-

FM

35-20.000 Hz

typ. <0,3 %

typ. >120 dB(A)

HT 4500

500-530, 570-600, 650-680, 680-710, 720-750, 760-790, 790-820 und 835-863 MHz

<=30 MHz (country-dependent)

max. 50 mW (ERP)

FM

35-20.000 Hz

typ. <0,3 %

typ. >120 dB(A)

PT 4500

500-530, 570-600, 650-680, 680-710, 720-750, 760-790, 790-820 und 835-863 MHz

<=30 MHz (country-dependent)

max. 50 mW (ERP)

FM

35-20.000 Hz

typ. <0,3 %

typ. >120 dB(A)

SR 450

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 600 to 630, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz

<=30 MHz (country-dependent)

-

FM

35-20.000 Hz

typ. <0,3 %

typ. >120 dB(A)

HT 450

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 600 to 630, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz

<=30 MHz (country-dependent)

max. 50 mW (ERP)

FM

35-20.000 Hz

typ. <0,7 % (1 kHz)

PT 450

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 600 to 630, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz

<=30 MHz (country-dependent)

max. 50 mW (ERP)

FM

35-20.000 Hz

SR 470

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 600 to 630, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz

<=30 MHz (country-dependent)

-

FM

HT 470

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 600 to 630, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 790 to 820 and 835 to 865 MHz

<=30 MHz (country-dependent)

max. 50 mW (ERP)

PT 470

500 to 530, 570 to 600, 600 to 630, 650 to 680, 680 to 710, 720 to 750, 790 to 820 and 835 to 865 MHz

<=30 MHz (country-dependent)

max. 50 mW (ERP)

>= 8 hrs. with 2x 1.5V LR6 AA batteries >= 8 hrs. with 2x 1.2V AA rechargeable batteries (NiMH, >2100 mAh)

balanced 3-pin XLR and unbalanced TS1/4" jack output level adjustable to -30, 0, + 6 dB

balanced 3-pin XLR unbalanced TS1/4" jack output level adjustable to -30 or 0 dB

balanced XLR and unbalanced 1/4" (6.3 mm) jack: adjustable from mic to line level. Output level at rated deviation: 500 mV rms

St an da rd

336 g (9,1x2 in.)

Lif e

231 x 52 mm dia. (9.1 x 2 in.)

In pu t

PS 4000 W, MK PS, MKA 20, AB 4000, ASU 4000, RA 4000 B/W, RA 4000 W, SRA 2 W, SRA 2 B/W

Au di o

2 BNC UHF antennas, EUStandard IEC Power Cord, US-Standard IEC Power Cord

T.H .D .

2300 g (81oz.)

Au di o

Standard 1U-rack 480 x 43 x 200 mm (18.9 x 1.7 x 7.87 in.)

M od ul at ion

RF Ou tp ut Po we r

Ne t/s hi pp in g

<=155 MHz (country-dependent)

Di m en sio ns

Wireless Systems

Ba nd wi dt h

Band 1: 548.1 to 697.9 MHz Band 2: 710.1-864.9 MHz

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

DSR 700

Section:

02

Sw itc hi ng

Ca rr Ra ier ng Fre e qu en cy

Comparison chart

Section:

02

external Mute-Switch, RMS 4000, MGK L

Page 161


500-530, 570-600, 790-820, 835-865 MHz

<=30 MHz (country-dependent)

40-20.000 Hz

typ. <0,8 % (1 kHz)

typ. >105 dB(A)

max100 mW

FM MPX Stereo

35-20.000 Hz

<0,8% typ.

>90 dB(A) typ.

FM MPX Stereo

35-20.000 Hz

<0,8% typ.

>90 dB(A) typ.

60 x 74 x 30 mm (2.4 x 2.9 x 1.2 in.)

60 g (2.1 oz.)

1 AA size battery, belt clip

External mute switch

200 x 44 x 190 mm (7.8 x 1.7 x 7.4 in.)

1.070 g (2.36 lbs.)

Power supply, RMU 4000 rack mounting kit. Color Coding Kit, UHF antenna

165 g (5.82 oz.)

2 AA size dry batteries, belt clip, color coding kit

SPC 4, PSu 4000, SRA 2 W, RA 4000 W, MKA 5, BP 4000 and CU 4000, Charging Unit

for 1% THD: 126 dB

22 dB-A

72 dB

≤200 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

closed-back, circumaural dynamic headphones

91 dB SPL/mW, 104 dB/V

16 to 28,000 Hz

200 mW

55 ohms

<0.3%

6-pin mini XLR connector

2 x 3-conductor, separable, 3 m (10 ft.) long, coiled section, with 6-pin female mini XLR connector, 1/4" TRS jack plug (headphones), and 3-pin XLR connector w/integrated HSC-PA phantom power adapter (microphone)

matte black

300 g (10.6 oz.)/ 755 g (26.4 oz.)

HSC 171

prepolarized condenser microphone

cardioid

20 to 20,000 Hz

25 mV/Pa

for 1% THD: 126 dB

22 dB-A

72 dB

≤200 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

9 to 52 V phantom power

≤2 mA

closed-back, supraaural dynamic headphones

94 dB SPL/mW, 107 dB/V

18 to 26,000 Hz

200 mW

55 ohms

<0.4%

6-pin mini XLR connector

2 x 3-conductor, separable, 3 m (10 ft.) long, coiled section, with 6-pin female mini XLR connector, 1/4" TRS jack plug (headphones), and 3-pin XLR connector w/integrated HSC-PA phantom power adapter (microphone)

matte black

250 g (8.8 oz.)/ 720 g (25.2 oz.)

HSD 271

dynamic

hypercardioid

60 to 17,000 Hz

1 mV/Pa (-60 dB)

for 1%/3% THD: 124/128 dB

15 dB-A

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

closed-back, circumaural dynamic headphones

91 dB SPL/mW, 104 dB/V

16 to 28,000 Hz

200 mW

55 ohms

<0.3%

6-pin mini XLR connector

2 x 3-conductor, separable, 3 m (10 ft.) long, coiled section, with 6-pin female mini XLR connector, 1/4" TRS jack plug (headphones), and 3-pin XLR connector (microphone)

matte black

305 g (10.8 oz.)/ 760 g (26.6 oz.)

HSD 171

dynamic

hypercardioid

60 to 17,000 Hz

1 mV/Pa (-60 dBV)

for 1%/3% THD: 124/128 dB

15 dB-A

≤600 ohms

≥2,000 ohms

closed-back, supraaural dynamic headphones

94 dB SPL/mW, 107 dB/V

18 to 26,000 Hz

200 mW

55 ohms

<0.4%

6-pin mini XLR connector

2 x 3-conductor, separable, 3 m (10 ft.) long, coiled section, with 6-pin female mini XLR connector, 1/4" TRS jack plug (headphones), and 3-pin XLR connector (microphone)

matte black

255 g (9 oz.)/ 725 g (25.4 oz.)

M

Ca bl e

Ty pe

Ty p

E ST SY

Fin ish

T.H .D .

25 mV/Pa

HO

Co nn ec to r

Ra te d

20 to 20,000 Hz

HE

P AD

Se ns iti vit y

cardioid

Cu rre nt

prepolarized condenser microphone

I

PH

Im pe da nc e

Po we rr at in g

S

70 x 90 x 25 mm (2.8 x 3.5 x 1 in.)

M ax .S PL

NE

Battery Life 6 to 10 hours, volume dependent, 2 AA batteries or BP 4000

St an da rd

typ. 8 h 1 x 1.5 V AA size battery

2x XLR/jack hybrid connector max. 10 dBV 3.5 mm jack, 150 mW (rms)/16 ohms

Op tio na la cc es so rie s

ac ce ss or ies

we ig ht

1 x AA size battery, stand adapter

Lif e

214 g (7.5 oz.)

Ba tte ry

In pu t Au di o

Au di o

l229 mm (9 in.); dia. 53 mm (2.1 in.)

HSC 271

M

O CR

Headsets

Page 162

Ou tp ut

Si gn (A al/n -w o eig ise ht ra ed tio )

T.H .D .

FM

typ. 8 h 1 x 1.5 V AA size battery

Se ns iti vit y

Fr eq ue nc yr an ge

E

Po lar pa tte rn

ON

Ba nd wi th

max. 50 mW (ERP)

Section:

02

Au di o

M od ul at ion

typ. >120 dB(A)

we ig ht

SPR 4

typ. <0,8 % 1 kHz)

360 g (12.7 oz.)

Section:

Ne t/s hi pp in g

<=30 MHz (country-dependent)

70-20.000 Hz

Ne t/s hi pp in g

500-530, 570-600, 790-820, 835-865 MHz

FM

Di m en sio ns

SST 4

max. 50 mW (ERP)

approx. 200 x 44 x 150 mm (7.8 x 1.7 x 5.9 in.)

Balanced XLR and unbalanced 1/4" (6.3 mm) jack: adjustable from mic to line level. Output level at rated deviation: 500 mV rms

im pe da nc e

530 to 560, 600 to 630, 748 to 778, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz

typ. >105 dB(A)

Fr eq ue nc yr an ge

PT 45

typ. <0,8 %

co ns um pt ion

530 to 560, 600 to 630, 748 to 778, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz

40-20.000 Hz

Re c im omm pe e da nd nc ed e loa d Po we (IE rin C g 61 93 8)

HT 45

FM

Eq u (IE ival C ent 60 n 26 ois 8- e 4) le ve l Si gn a (A l/n -w o eig ise ht ra ed tio )

530 to 560, 600 to 630, 748 to 778, 790 to 820, 835 to 865 MHz

RF Ou tp ut Po we r

Sw itc hi ng

SR 45

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Wireless Systems

Ca rr Ra ier ng Fre e qu en cy

Ba nd wi dt h

Comparison chart

02

Page 163


Alphabetical Index

K 271 MK II

K 171 MK II

K 141 MK II

Headphones

K 181 DJ

Section:

02

K 81 DJ

K 702

K 99

K 77

K 44

K 10

16 to 28,000 Hz

closed-back, dynamic headphones

18 to 26,000 Hz

semi-open, dynamic headphones

15 to 25,000 Hz

semi-open, dynamic headphones closed-back, dynamic headphones

18 to 24,000 Hz

5 to 30,000 Hz

closed-back, dynamic headphones

16 to 24,000 Hz

open-back, dynamic headphones

10 to 39,800 Hz

semi-open, dynamic headphones

18 to 22,000 Hz

closed-back, dynamic headphones

18 to 20,000 Hz

closed-back, dynamic headphones Dynamic, supraaural/ closed-back

18 to 20,000 Hz

100 to 13,000 Hz

91 dB/mW, 104 dB/V

101 dB/mW, 114 dB/V

120 dB/V

115 dB/V

105 dB/V

112 dB/V

115 dB/V

115 dB/V

98 dB SPL/ 1 mW

200 mW

200 mW

200 mW

200 mW

3,500 mW

2,000 mW

200 mW

200 mW

200 mW

200 mW

200 mW

55 ohms

55 ohms

55 ohms

55 ohms

42 ohms

32 ohms

62 ohms

32 ohms

32 ohms

32 ohms

360 ohms

leatherette, velvet

leatherette, velvet

leatherette, velvet

leatherette, velvet

St an Ac dar ce d ss oir es

we ig ht Ne t/s hi pp in g

Ad ap te r St er eo

Co nn ec to r

Ca bl es

Ea rp ad s

Im pe nd an ce

Ra te d

Po we r

94 dB/mW, 107 dB/V

M ax . In pu t

Se ns iti vit y

91 dB/mW, 104 dB/V

3 m single-sided, 5 m coiled gold plated gold plated 1/8" to 240 g (8.5 oz.)/ velvet earpads, cable (99,9% oxygen-free) stereo mini jack 1/4" screw-on 550 g (19.4 oz.) 5 m coiled cable, plug-in cable on headphones adapter 3 m single-sided (mini-XLR connector) cable 3 m single-sided, 5 m coiled gold plated gold plated 1/8" to 200 g (7.1 oz.)/ velvet earpads, cable (99,9% oxygen-free) stereo mini jack 1/4" screw-on 500 g (17.6 oz.) 5 m coiled cable, plug-in cable on headphones adapter 3 m single-sided (mini-XLR connector) cable 3 m single-sided, 5 m coiled gold plated gold plated 1/8" to 240 g (8.5 oz.)/ velvet earpads, cable (99,9% oxygen-free) stereo mini jack 1/4" screw-on 550 g (19.4 oz.) 5 m coiled cable, plug-in cable on headphones adapter 3 m single-sided (mini-XLR connector) cable 3 m single-sided, 5 m coiled gold plated gold plated 1/8" to 225 g (7.9 oz.)/ velvet earpads, cable (99,9% oxygen-free) stereo mini jack 1/4" screw-on 550 g (19.4 oz.) 5 m coiled cable, plug-in cable on headphones adapter 3 m single-sided (mini-XLR connector) cable 1.8 m single-sided gold plated gold plated 1/8“ to 280 g (9.9 oz.)/ (99,9% oxygen-free) plug-in stereo mini jack 1/4“ screw-on 597 g (21.1 oz.) cable on headphones adapter (mini-XLR connector) 2.5 m single-sided gold plated gold plated 1/8“ to 150 g (5.3 oz.)/ (99,9% oxygen-free) plug-in stereo mini jack 1/4“ screw-on 343 g (12.1 oz.) cable on headphones adapter (mini-XLR connector) 3 m single-sided (99,9% oxygen-free)

gold plated stereo jack plug 6.3 mm (1/4“)

gold plated convertible jack plug 3.5/6.3 mm (1/4“ to 1/8“)

3 m single-sided (99,9% oxygen-free)

stereo mini plug

convertible jack 210 g (7.4 oz.)/ plug (1/8" to 1/4") 400 g (14.1 oz.)

3 m single-sided (99,9% oxygen-free)

stereo mini plug

2.5 m single-sided (99,9% oxygen-free) 1.5 m (5 ft.), single entry

stereo mini plug

gold plated TS mini jack plug

235 g (8.3 oz.)/ 850 g (30 oz.)

convertible jack 190 g (6.7 oz.)/ plug (1/8" to 1/4") 400 g (14.1 oz.) convertible jack plug 3.5/6.3 mm (1/8" to 1/4")

190 g (6.7 oz.)/ 400 g (14.1 oz.) 72 g (2.5 oz.)/ 110 g (3.9 oz.)

Accessories

136-139

CK 61-, 62-, 63-ULS

34

HSD 171

135

P2

61

Accessories Matrix

140-141

CK 69-ULS

35

HSD 271

135

PCC®-130/130SW

87

CK 77 WR

56

HT 45

121

PCC®-160

84

CK 91, CK 92, CK 93, CK 94

36

AMM 10 Application Guide Architectural Microphone Series BP 4000

142-143 66 111

C 1000 S

32

C 12 VR

26

C 214 C 2000 B C 3000

30 32 31

C 391 B

37

C 4000 B

31

C 411

52

C 414 XL II

29

C 414 XLS

28

C 417

57

C 430

52

C 4500 B-BC

33

C 451 B, C 451 B/ST

27

C 480 B

34

C5

46

C 516 ML

54

HT 450

117

PCC®-170

CK 98

37, 93

HT 4500

109

PT 45

121

CK 99 L

57, 81

HT 470

119

PT 450

117

98

HUB 4000 Q

112

PT 470

119

CU 4000

111

iPhone App

113

PT 4500

110

CU 700

107

Modular Series

69

PZM®-6D

86

D 112

51

IP 2

123

PZM®-10/PZM®-10LL

90

D 230

33

IVM 4

122

PZM®-11, PZM®-11LLWR

91

D 40

51

IVM 4 Multi-Channel Systems 125

PZM®-30D

85

D 44 S

50

IVM 4 Sets

122

PZM®-185

88

D 5, D 5 S

48

K 10

133

RA 4000 W

124

D 55 S

50

K 141 MK II

129

D 7, D 7 S

47

K 171 MK II

128

D 77 S/XLR, D 77 S/Jack

49

K 181 DJ

130

D 770

48

K 240 MK II

129

D 88 S/XLR, D 88 S/Jack

49

K 271 MK II

CS 5

DGN 99/DGN 99 E DHT 700 DMM 4/2/2

87

Reference Projects

65

SE 300 B

37

Sound Grabber II

88

128

Specifications – comparison chart

146-164

80

K 44

133

SPC 4

124

107

K 702

131

SPR 4

123

96

K 77

132

SR 45

120

97

K 81 DJ

130

SR 450

116

DMS 700

106

K 99

132

SR 470

118

145

SR 4500

108

89

SRA 2W

124

DMM 4/2/4

C 518, C 519

53

C 520

55

DPT 700

107

Key to Product Names

46

DSR 700

106

MB 3, MB 4

54

DST 99 S

80

Patents

C 547 BL

83

GN 155 Set

75

Perception Live Introduction

C 555 L

55

GN E 5Pin Series

74

Perception Studio Introduction 38

C 562 CM

90

GN E Series

72

Perception Wireless

C 568 B

92

GN ESP Series

73

Perception 120

41

C 747 V11

82

GN Series

71

Perception 120 USB

42

CBL 99

81

Groove Pack

61

Perception 170

41

78

HC 577 L

56

Perception 220

40

Wireless Multi-Channel Systems

115

CGN 99 H/S, CGN 99 H/L

79

HiQnet ®

113

Perception 420

40

WMS 450

116

CHM 99

79

HM 1000

75

Perception 820 Tube

39

WMS 450 Sets

116

CK 31, CK 32, CK 33

76

HSC 171

134

P 5/P 5 S

59

WMS 470

118

CK 47, CK 80

77

HSC 271

134

P 4/P 3 S

60

WMS 4500

108

C 535 EB C 544 L

CGN 99 C/S, CGN 99 C/L

Page 164

94-95

144 58

120

SST 4

122

System Architect

112

System Description/ 99er Series

78

System Description/ Modular Series

69

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

K 240 MK II

closed-back, dynamic headphones

Au di o

Ty p

Ba nd wi th

Alphabetical Index

Section:

02

Wireless System Components 114

Page 165


Notes

Technical Grammy Award 2010

®

“And the award goes to... AKG!”

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

02

Section:

02

Alejandro Sanz

Page 166

Page 167


Anna F.

Professional Audio Catalog Portable PA Recording & Broadcast Installed Sound Tour Sound

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

02 03

Section:

02 03

www.akg.com AKG Acoustics GmbH Lemböckgasse 21–25, 1230 Vienna /AUSTRIA, phone: + 43 1 86654 0 e-mail: sales@akg.com

For other products and distributors worldwide visit www.akg.com Specifications subject to change without notice.

01/11 PROA016020

Page 168

And Distribution Equipment

.11

BSS AUDIO

AKG Acoustics, U.S. 8400 Balboa Boulevard, Northridge, CA 91329, U.S.A., phone: + 1 818 920 3212 e-mail: akgusa@harman.com

Professional Audio Signal Processing

Page 169


Contents: BSS Audio is world renowned for outstanding sound quality and reliable equipment that satisfies the real

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

demands of professional musicians and high-profile installations. Products from BSS Audio are used on major tours, in recording and broadcast studios, churches, casinos, arenas, and nightclubs on every continent.

Section:

03

Audio Signal Processing

Section:

03

Why do so many sound industry veterans swear by BSS Audio? Because with every performance, installation, broadcast, and recording, these professionals put their reputations on the line. The pros demand superior sound quality and a proven track record. They can count on it with BSS Audio.

Soundweb™ London: networked signal processors Soundweb™ Lite: signal processor FDS-366T OMNIDRIVE™ COMPACT plus: loudspeaker management system FDS-336T/FDS-334T Minidrive™: loudspeaker management systems WHISEWORKS™ - Neville Thiele Method™ Filters FCS-960: dual mode graphic equalizer FCS-966: constant Q graphic equalizer AR-133: active DI box/line balancer Product Specifications

Page 170

Page 171


Reliability: The uncompromising reliability achieved through superb design and meticulous quality assurance is why more artists regularly choose BSS Audio systems. From the rock-solid AR-133 Direct Injection Box, to the state of the art Soundweb London networked signal processors, BSS Audio offers the very best in signal processing.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

03

Section:

03

Live Sound: Including BSS Audio components as an integral part of any sound installation will ensure years of dependable performance and reliability.

Page 172

Twenty years of live sound experience let you focus on the job at hand.

For over 25 years, BSS Audio equipment has been manhandled on and off of trucks and planes, city after city, tour after tour. And every time the show started, the performers and the techs knew their BSS Audio gear would work. No wonder top performing artists like Metallica, Diana Krall, David Bowie, and Oasis regularly choose BSS Audio systems.

Page 173


Soundweb™ London Networked Signal Processors

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

03

Section:

03 The power, flexibility and reliability for any scale of installed sound system. Long before networked digital audio, BSS Audio™ gained its reputation for elegant-sounding signal processing and crossovers. Innovative technologies like Progressive Knee Subtractive Compression, mid-filter crossover limiting, dynamic equalization and ADE™ restoration of leading-edge information in noise gates have elevated BSS Audio to almost cult status among live sound and recording engineers. We’ve leveraged this analog audio expertise into what many believe are the best-sounding digital signal processing algorithms available. Beginning with Soundweb™ Original…and now with the Soundweb™ London family of networked digital signal processing systems, we’ve brought the same warmth and clarity to a vast BSS Audio - Full-line Catalog

Page 174

palette of DSP modules. All are deployed within an intuitive, easy-to-use design and maintenance interface called HiQnet™ London Architect™. So you’re not just getting, for example a generic compressor module; you’re getting digital processing closely based on the acclaimed sound of our DPR-402. From automixers to graphic and parametric EQs, from duckers to delays, you can hear the BSS Audio difference. Bottom line: we’re a highly-regarded crossover and analog signal processing company who started making digital signal processing devices, not a DSP company who ventured into the complex world of high-end professional audio.

BSS Audio

Page 175


Soundweb™ London

03

• Easy creation of virtually any audio system design with a free-design programmable DSP system that places no restrictions on signal path, sub-mixing or object location • The ability to change how your audio system behaves according to the type of event you are holding, just with the recall of a preset • Easy and quick addition of more signal processing within the system without increasing your hardware budget • Fast implementation of specification changes during or post-design • The appropriate level of end-user control without providing overlycomplex interfaces

The same philosophy is at the heart of Soundweb™ London. Moreover, the experience with, and suggestions from thousands of clients have enabled BSS Audio to enhance Soundweb London’s power and flexibility to unprecedented levels including: BSS Audio - Full-line Catalog

Page 176

• Pristine audio quality, with advanced A/D and D/A conversion, together with 96kHz-capable audio processing and networking • Simple, easy-to-learn drag-and-drop system design, now even more powerful with named CobraNet™ bundle assignment, signal path navigation and scalable DSP objects • Ethernet based control over Cat 5 cable, with network audio via CobraNet™ with redundant capability • An extensive range of control options to offer clients simple or sophisticated control interfaces • Easy expansion or reconfiguration of system hardware in the field

With years of experience to count on, Soundweb London represents your wisest choice when investing in programmable DSP technology.

The system approach fully realized No one else can offer our level of integration. Because only Soundweb London is the backbone of a completely unified system solution with microphones, consoles, amplifiers and loudspeakers from sister Harman Pro companies AKG Acoustics® , Soundcraft®, Crown Audio® and JBL Professional® , as well as dbx Professional

Easy to design System design should be drag-anddrop easy. Our Soundweb™ Original software application, Soundweb™ Designer took system design and control to an unprecedented level. Now HiQnet™ London Architect™ brings even more power to your design creativity. You enjoy total flexibility of signal path flow and connectivity, a massive range of processing objects modeled on classic BSS Audio processors, and the freedom to design the system exactly how you want it.

designed to enable future software releases to include new leading edge DSP functions.

Create custom control panels One of the advantages inherited from Soundweb™ Designer has been made even easier. Simple mouse clicks create control panels and pages and add “unbound” elements such as meters and faders that can then be tied to distinct processing objects. Not forgotten is the “traditional” method of creating panels by dragging controls directly onto these custom panels. Pages can also be nested within panels, increasing their versatility, offering neater layout of controls and taking the concept to an unprecedented level.

HiQnet™ London Architect™ uses the familiar drag-and-drop design interface that Soundweb users will know well, but has been dramatically enhanced to provide a more powerful, flexible and user-oriented interface: • dockable tool menus • creation of zones • layout scrolling, zooming and minimap windows • new innovative processing objects such as scalable mixers that make design and object selection easier than ever • new control panels with vast galleries of controls • highly informative docking windows • the ability to copy control values across objects

Easy to install Each Soundweb London processor is totally self-contained, so devices can be installed locally to their amplifier racks rather than in one centralized location. Category 5 cable is used to interconnect system devices and Ethernet hardware, with network hops of 300 feet (100 meters) possible. Digital audio bus The digital audio bus featured on the BLU-800, BLU-320, BLU-160 and BLU-120, is a fault-tolerant bus of 256 channels. In addition to providing a backbone for the transportation of multiple channels, the bus also facilitates the creation of large, fault-tolerant, centralized matrices containing multiple bus-capable devices.

Proven DSP processing objects All the familiar Soundweb™ Original processing objects are included; many modeled on the classic and respected BSS Audio analog processors. The platform has also been

— these are just a few of the ways in which we’ve made HiQnet London Architect the most powerful design software in its class.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

Built on the foundations of an industry standard Our Soundweb™ Original series sent ripples through the sound contracting world. The first largescale system to offer a distributed, programmable DSP system with robust capabilities and simple controls on a single Cat 5 cable, it has inspired a host of imitators. Yet there are key areas where the original Soundweb philosophy still stands above the rest:

Products® and BSS Audio™ signal processing devices. Harman Pro is in the unique position to be able to provide components for the entire signal path and through the use of HiQnet™, the Harman Pro Communications Protocol, integration of these components has never been easier. System integrators will be familiar with having to waste expensive engineering time translating different protocols, so that products using disparate languages will communicate. Imagine how much easier it is when all of your system elements “speak” the same language. Via HiQnet™ London Architect™ software, you can also add integrated monitoring of Crown Audio PIP-LITE, USP3 and USP3/ CN Programmable Input Processor (‘PIP’) modules, as used in the CTs series of amplifiers. You can also configure BSS Audio FDS-334T and FDS-336T Minidrive processors and the industry standard FDS-366T OMNIDRIVE COMPACT plus system. One control application can monitor amplifier performance, speaker conditions, log events and report errors back to the operator.

Section:

03

Soundweb™ London Family of Products With a choice of seven different processors within the Soundweb London family and input / output card flexibility within each device, Soundweb London represents a truly flexible and scalable system. Whether you require the high bandwidth audio networking of a digital audio bus, CobraNet compatibility, DSP capability, input / output expansion or a specific mix of functionality, Soundweb London offers the building blocks of a tailor made system. CHASSIS

CONFIG. I/O

INPUTS

HYBRID COMPATIBLE

OUTPUTS

CONFIG.

LCD DISPLAY

LOGIC

RS-232

GPIO

SIGNAL PROCESSING

COBRANET

DIGITAL AUDIO BUS

AEC COMPATIBLE

BLU-800

19”

E

C

E

C

S

E

E

E

E

4X

E

256

E

C

S

E

E

E

E

1X

E

C

S

E

E

E

E

E

256

E

C

S

E

E

E

E

E

C

S

E

E

E

E

4X

256

E

C

S

E

E

E

E

1X

C

S

E

E

E

E

256

E

BLU-80

19”

E

C

BLU-320

19”

E

C

BLU-32

19”

E

C

BLU-160

19”

E

C

BLU-16

19”

E

C

BLU-120

19”

E

C

BLU-100

19”

E

12

8

S

E

E

E

E

2X

E

BLU-101

19”

E

12

8

S

E

E

E

E

2X

E48

12

BLU-102

19”

E

10

S

E

E

E

E

2X

E48

8

BLU-BIB

HALF-RACK

BLU-BOB1

HALF-RACK

BLU-BOB2

19”

E E E

1

8

8

48

M

256

8

M

256

8

M

256

BSS Audio

Page 177


Soundweb™ London Blu-BOB1 & 2 & Blu BIB(Break-Out/In Boxes)

100 Series

Networked programmable dsp systems

The Soundweb London 100 Series devices feature configurable signal processing and logic processing. The signal path between the inputs and outputs can be completely tailored to an application, and all of the processing objects and logic objects used in larger Soundweb London systems are made available to designers within the 100 Series. The configurable signal processing offered by the 100 Series devices is roughly twice that of the Soundweb London BLU-80 and BLU-16 devices.

Section:

03

The BLU-101 and BLU-102 devices feature the same Acoustic Echo Cancellation algorithm used on the Soundweb London Acoustic Echo Cancellation Input Cards. The BLU-101 offers 12 AEC algorithms while the BLU-102 offers eight AEC algorithms and a telephone hybrid. The AEC algorithms run on dedicated

Input / Output Expanders

The 100 Series devices feature a low latency, fault tolerant digital audio bus of 48 channels which uses standard Category 5e cabling giving a distance of The Soundweb London 100 Series is an example of where user feedback, combined with the leveraging of Soundweb London’s technology, functionality and flexibility has resulted in the development of a truly game-changing product. The 100 Series broadens the reach of Soundweb London and makes a solution strongly associated with high-profile projects available to many more applications. The 100 Series devices and the other members of the Soundweb London family provide the building blocks of the perfectly tailored system solution.

The Soundweb London BLU-BOB or “break-out box” offers 8 channels of analog audio output expansion via the Soundweb London high bandwidth, fault tolerant digital audio bus. The BLU-BOB output channels are easily configured by six DIP switches located on the rear of the device, which select consecutive channels in groups of eight. This simple configuration allows selection of any 8-channel range from the 256 channels available on the digital audio bus. Output channel assignments are configured by DIP switch selection only.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

The Soundweb London 100 Series devices offer a fixed configuration of inputs and outputs (see comparison table for further information). The analog inputs of the devices provide software configurable gain in 6dB steps up to +48dB per channel and software selectable Phantom Power per channel. Phantom Power, Signal Present and Clip information per channel is easily accessible, without the requirement for a PC, from clear front panel LED indication.

processors but are represented within software as a Processing Objects. This means that all of the configurable DSP is available for other processing but AEC inputs can be sourced locally, from networked audio or even post-mix for budget-constrained applications.

high bandwidth, fault tolerant digital audio bus. The BLU-BIB input channels are easily configured by six DIP switches located on the rear of the device, which select consecutive channels in groups of eight. This simple configuration allows assignment to any 8-channel range within the 256 channels available on the digital audio bus. Input channel assignments are configured by DIP switch selection only.

Section:

03

The Soundweb London BLU-BIB or “break-in box” offers 8 channels of analog audio input expansion via the Soundweb London

Wall Controllers and Accessories BLU-10

BLU-6

BLU-8

BLU-3

(available in white, black and blue)

(available in white and black)

BLU-HIF

Telephone Headset Interface

BSS Audio - Full-line Catalog

Page 178

sw9015US

BLU-3

sw9012US

BLU-MC1

Fiber Optic Media Converter

BSS Audio

Page 179


Soundweb™ Lite

FDS-366T OMNIDRIVE™ COMPACT plus FDS-336T Minidrive™ / FDS-334T Minidrive™

Standalone Signal Processor

Loudspeaker Management Systems

Section:

03

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

The demand for simple standalone DSP processing led BSS Audio to introduce the Soundweb Lite 3088 Signal Processor. This standalone non-networked 8x8 unit draws on the phenomenal success of the larger networked Soundweb

SW9088iis and associated products, but provides a cost-effective solution for situations where the design requires a maximum of 8 inputs and 8 outputs.

Section:

Soundweb™ Original

• Freely configurable DSP • Distributed processing, networking and DSP • Proprietary networking requires no external hardware or set-ups

• Network carries control data and 8 channels of 24-bit/48kHz digital audio • Easy system design and configuration using Soundweb™ Designer software

• High network tolerance and stability • Variety of limitedaccess control options • Systems can be easily expanded or updated • Optional Audio/Video matrix and in-wall control panels available

03 The OMNIDRIVE and Minidrive systems represent the ultimate in loudspeaker management, monitoring, and zone control. Minidrive™ provides the same core functions as the OMNIDRIVE range: crossover (LinkwitzRiley, Bessel or Butterworth, WHISEWORKS - Neville Thiele Method Filters), mid-band limiters, equalization (assignable to inputs and outputs), and input and output delay. But the price is made lower than the OMNIDRIVE’s by omitting a few of the OMNIDRIVE’s more advanced features.

SW9012 (UK Version) BSS Audio - Full-line Catalog

Page 180

SW9012 (US Version)

SW9015 (UK Version)

SW9015 (US Version)

The FDS-366T OMNIDRIVE features WHISEWORKS – Neville Thiele Method™* filter technology, letting you take your loudspeakers closer to their operating bandwidths without fear of over-excursion. One FDS-366T OMNIDRIVE COMPACT plus can

drive a true stereo 3-way system, or 3 bi-amp outputs for monitors. Add more units and MIDI slave linking to make stereo 4, 5 and even 6-way systems. The OMNIDRIVE COMPACT Plus and Minidrive all have completely flexible routing allowing any input to be sent to any output making the FDS series of products suitable for a diverse range of applications. You can configure, control, and monitor the FDS-366T, FDS-336T and FDS-334T via HiQnet™ London Architect™. BSS Audio

Page 181


Whiseworks – Neville Thiele Method Filters Included with Soundweb™ London, Soundweb™ Original, OMNIDRIVE COMPACT plus and Minidrive

“The cleanest and clearest filters I’ve heard to date.”

A NTM™ Crossover Filter is a new type of electrical/acoustical filter offering significant performance advantages over all previous crossover filter types in audio applications. The filter was developed by Neville Thiele (pronounced “Teel”). How do they work?

The NTM crossover uses a unique notched response to achieve a very steep roll-off rate outside the pass-band. The 4th order NTM crossover amplitude response looks like this: NTM Roll-off

Notches in the responses speed-up the rate of roll-off. Beyond the notch, the response rises again, but remains respectably attenuated.

Ferrit, Promix/Electrotec, Las Vegas, Nevada, USA

Advantages

*WHISEWORKS - NTM™* and WHISEWORKS - Neville Thiele Method™ are trademarks of Precision Audio Pty. Ltd.

“The biggest step forward in digital crossover technology since Linkwitz-Riley.” Jerry Wing, Britannia Row Productions, UK

BSS Audio - Full-line Catalog

Page 182

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

“The new filters allow me to put more power to the devices without fear of overload or over-excursion. Once adjusted, sounds better than standard filters. The system seemed louder and clearer. We were setting off alarms in the car park!”

03

Graphic Equalizers

What are NTM™* Filters all about?

Andy Dockerty, Adlib Audio, UK

Section:

FCS-960 & FCS-966

Like the Linkwitz-Riley crossover shape, NTM crossovers maintain a flat amplitude response against frequency, and hold the drivers in-phase throughout the crossover region, preventing beam tilting. Additionally however, the 8th order NTM filter gives the fastest roll-off rate of any of the common crossover shapes. The 4th order NTM filter also offers the best group delay flatness of any crossover shape with a roll-off of at least 24dB/Octave, whilst offering a higher cut-off rate than any other 4th order crossover. For many years, Linkwitz-Riley crossovers have been the ‘industry standard’ as they offered the best compromise for most of the important parameters.

The new NTM crossover shapes now represent the optimal combination of characteristics for most applications, assuring it at least a place alongside Linkwitz Riley, if not becoming the new industry standard.

Section:

FCS-960 Of all the features that distinguish the FCS series among professional-grade equalizers, Constant Q filters are probably the most prominent. Compared to the earlier “gyrator” style of filters, Constant Q filters provide a smoother and more predictable interaction between adjacent faders, and the resulting EQ curve more closely resembles the actual fader positions. And each fader on the FCS equalizers has +/– 15dB of adjustable gain, more than many competitive graphic equalizers. When you consider the FCS series’ proven history of quality and reliability as well as their impressive feature set, you understand why so many industry veterans include these equalizers in their racks.

03

Dual Mode Graphic Equalizer

The FCS-960 is the graphic EQ of choice among some of the biggest names in the touring business. Dual mode operation accommodates both Wide Q for Room Contouring (to find the smoothest response) and Narrow Q for monitoring (to “notch out” particular frequencies) on each channel. The FCS-960 provides two channels in 3U of rack space. Constant Q-filters with filter-bypass center taps are controlled by high grade, 45mm faders with molded polymer fader knobs. These prominent knobs eradicate visual parallax error even under low light conditions. Also included are sweepable/switchable Hi-pass filter, Gain control and electronically balanced inputs and outputs.

BSS Audio

Page 183


Active DI, Line Balancing & Signal Distribution FCS-966

Constant Q Graphic Equalizer

Harman Professional Group | 2011

The FCS-966 is commonly used for stage monitors and is engineered using knowledge and experience gained from the FCS-960. Modern components and manufacturing techniques allow premium quality and reliability to be retained at a lower price point.

room or loudspeaker response. These filters are very musical gentle boost and cut shelving type, which can be used to add (or remove) room effects that change with temperature, audience numbers or humidity.

Section:

03

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Traditionally, much general equalization takes place on the faders alone, but this restricts the use of the faders at each end of the scale for further precision EQ work. So BSS Audio provides the FCS-966 with separate LF and HF contour filters, which can change an overall sound balance without disturbing a detailed

Section:

03

AR-133 Active DI Box/Line Balancer

The AR-133 is a single channel DI box with high input impedance, W" jack input and parallel link ouputs to feed backline amps. Though itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s a favorite among highprofile touring professionals, the AR-133 is priced to be affordable for all musicians, studios and PA companies. The rugged aluminum extrusion caseâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s unique arch design lets you run cables back underneath the unit for neat cable management.

The AR-133 includes phantom power and battery supplies. Should the phantom power from the console fail or accidentally switch off, the AR-133 automatically switches over to the internal 9V battery, providing uninterrupted use. Numerous applications can be satisfied by the AR-133. For example, as well as the traditional guitar use, the AR-133 can be used with keyboards, DJ mixers, link outputs, and other electronic sources. The AR-133 can also be used as an active balancing device.

The AR-133 uses an enhanced version of the same audio path as the AR-116, regarded by many as an industry standard. The sound quality is legendary, particularly on acoustic and bass guitars.

BSS Audio - Full-line Catalog

Page 184

BSS Audio

Page 185


Product Specifications: Soundweb London – Networked Signal Processors

BLU-16, BLU-32, BLU-80, | BLU-120, BLU-160, BLU-320 and BLU-800 4

2

3

1

4

1

3

2

B S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

blu-160/blu-120

A S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

D

(rear diagrams)

4

2

3

C

1

4

1

3

2

A

B

blu-800, blu-320

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

C

D

(rear diagram)

4

2

3

1

4

1

3

2

B

blu-16

(rear diagram)

C C OPTO + –

1 1

2 2

CONTROL INPUTS LOGIC OUTPUTS

7 7

8 8

R R

R R

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

T1AL-250V FUSE

LOCATE

RS232

ETHERNET

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

4

2

3

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Front Panel Led Indicators: Per Input: Other: Analogue Inputs: Mic/Line Inputs Input Impedance Maximum input level CMRR Input Noise (E.I.N.) Phantom power A/D Latency: Digital Inputs:

Section:

Input impedance: Sample Rate: Sample Rate conversion: THD+N: Latency: Analogue Outputs:

03

Maximum Output Level Frequency Response THD Dynamic Range Crosstalk D/A Latency Digital Outputs: Input impedance:

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

4

1 1

2 2

CONTROL INPUTS LOGIC OUTPUTS

7 7

8 8

R R

R R

RS232

ETHERNET

Signal Present, CLIP, SYNC/48V, I/O card type (IN, OUT, DIG) LCD Display, Conductor active, Net Link active, Data Activity. Up to 16 electronically balanced on Phoenix Combicon removable screw connectors Nominal gain 0dB, electronically switchable up to +48dB,in +6dB steps 3.5kΩ +20dBu with 0dB input gain,+8dBu with 12dB gain >75dB at 1KHz <-128dBu typical with 150Ω source 48V nominal, selectable per input 38.7/Fs Up to 16 AES/EBU or S/PDIF on Phoenix/Combicon removable screw connectors 110 ohm (AES/EBU), 75 ohm (S/PDIF) 48kHz or 96kHz 8kHz-96kHz -140dB 3/Fso + (56.581/Fsi) + (55.658/Fso). Up to 16 electronically balanced on Phoenix/Combicon removable screw connectors +19dBu 15Hz-20KHz (+0.5dB/-1dB) <0.01% 20Hz to 20KHz, +10dBu output 108dB typical, 22Hz-22KHz unweighted <-75dB 28/Fs Up to 16 AES/EBU or S/PDIF on Phoenix/Combicon removable screw connectors. 110 ohm (AES/EBU), 75 ohm (S/PDIF)

2

A S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

C

D

100-240VAC ~ 50/60Hz 35VA

LOCATE

1

3

B C C OPTO + –

SECONDARY OUT

T1AL-250V FUSE

C

1

IN

(rear diagrams)

+ –

D 100-240VAC ~ 50/60Hz 35VA

PRIMARY

Blu-32/blu-80

A S

BUDDYLINK / 48K

Sample Rate: Sample Rate conversion: THD+N: Latency: Control Ports: 12 inputs and 6 outputs Control Input Voltage Control Input Impedance Logic Output Voltage Logic Output Impedance Logic Output Current Watchdog Output: Opto Output current Withstanding voltage Series Impedance Control Network (All Models): Connectors Maximum cable length CobraNet™ Audio Network: Connectors: Maximum cable length Power and Dimensions: Mains Voltage Power Consumption BTU Rating Operating Temperature Range: Dimensions Weight

Harman Professional Group | 2011

S

48kHz or 96kHz 8kHz-96kHz -140dB 3/Fso + (56.581/Fsi) + (55.658/Fso). 0 to 4.5v 4.7kΩ to +5V (2-wire mode), >1MΩ (3-wire mode) 0 or +5V unloaded 440Ωs 10mA source, 60mA sink Phoenix/Combicon connector for failsafe control 14mA maximum 80V maximum (Off) 220Ω (isolated) RJ45 Ethernet connector 100m/300ft on Category 5 cable between device and Ethernet switch (BLU-80, BLU-32 only) 2 x RJ45 connectors 100m/300ft on Category 5 cable between device and Ethernet switch

Section:

03

85-270V AC, 50/60Hz <35VA <120 BTU/hr 5(41) to 35(95) degrees C(degrees F) (h (U) x w x d): 1.75" (1U) x 19" x 11.3" (45mm x 483mm x 287mm) 18.6 lbs / 8.4kgs (estimated)

Soundweb London BLU-100 Series – Networked Signal Processor BLU-100

Product Specifications: The BSS Audio website, located at bssaudio.com is updated regularly and provides a great source for all the latest news and product specifications. You will find useful information in the form of brochures, user manuals, technical data sheets, applications guides and software updates. The website also contains contact information for all sales, technical support and service enquiries. BSS Audio - Full-line Catalog

Page 186

(rear diagram)

û

Product information:

All specifications are subject to change. ©2006 All Rights Reserved, Harman International Industries, Inc. BSS Audio, Soundweb, London Architect, OMNIDRIVE, Minidrive, and HiQnet are trademarks of Harman International Industries. WHISEWORKS NTM and Neville Thiele Method are trademarks of Whiseworks Pty., Ltd. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

Front Panel Led Indicators: Per Input: Other: Analog Inputs: Mic/Line Inputs: Input Impedance: Maximum Input Level: CMRR: Input Noise (E.I.N.): Phantom Power: A/D Latency: Analog Outputs: Maximum Output Level: Frequency Response: THD: Dynamic Range:

Signal Present, CLIP, 48V (Input only) COM, STAT, ERR, PWR 12 electronically balanced on Phoenix Combicon removable screw connectors Nominal gain 0dB, electronically switchable up to +48dB,in +6dB steps 3.5kΩ +20dBu with 0dB input gain,+8dBu with 12dB gain >75dB at 1KHz <-128dBu typical with 150Ω source 48V nominal, selectable per input 37/Fs [0.77ms@48k] 8 electronically balanced on Phoenix/Combicon removable screw connectors +19dBu 20Hz-20KHz (+0.5dB/-1dB) <0.01% 20Hz to 20KHz, +10dBu output 108dB typical, 22Hz-22KHz unweighted

Crosstalk: Output Impedance: D/A Latency: Control Ports: Control Input Voltage: Control Input Impedance: Logic Output Voltage: Logic Output Impedance: Logic Output Current: Watchdog Output: Opto Output Current: Withstanding Voltage: Series Impedance: Control Network: Connectors: Maximum Cable Length: BLU link: Connectors: Maximum Cable Length:

<-75dB 40Ω balanced and 20Ω unbalanced 29/Fs [0.60ms@48k] 12 inputs and 6 outputs 0 to 4.5v 4.7kΩ to +5V (2-wire mode), >1MΩ (3-wire mode) 0 or +5V unloaded 440Ωs 10mA source, 60mA sink Phoenix/Combicon connector for failsafe control 14mA maximum 80V maximum (Off) 220Ω (isolated) RJ45 Ethernet connector 100m/300ft on Category 5 cable between device and Ethernet switch 2 x RJ45 Ethernet connectors 100m/300ft on Category 5e cable between devices

BSS Audio incorporates high quality mechanical fans in some products. All mechanical fans have a limited life expectancy. We recommend annual inspection of fans for dust occlusion and excessive noise. Fan assemblies should be replaced after six to ten years of use. Environmental factors such as elevated temperature, dust, and smoke can adversely affect fan life. Systems exposed to these conditions should be inspected more frequently. Fan replacement can be performed either at the factory or by an experienced technician in the field. Please contact BSS Technical Support for more information on purchasing replacement parts or product service. BSS Audio has a policy of continued product improvement and accordingly reserves the right to change features and specifications without prior notice.

BSS Audio

Page 187


Product Specifications: Soundweb London BLU-100 – (Specifications Continued) Max. Number of Nodes: Latency: Pass Through Latency: Power and Dimensions: Mains Voltage:

60 11/Fs [0.23ms@48k] 4/Fs [0.08ms@48k]

Power Consumption: BTU Rating: Operating Temp. Range: Dims: (H(U) x W x D): Weight:

100-240V AC, 50/60Hz

FCS Series – Graphic Equalizers

FDS-Series – (Specifications Continued) Crossover Filters: Slopes

<55VA <188 BTU/hr 5 (41) to 35 (95) degrees C (degrees F) 1.75” (1U) x 19” x 9.0” (45mm x 483mm x 229mm) 7.5 lbs / 3.4 kgs (estimated)

Type

CHANNEL 2 OUTPUT

CHANNEL 1 INPUT

OUTPUT

INPUT

SELECT VOLTAGE

220

FCS-960 (rear diagram)

ON

Pin 2 + (Hot) Pin 3 - (Cold)

Pin 2 + (Hot) Pin 3 - (Cold)

BALANCED CONNECTIONS

BALANCED CONNECTIONS

Tip + (Hot) Ring - (Cold)

Tip + (Hot) Ring - (Cold)

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

S

+ –

240

FCS-966 (rear diagram)

Section:

03

FCS-960 Inputs: Impedance Max Input Level Connector Output Section: Output Max Output Level Connector System Performance: Frequency Response Distortion (THD) Output Noise (Flat) Channel Separation (FCS-960) Gain Control Range Peak Indicator Bypass Filter Power and Dimensions: Power Requirements Power Consumption Dimensions (HxWxD): Weight

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 2

FCS-966 Input Section: Input Impedance Maximum Input Level CMRR Output section: Output Impedance Maximum Output Level Filters: HP filter LF contour HF contour Frequency bands General Performance Frequency Response Noise Dynamic Range Cross Talk Distortion Gain control Power and Dimensions: AC Power Dimensions Weight

10kΩ, electronically balanced +20dBu XLR3-31 Electronically balanced and floating +20dBu into 600Ω XLR3-32 ±0.25dB 20Hz-20kHz <0.005% 20Hz-20kHz @ +4dBu <-93dBu 22Hz-22kHz unweighted >80dB from 20Hz-20kHz ±10dB +18dBu Passive fail-safe bypass relay MFB Constant Q type 50/60Hz, 90V-264V < 00VA 00" x 19" x 00" 000mm x 483mm x 000mm 6.6 lbs / 3 kg (estimated)

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 2

10kΩ, electronically balanced >+20dBu >-40dB @1kHz <50Ω, electronically balanced >+20dBu into 600Ω OUT to 250Hz @ 12dB/octave ±6dB shelving @ 50Hz 6dB/octave ±6dB shelving @ 14kHz 6db/octave ±15dB on ISO centers with a Q of 4

Crossover Slopes

Limiters: Mid-filter EQ: Up to 38 bands of EQ Type Frequency range Delay: Delay Time Delay Time Resolution Delay Units Power and Dimensions Power Requirements Power Consumption Dimensions (HxWxD): Weight (shipping)

5Hz to 45kHz ±1dB <-94dBu 22Hz to 22kHz > 115dB >-80dB @1kHz <0.005%THD (80kHz measurement BW) 20Hz-20kHz +10dB to ∞ 115/230V AC, 50/60Hz, 30VA 19" x 5.25" x 7.1" / 483mm x 134mm x 180mm 6.6lbs / 3kgs

AR-133 Section: Input

Output Section: Output Transformer Connector

INPUTS

FLOATING BALANCED OUTPUTS

>108dB unweighted 22Hz-22kHz < ±0.25dB, 15Hz-20kHz with filters out < 0.01%, 20Hz-20kHz @ +10dBu input level 48kHz > 80dB, 20Hz-20kHz 24-bit, input and output Mono 4-way, stereo 2-way Mono 6-way, stereo 3-way, stereo 2-way with A+B sum 2-way, any combination of 2 inputs to up to 6 outputs with individual passbands Bessel, 12 & 24dB/octave; Linkwitz-Riley, 12, 24 or 48dB/octave; Butterworth, 6, 12, 18, 24 or 48dB/octave; WHISEWORKS-NTM, 36 & 52dB/octave 2-stage limiters with threshold of -10 to +20dBu Dependent upon used crossovers slopes. High and Low shelving at 6dB or 12dB/octave or fully parametric with bandwidth of 0.05 to 3.0 octaves 15Hz to 16kHz, gain of ±15dB in 0.5 dB steps 635ms maximum delay on each input to output path 21μs steps Milliseconds, meters, feet or frames per second 50/60Hz, 90V-264V < 30VA 1.75" x 19" x 8" 44.4mm x 483mm x 203mm 6.2 lbs / 2.8 kg

03

AR-133 – Active DI Box/Line Balancer

Connectors

| FDS-366T, FDS-336T and FDS-334T

4 channels +20dBu, into 600Ω, electronically balanced 47Ω

Section:

Max Input Level

FDS-Series – Loudspeaker Management Systems

FDS-334T Max Output Level Output Impedance General Performance: Dynamic Range Frequency Response Distortion (THD) Audio Sample Rate Channel Separation A/D & D/A Conversion: Crossover Filters: FDS-334T FDS-336T

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Delays: Available on Inputs A, B, and C Outputs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Delay step 11 microseconds minimum Max Delay time 2.6 seconds EQ: Max number of EQ filters > 50 depending on crossover slopes EQ Type Parametric, Bell or shelving on any filter EQ Gain ±15dB, variable in 0.2dB steps Bandwidth 0.05 to 3 octaves, variable in 0.05 steps EQ frequency 15Hz to 20kHz Dynamic slope 2:1 to 20:1 (dynamic EQs only) General Performance (filters out) Frequency response 10Hz - 20kHz, ±0.25dB 10Hz - 40kHz, +/-2dB Dynamic range >112dB, unweighted 22Hz to 22kHz, >117dB when AES/ EBU inputs used Channel Separation >80dB, 30Hz-20kHz Distortion (THD) <0.005%, 20Hz - 20kHz @+10dBu output Power and Dimensions AC Power 90V-264V AC, 50/60Hz, 30VA Dimensions 19” x 1.75” x 11.5” / 483mm x 45mm x 292mm Weight 8.4lbs / 3.8kgs MINIDRIVE Inputs Max Level +20dBu Input Impedance 10kΩ, electronically balanced Outputs FDS-336T 6 channels

| FCS-960, FCS-966 MAINS POWER

6, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 or 52dB per octave (Filter type dependant) WHISEWORKS–NTM™, Bessel, Butterworth, or LinkwitzRiley

1MΩ (pad at 0dB), 47kΩ (pad at -20dB), 47kΩ (pad at -40dB) +9dBu (pad at 0dB), +29dBu (pad at -20dB), +49dBu (pad at -40dB) Two Parallel ¼" jacks, parallel XLR connector (unbalanced) Max Output Level +8dBu into 600Ω or greater XLR3-32

General Performance: Distortion (THD) < 0.005% at 1kHz, 0dBu output Noise <-105dB unweighted, 22Hz-22kHz* Frequency 30Hz to 20kHz, +0dB/-1dB Power and Dimensions Main/Standby Power 9 volt PP3 type, battery preferably alkaline Current drain phantom: <7.5mA; battery: <2mA Phantom Power +20 volts DC to +48 volts DC Dimensions 2.3" x 4.9" x 5.6" / 59 mm x 124 mm x 143 mm Weight 1.4 lbs / 650 gms, excluding batteries * Noise measured relative to maximum output.

CONTROLLER INTERFACES RS232

FDS-334T

(rear diagram)

MIDI OUT

MIDI THRU

3

4

MIDI IN

2

1

B

A

INPUTS

FLOATING BALANCED OUTPUTS CONTROLLER INTERFACES RS232

FDS-336T

(rear diagram)

MIDI OUT MIDI THRU

100-240VAC ~ 50/60Hz 35VA

MIDI IN

6

5

4

2

3

1

FLOATING BALANCED OUTPUTS

FDS-366T

(rear diagram)

FDS-366T Input Section: Input Impedance Maximum Input Level CMRR Input gain Input Connector

100-240VAC ~ 50/60Hz 35VA

10kΩ, electronically balanced +20dBu >50dB 30Hz-20kHz +/-15dB variable in 0.1dB steps XLR-3F

BSS Audio - Full-line Catalog

Page 188

RS485

RS485

RS232

PROGRAM SELECT

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

6

5

4

3

2

1

C/MIC

B

A

LANCED

INPUTS

B

A/AES

AES/EBU Interface: Input Sample Rate 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz Output Section: Output Impedance <50Ω, electronically balanced and floating Maximum Output Level +20dBu into 600Ω or greater Output Gain ±21dB, variable in 0.1dB steps Output Connector XLR-3M. transformer Balancing optional

BSS Audio

Page 189


Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

04 03

Section:

03 04

Professional Audio Signal Processing and Distribution Equipment 8760 S. Sandy Parkway, Sandy, Utah 84070, USA tel: +1 (801) 566-8800, Fax: +1 (801) 568-7662

bssaudio.com

Page 190

Page 191


Section:

04

CT DriveCore Series

Section:

04

CTs 2-Channel Series CTs Multi-Channel Series CTs Multi-Channel with CobraNetTM CDi Series DSi Series

Page 192

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

INSTALLED SOUND

Page 193


Back Panel Controls and Connectors

IM

AC Power Cord Connector: IEC inlet, type 320; 100/120VAC units: 15A; 220/230/240VAC units: 10A. Voltage is indicated above IEC inlet. Output Connectors: 3-PIN Phoenix Connectors for every two channels with touch-proof cover. Accepts up to 12 AWG terminal forks. Input Connectors: Removable Phoenix-style barrier connectors for balanced input. High-Pass Filter: A fixed 70-Hz high-pass filter per channel pair is automatically inserted when the mode switch is set to either of the constant-voltage settings. The high-pass filter corner frequency can be set to 70 Hz, or bypassed by using the DIP switch located on the back panel. Auto-Standby: After 30 minutes of idle, amp will go into Standby. Amplifier will come out of Standby once signal is recieved.

04

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

 FEATURES • • • • • •

High power density: Four/eight-channel models in a 1U chassis. DriveCore technology. Light weight design. Convection (Fan-less) cooled. Life safety features. Cascading inputs for added flexibility.

POWER OUTPUT* 8-ohm Dual Models

CT 475 CT 875 CT 4150 CT 8150

(per channel)

Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when the channel is initialized and ready to produce audio output. Signal Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates to indicate the presence of analog input signals above –40 dBu. Clip Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates when the THD of the channel’s output signal rises to a level typically considered as the onset of audible clipping. The Clip Indicator also will illuminate during Thermal Level Control (TLC) or input overload.

PR

Flexibility

Green Power: Crown's most efficient mode of operation. The power consumption of the amplifier will only match the input load. This means that the amplifier will operate at maximum efficiency at all times.

EL

Section:

Options XFMR 4/8: This is a rack-mountable transformer that allows 100V/70V output from the amplifier, and allows other amplifiers without direct constant voltage output to be easily integrated into distributed systems.

Protection Systems

Thermal Level Control (TLC): If an amplifier channel starts to overheat, the TLC circuit will engage that channel’s input compressor. By compressing the input, the amplifier will not generate as much heat and will have a chance to cool down. The degree of compression is proportional to the amount of overheating. If the channel becomes too hot for safe operation even after full TLC limiting, the channel will shut off, and the Thermal Indicator for that channel will flash brightly to alert the user that a state of thermal stress or overload has cause the channel to shut down. FIT (Fault Isolation Topology): Isolates faults within affected channels. Fault: If an amplifier channel requires service, the corresponding Fault indicator will illuminate to alert the user of this condition. If this occurs, return the amplifier to the Crown factory or to an authorized Crown service center. AC Under-/Over-Voltage Protection: If the AC line voltage varies out of an acceptable range, the amplifier’s power supply turns off and the blue Power LED flashes. The amplifier will turn back on when the AC line voltage returns to safe operating levels.

RY

Thermal Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, flashes when a state of thermal stress or overload has caused the channel to shut down. If the power supply goes into thermal overload, all channel LEDs will flash. Fault Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, flashes when a fault condition has occurred in the channel. Ventilation Grille: Passive airflow vent. Data Indicator: Yellow LED indicates IQ Loop data activity (if the amplifier is equipped with an IQ-MC module, and connected to an IQ Loop). Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates amplifier has been turned on and AC power is available. Indicator also flashes if the amplifier shuts off due to an under-/over-voltage condition on the AC mains. Power Switch: Amplifier is on when the switch is in the IN position.

Input/Output Switches: The ampliefier can be configured so that input signals can be routed to multiple outputs. Aux Port: Used for Lifesafety and Deep Sleep funtions. LifeSafety: Amplifier will produce a 2Hz "heart beat" pulse on a 12VAC signal indicate amplifier is operationg within non-fault condition. Cooling Vents: Passive airflow.

Under-Voltage Limit

Models 100VAC

Over-Voltage Limit

90VAC

110VAC

120 VAC units

108VAC

132VAC

220V/230V/240V units

198VAC

264VAC

Section:

Power Fuse: A fuse protects the amplifier from excessive AC current draw. Inrush Limiting: A soft-start circuit in the power supply minimizes the amplifier’s current draw during power-on. Regulatory Certifications

INSTALLED SOUND

C

rown’s CT DriveCore Series offers wide flexibility for a wide range of installed sound applications. These amplifiers offer independent selection of high- and low-impedance operation for each channel pair, making these amps ideal for multi-zone installations.

75W 75W 150W 150W

*Average power in watts at rated THD, 20 Hz - 20 kHz.

Page 194

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz - 20 kHz): <0.5 dB. Signal to Noise Ratio below rated power (20 Hz to 20 kHz): 110 dB A-weighted. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at 1 watt, from 20 Hz to 20 kHz: < 0.05%. Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) < 0.05% (typical). Crosstalk (below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 70 dB. Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20 Hz to 1 kHz): >70 dB. DC Output Offset (shorted input): < ±5 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): 20 kilohms balanced, 10 kilohms unbalanced. Maximum Input Level (before input compression): + 20 dBu. Voltage Gain (at maximum level setting), 1.4V sensitivity, 4/8 Ohm Operation: 20:1 (26 dB); 70V Operation: 50:1 (34 dB) 100V Operation: 71.4:1 (37 dB) AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available (±10%): 120V/60 Hz, 220/230/240V/50 Hz. Power Draw at Idle (120VAC mains, all channels in 4/8 ohm mode): 5W. Power Draw at Idle (120VAC mains, all channels in 70V mode): 7W. Cooling: Fanless convention cooled Dimensions (Width, Height, Depth): 19 in. (48.3 cm) W x 1.75 in. (4.4 cm) H x 14.25 in. (36.2 cm) D. (This applies to all models) Weight (Net, Shipping): 10 lb (4.5 kg), 15 lb (6.8 kg). (This applies to all models)

IN A

 SPECIFICATIONS

AMPLIFIERS INSTALLED SOUND CT DriveCore Series: The New Standard CT 475, CT 875, CT 4150, CT 8150

Page 195

04


 SPECIFICATIONS

AMPLIFIERS INSTALLED SOUND CTs Series: The New Standard CTs 600, CTs 1200, CTs 2000, CTs 3000

Section:

04

Foundation

 FEATURES • • • • •

High power density. All two channel models in a 2U chassis. New Crown Switching Power Supply for lighter weight. Selectable “Constant-Voltage” or low-impedance operation per channel. 100V direct outputs on all models. Fully PIP2-compatible.

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Bridge Mode Indicator: Yellow LED illuminates when the rear-panel Mode Switch is set to the “Bridge” position.

2-ohm Dual 4-ohm Dual 2-ohm 8-ohm Dual Dual 4-ohm16-ohm Dual Dual 8-ohm70V DualDual16-ohm 100V Dual Dual 70V Dual 4-ohm 100V Dual8-ohm 4-ohm16-ohm 8-ohm 100V 16-ohm 140V 100V200V (per channel) Models (per channel) (per channel) (per channel) (per channel) (per channel) (per channel) (per channel) (per channel) (per channel) (per channel) Bridge(per channel) Bridge Bridge Bridge Bridge Bridge BridgeBridge Bridge Bridge

Signal Indicators: Three green LEDs per channel indicate the amplifier’s input and output signal levels. Signal: input signal is above –40 dBu. –20 dB: amplifier output is 20 dB below clipping. –10 dB: amplifier output is 10 dB below clipping. Clip Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates when the channel’s output signal reaches the onset of audible clipping. The Clip Indicator also will illuminate during Thermal Level Control (TLC) limiting or when the input compressor/limiter is protecting the amplifier from input overload. Thermal Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates when the channel has shut down, or is very near shutting down, due to thermal stress or overload. Fault Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, flashes when the amplifier output channel has stopped operating. Data Indicator: Yellow LED indicates control data activity (if the amplifier is equipped with an IQ-PIP2 module, and connected to a control system). Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates amplifier has been turned on and AC power is available. The LED will flash when the AC line voltage is 15% above or 25% below the nominal rated value. Cooling Vents: Front-to-rear forced airflow. Power Switch: Push-on / push-off switch.

Back Panel Controls and Connectors

Power Cord Connector: Standard 15 amp IEC inlet. Voltage is indicated above IEC inlet. Reset Switch: Resets the circuit breaker that protects the power supply. Speaker Connectors: One four-pole touch-proof terminal strip. Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks. Input Connectors: Balanced 2-pin terminal block connector, one per channel, on the standard PIP2-BBY module. Channel Level Control: One 21-position detented rotary attenuator per channel, ranging from minus infinity (–70 dB) to 0 dB gain.

Highpass Filter: One 3-position switch per channel selects between OFF, 35Hz and 70Hz 3rd-order filters. “Y” Input Switch: When set to ON, this switch parallels the input signals of the two channels for use when the input signal is mono. Also can be used to daisy-chain the signal to another amplifier. Ventilation Grille: Front-to-rear forced airflow.

Options

PIP2 modules, including the PIP-Lite, PIP-USP3, and PIP-USP3/CN.

Protection Systems

Thermal Level Control (TLC): If an amplifier channel starts to overheat, the TLC circuit will engage the input compressor. By compressing the input, the amplifier will not generate as much heat and will have a chance to cool down. Junction Temperature Simulation (JTS): In the CTs 600/1200, if excess power is demanded, JTS circuitry limits the drive level of the output devices to a safe range, preventing damage. Fault: The amplifier will light the Fault LED if the amplifier output stage stops operating. AC Under-/Over-Voltage Protection: If the AC line voltage drops below 25% or rises above 15% of the nominal operating voltage of the amplifier, the amplifier’s power supply turns off and the blue Power LED flashes. The amplifier will turn back on when the AC line voltage returns to safe operating levels. Circuit Breaker: This breaker protects the amplifier from excessive AC current draw. DC Output Servo: The output servo circuit protects your drivers by eliminating DC offset, even in the presence of very large asymmetrical signals. In-rush Limiting: A soft-start circuit in the power supply minimizes the amplifier’s current draw during power-on. Variable-speed Fan: Two continuously variable speed fans direct the airflow through the amplifier for cooling.

Regulatory Certifications

Other Applications

Mode Switch: Two-position switch is used to select the amplifier’s mode of operation: Dual or Bridge-Mono.

INSTALLED SOUND

POWER OUTPUT*POWER OUTPUT* Models

Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when the channel is initialized and ready to produce audio output. Indicator is off when PIP puts the amplifier in standby mode via the control system.

140V Bridge

200V Bridge

CTs 600 150W CTs 600300W 150W 300W 300W 300W 300W 300W 300W 300W‡300W 300W 300W600W ‡ 300W600W 600W 600W‡600W 600W600W 600W ‡ ‡600W 600W‡ CTs 1200 250W CTs 1200 600W 250W 600W 600W 300W 600W 600W 300W 600W‡600W 500W 600W 1,200W ‡ 500W 1,200W 1,200W 1,200W 1,200W ‡ 1,200W 1,200W 1,200W ‡ 1,200W ‡ 1,200W‡ CTs 2000 1,000W CTs 2000 1,000W 1,000W 1,000W 1,000W 625W1,000W 1,000W 625W 1,000W 1,000W 2,000W 1,000W 2,000W 2,000W 2,000W 2,000W 2,000W 2,000W 2,000W 2,000W 2,000W 2,000W 2,000W CTs 3000 1,500W CTs 3000 1,500W 1,500W 1,250W 1,500W 625W1,250W 1,500W 625W 1,500W 1,500W 3,000W 1,500W 3,000W 3,000W 2,500W 3,000W 3,000W 2,500W 3,000W 3,000W 3,000W 3,000W 3,000W

C

rown’s CTs Series amplifiers provide exceptional performance, flexibility and value for installed sound applications. CTs Series amplifiers feature independent selection of high and low impedance operation for a specific channel, plus power levels and features that were carefully chosen to match the requirements of fixed install design. Easy integration with HiQnet™ and CobraNet™ allows CTs amplifiers to deliver a comprehensive lineup of monitoring and control features along with digital audio transport for an award-winning digital audio solution.

*Maximum average power*Maximum in watts at average rated THD, power 20 Hz in watts - 20 kHz. at rated THD, 20 ‡With Hz -T-170V 20 kHz.or TP-170V.‡With T-170V or TP-170V.

Page 196

Page 197

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz - 20 kHz): ±0.25 dB. Signal to Noise Ratio below rated power (20 Hz to 20 kHz): 105 dB A-weighted. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at full rated power, from 20 Hz to 20 kHz: CTs 600/1200: < 0.1%. CTs 2000/3000 < 0.35%. Damping Factor: 10 Hz to 100 Hz: > 3000. Crosstalk (below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 80 dB. Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20 Hz to 1 kHz): 50 dB. DC Output Offset: < ±2 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): 10 kilohms balanced, 5 kilohms unbalanced. Maximum Input Level: +20 dBu before input compression, +32 dBu absolute maximum. Load Impedance: (Note: Safe with all types of loads) CTs 600/1200 Stereo: 2/4/8/16 ohms, 70V, 100V Bridge Mono: 4/8/16 ohms, 140V. CTs 2000/3000 Stereo: 2/4/8/16 ohms, 70V, 100V Bridge Mono: 4/8/16 ohms, 140V, 200V. Voltage Gain (at maximum level setting): 8/4 ohm operation, 1.4V sensitivity CTs 600 35:1 (31 dB) CTs 1200 50:1 (34 dB) CTs 2000 63.9:1 (36 dB) CTs 3000 71.4:1 (37 dB). 26 dB: 20:1 (26 dB). 70V operation, 1.4V sensitivity or 100V operation, 2.0V sensitivity: 50:1 (34 dB). AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available (±10%): 120VAC/60Hz, 230VAC/50 Hz. Power Draw at Idle (120VAC mains): CTs 600/1200: 24W (standby mode) CTs 2000/3000: 35W (standby mode). Cooling: Continuously variable speed forced air, front-to-back airflow. Dimensions: 19 in. (48.3 cm) W x 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) H x 14.25 in. (36.2 cm) D. Weight: Net, Shipping CTs 600: 22.8 lb (10.3 kg), 27.7 lb (12.6 kg) CTs 1200: 23.4 lb (10.6 kg), 28.3 lb (12.8 kg) CTs 2000: 27.0 lb (12.2 kg), 32.0 lb (14.5 kg) CTs 3000: 27.7 lb (12.6 kg), 32.7 lb (14.8 kg).

Section:

04


 SPECIFICATIONS

AMPLIFIERS INSTALLED SOUND CTs Multi-Channel Series: The New Standard CTs 4200, CTs 8200

04

Flexibility

 FEATURES • • • • • •

High power density: Four-channel model in a 2U chassis, eight-channel model in a 3U chassis. New Crown Switching Power Supply for lighter weight. Selectable “Constant-Voltage” or low-impedance (4/8 ohm) operation per channel-pair. 100V direct outputs. New “FIT” (Fault Isolation Topology) circuitry isolates fault conditions without affecting neighboring channels. Accept new MC accessory modules.

Models

CTs 4200 CTs 8200

260W 200W

180W 220W † 160W 200W

1 channel driven 4-ohm Dual 8-ohm Dual 70V Dual †

270W 270W

220W 220W

250W † 250W

All channel pairs driven 8-ohm Bridge 16-ohm Bridge 100V Bridge †

520W 400W

Bridge Mode Indicator: Yellow LED, one per channel pair, illuminates when the channel pair’s Mode Switch is set to the “Bridge” position. If Mode switch is changed while amplifier is powered up, Bridge LED will flash, indicating that the amplifier must be powered off and on to reset the Mode. Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when the channel is initialized and ready to produce audio output.

Back Panel Controls and Connectors

AC Power Cord Connector: IEC inlet, type 320; 100/120VAC units: 15A; 220/230/240VAC units: 10A. Voltage is indicated above IEC inlet. Output Connectors: One four-pole terminal strip for every two channels with touch-proof cover. Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks. Accessory Panel: CTs 4200 accepts an optional VCA-MC4A module. CTs 8200 accepts an optional VCA-MC8 module. Channel Level Controls: One 21-position detented rotary potentiometer per channel, ranging from infinity (–70 dB) to 0 dB attenuation. Input Connectors: Removable Phoenix-style barrier connectors for balanced input. Also can be used as a CobraNet input or a backup for CobraNet. Mode Switch: Used on each consecutive pair of channels, this four-position switch is used to select the amplifier’s mode of operation: Dual 8/4 ohms, Dual 70V, Bridge-Mono 16/8 ohms, and BridgeMono 100V. Cooling Vents: Front-to-rear forced airflow. Options Control Modules: VCA-MC4A: VCA module for CTs 4200A. VCA-MC8: VCA module for CTs 8200. Wall-mount level control panels for use with VCA module: 1-VCAP: Single-gang panel with 1 VCA channel volume control. 4-VCAP: Two-gang panel with 4 VCA channel volume controls. T-170V: This is an autoformer that allows 100V output from the amplifier, and allows other amplifiers without direct constant voltage output to be easily integrated into distributed systems. TP-170V: This is a rack-mountable panel with four autoformers as described above.

Protection Systems

Thermal Level Control (TLC): If an amplifier channel starts to overheat, the TLC circuit will engage that channel’s input compressor. By compressing the input, the amplifier will not generate as much heat and will have a chance to cool down. The degree of compression is proportional to the amount of overheating. If the channel becomes too hot for safe operation even after full TLC limiting, the channel will shut off, and the Thermal Indicator for that channel will flash brightly to alert the user that a state of thermal stress or overload has cause the channel to shut down. FIT (Fault Isolation Topology): Isolates faults within affected channels. Fault: If an amplifier channel requires service, the corresponding Fault indicator will illuminate to alert the user of this condition. If this occurs, return the amplifier to the Crown factory or to an authorized Crown service center. High-Pass Filter: A fixed 35-Hz (70-Hz in CTs 4200) high-pass filter per channel pair is automatically inserted when the mode switch is set to either of the constant-voltage settings. The high-pass filter corner frequency in the CTs 8200 can be set to 70 Hz, or bypassed, with a service option. AC Under-/Over-Voltage Protection: If the AC line voltage varies out of an acceptable range, the amplifier’s power supply turns off and the blue Power LED flashes. The amplifier will turn back on when the AC line voltage returns to safe operating levels. Under-Voltage Limit

Models

Over-Voltage Limit

100VAC (CTs 8200 only)

90VAC

110VAC

120 VAC units

108VAC

132VAC

220V/230V/240V units

198VAC

264VAC

Section:

Power Fuse: A fuse protects the amplifier from excessive AC current draw. Inrush Limiting: A soft-start circuit in the power supply minimizes the amplifier’s current draw during power-on. Variable-speed Fan: Continuously variable speed fan directs the airflow through the amplifier for cooling. Regulatory Certifications

Other Applications

INSTALLED SOUND

POWER OUTPUT* All channels driven 4-ohm Dual 8-ohm Dual 70V Dual

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Signal Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates to indicate the presence of analog input signals above –40 dBu. Clip Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates when the THD of the channel’s output signal rises to a level typically considered as the onset of audible clipping. The Clip Indicator also will illuminate during Thermal Level Control (TLC) or input overload. Thermal Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, flashes when a state of thermal stress or overload has caused the channel to shut down. If the power supply goes into thermal overload, all channel LEDs will flash. Fault Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, flashes when a fault condition has occurred in the channel. Ventilation Grille: Front-to-rear forced airflow. Data Indicator: Yellow LED indicates IQ Loop data activity (if the amplifier is equipped with an IQ-MC module, and connected to an IQ Loop). Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates amplifier has been turned on and AC power is available. Indicator also flashes if the amplifier shuts off due to an under-/over-voltage condition on the AC mains. Power Switch: Amplifier is on when the switch is in the IN position.

400W 320W

220W † 200W

1 channel pair driven 8-ohm Bridge 16-ohm Bridge 100V Bridge †

560W 540W

440W 250W † 440W 250W

C

rown’s CTs Multi-Channel Series offers wide flexibility for a wide range of installed sound applications. CTs Multi-Channel Series amplifiers offer independent selection of high- and low-impedance operation for each channel pair, making these amps ideal for multi-zone installations.

*Maximum average power in watts at 1kHz at 0.1% THD. †Constant Voltage full-bandwidth power ratings support 100 Hz to 20 kHz due to automatic high-pass filters.

Page 198

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz - 20 kHz): ±0.5 dB. Phase Response (at 1 watt, 10 Hz - 20 kHz): ±35°. Signal to Noise Ratio below rated power (20 Hz to 20 kHz): 100 dB unweighted. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at 1 watt, from 20 Hz to 20 kHz: < 0.05%. Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) 60 Hz and 7 kHz at 4:1, from 163 milliwatts to full bandwidth power: < 0.05% (typical). Damping Factor: 10 Hz to 400 Hz: >180. Crosstalk (below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 80 dB. Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 50 dB. DC Output Offset (shorted input): < ±5 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): 20 kilohms balanced, 10 kilohms unbalanced. Maximum Input Level (before input compression): + 20 dBu. Load Impedance: (Note: Safe with all types of loads) Stereo: 4/8 and 25 ohms (70V) Bridge Mono: 8/16 and 50 ohms (100V) Voltage Gain (at maximum level setting), 1.4V sensitivity, 4/8 Ohm Operation: 20:1 (26 dB); 70V Operation: 50:1 (34 dB) 100V Operation: 71.4:1 (37 dB) AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available (±10%): 120V/60 Hz, 220/230/240V/50 Hz. Power Draw at Idle (120VAC mains, all channels in 4/8 ohm mode): 58W. Power Draw at Idle (120VAC mains, all channels in 70V mode): 77W. Cooling: Continuously variable speed forced air, front-to-back airflow. Dimensions (Width, Height, Depth): CTs 4200: 19 in. (48.3 cm) W x 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) H x 16.25 in. (41.3 cm) D. CTs 8200: 19 in. (48.3 cm) W x 5.25 in. (13.3 cm) H x 16.25 in. (41.3 cm) D. Weight (Net, Shipping): CTs 4200: 27 lb 8 oz (12.5 kg), 32 lb (14.5 kg) CTs 8200: 36 lb 6 oz (16.5 kg), 47 lb (21.3 kg).

Page 199

04


AMPLIFIERS INSTALLED SOUND CTs Multi-Channel Series: With CobraNet CTs 4200USP/CN, CTs 8200USP/CN

 SPECIFICATIONS USP/CN CobraNet Module Specifications (for amplifier specifications, see the CTs MultiChannel Series pages)

Connectors:

Indicators:

Preset Indicator Signals the number of the current preset, if active, by flashing a series of flashes equal to the current preset number.

Switches:

Reset/Preset Switch Used to change presets, restore settings to factory default or restore all the presets to the factory defaults. During operation of the switch, the Data indicator flashes as an aid to the user. Accessible with a straightened paper clip through the rear panel, the switch selects the next user preset if pressed for less than 2 seconds, resets the module to preset “0” if pressed for more than 2 seconds.

General:

Memory Backup: Non-volatile FLASH memories for backup of run-time parameters, presets, and program storage. Communications: 100Mb Fast Ethernet conforming to IEEE 802.3.

D/A and A/D Conversion: 24 bit. Latency:

DSP processing: 1 ms or 1000 µs. Digital-to-analog conversion: 250 µs. Analog-to-digital conversion: 250 µs. Amplifier: 100 µs. Total: 1.6 ms or 1000 µs. Dynamic Range: 103 dB typical (A-weighted, 20Hz–20kHz, audio sourced from muted CobraNet channel). Distortion: < 0.1% THD+N, 20Hz–20kHz. Frequency Response: ± 0.5 dB, 20Hz–20kHz. Input/Output Monitor Accuracy: Typically ±1dB. Maximum Input Level: + 20 dBu.

Regulatory Certifications

Other Applications

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

AUX Connector Configurable for AUX input, AUX output and Listen Bus. Listen Bus is also supported through CobraNet. Network Connector The dual RJ45 CobraNet connectors allow a Primary & Secondary connection to the 100Mb Ethernet network. Should the Primary connection lose link activity with the network, the input module will automatically switch to the Secondary connection to ensure uninterrupted audio and control. The indicators on the RJ45 connectors display network information concerning the Ethernet and CobraNet connections.

IQ Data Indicator Flashes when the module receives a valid command that is addressed to the CTs 4200 USP/CN and CTs 8200USP/CN.

Overall Audio Performance:

DSP Processing: Two processors, 32 bit, Floating Point, 724 µs latency.

Section:

04

Section:

04

CobraNet Capable TM

 FEATURES (input module) • •

• • • •

100 Mbps Ethernet single-plug solution for CobraNet audio, and HiQnet™ control and monitoring. Analog audio inputs allow CobraNet network audio input, CobraNet audio backup, or a hardwire emergency override of CobraNet audio. 24 bit digital to analog conversion with 32 bit, floating point DSP processing. Firmware upgrades via the network. 10 user selectable presets. Reliable FLASH memory backup of all parameters.

CTs 8200USP/CN Back Panel (note USP/CN CobraNet™ module at top left)

POWER OUTPUT* Models

CTs 4200USP/CN CTs 8200USP/CN

All channels driven 4-ohm Dual 8-ohm Dual 70V Dual

260W 200W

180W 160W

220W † 200W

1 channel driven 4-ohm Dual 8-ohm Dual 70V Dual

270W 220W 250W † 270W 220W 250W

*Maximum average power in watts at 1kHz at 0.1% THD. †Constant Voltage full-bandwidth power ratings support 100 Hz to 20 kHz due to automatic high-pass filters.

Page 200

All channel pairs driven 8-ohm Bridge 16-ohm Bridge 100V Bridge † †

520W 400W

400W 320W

220W † 200W

1 channel pair driven 8-ohm Bridge 16-ohm Bridge 100V Bridge †

560W 540W

440W 440W

250W † 250W

T

INSTALLED SOUND ®

he Crown CTs 4200USP/CN and CTs 8200USP/CN power amplifiers have an integrated 3rd generation, DSP-based input module. It connects the amplifier to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network allowing it to be remotely controlled and monitored via System Architect™ software. In addition, the input module allows the transport of real-time digital audio via CobraNet™ over the same Ethernet network. The amplifiers connect to a HiQnet™ audio control/monitor network using standard 100 Mbps Ethernet hardware (switches, Network Interface Cards, and cables). CobraNet™ audio is available over the same 100 Mbps Ethernet network, providing a simple-to-install, single-plug solution for audio distribution, control, and monitoring.

Page 201


 SPECIFICATIONS

AMPLIFIERS INSTALLED SOUND CDi Series: 2/4/8 Ohm, 70V/100V per channel CDi 1000, CDi 2000, CDi 4000, CDi 6000

Performance

Output Power: See power charts below. Voltage Gain at 1kHz: CDi 1000: 30.5 dB CDi 2000: 32.9 dB CDi 4000: 34.2 dB CDi 6000: 37.1 dB Frequency Response: +0/–1 dB from 20 Hz to 20 kHz at 1 watt into 4 ohms. Load Impedance: Safe with all types of loads. Rated for 2 to 8 ohms in Stereo mode, 4 to 16 ohms in Bridge-Mono mode. Sensitivity: 1.4V. Signal to Noise Ratio (below rated 8-ohm power at 1 kHz): 100 dB (A weighted).

• • • • •

POWER OUTPUT* Models

2-ohm Dual (per channel)

4-ohm Dual (per channel)

CDi 1000 700W** 500W CDi 2000 1,000W** 800W CDi 4000 1,600W** 1,200W CDi 6000 3,000W** 2,100W

8-ohm Dual (per channel)

70V Dual (per channel)

275W 500W 475W 800W 650W 1,000W 1,200W 2,500W

*Maximum average power in watts at 1 kHz at 0.5% THD. **With 1% THD.

Page 202

4-ohm Bridge

100V‡ Dual (per channel)

1,400W** 500W 2,000W** 800W 3,200W** 1,000W 6,000W** 2,500W

140V Bridge

1,000W 1,600W 2,000W 5,000W

Level: Detented rotary level control, one per channel. Power Switch: On/off switch applies AC power to the amplifier.

Signal Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when a very low-level signal is present at input. –10 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal exceeds –10 dB below clip. –20 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal level exceeds –20 dB below clip. Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when the amplifier is ready to produce audio. Clip Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, turns on at the threshold of audible distortion. Temp Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates under excessive temperature conditions.

Operating Temperature: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing).

Power Indicator: Blue LED illuminates when the amplifier has been turned on and has power.

DSP Section

Rear Panel Controls and Connectors

Input EQ: 6 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15 dB boost/cut. Also adjustable high and low shelving filters. This 8-filter EQ section can be bypassed.

Onboard digital signal processing includes crossovers, EQ filters, delay, and output limiting. Computer connectivity via USB allows fast setup and configuration with HiQnet™. Barrier strip outputs, removable Phoenix-style input. Extremely versatile, handling a wide range of speaker impedances and outputs. Switch-mode universal power supply. Speaker presets for crossover frequencies, EQ, limiting, compression, delay, and subharmonic synthesis.

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Crossover Filters: Highpass and lowpass per channel. Butterworth 6/12/18/24 dB per octave and Linkwitz-Riley 24/48 dB per octave. Also includes ±15 dB bandpass gain and polarity control.

T

AC Line Connector:

CDi 1K, 2K, 4K: NEMA 5-15P (15A). CDi 6000: NEMA 6-10P (20A) IEC C20 (20A). Input Connector: Two 3-pin removable Phoenix-type connectors each accept a balanced line-level input signal.

Protection

Included Accessories

Non-touch cover Locking level-control knobs.

Construction Chassis: Steel.

Cooling: Proportional speed fan with front-torear airflow. Dimensions: EIA Standard 19-in. rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B), 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) high and 12.25 in. (31.11 cm) deep behind mounting surface. CDi 6000 is 16.2 in. (41.15 cm) deep. Net Weight: CDi 1K. 2K, 4K: 19 lb (8.6 kg). CDi 6K: 24 lb (10.9 kg).

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 •

CDi-Series amplifiers are protected against shorted, open or mismatched loads; overloaded power supplies; excessive temperature; chain destruction phenomena; excessive output current, and input overload damage. They also protect loudspeakers from input/ output DC, large or dangerous DC offsets and turn-on/turn-off transients.

Input Stage: Input is electronically balanced and employs precision 1% resistors.

CDi 6000: 15.3A At Idle: Draws no more than 180 watts.

 FEATURES

Presets: 20 presets. 19 are user-definable

LCD Screen: Backlit liquid crystal display shows speaker presets and signal processing.

AC Line Current: CDi 1000: 6.8A CDi 2000: 8.3A CDi 4000: 10.5A At Idle: Draws no more than 38 watts.

Versatility

HiQnet USB Connector: Type B, connects to a USB port on a PC.

Crosstalk: > 70 dB below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz.

AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available: 100V, 120V, 220-240V, 50/60 Hz.

Output Connectors: 4-position barrier strip with connectors for dual louspeakers or bridge-mono loudspeaker. Dual connectors work with 2-8 ohm or 70V/100V loads. Bridge-mono connectors work with 4-8 ohm or 140V loads.

Output Limiter: Prevents clipping and protects loudspeakers. Choice of –3, –6, or –12 dB threshold per channel.

Sel/Prev/Next Buttons: Three buttons near the LCD screen are used to access menu items and front panel lockout.

Maximum Input Signal: +22 dBu typical.

04

Delay: Up to 50 msec total delay per channel.

Damping Factor: Better than 500 from 20 Hz to 400 Hz.

Input Impedance (nominal): 20 k ohms, balanced; 10 k ohms, unbalanced.

Section:

Output EQ: 8 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15 dB boost/cut. This 8-filter EQ section can NOT be bypassed. Filters are enabled individually.

Section:

Shipping Weight: CDi 1K, 2K, 4K: 22 lb (10.0 kg). CDi 6K: 30 lb (13.6 kg).

04

Regulatory Certifications

Note: All measurements apply to all models of CDi Series amplifiers in stereo mode with 8-ohm loads and an input sensitivity of 26 dB gain, 1 kHz at rated power unless other otherwise specified. Specifications for units supplied outside the U.S.A. may vary slightly at different AC voltages and frequencies.

INSTALLED SOUND

he CDi Series of Crown® amplifiers are professional tools designed and built for installed sound applications. The series includes four models which are identical except for output power: CDi 1000, CDi 2000, CDi 4000 and CDi 6000. All are rugged and lightweight, and offer unmatched value in their class. CDi-Series amplifiers feature an LCD screen with DSP speaker presets. Other features include a switch-mode universal power supply, useful function indicators, proportional-speed fanassisted cooling, removable Phoenix-style inputs, barrier strip outputs for low-Z or 70V/140V loads, short-circuit protection and more.

‡100Vp

Page 203


 SPECIFICATIONS

AMPLIFIERS INSTALLED SOUND DSi Series: 2, 4, 8 ohm DSi 1000, DSi 2000, DSi 4000, DSi 6000

Performance

04

One-touch Performance

 FEATURES • • • • •

Intuitive front-panel LCD screen, automatic presets for popular JBL speaker systems for quick, easy configuration. Onboard digital signal processing includes crossovers, EQ filters, delay, and output limiting. Computer connectivity via USB allows fast setup and configuration with HiQnet™. Barrier strip outputs, removable Phoenix-style input. All models are THX®-approved.

DSi 1000 DSi 2000 DSi 4000 DSi 6000

2-ohm Dual (per channel)

700W*† 1,000W* 1,450W* 3,000W*

4-ohm Dual (per channel)

8-ohm Dual (per channel)

475W 275W 800W 475W 1,200W 650W 2,100W 1,200W

Maximum average power in watts at 1 kHz at 0.5% THD. *With 1% THD.

Page 204

CDi 6000: 15.3A At Idle: Draws no more than 180 watts.

Operating Temperature: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing).

Input EQ: 6 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15 dB boost/cut. Also adjustable high and low shelving filters. This 8-filter EQ section can be bypassed. Crossover Filters: Highpass and lowpass per channel. Butterworth 6/12/18/24 dB per octave, Linkwitz-Riley 24/48 dB per octave. Also includes ±15 dB bandpass gain and polarity control. Output EQ: 8 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15 dB boost/cut. This 8-filter EQ section can NOT be bypassed. Filters are enabled individually. Output Limiter: Prevents clipping and protects loudspeakers. Choice of –3, –6, or –12 dB threshold per channel. Delay: Up to 50 msec total delay per channel. Presets: 20 presets. One is “DSP OFF.” Fifteen are factory-set for JBL Cinema systems. Four are user-definable.

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Level: Detented rotary level control, one per channel. Power Switch: On/off switch applies AC power to the amplifier. Sel/Prev/Next Buttons: Three buttons near the LCD screen are used to access menu items and front panel lockout. LCD Screen: Backlit liquid crystal display shows speaker presets and signal processing. Signal Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when a very low-level signal is present at input. –10 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal exceeds –10 dB below clip. –20 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal level exceeds –20 dB below clip. Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when the amplifier is ready to produce audio. Clip Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, turns on at the threshold of audible distortion. Temp Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates under excessive temperature conditions. Power Indicator: Blue LED illuminates when the amplifier has been turned on and has power.

Rear Panel Controls and Connectors AC Line Connector: DSi 1K, 2K, 4K: NEMA 5-15P (15A). DSi 6000: NEMA 6-10P (20A) IEC C20 (20A). Input Connector: Two 3-pin removable Phoenix-type connectors each accept a balanced line-level input signal. Output Connectors: 4-position barrier strip with connectors for dual louspeakers or bridge-mono loudspeaker. HiQnet USB Connector: Type B, connects to a HiQnet network. HD-15 Connector: For cinema I/O compatibility with DSi-8M System Monitor. See Figure 1.

Protection

DSi-Series amplifiers are protected against shorted, open or mismatched loads; overloaded power supplies; excessive temperature; chain destruction phenomena; excessive output current, and input overload damage. They also protect loudspeakers from input/output DC, large or dangerous DC offsets and turn-on/turn-off transients

Construction

Chassis: Steel. Cooling: Proportional speed fan with front-torear airflow. Dimensions: EIA Standard 19-in. rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B), 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) high and 12.25 in. (31.11 cm) deep behind mounting surface. DSi 6000 is 16.2 in. (41.15 cm) deep. Net Weight: DSi 1K. 2K, 4K: 19 lb (8.6 kg). DSi 6K: 24 lb (10.9 kg). Shipping Weight: DSi 1K, 2K, 4K: 22 lb (10.0 kg). DSi 6K: 30 lb (13.6 kg).

Regulatory Certifications

Note: All measurements apply to all models of CDi Series amplifiers in stereo mode with 8-ohm loads and an input sensitivity of 26 dB gain, 1 kHz at rated power unless other otherwise specified. Specifications for units supplied outside the U.S.A. may vary slightly at different AC voltages and frequencies.

INSTALLED SOUND

POWER OUTPUT Models

CDi 1000: 6.8A CDi 2000: 8.3A CDi 4000: 10.5A At Idle: Draws no more than 38 watts.

DSP Section

4-ohm Bridge

1,400W*† 2,000W* 3,000W* 6,000W*

8-ohm Bridge

950W 1,600W 2,400W 4,200W

†Not rated for 100V versions.

ngineered from the ground up for unmatched quality and performance, the Crown DSi Echannel Series of power amplifiers offers four models of 500W, 800W, 1200W and 2100W per at 4 ohms. Onboard digital signal processing includes crossovers, EQ filters, delay ®

and output limiting. Rear panel HD-15 connector provides easy input/output connectivity between DSi amplifiers and the new DSi-8M System Monitor. At the touch of a button, Crown’s DSi cinema amplifiers deliver perfectly matched performance with each awardwinning JBL ScreenArray system, making this the ultimate cinema solution.

Page 205

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

Voltage Gain at 1kHz: DSi 1000: 30.5 dB DSi 2000: 32.9 dB DSi 4000: 34.2 dB DSi 6000: 37.1 dB Frequency Response: +0/–1 dB from 20 Hz to 20 kHz at 1 watt into 4 ohms. Load Impedance: Safe with all types of loads. Rated for 2 to 8 ohms in Stereo mode, 4 to 16 ohms in Bridge-Mono mode. DSi 1000 A1 (100V version) is rated for 4 to 8 ohms in Stereo mode, 8 to 16 ohms in Bridge-Mono mode. Sensitivity: At 8 ohm rated output: DSi 1000: 1.4V DSi 2000: 1.4V DSi 4000: 1.4V At 4 ohm rated output: DSi 1000: 1.3V DSi 2000: 1.2V DSi 4000: 1.3V At 2 ohm rated output: DSi 1000: 1.1V DSi 2000: 1.0V DSi 4000: 1.0V Signal to Noise Ratio (below rated 8-ohm power at 1 kHz): 100 dB (A weighted). Damping Factor: Better than 500 from 20 Hz to 400 Hz. Crosstalk: > 70 dB below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz, A-weighted. Input Stage: Input is electronically balanced and employs precision 1% resistors. Input Impedance (nominal): 20 k ohms, balanced; 10 k ohms, unbalanced. AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available: 100V, 120V, 220240V, 50/60 Hz. AC Line Current:

Section:

04


Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

COMMERCIAL AUDIO

Section:

04

Preamplifier-Mixers

Section:

04

Amplifiers Mixer-Amplifiers XM Business Music Systems

Page 206

Page 207


COMMERCIAL AUDIO PREAMPLIFIER-MIXERS

 SPECIFICATIONS

14M, 28M

Performance

Frequency Response (at line out): 20 Hz to 20 kHz +/- 1 dB. Signal to Noise Ratio (master volume at minimum): 100 dB. THD: 0.05% typical with 800 mV balanced input, 1V output. Input Sensitivity (volts RMS for full output at maximum gain): Balanced mic inputs: 3 mV. Balanced line inputs: 800 mV. RCA connectors: 400 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): Mic: 400 ohms. Line: 100 kilohms. RCA: 50 kilohms. Crosstalk (all controls at “10”): –50 dB at 1kHz.

Input Connectors: Mic/Line Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type, balanced, one per input channel.

Input Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED, one for each input channel, illuminates when input signal exceeds –24 dBu (line) or –70 dBu (mic). Output Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED, one for each output channel, illuminates when output signal level exceeds 100 mV. Clip Indicators: Red LED, one per output channel. Illuminates at threshold of audible distortion. Output Volume Controls: One per output channel. Detented potentiometer with knob.

Back Panel Controls and Connectors

Auxiliary Power Input: 2-position terminal strip for 24 VDC (±10%) backup power. Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks.

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Power Switch: Pushbutton on-off switch. The power switch does not affect the 24V DC auxiliary power input. Input Volume Controls: Microphone/line, four in 14M, eight in 28M. Detented potentiometers with knobs.

AC Power Inlet: Detachable IEC.

Mixer Config Switch: A DIP switch with two functions: 1. Assigns an input as the priority input for each output, thereby temporarily muting the remaining inputs. Muting is activated by contact closure. 2. Global enable switch for phantom power. Does not affect RCA inputs. Default position is off. Priority Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type connector allows Input 1 or Input 5 (28M only) to mute other input signals by contact closure.

Dual RCA Input Connector: For stereo music signals, unbalanced, summed together, two connectors per input channel. The tone generator has been omitted. Call Crown Tech Support if you have a tone generator question. Mic/line Switch: Selects mic-level or line-level signals. One switch for each balanced input

Included Accessories

Power cord Detachable rack ears Phoenix-type connectors Spade lugs

Dimensions

EIA Standard 19-inch (48.3-cm) rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B) with rack ears, 1.7-inch (4.3-cm) height and 10.7-inch (27.18-cm) depth behind the mounting surface.

Weight

Net Weight: 14M: 8.7 lb (3.9 kg) 28M: 8.7 lb (3.9 kg) Shipping Weight: 14M: 14 lb (6.4 kg) 28M: 14 lb (6.4 kg)

Section:

04

Regulatory Certifications

Input Routing Switch (28M only): DIP switches that assign each input signal to each output. Two switches per input.

 FEATURES • • • • • • •

Page 208

4 or 8 inputs, 1 or 2 output channels. Ideal for commercial and industrial use. Balanced Phoenix-type mic/line inputs; RCA inputs. Balanced Phoenix-type line outputs. Any input can be sent to any output. Priority muting. Independent bass and treble controls for each input.

Model

Inputs

System Zones

14M 28M

4 8

Single-zone Two-zone

T

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Phantom Power: 15 VDC.

Storage Temperature: –20° C to 85° C.

Adaptable

Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates power on.

Fuse: Protects the power supply.

Operating Temperature/Humidity: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing).

04

Line Out Connector: One 3-pin balanced Phoenix-type connector per output channel. Level controlled by master volume control.

Line Output Level (nominal): 1.2 V into 10 kilohms. AC Line Voltages Available: 100V 50/60 Hz 120V 60 Hz 220V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 240V 50/60 Hz

Section:

Tone Controls: Bass and Treble non-detented potentiometers on each input channel. Bass ±10 dB at 100 Hz, Treble ±10 dB at 10 kHz.

COMMERCIAL AUDIO

he Crown® 14M and 28M are high-value mixers for commercial and industrial audio. The mixers are part of Crown’s Commercial Audio Series, which also includes mixer-amplifiers and power amplifiers. These low-cost units provide all necessary features in a simple building-block format. Some applications include schools, hospitals, factories, restaurant/retail, houses of worship, fitness facilities, A/V boardrooms, correctional facilities, and small offices. Typical uses are paging, background music, security and evacuation instructions. Input routing allows each input to be assigned to any output. You can add more mixers for more inputs, or add more power amps (or mixer-amps) to handle more zones. Other features include priority muting and phantom power.

Page 209


 SPECIFICATIONS

COMMERCIAL AUDIO AMPLIFIERS 180A, 280A, 1160A

Performance

Frequency Reponse (at 1 watt from 4-ohm tap): 70 Hz to 19 kHz +/- 1 dB. Frequency Response (at line out): 20 Hz to 20 kHz +/- 1 dB. Power Bandwidth (at 4-ohm tap, 2 dB below maxium 1 kHz power): 50 Hz to 20 kHz with < 0.5% THD Signal to Noise Ratio (ref. to rated power, master volume at minimum): 85 dB. DC Output Offset: < ±5 mV. THD: Less than 0.5% at rated power at 1 kHz. Input Sensitivity (for full output at maximum gain): 800 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): 100 kilohms.

Crosstalk (all controls at “10”): –70 dB at 1kHz. Line Output Level (nominal): 1V into 10 kilohms. AC Line Voltages Available: 100V 50/60 Hz 120V 60 Hz 220V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 240V 50/60 Hz Operating Temperature/Humidity: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing).

Section:

04

Storage Temperature: –20° C to 85° C.

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Power Zone

Power Switch: Pushbutton on-off switch. The power switch does not affect the 24V DC auxiliary power input. Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates power on.

Protection

Clip Indicators: Red LED, one per output channel. Illuminates at threshold of audible distortion.

DC-Fault Load Protection: Included.

Master Volume Controls: One per output channel. Detented potentiometer with knob. Tone Controls: Bass and Treble non-detented potentiometers on each channel. Bass ±10 dB at 100 Hz, Treble ±10 dB at 10 kHz.

Back Panel Controls and Connectors

Reset Switch: Resets the circuit breaker that protects the power supply. 220/230/240V units have a fuse instead. AC Power Inlet: Detachable IEC. Auxiliary Power Input: 2-position terminal strip for 24 VDC (±10%) backup power. Accepts up to 14 AWG terminal forks. Amplifier Outputs Connectors: One per channel, 4-position terminal strip with COM (Common), 4 ohms, 70V and 100V terminals. Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks. Nontouch cover included. Output VCA Connector: One for every two channels, 4-pin Phoenix-type connector for two VCA control lines of +10 VDC and ground. Compatible with Crown 1-VCAP and 4-VCAP modules. Line Out Connector: One 3-pin balanced Phoenix-type connector per output channel. Post master, pre-VCA. Level controlled by master volume control. Amp Input Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type, high-impedance balanced, one per amplifer channel.

Current Limit Protection: Included. Thermal Limit Protection: Over-temperature thermal cutout.

Included Accessories

Power cord Detachable rack ears Screws for rack ears Non-touch cover for output connectors Phoenix-type connectors Spade lugs

Optional Accessories

1-VCAP remote volume control for one channel. 4-VCAP remote volume control for four channels.

Dimensions

EIA Standard 19-inch (48.3-cm) rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B) with rack ears, 3.5-inch (8.9-cm) height and 12.2-inch (31.0-cm) depth behind the mounting surface (not including nontouch cover). 4.1 inches (10.5 cm) high including feet. 13.9 inches (35.2 cm) deep from front of knobs to back of non-touch cover.

Weight

Net Weight:

180A: 21.0 lb (9.5 kg) 280A: 25.3 lb (11.5 kg) 1160A: 25.3 lb (11.5 kg)

Shipping Weight:

Section:

180A: 26.0 lb (11.8 kg) 280A: 30.3 lb (13.7 kg) 1160A: 30.3 lb (13.7 kg)

04

Regulatory Certifications

Cooling

Convection cooled.

 FEATURES • • • •

Ideal for commercial and industrial use. Balanced Phoenix-type line inputs; touch-proofed screw-terminal speaker outputs. Advanced protection system includes output current limiting, DC protection, circuit breaker/fuse, and thermal protection. 1 or 2 inputs; 1 to 2 amplifier output channels.

POWER OUTPUT* Models

180A 280A 1160A

4-ohm

70V/100V

Inputs

System Zones

80W 80W 160W

80W 80W 160W

1 2 1

Single-zone Two-zone Single-zone

T

COMMERCIAL AUDIO

he Crown® 180A, 280A and 1160A are high-value amplifiers for commercial and industrial audio. They provide 4-ohm and constant-voltage outputs (70V and 100V). The amps are part of Crown’s Commercial Audio Series, which also includes mixers and mixer-amps. These low-cost units provide all necessary features in a simple building-block format.

*Minimum guaranteed power in watts at 1 kHz with 0.5% THD.

Page 210

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Minimum Load Impedance: 100V output: 160 ohms. 70V output: 80 ohms. 4-ohm output: 4/8 ohms.

Output Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED, one for each output channel, illuminates when output signal level exceeds 100 mV (45 dB below full power) from the 4-ohm tap.

Page 211


 SPECIFICATIONS

COMMERCIAL AUDIO AMPLIFIERS 660A

Frequency Reponse (at 1 watt from 4-ohm tap): 100 Hz to 19 kHz +/- 1 dB. Frequency Response (at line out): 20 Hz to 20 kHz +/- 1 dB. Signal to Noise Ratio (ref. to rated power, master volume at minimum): 85 dB. DC Output Offset: < ±5 mV. THD: Less than 0.5% at rated power at 1 kHz. Input Sensitivity (for full output at maximum gain): 800 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): 100 kilohms. Minimum Load Impedance: 100V output: 160 ohms. 70V output: 80 ohms. 4-ohm output: 4/8 ohms. Crosstalk (all controls at “10”): –70 dB at 1kHz.

AC Line Voltages Available: 100V 50/60 Hz 120V 60 Hz 220V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 240V 50/60 Hz AC Voltage Tolerance: +10%/–20%. Operating Temperature/Humidity: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing). Storage Temperature: –20° C to 85° C.

Section:

04

Front Panel Controls and Indicators Power Switch: Pushbutton on-off switch.

Clip Indicators: Red LED, one per output channel. Illuminates at threshold of audible distortion. Volume Controls: One per output channel. Detented potentiometer with knob. Tone Controls: Bass and Treble non-detented potentiometers on each channel. Bass ±10 dB at 100 Hz, Treble ±10 dB at 10 kHz.

Back Panel Controls and Connectors Reset Switch: Resets the circuit breaker that protects the power supply. 220/230/240V units have a fuse instead. Input Connectors: Detachable 3-pin Phoenixtype, high-impedance balanced, one per channel. AC Power Inlet: Detachable IEC.

Protection

Current Limit Protection: Included. Thermal Limit Protection: Over-temperature thermal cutout. DC-Fault Load Protection: Included. Turn On/Turn Off: No thumps or pops.

Included Accessories

Power cord Detachable rack ears Screws for rack ears Non-touch cover for output connectors Phoenix-type connectors Spade lugs

Optional Accessories

1-VCAP remote volume control for one channel. 4-VCAP remote volume control for four channels.

Dimensions

Amplifier Outputs Connectors: One per channel, 4-position terminal strip with COM (Common), 4 ohms, 70V and 100V terminals for channels 1-4 and one 4-position terminal strip (4 ohms, + and – for each channel) for channels 5 and 6. Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks. Non-touch cover included.

EIA Standard 19-inch (48.3-cm) rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B) with rack ears, 3.5-inch (8.9-cm) height and 12.2-inch (31.0-cm) depth behind the mounting surface (not including nontouch cover). 4.1 inches (10.5 cm) high including feet. 13.9 inches (35.2 cm) deep from front of knobs to back of non-touch cover.

VCA Connector: Each pair of channels has a 4pin Phoenix-type connector for two VCA control lines of +10 VDC and ground. Compatible with Crown 1-VCAP and 4-VCAP modules.

Weight

Cooling

Net Weight: 30.3 lb (13.7 kg)

Section:

Shipping Weight: 35.3 lb (16.0 kg)

04

Convection cooled.

Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates power on.

Regulatory Certifications

6-Channel

 FEATURES • • • •

6 inputs; 6 amplifier output channels. Balanced Phoenix-type line inputs; touch-proof screw-terminal speaker outputs. Advanced protection system includes output current limiting, DC protection, circuit breaker/fuse, and thermal protection. Ideal for commercial and industrial use.

POWER OUTPUT* Model

4-ohm

70V/100V

Inputs

System Zones

660A

60W

60W

6

Six-zone

*Minimum guaranteed power in watts at 1 kHz with 0.5% THD.

Page 212

T

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Load Impedance: Ch. 1-4: 4 ohms and 70V/100V. Ch. 5-6: 4 ohms.

Output Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED, one for each output channel, illuminates when output signal level exceeds 100 mV (45 dB below full power) from the 4-ohm tap.

COMMERCIAL AUDIO

he Crown® 660A is a very flexible, high-value six-channel amplifier for commercial and industrial audio. It provides 4-ohm and constant-voltage outputs (70V and 100V) on channels 1 through 4, and 4-ohm outputs on channels 5 and 6. The 660A is a part of Crown’s Commercial Audio Series, which also includes mixers and mixer-amps. These low-cost units provide all necessary features in a simple building-block format.

Page 213


 SPECIFICATIONS

COMMERCIAL AUDIO MIXER-AMPLIFIERS 180MA, 280MA, 1160MA

Performance

Frequency Reponse (at 1 watt from 4-ohm tap): 70 Hz to 19 kHz ± 1 dB. Frequency Response (at line out): 20 Hz to 20 kHz ± 1 dB. Power Bandwidth (at 4-ohm tap, 2 dB below maxium 1 kHz power): 50 Hz to 20 kHz with < 0.5% THD Signal to Noise Ratio (ref. to rated power, master volume at minimum): 85 dB. DC Output Offset: < ±5 mV.

Reset Switch: Resets the circuit breaker that protects the power supply. 220/230/240V units have a fuse instead. AC Power Inlet: Detachable IEC.

Cooling

Input Impedance (nominal): Mic: 400 ohms. Line: 100 kilohms. RCA: 50 kilohms.

Auxiliary Power Input: 2-position terminal strip for 24 VDC (±10%) backup power. Accepts up to 14 AWG terminal forks.

Convection cooled.

Protection

Amplifier Outputs Connectors: One per channel, 4-position terminal strip with COM (Common), 4 ohms, 70V and 100V terminals. Accepts up to 14 AWG terminal forks. Nontouch cover included.

Thermal Limit Protection: Over-temperature thermal cutout.

AC Line Voltages Available: 100V 50/60 Hz 120V 60 Hz 220V 50/60 Hz 230V 50/60 Hz 240V 50/60 Hz Operating Temperature/Humidy: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing). Storage Temperature: –20° C to 85° C.

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Power Switch: Pushbutton on-off switch. The power switch does not affect the 24V DC auxiliary power input.

• • • • •

4 to 8 inputs, 1 to 2 amplifier output channels. Ideal for commercial and industrial use. Balanced Phoenix-type mic/line inputs; touch-proofed screw-terminal speaker outputs. Any input can be sent to any output. Priority muting.

180MA 280MA 1160MA

4-ohm

70V/100V

Inputs

System Zones

80W 80W 160W

80W 80W 160W

4 8 4

Single-zone Two-zone Single-zone

*Minimum guaranteed power in watts at 1 kHz with 0.5% THD.

Page 214

Tone Controls: Bass and Treble non-detented recessed potentiometers on each input channel. Bass ±10 dB at 100 Hz, Treble ±10 dB at 10 kHz. Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates power on. Input Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED, one for each input channel, illuminates when input signal exceeds –24 dBu (line) or –70 dBu (mic).

Amp Config Switch: A DIP switch with two functions:

DC-Fault Load Protection: Included.

Included Accessories

Power cord Detachable rack ears Screws for rack ears Non-touch cover for output connectors Phoenix-type connectors Spade lugs

1. Assigns an input as the priority input for each output, thereby temporarily muting the remaining inputs. Muting is activated by contact closure.

Optional Accessories

2. Global enable switch for phantom power. Does not affect RCA inputs. Default position is off.

Dimensions

Priority Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type connector allows Input 1 or Input 5 (280MA only) to mute other input signals by contact closure. Input Routing Switch (280MA only): DIP switches that assign each input signal to each output. Two switches per input. Line Out Connector: One 3-pin balanced Phoenix-type connector per output channel. Post master, pre-VCA. Level controlled by master volume control. The tone generator has been omitted. Call Crown Tech Support if you have a tone generator question. Input Connectors: Mic/Line Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type, balanced, one per input channel.

1-VCAP remote volume control for one channel. 4-VCAP remote volume control for four channels. EIA Standard 19-inch (48.3-cm) rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B) with rack ears, 3.5-inch (8.9-cm) height and 12.2-inch (31.0-cm) depth behind the mounting surface (not including nontouch cover). 4.1 inches (10.5 cm) high including feet. 13.9 inches (35.2 cm) deep from front of knobs to back of non-touch cover.

Weight

Net Weight: 180MA: 21.0 lbs. (9.5 kg). 280MA: 25.3 lbs. (11.5 kg) 1160MA: 25.3 lbs. (11.5 kg) Shipping Weight: 180MA: 26.0 lbs. (11.8 kg) 280MA: 30.3 lbs. (13.8 kg) 1160MA: 30.3 lbs. (13.8 kg)

Regulatory Certifications

COMMERCIAL AUDIO

POWER OUTPUT* Models

Input Volume Controls: Microphone/line, four in 180MA and 1160MA, eight in 280MA. Detented potentiometers with knobs.

Output VCA Connector: 4-pin Phoenix-type connector for two VCA control lines of +10 VDC and ground. Compatible with Crown 1-VCAP and 4-VCAP modules.

Current Limit Protection: Included.

C

rown’s Commercial Audio mixer/amplifiers deliver legendary Crown quality to the commercial audio industry. These high-value mixer-amplifiers provide both 4-ohm and constant-voltage outputs (70V and 100V) for use in a wide range of commercial applications including schools, hospitals, factories, restaurant/retail, houses of worship, fitness facilities, A/V boardrooms, correctional facilities, and small offices. Easily configured for a range of uses such as paging, background music, security, and evacuation instructions, Crown’s Commercial Audio units are the smart choice for commercial sound.

Page 215

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Phantom Power: 15 VDC.

 FEATURES

Mic/line Switch: Selects mic-level or line-level signals. One switch for each balanced input.

Back Panel Controls and Connectors

Line Output Level (nominal): 1V into 10 kilohms.

Practical

Output Volume Controls: One per output channel. Detented potentiometer with knob.

Amp Input Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type, high-impedance balanced, one per amplifer channel. Used to link an additional mixer to the mixer-amplifier. Can be used to connect an external processor.

Input Sensitivity (for full output at maximum gain): Balanced mic inputs: 3 mV. Balanced line inputs: 800 mV. RCA connectors: 400 mV.

Crosstalk: –70dB at 1kHz.

04

Clip Indicators: Red LED, one per output channel. Illuminates at threshold of audible distortion. Does not respond to signals from the AMP INPUT connector.

Dual RCA Input Connector: For stereo music signals, unbalanced, summed together, two connectors per input channel.

Link In/Out Switch: Slide switch, one per channel. With the Link Switch IN, any signal applied to the Amp Input connector will be mixed with the input signal(s). With the Link Switch OUT, only the signal from the Amp Input Connector will appear at the amplifier output.

THD: Less than 0.5% at rated power at 1 kHz.

Section:

Output Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED, one for each output channel, illuminates when output signal level exceeds 100 mV (45 dB below full power) from the 4-ohm tap. Does not respond to signals from the AMP INPUT connector.

Section:

04


 SPECIFICATIONS

COMMERCIAL AUDIO MIXER-AMPLIFIERS 135MA, 160MA

Performance

Frequency Response (at 1 watt from line out): 50 Hz to 20 kHz ± 1 dB. 19 Hz to 34 kHz +0, –3 dB. Signal to Noise Ratio (ref. to rated power, master volume at minimum):

Output Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED above master output volume control illuminates when any input signal exceeds –40 dBu.

Mic: > 58 dB. Line: > 60 dB. Telephone: > 60 dB. Inputs 2 or 3 (and 4 in 160MA): > 78 dB.

Output Signal Clip Indicators: Red LED above master output volume control flashes brightly at threshold of audible distortion.

THD + N: < 0.5% at rated power at 1 kHz. < 0.1% at 5W at 1 kHz. Input Sensitivity (for full output at maximum gain): Input 1: Mic 3mV, Line 800mV. Input 2: 400mV. Input 3: 400mV. Input 4 (160MA only): 400mV.

Crosstalk: –82 dB at 1kHz (Ch. 1 line input 0.8V, Ch. 1 volume at minimum, other channel volumes at maximum). Line Output Level (nominal): 1V into 10 kilohms. Phantom Power: 15 VDC. AC Line Voltages Available: Universal Power Supply. Line voltage tolerance +15%, –20%.

04

Operating Temperature/Humidity: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing). Storage Temperature: –20° C to 85° C.

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Power Switch: Pushbutton on-off switch.

Practical

 FEATURES • • • • •

3 inputs and one 35W amplifier output channel in 135MA. 4 inputs and one 60W amplifier output channel in 160MA. Ideal for paging, background music, and music-on-hold. Voice-activated priority muting (VOX). Pre-amp outputs.

POWER OUTPUT* Models

8-ohm

70V/100V

135MA 160MA

35W 60W

35W 60W

Inputs

System Zones

3 4

Single-zone Single-zone

*Minimum guaranteed power in watts at 1 kHz with 0.5% THD.

Page 216

Input Volume Controls: Four controls, one per input. Detented potentiometers with knobs. Tone Controls: Bass and Treble non-detented recessed potentiometers under master output volume control. Bass ±10 dB at 100 Hz, Treble ±10 dB at 10 kHz. Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates power on. Input Signal Presence Indicators: Green LED, one above each channel's input attenuator, illuminates when input signal exceeds –40 dBu.

C

4. On: CH1 VOX mutes other channels by sensing signal through Input 1. 5. On: Routes CH1 to MOH output. 6. On: Routes CH2 to MOH output. 7. On: Routes CH3 to MOH output. 8. On: 15V phantom power. VOX Threshold: Trim pot controls how loud the voice on CH1 must be before muting other channels. Can be set for no muting.

Master Output Volume Control: Detented potentiometer with knob.

Cooling

Back Panel Controls, Connectors and Indicators

Protection

AC Power Inlet: Detachable IEC accepts US or Euro style power cords. Amplifier Output Connector: 4-position terminal barrier block with COM (Common), 8 ohms, 70V and 100V terminals. Accepts up to 10 AWG terminal forks. Non-touch cover included. Preamp Line Out Connector: 3-pin balanced Phoenix-type for connection to external amplifiers. Level independent of master volume control. Input Connector 1: 5-terminal Phoenix connector. 3 terminals for balanced signal, 2 terminals for priority contact closure, which mutes other channels when DIP switch 3 is on. Input Connector 2: Unbalanced line-level RCAtype connectors. Input Connector 3: Unbalanced line-level RCAtype connectors. Input Connector 4 (160MA only): Unbalanced line-level RCA-type connectors. Telephone (MOH) Output Connector: 4-terminal Phoenix connector (2 terminals for 1W output to 8-ohm speaker, 2 terminals for 600-ohm output to PBX music-on-hold port). MOH Level Control: Trim pot adjusts level for Music-On-Hold output from Telephone (MOH) Output Connector. Amp Configuration DIP Switch: DIP switch selection for multiple functions. 1. On: Sets CH1 to Mic Input. Off: Sets CH1 to Line Input. 2. On: Sets CH1 to Normal mode (no priority). 3. On: CH1 priority contact closure mutes other channels.

Convection cooled. Included protection mechanisms are current limiting, over-temperature thermal cutout, and DC-fault load protection. The unit is protected against turn-on/turn-off thumps.

Included Accessories

Power cord Non-touch cover for output connectors Phoenix-type connectors

Optional Accessories

Part no. IST 600-ohm Isolation Transformer for Telephone Output or Input 1. Part no. RM1 single rack mount kit for mounting a single MA unit in a rack. Part no. RM2 double rack mount kit for mounting two MA units side-by-side in a rack. Part no. S-Cover 10-pack of security knobs.

Dimensions

Width: Half rack width (9.5 in. or 24.1 cm). Height (front panel): 3.5 in. (8.9 cm). Height (including feet): 4.1 in. (10.5 cm). Depth (front panel to back panel): 12.2 in. (31.0 cm). Depth (front of knobs to back panel): 13.9 in. (35.2 cm).

Weight

Net Weight: 135MA: 8 lb 2 oz (3.7 kg). 160MA: 9 lb 7 oz (4.3 kg). Shipping Weight: 135MA: 10 lb 16 oz (4.9 kg). 160MA: 12 lb 4 oz (5.6 kg).

Regulatory Certifications

COMMERCIAL AUDIO

rown’s Commercial Audio mixer/amplifiers deliver legendary Crown quality to the commercial audio industry. These high-value mixer-amplifiers provide both 8-ohm and constant-voltage outputs (70V and 100V) for use in a wide range of commercial applications including schools, hospitals, factories, restaurant/retail, houses of worship, fitness facilities, A/V boardrooms, correctional facilities, and small offices. Easily configured for a range of uses such as paging, background music, security, and evacuation instructions, Crown’s Commercial Audio units are the smart choice for commercial sound.

Page 217

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Input Impedance (nominal): Mic: 2.2 kilohms. Line: 10 kilohms. RCA: 10 kilohms.

Section:

Input Signal Clip Indicators: Green LED, one above each channel's input attenuator, flashes brightly at threshold of audible distortion.

Section:

04


 SPECIFICATIONS

COMMERCIAL AUDIO XM TUNER-MIXER-AMPLIFIERS 180MAx Pack (180MAx tuner-mixer-amplifier also available separately)

Performance

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Section:

04

XM Enabled

 FEATURES • • •

Programmable XM tuner with XM channel data display. Independent bass and treble controls for each input. Balanced Phoenix-type mic/line inputs; touch-proof screwterminal speaker outputs. Priority ducking, Music-On-Hold (MOH) outputs. 180 MAx Pack includes four JBL Control 1ST 2-way speakers with 70V transformer and mounting brackets, remote control and XM antenna.

• •

POWER OUTPUT* Model

4-ohm

25V/70V

Inputs

System Zones

180MAx

80W

80W

4

Single-zone

*Minimum guaranteed power in watts at 1 kHz with 0.5% THD.

Page 218

Power Switch: Pushbutton on-off switch. Input Volume Controls: Four detented potentiometers with knobs. Input 1: Microphone/line (switchable)/telephone. Inputs 2 and 3: Line. Input 4: XM radio. Tone Controls: Bass and Treble non-detented recessed potentiometers on each input channel. Bass ±10 dB at 100 Hz, Treble ±10 dB at 10 kHz. XM Tuner Menu Button: Selects Direct, Preset, or Category mode. XM Tuner Category Buttons: Scrolls through categories (rock, classical, news, country, etc). XM Tuner Scroll Knob: Lets you scroll through channels and select them. XM Tuner Display: LCD screen displays XM channel data (channel number, channel name, artist name, song title), 16 station presets and signal strength. Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates power on. Input Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED illuminates when input signal exceeds –24 dBu (line) or –70 dBu (mic).

T

Back Panel Controls, Connectors and Indicators

Reset Switch: Resets the circuit breaker that protects the power supply. MOH 1V Level Control: Trim pot adjusts level for Music-On-Hold 1V output. MOH 1W Level Control: Trim pot adjusts level for Music-On-hold 1W output. MOH Signal Presence Indicator: Flashes when MOH signal is present. MOH Source Switch: Switches between Input 3 or XM, and routes the source to MOH 1V Line Out and MOH 1W connectors. MOH 1W Select Switch: Feeds 1W MOH signal either to amplifier output or internal speaker. MOH 1V Line Output RCA Connectors: Two RCA connectors (mono) for 1-volt output (in parallel with 600-ohm connectors, so they are isolated). MOH 1W Line Output Connector: 3-pin Phoenix connector provides Music-On-Hold signal of approximately 1 watt. MOH 1V Line Output Phoenix Connector: 3-pin Phoenix connector, 600-ohm transformer-isolated output, provides Music-On-Hold signal of approximately 1 volt. Phantom Power Switch: Turns phantom power on or off for Input 1. Mic/line Switch: Selects mic-level or line-level signal for Input 1. Link In/Out Switch: Slide switch. When set to IN, any signal applied to the Amp Input connector will be mixed with the input signal(s); when set to OUT, only the signal from the Amp Input Connector will appear at the amplifier output. Amplifier Output Connectors: 4-position terminal strip with COM (Common), 4 ohms, 25V and 70V terminals. Accepts up to 10 AWG crimp-on terminal forks. Non-touch cover included. XM Radio Stereo Line Out Connector: Dual RCA jacks for stereo music out from XM Radio tuner. Preamp Line Out Connector: 3-pin balanced Phoenix-type connector. Post master, pre-VCA. Level controlled by master volume control. Output VCA Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type connector for two VCA control lines of +10 VDC and ground. Compatible with Crown 1-VCAP module. Priority Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type connector for push-to-talk mic switch. Contact closure activatges ducking. Ducking does not affect Music-On-Hold outputs or XM stereo line out. Active Indicator: LED illuminates when VOX ducking is active.

he Crown® 180MAx Pack is the first tuner-mixer-amplifier and loudspeaker system designed for commercial use. It is designed for easy installation. Applications include restaurants, retail stores, coffee shops and other commercial establishments. The system includes the Crown 180MAx tunermixer-amplifier (also available separately), four JBL® Control® 1ST 2-way loudspeakers with built-in 70V transformers, XM antenna and a wireless remote control. Built into the 180MAx is an XM Radio tuner that receives satellite radio stations with digital sound quality. The unit also accepts signals from line, telephone, or microphone (phantom power included). Other features include bass and treble controls, and priority ducking.

VOX Threshold: Trim pot adjusts how loud the voice must be before ducking occurs. Can be set for no ducking. Priority Release Control: Trim pot adjusts release time of VOX ducking. Mic/Line Input Connector (Input 1 only): 3-pin Phoenix-type, balanced. Line Input Connectors (Inputs 2 and 3 only): 3-pin Phoenix-type, balanced. Dual RCA Input Connector: For stereo music signals, unbalanced, summed together, two connectors per input for inputs 1, 2 and 3. TEL Input Connector: Transformer-isolated 600-ohm input, summed into Input 1 for paging from a telephone system. Amp Input Connector: 3-pin Phoenix-type, high-impedance balanced. Used to link an additional mixer to the mixer-amplifier. Can be used to connect an external processor. AC Power Inlet: Detachable IEC. XM Radio Antenna Input: Connects to the XM antenna cable.

Cooling

Convection cooled.

Protection

Current Limit Protection: Included. Thermal Limit Protection: Over-temperature thermal cutout. DC-Fault Load Protection: Included.

Included Accessories

Power cord Detachable rack ears Screws for rack ears Non-touch cover for output connectors Phoenix-type connectors Spade lugs XM antenna Remote control

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Frequency Reponse (at 1 watt from 4-ohm tap): 70 Hz to 19 kHz ±1 dB. Frequency Response (at line out): 20 Hz to 20 kHz ±1 dB. Power Bandwidth (at 4-ohm tap, 2 dB below maxium 1 kHz power): 50 Hz to 20 kHz with < 0.5% THD Signal to Noise Ratio (ref. to rated power, master volume at minimum): 85 dB. DC Output Offset: < ±5 mV. THD: Less than 0.5% at rated power at 1 kHz. Input Sensitivity (for full output at maximum gain): Balanced mic inputs: 3 mV. Balanced line inputs: 800 mV. RCA connectors: 400 mV. Isolated telephone input: 75 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): Mic: 400 ohms. Line: 100 kilohms. RCA: 50 kilohms. Telephone: 600 ohms. Crosstalk: –70dB at 1kHz. Line Output Level (nominal): 1V into 10 kilohms. Phantom Power: 15 VDC. AC Line Voltages Available: 120V, 60 Hz. Line voltage tolerance +10%, –20%. Operating Temperature/Humidity: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing). Storage Temperature: –20° C to 85° C.

Output Signal Presence Indicator: Green LED, illuminates when output signal level exceeds 100 mV (45 dB below full power) from the 4-ohm tap. Clip Indicator: Red LED on output illuminates at threshold of audible distortion. Output Volume Control: Detented potentiometer with knob.

Section:

04

Optional Accessories

1-VCAP remote volume control.

Dimensions

Width (without rack ears): 17.3 in. (43.8 cm). Width (with rack ears): EIA Standard 19 in. W (EIA RS-310-B). Height (front panel): 3.5 in. (8.9 cm). Height (including feet): 4.1 in. (10.5 cm). Depth (front panel to back panel): 12.2 in. (31.0 cm). Depth (front of knobs to back of non-touch cover): 13.9 in. (35.2 cm).

Weight

Net Weight: 20 lb (9.07 kg). Shipping Weight: 25 lb (11.34 kg)

Regulatory Certifications

COMMERCIAL AUDIO

Page 219


Section:

04

Page 220

XTi Series

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

PORTABLE PA

Section:

04

XLS Series

Page 221


 SPECIFICATIONS

PR

World-Class

 NEW FEATURES • • • • •

Peakx Plus™ Limiters provide the ultimate in performance and protection. Enhanced Subharmonic Synth section provides user control of frequency, gain, and filter type. 3 user defined fan mode controls: Normal, Early, and Full Speed for matching for performance to a specific application. System monitoring provides visibility of AC Line Voltage and Power Supply Temperature. Integrated cast-aluminum handles for easy handling and enhanced durability.

POWER OUTPUT Model

XTi 1002 XTi 2002 XTi 4002 XTi 6002

2-ohm Dual (per channel)

4-ohm Dual (per channel)

8-ohm Dual (per channel)

700W* 500W 275W 1,000W* 800W 475W 1,600W* 1,200W 650W 3,000W* 2,100W 1,200W

4-ohm Bridge

8-ohm Bridge

1,400W* 2,000W* 3,200W* 6,000W*

1,000W 1,600W 2,400W 4,200W

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Input EQ: 6 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15 dB boost/cut. Also adjustable high and low shelving filters. This 8-filter EQ section can be bypassed. Crossover Filters: Highpass and lowpass per channel. Butterworth 6/12/18/24 dB per octave. Linkwitz-Riley 24/48 dB per octave. Also includes ±15 dB bandpass gain and polarity control. Output EQ: 8 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15dB boost/cut. This 8-filter EQ section can be bypassed.

T

Protection

XTi-Series amplifiers are protected against shorted, open or mismatched loads; overloaded power supplies; excessive temperature; chain destruction phenomena; excessive output current, input overload damage; and high-frequency blowups. They also protect loudspeakers from input/output DC, large or dangerous DC offsets and turn-on/turn-off transients.

IN A

Level: Detented rotary level control, one per channel. Power Switch: On/off switch applies AC power to the amplifier. Sel/Prev/Next Buttons: Three buttons near the LCD screen are used to access menu items and front panel lockout. LCD Screen: Backlit liquid crystal display shows speaker presets. Signal Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when a very low-level signal is present at input. May be used for troubleshooting cable runs. –10 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal exceeds –10 dB below clip. –20 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal level exceeds –20 dB below clip. Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when the amplifier is ready to produce audio. Clip Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, turns on at the threshold of audible distortion. Temp Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates under excessive temperature conditions. Power Indicator: Blue LED illuminates when the amplifier has been turned on and has power.

IM

DSP Section

Link/Out Connector: Loop-thru signal from input connector for linking to another amplifier, one per channel. Output Connectors: Two Neutrik® Speakon® NL4MP (mates with NL4FC) output connectors. Channel-1 Speakon® is wired with Ch. 1 and Ch. 2 outputs for use with optional single 4-conductor cable. Two binding post outputs (in parallel with Speakon® connectors). HiQnet USB Connector: Type B, connects to a HiQnet network.

RY

Delay: For signal alignment of driver; 50 mS total delay. Subharmonic Synthesizer: Takes the lowfrequency content of the input signal and “synthesizes” a new signal that is the same as the input signal but one octave lower. The new synthesized signal is then mixed with the original signal to create the effect. Peakx Plus Limiters: Channel independant limiters allowing control over threshold, attack and release. Presets: 30 presets, 29 of which are userdefinable.

EL

EL

04

PR

IM

Section:

Voltage Gain at 1kHz, 8 ohm rated output: XTi 1002: 30.5 dB XTi 2002: 32.9 dB XTi 4002: 34.2 dB XTi 6002: 37.1 dB Frequency Response: +0/–1 dB from 20 Hz to 20 kHz at 1 watt into 4 ohms. Load Impedance: Safe with all types of loads. Rated for 2 to 8 ohms in Stereo mode, 4 to 16 ohms in Bridge-Mono mode. The XTi 1000 A1 (100V version) is rated for 4 to 8 ohms Stereo, 8 to 16 ohms Bridge Mono. Sensitivity: 1.4V Signal to Noise Ratio (below rated 1 kHz power at 8 ohms): XTi 1K, 2K, 4K: 100 dB (A weighted). XTi 6K: 103 dB (A weighted). Damping Factor: Better than 500 from 20 Hz to 400 Hz. Crosstalk: > 70 dB below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz. Input Stage: Input is electronically balanced and employs precision 1% resistors. Input Impedance (nominal): 20 k ohms, balanced;10 k ohms, unbalanced. Maximum Input Signal: +22 dBu typical. AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available: 100V, 120V, 220-240V 50/60 Hz. AC Line Current (120VAC amplifier playing 1/8 power pink noise into 4 ohms per ch): XTi 1000: 6.8A, XTi 2000: 8.3A, XTi 4000: 10.5A; at idle draws no more than 38 watts. XTi 6000: 15.3A; at idle draws no more than 180 watts. Operating Temperature: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing).

Rear Panel Controls and Connectors

Construction

Chassis: Steel. Cooling: Proportional speed fan with front-torear airflow. Dimensions: EIA Standard 19-in. rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B), 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) high and 12.25 in. (31.11 cm) deep behind mounting surface. XTi 6000 is 16.2 in. (41.15 cm) deep. Net Weight: XTi 1K, 2K, 4K: 18.5 lb (8.4 kg). XTi 6K: 24.0 lb (10.9 kg). Shipping Weight: XTi 1K, 2K, 4K: 21.5 lb (9.8 kg). XTi 6K: 30.0 lb (13.6 kg). Optional Accessory: Rear rack-ear support for XTi 6000.

Regulatory Certifications

Other Applications

AC Line Connector: XTi 1K, 2K, 4K: NEMA 5-15P (15A). XTi 6K: NEMA 6-20P (20A) IEC C20 (20A) Input Connector: XLR, one per channel.

P O R TA B L E PA

he XTi Series of Crown® amplifiers are professional tools designed and built for portable PA applications. The series includes four models which are similar except for output power: XTi 1002, 2002, 4002 and 6002. All are rugged and lightweight, and offer unmatched value in their class. XTi-Series amplifiers feature an LCD screen with speaker presets for crossover frequencies, EQ, limiting, delay, and a subharmonic synthesizer. Other features include a switch-mode universal power supply, useful function indicators, proportional-speed fan-assisted cooling, XLR inputs, Speakon® and binding-post outputs, short-circuit protection and more.

1 kHz power with 0.5% THD. * With 1% THD.

Page 222

Page 223

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

IN A

RY

AMPLIFIERS PORTABLE PA XTi 2.0 Series: World Class XTi 1002, XTi 2002, XTi 4002, XTi 6002

Section:

04


 SPECIFICATIONS

AMPLIFIERS PORTABLE PA XLS-III Series: Performance and Flexibility XLS1000, XLS1500, XLS2000, XLS2500

Performance

Sensitivity (for full rated power at 4 ohms): 1.4 Vrms. Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz to 20 kHz): +0 dB, –1 dB. Signal-to-Noise Ratio Rated as dBr to full rated 8 ohms power output (A-weighted): XLS1000: > 97 dB. XLS1500, XLS2000, XLS2500: > 103 dB. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): < 0.5%. Intermodulation Distortion (IMD): (60 Hz and 7 kHz at 4:1) from full rated output to –30 dB: < 0.3%. Damping Factor (8 ohm) 10 Hz to 400 Hz: > 600.

Input Impedance (nominal): 20 kilohms balanced, 10 kilohms unbalanced. Load Impedance: 2 to 8 ohms per channel in Stereo, 4 to 8 ohms in Bridge Mono. AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available (±10%): 120 VAC 60 Hz, 100 VAC 50/60 Hz, 220 and 240 VAC 50 Hz.

Controls

Level: Two front-panel rotary level controls, one for each channel.

Section:

04

LCD Screen: Back-lit LCD allows for crossover configuration, amp mode configuration and clip compressor configuration.

Innovation

 FEATURES •

High Performance, Lightweight Class-D amplifier – weighs less than 11 lbs.

Integrated PureBand™ Crossover system ensures seamless transitions from low to high frequency drivers.

Integrated PeakX™ Limiters provide maximum output while protecting your speakers.

XLR, 1/4", RCA Inputs ensure compatibility with any source.

1/4" Inputs can be used as loop-thrus to distribute signal to additional amplifiers.

POWER OUTPUT* Models

2-ohm Dual (per channel)

4-ohm Dual (per channel)

8-ohm Dual (per channel)

XLS1000 XLS1500 XLS2000 XLS2500

550W 775W 1,050W 1,200W

350W 525W 650W 775W

215W 300W 375W 440W

8-ohm Bridge

700W 1,050W 1,300W 1,550W

4-ohm Bridge

1,100W 1,550W 2,100W 2,400W

Menu/Prev/Select: Three buttons located near the LCD screen that are used to configure and access the integrated processing. Power: Front-panel switch; on when in the IN position. Blue LED will illuminate when on. Circuit Breaker: Back-panel breaker provides overload protection.

T

Crossover Filter: Linkwitz-Riley 24dB per ocatve.

Crossover Mode: Crossover (CH1=LPF, CH2=HPF), Low Pass (both channels LPF), High Pass (both channels HPF), Bridge (LPF or HPF). PeakXTM Limiters: Channel independent clip limiter designed to provide maximum output while protecting your loudspeakers.

Indicators

Signal Presence Indicators: Two green LEDs, one for each channel, illuminate when the channel’s input signal exceeds –40 dBu. –10 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal exceeds –10 dB below clip. –20 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal level exceeds –20 dB below clip. Clip Indicators: Two red LEDs, one for each channel, illuminate when the channel’s output is being overdriven. Thermal Indicator: Two red LEDs, one for each channel, illuminate when thermal compression begins.

Input/Output

Input Connectors: XLR (one per channel), 1/4 inch (one per channel), and RCA (one per channel). The 1/4 inch inputs can be used as loop-thrus to distribute signal to multiple amplifiers. Output Connectors: Two 4-Pole Speakon® Output Connectors accept 2-pole or 4-pole Speakon® connectors. The top Speakon connector is wired for both channels so it can be used for bridge-mono wiring or for stereo wiring of two speakers to a single Speakon connector.

Protection

XLS Series amplifiers provide extensive protection and diagnostic capabilities, including output current limiting, DC protection, circuit breaker, and thermal protection.

Construction

Ventilation: Flow-through ventilation from front to back. Cooling: Internal heat sinks with forced-air cooling for rapid, uniform heat dissipation. Air Volume Requirements (per minute per unit): 80.15 ft³ (2.27 m³). Dimensions:EIA Standard 19-inch (48.3-cm) rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B), 3.5-inch (8.9-cm) height. XLS1000/1500: 8.10-inch (20.6-cm) depth. XLS2000/2500: 10.35-inch (26.3-cm) depth.

Weight

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Crosstalk (below rated 8 ohm power): at 1 kHz: > 85 dB. at 20 kHz: > 60 dB.

PureBandTM Crossover System

Net Weight: XLS1000: 8.6 lb (3.9 kg) XLS1500: 8.6 lb (3.9 kg) XLS2000: 10.75 lb (4.9 kg) XLS2500: 10.75 lb (4.9 kg) Shipping Weight: XLS1000: 13.6 lb (6.2 kg) XLS1500: 13.6 lb (6.2 kg) XLS2000: 15.75 lb (7.1 kg) XLS2500: 15.75 lb (7.1 kg)

Regulatory Certifications

Section:

04 Other Applications

One pair of back-panel binding posts per channel; accepts banana plugs or bare wire. (European models do not accept banana plugs.)

ake command of center stage with Crown's new XLS amplifiers. The highperformance class-D amplifier combined with its integrated PureBand™ Crossover System deliver unmatched performance and sound; while its multiple inputs let you plug in anything you want. PeakX™ Limiters effortlessly protect your speaker investment, and at 11 pounds moving from show to show is nearly effortless. Powerful, flexible, portable, and reliable – RUN THE SHOW with a power amplifier designed to play hard all night long.

P O R TA B L E PA

*Maximum average power in watts at 0.5% THD, 1 kHz.

Page 224

Page 225


 SPECIFICATIONS

AMPLIFIERS PORTABLE PA XLS Series: Affordable and Reliable XLS 5000

Performance

Controls

Level: Two front-panel rotary level controls, one for each channel. Power: Front-panel switch; on when in the IN position.

Section:

04

Circuit Breaker: Back-panel breaker provides overload protection. Mode Switch: Back-panel switch selects Dual or Bridge-Mono mode.

Indicators

Signal Presence Indicators: Two green LEDs, one for each channel, illuminate when the channel’s input signal exceeds –40 dBu. Clip Indicators: Two red LEDs, one for each channel, illuminate when the channel’s output is being overdriven. Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates amplifier has been turned on and AC power is available. Fault Indicator: Two red LEDs, one for each channel, illuminate when amplifier is in protect mode. Also illuminates briefly during normal power-up when amplifier is first switched on.

Input/Output

Input Connectors: One per channel; back-panel three-pin female XLR input connectors. Output Connectors: Two 4-Pole Speakon® Output Connectors accept 2-pole or 4-pole Speakon® connectors. The top Speakon connector is wired for both channels so it can be used for bridge-mono wiring or for stereo wiring of two speakers to a single Speakon connector. One pair of back-panel binding posts per channel; accepts banana plugs or bare wire. (European models do not accept banana plugs.)

Protection

Provides extensive protection and diagnostic capabilities, including output current limiting, DC protection, circuit breaker, and thermal protection.

Construction

Ventilation: Flow-through ventilation from front to back. Cooling: Internal heat sinks with forced-air cooling for rapid, uniform heat dissipation. Air Volume Requirements (per minute per unit): 80.15 ft³ (2.27 m³). Dimensions: EIA Standard 19-inch (48.3-cm) rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B), 5.25-inch (13.3-cm) height and 15.5-inch (39.5-cm) depth.

Weight

Net Weight: 62.0 lb (27.7 kg) Shipping Weight: 74.0 lb (33.6 kg)

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Sensitivity (for full rated power at 4 ohms): 1.25 Vrms. Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 22 Hz to 20 kHz): +0 dB, –1 dB. Signal-to-Noise Ratio (20 Hz to 20 kHz, inputs terminated): A-weighted, below rated power: > 100 dB. No weighting, below rated power: > 95 dB. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): < 0.5%. Intermodulation Distortion (IMD): (60 Hz and 7 kHz at 4:1) from full rated output to –40 dB: < 0.3%. Damping Factor (8 ohm) 10 Hz to 400 Hz: >200. Crosstalk (below rated power): at 1 kHz: –75 dB. at 20 kHz: –59 dB. Input Impedance (nominal): 20 kilohms balanced, 10 kilohms unbalanced. Load Impedance: 2 to 8 ohms per channel in Stereo, 4 to 8 ohms in Bridge Mono. AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available (±10%): 120 VAC 60 Hz, 100 VAC 50/60 Hz, 220 VAC 50 Hz, and 230-240 VAC.

Regulatory Certifications

Other Applications

Section:

04

Evolution

 FEATURES • • • •

Housed in a rugged, all-steel 3U chassis. Efficient forced-air fan prevents excessive thermal buildup. Electronically balanced XLR inputs; touchproof binding post and Speakon outputs. Precision detented level controls, power switch, and four LEDs, which indicate clip for each channel, power and fault conditions.

P O R TA B L E PA

POWER OUTPUT* Models

2-ohm Dual (per channel)

4-ohm Dual (per channel)

XLS 5000

2,500W‡

1,800W** 1,100W**

*Maximum average power in watts at 0.5% THD, 1 kHz.

Page 226

8-ohm Dual (per channel)

**With 0.1% THD

8-ohm Bridge

4-ohm Bridge

3,600W** 5,000W‡

T

he XLS 5000 power amplifier from Crown represents a new era in affordable, quality power amplification. It incorporates the best of tried-and-true design principles and innovative features, all in a rugged, light-weight 3U chassis.

‡With 1% THD

Page 227


Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

TOURING

Section:

04

Page 228

I-Tech HD Series

Section:

04

Macro-Tech i Series

Page 229


 SPECIFICATIONS

AMPLIFIERS TOURING I-Tech Series: Excellence Without Compromise I-T4000, I-T6000, I-T8000

Summary Specifications

Input Sensitivity (referenced to 8 ohm rated output): Adjustable in 0.1V steps from 1.4V to 7.75V.

Signal to Noise Ratio below rated full-bandwidth power, A-weighted: > 112 dB.

Required AC Mains: Universal AC input, 100240VAC, 50/60 Hz (±15%). Maximum AC mains voltage 277VAC.

Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz - 20 kHz): ±0.25dB.

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) at full rated power: < 0.1%. Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) 60 Hz and 7 kHz at 4:1, from full rated output to –35 dB: < 0.2%. Damping Factor (20 Hz to 100 Hz at 8 ohms): > 5000. Crosstalk (below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 80 dB. Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 70 dB typical.

A/D, D/A Converters: 24-bit 192 kHz Cirrus Logic. Digital Input: AES/EBU, 24-bit, 32-96 kHz. Onboard sample-rate converter. Network: Onboard TCP/IQ and HiQnet, compatible with standard 100 Mb Ethernet hardware. DSP: 24-bit conversion with 32-bit, floatingpoint DSP processing. World-class IIR and linear phase FIR filters. Has 64 assignable filters with 9 different filter types. Includes all-pass filters, over 2 seconds of delay available per channel, and dual uncorrelated-noise and sinewave generators.

Section:

04

Load Impedance: (Note: Safe with all types of loads) Stereo: 1/2/4/8/16 ohms. Bridge Mono: 2/4/8 ohms.

Front Panel Indicators, Controls and Connectors Indicators: Bridge mode, Ready, Signal level, Clip, Thermal error, Fault, Network data, Power, AC mains. LCD Control Screen and Controls: These let the user adjust the amplifier’s attenuation and muting, configure the amp, set up and view error monitoring (such as temperature and load supervision), set IP and HiQnet addresses from the front panel, and recall DSP presets. The presets allow the user to quickly reconfigure the amp for various applications. Level Controls (Encoders): Speed-sensitive rotary encoders, 0.5 dB steps, range 0 to –100 dB. These two knobs affect the Channel-1 and Channel-2 output levels. They also select Menu items and adjust parameter values that are displayed on the LCD Control Screen. Power Switch: Push-on/push-off switch with built-in green AC mains present indicator. USB 2.0 Connector: Accepts a USB drive to transfer presets from the drive to the amplifier DSP, and vice versa.

Connectors: Balanced XLR analog inputs, balanced analog XLR loop-thru outputs, AES/EBU digital input, AES/EBU digital loop-thru output, 4-Pole Speakon output connectors, binding post output connectors, power cord, EtherCon® Ethernet connector for networking via HiQnet or CobraNet. Reset Switch/Circuit Breaker: If the current draw of the amplifier exceeds safe limits, this breaker automatically disconnects the power supply from the AC mains. The switch resets the circuit breaker. Preset Indicator: LED flashes to signal the number of the current preset if active. LED is green if the preset values have not been changed once loaded. LED is yellow if the preset values have been changed since they were loaded.

Construction Cooling: Dual-zone, microprocessor controlled, continuously variable speed fans, front-to-back airflow. Dimensions: 19 in. (48.3 cm) W x 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) H x 16.2 in. (41.1 cm) D. Weight: 28 lbs (12.7 kg) net, 36 lbs (16.3 kg) shipping. Included Accessories: Rear rack ears, rack screws, operation manual, power cords, foam air filter.

Section:

Regulatory Certifications

04

Other Applications

Raising the Bar–Again

 FEATURES • • • • • • •

BSS OMNIDRIVEHD™ DSP processing with IIR and linear phase FIR filters. Global Power Supply designed to deliver maximum power no matter where your schedule takes you. Universal AC input accepts100-240VAC, 50/60 Hz (±15%). High power density, up to 9000 watts in a 2U chassis. Highest output voltage in the industry (200V peak) provides clean transient peaks. 5th-generation patented Class I (BCA®) circuitry. Front-panel USB connector transfers presets to/from a USB drive to the amp’s DSP. True Ethernet backbone–fast, reliable and scalable.

POWER OUTPUT* Model

20 mS BURST 2-ohm Dual 2-ohm Dual 4-ohm Dual 2-ohm Dual (per ch.) (per channel) (per channel, 1 kHz) (per channel)

MA-5000i 3,000W MA-9000i 4,700W MA-12000i 6,000W

2,000W 2,800W 3,750W

2,000W 3,500W 4,500W

2,500W 3,500W 4,500W

8-ohm Dual (per channel)

4-ohm Bridge

8-ohm Bridge

1,250W 1,500W 2,100W

4,000W 5,600W 7,500W

5,000W 7,000W 9,000W

C

T O U R I N G

rown continues the tradition of excellence and innovation with the Crown® I-Tech HD Series, delivering unmatched versatility, power and performance for touring sound applications. Featuring onboard high-definition BSS OMNIDRIVEHD™ DSP with 24-bit, 192 kHz Cirrus Logic SHARC A/D and D/A converters, the I-Tech HD Series also offers a new software interface that provides easier systemlevel changes, and includes a configuration wizard. Providing up to 9 kW continuous power in a 2U rack space and delivering the highest output voltage in the industry, the I-Tech HD Series outperforms all the competition, even our own.

*Guaranteed minimum power in watts at 20 Hz-20 kHz with 0.1% THD

Page 230

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Latency (analog, digital inputs): 1.13 mS analog, 1.81 mS digital (96 kHz).

AC Line Connector: Five cordsets supplied with amplifier (USA, UK, European, Australia, India).

Back Panel Connectors, Controls, and Indicators

Page 231


AMPLIFIERS TOURING Macro-Tech i Series: The Legend Continues Macro-Tech i Series

 SPECIFICATIONS Performance

04

The Legend Continues

 FEATURES

®

®

• The Macro-Tech i Series continues the Crown Macro-Tech legacy of unparalleled sonic accuracy and detail, putting sound quality above all else • Patented, cutting-edge Class-I circuitry gets more power out of an amplifier with less waste • Rugged construction ensures that all Macro-Techs are built to withstand years of abuse on the road • Global Power Supply — designed to deliver maximum power no matter what country you work in • Built-in load, line voltage, input and output monitoring • Standard Ethernet networking via System Architect® lets system operators monitor and control the amplifier from any location

POWER OUTPUT* Model

20 mS BURST 2-ohm Dual 2-ohm Dual 4-ohm Dual 2-ohm Dual (per ch.) (per channel) (per channel, 1 kHz) (per channel)

MA-5000i 3,000W MA-9000i 4,700W MA-12000i 6,000W

2,000W 2,800W 3,750W

2,000W 3,500W 4,500W

2,500W 3,500W 4,500W

8-ohm Dual (per channel)

4-ohm Bridge

8-ohm Bridge

1,250W 1,500W 2,100W

4,000W 5,600W 7,500W

5,000W 7,000W 9,000W

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Bridge Mode Indicator: Amber LED illuminates when the amplifier is set to Bridge-Mono mode. Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel. On (bright): Ready. On (dim): Onset of compression. Off: Thermal failure. Signal Indicators: One green LED per channel. Solid green: Input signal is above –40 dBu. Bright green: Channel’s output signal has reached the onset of audible clipping.

T

Power Indicator: Blue LED indicates amplifier has been turned on and AC power is available. The LED will flash when the AC line voltage is 10% above or below the nominal rated value. Data Indicator: Yellow LED on front panel indicates network data activity. Data indicator flashes only when the amplifier is polled for data, or is polled to see whether it is online Power Switch: Push-on/push-off switch with built-in green AC mains present indicator. Volume Control: Precision detented attenuator with 31 steps, press-and-hold mute function. Volume Control LED Ring: A ring of green LEDs around each volume control show the position of the control. Entire ring flashes when channel is muted. Can be converted to be a level meter.

Back Panel Controls, Indicators and Connectors

Power Cord Connector: Detachable 20 amp IEC inlet. Cord locks with suppliled cord retention clip. Voltage range is indicated above IEC inlet. Reset Switch/Circuit Breaker: If the current draw of the amplifier exceeds safe limits, this breaker automatically disconnects the power supply from the AC mains. The switch resets the circuit breaker. Output Connectors: Two high-current, 50A Neutrik® Speakon® NL4MLP (mates with NL4FC or NL4), one per channel. Ch 1 Speakon® is wired with Ch 1 and Ch 2 outputs for use with single 4-conductor cable. Two pairs of high-current, 60A color-coded 5-way binding posts (for banana plugs, spade lugs or bare wire). Analog Input Connectors: A 3-pin female XLR connector for each channel. Analog Loop Thru Connectors: Two male XLR passive analog loop through. Mode Switch/Indicator: Sets amplifier to Stereo, Bridge, or Input Y mode. OFF=Stereo, YEL=Bridge, GRN=Y. Network Connectors: Two Neutrik® Ethercon connector accepts RJ-45 type connectors for HiQnet™ networking. Next to each connector is a yellow LINK ACT indicator that shows network activity, and a green 100Mb indicator that shows a 100Mb network connection. Data Indicator: Yellow LED on back panel indicates network data activity. Data indicator flashes only when the amplifier is polled for data, or is polled to see whether it is online.

Preset Indicator: Green/yellow LED flashes to signal the number of the current preset. LED is green if current preset is active, or is yellow if current preset is modified. Input Sensitivity Switch: Three-position switch providing 1.4V, 32 dB, and 26 dB settings for both channels.

Firmware/Software

Firmware can be updated at www.crownaudio. com > Support > Downloads. Software features: Same as PIP-Lite module (except no Listen Bus): User Presets, Clip Event Monitor, Input Signal Level Monitor, Output Signal Level Monitor, Thermal Headroom Level Monitor, Power/Standby Control, Signal Mute, Polarity Inverter, Input Signal Fader, Dynamic Gain Monitors (Ghost Faders), Amplifier Information, User and Channel Labels, Amplifier Mode, Amplifier Output Mode, Line Voltage Monitor, Error Reporting, Auto Standby, Input Signal Compressor/Limiter, Peak Voltage Limiter, Average Power Limiter, Clip Eliminator, Thermal Limiter, Limiter Tie, Load Supervision.

Construction

Cooling: Dual-zone, microprocessor controlled, continuously variable speed fans, front-to-back airflow. Front Panel: Cast aluminum with integrated handles. Dimensions: 19 in. (48.3 cm) W x 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) H x 16.2 in. (41.1 cm) D. Weight: 28 lbs (12.7 kg) net, 36 lbs (16.3 kg) shipping. Protection: Amplifier is protected against reactive loads, faults and shorts. If one channel experiences a catastrophic failure, the entire amplifier will shut down. Included Accessories: Rear rack ears, rack screws, operation manual, power cords, foam air filter.

Regulatory Certifications

Other Applications

T O U R I N G

he Crown Macro-Tech i Series amplifiers continue the Macro-Tech legacy of unparalleled sonic accuracy and detail, putting sound quality above all else. Their patented, cutting-edge Class-I circuitry gets more power out of an amplifier with less waste. Each model features a Global Power Supply designed to deliver maximum power in any country. The i Series offers studio-quality analog signal processing with built-in load, line voltage, input and output monitoring. Standard Ethernet networking via System Architect provides integrated monitoring and control to give system operators access to the system from any location.

*Guaranteed minimum power in watts at 20 Hz-20 kHz with 0.1% THD

Page 232

Page 233

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

Frequency Response (at 1 watt, 20 Hz - 20 kHz into 8 ohms): ±0.25 dB. Signal to Noise Ratio (below rated full-bandwidth power, A-weighted): >112 dB. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) (at 2 watts into 8 ohms): < 0.1%. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Plus Noise (at full rated power): < 0.35%, 20 Hz to 20 kHz. Intermodulation Distortion (IMD) (60 Hz and 7 kHz at 4:1, from full rated output to –30 dB): < 0.35%. Damping Factor (20 Hz to 100 Hz at 8 ohms): > 5000. Crosstalk (below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz): > 80 dB. Common Mode Rejection (CMR) (20 Hz to 1 kHz): 55 dB, typically >70 dB. DC Output Offset (shorted input): < ± 3 mV. Input Impedance (nominal): 10 kilohms balanced, 5 kilohms unbalanced. Maximum Input Level: +20 dBu typical. Network: Onboard HiQnet™, compatible with standard 100 Mb Ethercom hardware. Load Impedance: (Note: Safe with all types of loads) Stereo: 1/2/4/8/16 ohms. Bridge Mono: 2/4/8 ohms. Input Sensitivity (referenced to 8 ohm rated output): 1.4V, 32 dB gain, and 26 dB gain. Voltage Gain (referenced to 8 ohm rated output): MA-5000i: 37.1 dB to 22.2 dB MA-9000i: 37.9 dB to 23.0 dB MA-12000i: 39.3 dB to 24.5 dB Required AC Mains: Universal AC input, 100240VAC, 50/60 Hz (±10%). Maximum AC mains voltage 264VAC. AC Line Connector: Five cordsets supplied with amplifier (USA, UK, European, Australia, India).

Section:

04


Section:

04

Page 234

D Series

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

RECORDING & BROADCAST

Section:

04

Page 235


 SPECIFICATIONS

AMPLIFIERS  RECORDING & BROADCAST D Series: Long-Term Favorites D-45, D-75A

Performance

D-45: 18.3:1 ±3% or 25.2 dB ±0.3 dB. D-75A: 23:1 ±3% or 27.3 dB ±0.3 dB. Load Impedance: Safe with all types of loads. Rated for 4 to 16 ohms in dual mode, and 8 to 16 ohms in bridge-mono mode.

Section:

04

Tried & True

 FEATURES • • • • •

Powerful AB+B class circuitry yields maximum efficiency with minimum crossover “notch” distortion. IOC® (Input/Output Comparator) alerts of any distortion that exceeds 0.05% to provide proof of distortion-free performance. Ultra-low harmonic and intermodulation distortion result in the best dynamic transfer function in the industry. Very low noise and wide dynamic range exceed the audio specifications for digital compact discs (CDs). Convection cooling system dissipates heat through the heat sinks and chassis for optimal cooling and maintenance-free operation. Front-panel headphone jack.

POWER OUTPUT* Models

D-45 D-75A

4-ohm Dual (per channel)

35W 55W

8-ohm Dual (per channel)

25W 40W

16-ohm Dual (per channel)

20W 25W

AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available: 100, 120, 220 and 240VAC (±10%), 50 to 400 Hz for international units (depending on the transformer configuration). North American 120VAC, 60 Hz units are not convertible and can only be used at the specified voltage and frequency. All units draw 15 watts or less when idle. Maximum AC power consumption is 150 watts.

8-ohm Bridge

16-ohm Bridge

70W 110W

50W 80W

T

Controls

Power: A two-position front panel rotary on/off switch. Level: An independent 31-position detented front panel level control for each channel. Dual/Mono: The dual/mono jumper is located inside the amplifier. Ground Lift: To prevent ground loops, the chassis and signal grounds are separated (or “lifted”) by a permanent impedance installed between them. There is no control for this feature.

Indicators

Signal Presence: The green front panel indicator for each channel flashes synchronously with the channel’s output signal to indicate its presence. Input/Output Comparator: The red Input/ Output Comparator (IOC) indicator for each channel flashes if any type of distortion reaches 0.05%.

Input/Output

Input Connector: A balanced 3-pin female Neutrik® combination XLR and ¼-inch (6.35-mm) phone connector for each channel. Input Impedance: Nominally 20 k ohms, balanced. Nominally 10 k ohms, unbalanced. Input Sensitivity: Configurable for 26 dB gain or 0.775 volt sensitivity. Output Connector: Barrier block terminals and stereo headphone jack. The headphone output is unpadded, and in parallel with the main amplifier outputs. Output Impedance: Less than 15 milliohms in series with less than 3 microhenries. DC Output Offset: 10 millivolts or less.

Protection

Input: The inputs have series resistance that provides input overload protection. Controlled slew rate voltage amplifiers protect against radio frequencies. The AC line is fused to protect against excessive current draw. Output: Instantaneous limiting protection for short circuits, open circuits and mismatched loads. Turn-On: Minimum thumps. Power-up is instantaneous with no program delay.

Construction

Durable black finish on aluminum front panel with gray suede Lexan insert. Aluminum chassis provides maximum heat conduction and minimum weight. Dimensions: 19-inch (48.3 cm) rack mount width, 1.75 inches (4.5 cm) high, 8.5 inches (21.6 cm) deep behind the mounting surface, and a 0.625-inch (1.6-cm) protrusion in front of the mounting surface. Net Weight: D-45: 8 lb, 11 oz (3.9 kg) D-75A: 9 lb, 7 oz (4.3 kg). Shipping Weight: D-45: 10 lb, 9 oz (4.8 kg) D-75A: 11 lb, 4 oz (5.1 kg). Cooling: The amplifier is totally convection cooled. The entire aluminum chassis acts as a conductor to dissipate heat. The covers and front panel extrusion also act as heat sinks. Much of the unit’s heat is conducted through the extruded front panel. This design is used so that front panel contact with the equipment rack will also dissipate heat.

Regulatory Certifications

Output Signal

Dual: Unbalanced, two channel. Bridge-Mono: Balanced, single channel. Channel 1 controls are active; channel 2 controls should be turned down.

Other Applications

RECORDING & BROADCAST

he D-45 and D-75A are long-term standards. They are perfect for moderate power applications such as recording or broadcast studio near-field monitoring, video suite audio monitoring, a recording/broadcast headphone amp or a small paging system. Convection cooled, the highly reliable D Series is protected against shorted, open, mismatched or low-impedance loads.

*Maximum average power in watts at 0.1% THD, 1 kHz.

Page 236

Page 237

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Frequency Response: ±0.1 dB from 20 Hz to 20 kHz at 1watt. Phase Response: +10 to –15 degrees from 20 Hz to 20 kHz at 1 watt. Signal-to-Noise: 106 dB from 20 Hz to 20 kHz at full bandwidth FTC power. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 0.001% at full bandwidth FTC power from 20 Hz to 400 Hz increasing linearly to 0.05% at 20 kHz. Intermodulation Distortion (IMD): (60 Hz and 7 kHz 4:1) Less than 0.01% from 0.25 watts to full bandwidth FTC power, and less than 0.05% from 0.01 to 0.25 watts. Crosstalk: Greater than 100 dB below full bandwidth FTC power from 100 Hz to 1 kHz decreasing linearly to 80 dB at 20 kHz. Damping Factor: Greater than 400 from DC to 400 Hz. Controlled Slew Rate: 6 volts per ms. (Slew rates are limited to useful levels for ultrasonic/RF protection.) Voltage Gain: At the maximum level setting, 8-ohm load, 0.775V input sensititivity.

Section:

04


Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

CINEMA

Section:

04

DSi Series

Section:

04

CTs 2-Channel Series CTs Multi-Channel Series

Page 238

Page 239


 SPECIFICATIONS

AMPLIFIERS  CINEMA DSi Series: 2/4/8 Ohm DSi 1000, DSi 2000, DSi 4000, DSi 6000

Performance

04

One-Touch Performance

 FEATURES • • • • • •

Intuitive front-panel LCD screen, automatic presets for popular JBL cinema speaker systems for quick, easy configuration. Onboard digital signal processing includes crossovers, EQ filters, delay, and output limiting. Computer connectivity via USB allows fast setup and configuration with HiQnet™ System Architect® software. Rear-panel HD-15 connector provides easy input/output connectivity between DSi amplifiers and new DSi-8M System Monitor. Barrier strip outputs, removable Phoenix-style input. All models are THX®-approved.

POWER OUTPUT Models

DSi 1000 DSi 2000 DSi 4000 DSi 6000

2-ohm Dual (per channel)

700W*†

1,000W* 1,450W* 3,000W*

4-ohm Dual (per channel)

8-ohm Dual (per channel)

475W 275W 800W 475W 1,200W 650W 2,100W 1,200W

Maximum average power in watts at 1 kHz at 0.5% THD. *With 1% THD.

Page 240

4-ohm Bridge

1,400W*† 2,000W* 3,000W* 6,000W*

8-ohm Bridge

950W 1,600W 2,400W 4,200W

†Not rated for 100V versions.

CDi 1000: 6.8A CDi 2000: 8.3A CDi 4000: 10.5A At Idle: Draws no more than 38 watts.

CDi 6000: 15.3A At Idle: Draws no more than 180 watts.

DSP Section

Input EQ: 6 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15 dB boost/cut. Also adjustable high and low shelving filters. This 8-filter EQ section can be bypassed. Crossover Filters: Highpass and lowpass per channel. Butterworth 6/12/18/24 dB per octave, Linkwitz-Riley 24/48 dB per octave. Also includes ±15 dB bandpass gain and polarity control. Output EQ: 8 parametric filters per channel with adjustable Q, ±15 dB boost/cut. This 8-filter EQ section can NOT be bypassed. Filters are enabled individually. Output Limiter: Prevents clipping and protects loudspeakers. Choice of –3, –6, or –12 dB threshold per channel. Delay: Up to 50 msec total delay per channel. Presets: 20 presets. One is “DSP OFF.” Fifteen are factory-set for JBL Cinema systems. Four are user-definable.

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

Level: Detented rotary level control, one per channel. Power Switch: On/off switch applies AC power to the amplifier. Sel/Prev/Next Buttons: Three buttons near the LCD screen are used to access menu items and front panel lockout. LCD Screen: Backlit liquid crystal display shows speaker presets and signal processing. Signal Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when a very low-level signal is present at input. –10 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal exceeds –10 dB below clip. –20 Indicator: Green LED flashes when output signal level exceeds –20 dB below clip. Ready Indicator: Green LED, one per channel, illuminates when the amplifier is ready to produce audio. Clip Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, turns on at the threshold of audible distortion. Temp Indicator: Red LED, one per channel, illuminates under excessive temperature conditions. Power Indicator: Blue LED illuminates when the amplifier has been turned on and has power.

Operating Temperature: 0° C to 40° C at 95% relative humidity (non-condensing).

T

Rear Panel Controls and Connectors AC Line Connector: DSi 1K, 2K, 4K: NEMA 5-15P (15A). DSi 6000: NEMA 6-10P (20A) IEC C20 (20A). Input Connector: Two 3-pin removable Phoenix-type connectors each accept a balanced line-level input signal. Output Connectors: 4-position barrier strip with connectors for dual louspeakers or bridge-mono loudspeaker. HiQnet USB Connector: Type B, connects to a HiQnet network. HD-15 Connector: For cinema I/O compatibility with DSi-8M System Monitor. See Figure 1.

Protection

DSi-Series amplifiers are protected against shorted, open or mismatched loads; overloaded power supplies; excessive temperature; chain destruction phenomena; excessive output current, and input overload damage. They also protect loudspeakers from input/output DC, large or dangerous DC offsets and turn-on/turn-off transients

Construction

Chassis: Steel. Cooling: Proportional speed fan with front-torear airflow. Dimensions: EIA Standard 19-in. rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B), 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) high and 12.25 in. (31.11 cm) deep behind mounting surface. DSi 6000 is 16.2 in. (41.15 cm) deep. Net Weight: DSi 1K. 2K, 4K: 19 lb (8.6 kg). DSi 6K: 24 lb (10.9 kg). Shipping Weight: DSi 1K, 2K, 4K: 22 lb (10.0 kg). DSi 6K: 30 lb (13.6 kg).

Regulatory Certifications

Note: All measurements apply to all models of CDi Series amplifiers in stereo mode with 8-ohm loads and an input sensitivity of 26 dB gain, 1 kHz at rated power unless other otherwise specified. Specifications for units supplied outside the U.S.A. may vary slightly at different AC voltages and frequencies.

C I N E M A

he Crown® DSi Series of power amplifiers provides onboard digital signal processing including crossovers, EQ filters, delay and output limiting. A rear panel HD-15 connector provides easy input/output connectivity between DSi amplifiers and the new DSi-8M System Monitor. The intuitive front panel LCD screen guides installers through a setup process—featuring presets for the industry-standard JBL cinema loudspeaker systems—to make configuration quick and easy. At the touch of a button, Crown’s DSi cinema amplifiers deliver perfectly matched performance with each award-winning JBL ScreenArray® system, making this the ultimate cinema solution.

Page 241

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

Voltage Gain at 1kHz: DSi 1000: 30.5 dB DSi 2000: 32.9 dB DSi 4000: 34.2 dB DSi 6000: 37.1 dB Frequency Response: +0/–1 dB from 20 Hz to 20 kHz at 1 watt into 4 ohms. Load Impedance: Safe with all types of loads. Rated for 2 to 8 ohms in Stereo mode, 4 to 16 ohms in Bridge-Mono mode. DSi 1000 A1 (100V version) is rated for 4 to 8 ohms in Stereo mode, 8 to 16 ohms in Bridge-Mono mode. Sensitivity: At 8 ohm rated output: DSi 1000: 1.4V DSi 2000: 1.4V DSi 4000: 1.4V DSi 6000: 1.4V At 4 ohm rated output: DSi 1000: 1.3V DSi 2000: 1.2V DSi 4000: 1.3V DSi 6000: 1.3V At 2 ohm rated output: DSi 1000: 1.1V DSi 2000: 1.0V DSi 4000: 1.0V DSi 6000: 1.1V Signal to Noise Ratio (below rated 8-ohm power at 1 kHz): 100 dB (A weighted). Damping Factor: Better than 500 from 20 Hz to 400 Hz. Crosstalk: > 70 dB below rated power, 20 Hz to 1 kHz, A-weighted. Input Stage: Input is electronically balanced and employs precision 1% resistors. Input Impedance (nominal): 20 k ohms, balanced; 10 k ohms, unbalanced. AC Line Voltage and Frequency Configurations Available: 100V, 120V, 220240V, 50/60 Hz. AC Line Current:

Section:

04


 SPECIFICATIONS

AMPLIFIERS  CINEMA DSi-8M: Convenient Monitoring DSi-8M

Performance

Input Impedance (processor inputs): 10 kilohms.

Input Impedance (Processor Inputs): 10 k ohms. Input Impedance (Power Amplifiers Inputs): > 50 k ohms. Power Requirements: 100-240V , 50-60 Hz, 32 watts.

Front Panel Controls and Indicators

04

Performance Monitor

IEC AC Power Receptacle: Connects to an IEC AC power cord. Input Connector 1: 10-pin Phoenix terminal block connects to the power amplifier speaker outputs for the Left Surround, Right Surround, Back Surround Left, Back Surround Right and Subwoofer channels. This connector lets you monitor the output of amplifiers that do not include HD-15 connector options. Input Connector 2: 10-pin Phoenix terminal block connects to the power amplifier speaker output for the Left High, Left Low, Center High, Center Low, Right High and Right Low channels. This connector lets you monitor the output of amplifiers that do not include HD-15 connector options. Amplifier Level Control: Trimpot adjusts the level of the input signals from the power amplifiers. Processor Level: Trimpot adjusts the level of the input signals from the processor. Outputs to Power Amplifier Inputs: The six HD-15 connectors in this section connect to DSi amplifiers for both input and output signals. The HD-15 connectors have two functions: 1. Connect DSi 8M outputs to DSi amplifier inputs. 2. Connect DSi amplifier outputs to DSi 8M inputs for monitoring. Using VGA cables, the HD-15 connectors can be connected to Crown DSi power amplifier HD-15 connectors as described below. HD-15 Connector 1: For cinema I/O compatibility. Connects to Ls/Rs amplifier. HD-15 Connector 2: Connects to Bsl/Bsr amplifier. HD-15 Connector 3: Connects to Rl/Rh amplifier.

HD-15 Connector 4: Connects to Sw amplifier. HD-15 Connector 5: Connects to Ll/Lh amplifier. HD-15 Connector 6: Connects to Cl/Ch amplifier. Optional Input Connector: 25-pin D-sub connector connects to the EX output of the processor. Bargraph Level: Trimpot adjusts the sensitivity of the front-panel VU Bargraph Meter. Main Input Connector: 25-pin D-sub connector connects to the main outputs of the processor. “EX” Selector Switch: 8-position DIP switch. Turn on switches 1-4 if system is without EX. Turn on switches 5-8 if system is with EX. This routes the correct Ls/Rs inputs to the DSi-8M circuitry.

Construction

Chassis: Steel. Dimensions: EIA Standard 19-inch rack mount width (EIA RS-310-B), 3.5 inches (8.9 cm) high and 9.625 inches (24.4 cm) deep behind front mounting surface. Net Weight: 10 lb 2 oz (4.63 kg). Shipping Weight: 16 lb (7.26 kg).

Section:

Regulatory Certifications

04

 FEATURES • • • • • •

Compact 2-rack unit. 8 channels for monitoring processor or amplifier inputs. All inputs and outputs are balanced to interface with new cinema processors. No level jumps when switching between processor and amplifiers. 25-pin D-sub connectors, plus removable terminal blocks and HD-15 for quick, hassle-free connections. Designed to work with bi-amplified sound systems to monitor the high- and low-frequency outputs from the left, center and right channels.

T

he Crown® DSi-8M is a projection booth monitor designed to work with bi-amplified cinema systems using the Crown DSi Series amplifiers. All controls necessary for daily operation of the DSi-8M are easily accessible on the front panel. 8-channel monitoring allows you to monitor either the processor or the power amplifier’s outputs: L, C, R, Ls, Rs, Bsl, Bsr, and Sub in any combination. Input levels from the processor and power amplifier can be adjusted independently. There are no huge level jumps when switching between processor and power amplifiers. The bargraph display can be calibrated to the reference level for your theater. The projectionist can see auditorium levels instantly.

Page 242

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

Channel Select Buttons and LEDs: Eight pushbutton switches, one for each input channel. Pressing a button monitors the signal from that channel, and lights the corresponding LED. Any combination of eight channels can be selected. Volume Control: Rotary potentiometer with knob controls the volume of the internal or external speaker. Has no effect on the VU Bargraph Meter display. Processor/Amplifier Selector Switch and LEDs: Pushbutton switch with corresponding LEDs selects inputs from cinema procesor or power amplfiers for monitoring. VU Bargraph Meter: 12-segment meter displays input level of selected channels from –40 VU to +3 VU. May be calibrated by the rear-panel trim adjustment. Operates independently of the Volume Control. Test Jack: 1/4" phone jack lets the user monitor the audio output of the DSi-8M. Inserting a mono or stereo 1/4" phone plug here disables the internal speaker and routes the audio output to the Test Jack. Internal Speaker: For convenenient monitoring at the monitor panel. Power Switch and Power LED: Rocker switch turns power on or off. LED illuminates when power is on.

Rear Panel Controls and Connectors

C I N E M A

Page 243


AMPLIFIERS  CINEMA Other Cinema Products

AMPLIFIERS  CINEMA Other Cinema Products

CTs Multi-Channel

CTs 2-Channel

 FEATURES • •

 FEATURES •

• • •

• •

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

High power density. All two channel models in a 2U chassis. New Crown Switching Power Supply for lighter weight. Selectable “Constant-Voltage” or low-impedance operation per channel. 100V direct outputs on all models. Fully PIP2™-compatible.

High power density: Four-channel model in a 2U chassis, eight-channel model in a 3U chassis. New Crown Switching Power Supply for lighter weight. Selectable “Constant-Voltage” or low-impedance (4/8 ohm) operation per channel-pair. 100V direct outputs. New “FIT” (Fault Isolation Topology) circuitry isolates fault conditions without affecting neighboring channels. Accept VCA-MC accessory modules.

POWER OUTPUT* Models

CTs 4200 CTs 8200

Section:

All channels driven 4-ohm Dual 8-ohm Dual

260W 200W

180W 160W

70V Dual

220W** 200W**

All channel pairs driven 8-ohm Bridge

520W 400W

*Maximum average power in watts at 1kHz at 0.1% THD. **Constant Voltage full-bandwidth power ratings support 100 Hz to 20 kHz due to automatic high-pass filters.

04

Section:

04

POWER OUTPUT* Models

CTs 600 CTs 1200 CTs 2000 CTs 3000

2-ohm Dual (per channel)

150W 250W 1,000W 1,500W

4-ohm Dual (per channel)

300W 600W 1,000W 1,500W

70V Dual (per channel)

300W 600W 1,000W 1,500W

4-ohm Bridge

300W 500W 2,000W 3,000W

*Maximum average power in watts at rated THD, 20 Hz - 20 kHz.

Digital Circus, Raleigh, North Carolina, USA.

C I N E M A

C

rown Cinema Systems employ quality Crown professional amplifiers along with optional amplifier accessories for the best in cinema sound. Crown’s Digital B-Chain system, which provides the first alldigital cinema solution, employs Crown’s CTs Series amplifiers, IQ Networking amplifier modules, and Crown’s DBC® Network Bridge for the first all-digital cinema solution.

Page 244

Note: For more information about the products featured in this section, please refer to the following Crown sections: CTs 2-Channel, CTs Multi-Channel, XLS Series.

Page 245


Section:

04

Page 246

PIPs

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

NETWORKED PRODUCTS & ACCESSORIES

Section:

04

Accessories

Page 247


NETWORKED PRODUCTS PIPS FEATURES TCP / IQ

ANALOG AUDIO INPUTS

Ultra smooth processing by onboard high-definition BSS OMNIDRIVEHD DSP with 24-bit,192 kHz Cirrus Logic SHARC A/D and D/A converters and true 96 kHz processing

World-class FIR and IIR filters

LevelMAX™ peak, RMS and transducer thermal voltage power limiters combine for a smooth and accurate response, better sound, and higher usable SPL

PIP USP3/CN SmartAmp Automation for TCP/IQ

T

T

100Mb Ethernet single-plug solution for CobraNetTM audio, Ethernet AVB audio, and HiQnetTM control and monitoring

Auto Standby for increased energy efficiency

Multiple Input Options Include: Analog, CobraNetTM or Ethernet AVB, and AES3 Digital Audio

Digital Audio On/Off Ramp allows users to send pre or post processed analog signal out of the module to adjacent amplifiers

Amplifier output monitor using the Foldback control through either CobraNetTM or Ethernet AVB network

SLM (Sweep Load Monitoring) with system-level diagnostics

64 assignable filters with 9 different filter types including all-pass filters

Over 4 seconds of delay available per channel

Input compressors for each channel

Full error reporting

Firmware upgrades via the network

50 user selectable presets

Reliable FLASH memory backup of all parameters

Ambient Leveler senses the ambient sound level of a room via the connected loudspeakers

Over 2 seconds of delay available per channel.

Input compressors and output limiters for each channel.

Dual, uncorrelated noise generators for noise masking.

Sine-wave generator.

Load supervision.

Full error reporting.

Firmware upgrades via the network.

10 user selectable presets.

Reliable FLASH memory backup of all parameters.

SmartAmp Automation for Networked Audio he Crown PIP LITE is a PIP (Programmable Input Processor) input module for PIP2 compatible amplifiers. The PIP-LITE connects to an audio control network via 100 Mb Ethernet. The audio path in the PIP LITE is processed totally in the analog domain. The SmartAmp™ feature set offers a range of automation functions which provide greater control over amplifier operation and helps to save both time and money.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

FEATURES •

Section:

04

A Programmable Input Processor with system networking capabilities (connects via 100 Mb Ethernet). Remote control and monitoring of PIP2-compatible Crown amplifiers as well as some PIP1-compatible amplifiers.*

Can be connected to the same network used to transmit CobraNet™ audio. Implements SmartAmp features: input compressors, multimode output limiters, error reporting and load monitoring. AUX connector configurable for AUX input, AUX output, or Listen Bus.

he Crown PIP-USP3/CN is a 3rd generation DSP-based PIP™ (Programmable Input Processor) input module for PIP2 compatible amplifiers.* It connects the amplifier to a 100 Mb Ethernet network allowing it to be remotely controlled and monitored. In addition, the USP3/CN allows the transport of real-time digital audio via CobraNet™ over the same Ethernet network.

The USP3/CN connects to the audio control/monitor network using standard 100 Mb Ethernet hardware (switches, Network Interface Cards, and cables). CobraNet™ audio is available over the same 100 Mb Ethernet network, providing a simple to install, single plug solution for audio distribution, control, and monitoring. The USP3/CN’s SHARC DSP processor gives the user an enormous amount of digital signal processing. Audio routing, faders, meters, polarity & mute, input compressors, filters, delays, multimode output limiters, error reporting, and load monitoring are all available. A built-in noise generator and sinewave generator provide noise masking and test capabilities. The enhanced AUX port capability allows the user to interface with the amplifier to provide external manual control and monitoring.

FEATURES •

• •

100 Mb Ethernet single-plug solution for both CobraNet™ audio and networked control and monitoring. Analog audio inputs allow audio input to the CobraNet™ network, CobraNet™ audio redundancy, or a hardwire emergency override of CobraNet™ audio. Listen Bus amplifier output monitor via CobraNet™. 24 bit digital to analog conversion with 32 bit, floating point DSP processing. 64 assignable filters with 9 different filter types including

all-pass filters. •

Over 2 seconds of delay available per channel.

Input compressors and output limiters for each channel.

Dual, uncorrelated noise generators for noise masking.

Sine-wave generator.

Load supervision.

Full error reporting.

Firmware upgrades via the network.

10 user selectable presets.

Reliable FLASH memory backup of all parameters.

PIP USP4 T

he Crown® PIP-USP4 is a 4th generation DSP-based PIPTM (Programmable Input Processor) input module for CTs Series two channel amplifiers. The USP4 connects to an Ethernet network allowing it to be remotely controlled and monitored via System Architect. In addition, the USP4 allows the transport of real-time digital audio via AES3, CobraNetTM or Ethernet AVB. The USP4 is a HiQnetTM series component and connects to the audio control/ monitor network using 100Mb* Ethernet hardware (switches, Network Interface Cards, and cables). The CobraNet or Ethernet AVB audio signal is available over the same 100Mb* Ethernet network, providing a simple to install, single plug solution for audio distribution, control, and monitoring. The USP4’s OMNIDRIVEHDTM processor gives the user an enormous amount of digital signal processing. LevelMAXTM limiters, proprietary FIR and IIR filters, audio routing, faders, meters, polarity & mute, compressors, delays, error reporting and load monitoring are all available. Built in noise and sine-wave generator provide noise masking and test capabilities. The enhanced AUX port allows users to interface with the USP4 to provide additional external control and monitoring. Offering crisp clear sound and the widest dynamic range possible, the PIPUSP4 provides unprecedented power and flexibility in one compact—and very affordable—module. The USP4 can be installed in any CTs two channel amplifier. The USP4 is available in either CobraNet or Ethernet AVB versions for digital audio transport; with both modules still having integrated AES3 transport. The USP4 requires Harman Pro System Architect software. The System Architect software is available at hiqnet.harmanpro.com.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

PIP LITE

Section:

04

NETWORKED PRODUCTS

Page 248

Page 249


ACCESSORIES & APPLICATIONS ACCESSORIES

ACCESSORIES & APPLICATIONS ACCESSORIES

Accessories

Accessories cya

(cover your amp)

VCA-MC4A & VCA-MC8

1-VCAP & 4-VCAP

 FEATURES

3PLUS3 3+3 Extended Warranty

Crown’s No-Fault, 3+3 Extended Warranty package extends the terms of your original full warranty for an additional three years, thus covering years four through six. Available for Crown amplifiers only.

• • • •

1-VCAP provides remote volume control for one or more CTs amplifier channels. Fits into a 1-gang electrical box. 4-VCAP provides remote volume control for four or more CTs amplifier channels. Fits into a 2-gang electrical box.

Wall-Mount Controllers

Section:

04

Crown VCAP panels are wall-mounted panels with potentiometers that provide remote control of the volume of Crown CTs amplifier channels via a VCA-MC4 or VCA-MC8 module installed in the amplifier. Two models are available: 1-VCAP and 4-VCAP. 1-VCAP: Used in conjunction with a VCA-MC module, this is a 1-gang panel with one potentiometer that provides remote volume control for one or more CTs amplifier channels. The potentiometer on the panel is wired directly to the VCA connectors on the VCA-MC. 4-VCAP: This is a 2-gang panel with four potentiometers that provide remote volume control for four or more CTs amplifier channels. The potentiometers on the panel are wired directly to the VCA connectors on the VCA-MC.

Remote Level Control The Crown VCA-MC4A and VCA-MC8 are optional level-control modules for the Crown CTs multi-channel power amplifiers. The VCA-MC4A is for the CTs 4200, and the VCA-MC8 is for the CTs 8200. A VCA-MC module provides independent remote level control for each channel. 4-pin removable Phoenix-style barrier connectors provide the +10VDC control voltage, ground, and control lines for two amplifier channels. Thus, the 4-channel CTs 4200 uses two connectors; the 8-channel CTs 8200 uses four connectors. Crown CTs 4200 and 8200 amplifiers can be supplied with a VCA-MC module already factory-installed, or your choice of MC modules can be easily added to the amplifier by any authorized Crown Service Center.

T-170V Constant-Voltage Transformer The Crown T-170V is a single autoformer that provides impedance matching between an amplifier output and “constant voltage” loudspeakers. It allows amplifiers without direct 70V or 100V output capability to drive distributed speaker systems designed to operate at those voltages.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

 FEATURES

Independent remote level control for each channel. 4-pin removable Phoenix-style barrier connectors provide the +10VDC control voltage, ground, and control lines for two amplifier channels. Optional wall-mount level control panels for use with VCA modules: 1-VCAP and 4-VCAP.

Commercial Audio Accessories

Section: 1 INPUTS: COM OUTPUTS: COM

40V

50V

2 INPUTS: COM

70V 70V

100V

OUTPUTS: COM

40V

50V

3 INPUTS: COM

70V 70V

100V

OUTPUTS: COM

40V

50V

4 INPUTS: COM

70V 70V

100V

OUTPUTS: COM

40V

50V

04

70V 70V

100V

TP–170V

Choosing the Right Module To order accessory modules for your amplifier, please refer to the model tag (located on the back panel of the amplifier) for your amplifier’s specific model number. Then refer to the information below to select the correct accessory for your requirements. CTs4200: VCA-MC4 or IQ-MC4 CTs 4200A: VCA-MC4A or IQ-MC4A CTs 8200 or CTs 8200A: VCA-MC8 or IQ-MC8

Regulatory Certifications

For all CTs Multi-Channel Amp Accessories:

TP-170V Constant-Voltage Transformer Panel The Crown® TP-170V is a rack-mountable panel with four autoformers to provide impedance matching between amplifier outputs and “constant voltage” loudspeakers. This unit allows amplifiers without direct 70V or 100V output capability to drive distributed speaker systems designed to operate at those voltages. The TP-170V is constructed of sturdy steel, and hinged on one side to allow easy access to the inside connections.

RM1 Rack-Mounting Kit

RM2 Rack-Mounting Kit

The Crown RM1 is a single-unit rack-mounting kit. It is designed to be used with Commercial Audio models 135MA and 160MA mixer-amplifiers.

The Crown RM2 is a dual-unit rack-mounting kit. It is designed to be used with Commercial Audio models 135MA and 160MA mixer-amplifiers.

IST Isolation Transformer

S-COVER Security Cover Bulk Pack

The Crown IST is a 600-ohm to 600-ohm isolation transformer used for telephone connectivity. It is designed to be used with Commercial Audio models 135MA and 160MA mixer-amplifiers.

The Crown S-COVER is a 10-pack of security covers. It is designed to be used with Commercial Audio models 135MA and 160MA mixer-amplifiers.

ACCESSORIES

Page 250

Page 251


Section:

04

Installed Sound Product Applications

Section:

04

Live Sound Product Applications Crown Amplifier Warranty

Page 252

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

PRODUCT APPLICATIONS & WARRANTY

Page 253


ACCESSORIES & APPLICATIONS INSTALLED SOUND PRODUCT APPLICATIONS

ACCESSORIES & APPLICATIONS INSTALLED SOUND PRODUCT APPLICATIONS

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

04

Page 254

Section:

04

Page 255


Crown Amplifier Warranty

ACCESSORIES & APPLICATIONS LIVE SOUND PRODUCT APPLICATIONS

USA AND CANADA SUMMARY OF WARRANTY Crown International, 1718 West Mishawaka Road, Elkhart, Indiana 46517-4095 U.S.A. warrants to you, the ORIGINAL PURCHASER and ANY SUBSEQUENT OWNER of each NEW Crown product, for a period of three (3) years from the date of purchase by the original purchaser (the “warranty period”) that the new Crown product is free of defects in materials and workmanship. We further warrant the new Crown product regardless of the reason for failure, except as excluded in this Warranty Warranty is only valid within the country in which the product is purchased.

ITEMS EXCLUDED FROM THIS CROWN WARRANTY This Crown Warranty is in effect only for failure of a new Crown product which occurred within the Warranty Period. It does not cover any product which has been damaged because of any intentional misuse, accident, negligence, or loss which is covered under any of your insurance contracts. This Crown Warranty also does not extend to the new Crown product if the serial number has been defaced, altered, or removed.

WHAT THE WARRANTOR WILL DO

HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE You must notify us of your need for warranty service within the warranty period. All components must be shipped in a factory pack, which, if needed, may be obtained from us free of charge. Corrective action will be taken within a reasonable time of the date of receipt of the defective product by us or our authorized service center. If the repairs made by us or our authorized service center are not satisfactory, notify us or our authorized service center immediately.

Section:

04

DISCLAIMER OF CONSEQUENTIAL AND INCIDENTAL DAMAGES YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RECOVER FROM US ANY INCIDENTAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECT IN THE NEW CROWN PRODUCT. THIS INCLUDES ANY DAMAGE TO ANOTHER PRODUCT OR PRODUCTS RESULTING FROM SUCH A DEFECT. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATIONS OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

WARRANTY ALTERATIONS No person has the authority to enlarge, amend, or modify this Crown Warranty. This Crown Warranty is not extended by the length of time which you are deprived of the use of the new Crown product. Repairs and replacement parts provided under the terms of this Crown Warranty shall carry only the unexpired portion of this Crown Warranty.

DESIGN CHANGES We reserve the right to change the design of any product from time to time without notice and with no obligation to make corresponding changes in products previously manufactured.

LEGAL REMEDIES OF PURCHASER THIS CROWN WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. No action to enforce this Crown Warranty shall be commenced after expiration of the warranty period. THIS STATEMENT OF WARRANTY SUPERSEDES ANY OTHERS CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL FOR CROWN PRODUCTS.

Page 256

9/07

Page 257

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

We will remedy any defect, regardless of the reason for failure (except as excluded), by repair, replacement, or refund. We may not elect refund unless you agree, or unless we are unable to provide replacement, and repair is not practical or cannot be timely made. If a refund is elected, then you must make the defective or malfunctioning product available to us free and clear of all liens or other encumbrances. The refund will be equal to the actual purchase price, not including interest, insurance, closing costs, and other finance charges less a reasonable depreciation on the product from the date of original purchase. Warranty work can only be performed at our authorized service centers or at the factory. Warranty work for some products can only be performed at our factory. We will remedy the defect and ship the product from the service center or our factory within a reasonable time after receipt of the defective product at our authorized service center or our factory. All expenses in remedying the defect, including surface shipping costs in the United States, will be borne by us. (You must bear the expense of shipping the product between any foreign country and the port of entry in the United States including the return shipment, and all taxes, duties, and other customs fees for such foreign shipments.)

Section:

04


Crown Amplifier Warranty WORLDWIDE EXCEPT USA & CANADA SUMMARY OF WARRANTY Crown International, 1718 West Mishawaka Road, Elkhart, Indiana 46517-4095 U.S.A. warrants to you, the ORIGINAL PURCHASER and ANY SUBSEQUENT OWNER of each NEW Crown product, for a period of three (3) years from the date of purchase by the original purchaser (the “warranty period”) that the new Crown product is free of defects in materials and workmanship, and we further warrant the new Crown product regardless of the reason for failure, except as excluded in this Warranty.

NOTES:

Warranty is only valid within the country in which the product is purchased. 1 Note: If your unit bears the name “Amcron,” please substitute it for the name “Crown” in this warranty.

ITEMS EXCLUDED FROM THIS CROWN WARRANTY This Crown Warranty is in effect only for failure of a new Crown product which occurred within the Warranty Period. It does not cover any product which has been damaged because of any intentional misuse, accident, negligence, or loss which is covered under any of your insurance contracts. This Crown Warranty also does not extend to the new Crown product if the serial number has been defaced, altered, or removed.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

WHAT THE WARRANTOR WILL DO Harman Professional Group | 2011

We will remedy any defect, regardless of the reason for failure (except as excluded), by repair, replacement, or refund. We may not elect refund unless you agree, or unless we are unable to provide replacement, and repair is not practical or cannot be timely made. If a refund is elected, then you must make the defective or malfunctioning product available to us free and clear of all liens or other encumbrances. The refund will be equal to the actual purchase price, not including interest, insurance, closing costs, and other finance charges less a reasonable depreciation on the product from the date of original purchase. Warranty work can only be performed at our authorized service centers. We will remedy the defect and ship the product from the service center within a reasonable time after receipt of the defective product at our authorized service center.

HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE You must notify your local Crown importer of your need for warranty service within the warranty period. All components must be shipped in the original box. Corrective action will be taken within a reasonable time of the date of receipt of the defective product by our authorized service center. If the repairs made by our authorized service center are not satisfactory, notify our authorized service center immediately.

Section:

04

DISCLAIMER OF CONSEQUENTIAL AND INCIDENTAL DAMAGES

Section:

YOU ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RECOVER FROM US ANY INCIDENTAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECT IN THE NEW CROWN PRODUCT. THIS INCLUDES ANY DAMAGE TO ANOTHER PRODUCT OR PRODUCTS RESULTING FROM SUCH A DEFECT.

04

WARRANTY ALTERATIONS No person has the authority to enlarge, amend, or modify this Crown Warranty. This Crown Warranty is not extended by the length of time which you are deprived of the use of the new Crown product. Repairs and replacement parts provided under the terms of this Crown Warranty shall carry only the unexpired portion of this Crown Warranty.

DESIGN CHANGES We reserve the right to change the design of any product from time to time without notice and with no obligation to make corresponding changes in products previously manufactured.

LEGAL REMEDIES OF PURCHASER No action to enforce this Crown Warranty shall be commenced after expiration of the warranty period. THIS STATEMENT OF WARRANTY SUPERSEDES ANY OTHERS CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL FOR CROWN PRODUCTS.

9/07

TRADEMARKS NOTICE: Crown, Crown Audio, Amcron, BCA, IQ, Differoid, DBC, IOC, IQ System, Macro-Tech, ODEP, P.I.P., and VZ are registered trademarks; Digital B-Chain, Grounded Bridge, Power-Tech, PIP, PIP2, TCP/IQ, IQwic, SmartAmp, IQ2 and XTi are trademarks of Crown International. Neutrik, Speakon, Windows, Dolby, DTS, HiQnet, CobraNet, ScreenArray, dbx, System Architect, Phoenix and JBL are used for information only and are the property of their respective companies. Crown Audio, Inc. reserves the right to make changes in specifications, software, or products without prior notice. Crown Audio, Inc. also assumes no responsibility for any error in type or print reproduction of the features or specifications in this literature. The information provided in this manual was deemed accurate as of the publication date. However, updates to this information may have occurred. To obtain the latest version of this manual, please visit the Crown website at www. crownaudio.com. Some models may be exported under the name Amcron.

Page 258

Page 259


NOTES:

INSTALL

STUDIO

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

TOUR

Section:

04 05

Section:

04 05

dbx Professional Products

8760 S. Sandy Pkwy. Sandy, Utah 84070

801.568.7660 PHONE

801.568.7583 INT’L

801.568.7662 FAX

customer@dbxpro.com

FAX

2011 FULL LINE

FU LL LI N E CATALO G

www.dbxpro.com

Page 260

Page 261


It began 40 years ago with the vision of a single man to create a better way to record audio and that vision has continued

HISTORY

into a new millennium. The late David Blackmer, who is universally considered to be the father of modern Compression, had a quest to improve the dynamic range of analog recordings using decibel expansion. This quest produced the decilinear VCA and RMS detector which taken together have changed the sonic landscape and made possible so many of our current audio technologies. In 1971, Mr. Blackmer founded dbx® which has collectively produced over 35 patents

that continue to forge and reshape the landscape in the Live Sound, Studio Recording, and Installed Sound professional audio markets today. Our award-winning team of designers and engineers have embraced Mr. Blackmer’s passion for audio purity with a vengeance, and continue to design and build the precise and accurate tools necessary for today’s audio production. From our rock-solid Analog products like the 20-Series EQs and 10-Series Compressors, to our cutting-edge Performance and Commercial Audio products – our System Core (SC), DriveRack and ZonePRO lines – we provide the tools to accommodate all of your audio needs. This brochure is designed to help you navigate through our many product solutions and find the ones that meet your exact needs.

3 Series

SC 64

386

CONTENTS SC 32

DriveRack

®

DriveRack 4800

Section:

05

376

Dynamics 160A

DriveRack 4820

166XS

DriveRack 260

1066

DriveRack 220i

1046

DriveRack PA+

1074

DriveRack PX

266XS

ZonePRO™

Crossovers

ZonePRO 1260 (M)/1261(M)

223XS

ZonePRO Zone Controllers

234S

Blue/Purple Series

234XS

162SL

EQs iEQ-15 iEQ-31

dB10 dB12

Other AFS 224 120A

2231

286S

2031

PB-48

1231

05

Premium Direct Boxes

2015

1215

Section:

223S

ZonePRO 640 (M)/641 (M)

160SL

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

SC

Product Specs

131S 215S

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

231S

9

Page 262

Page 263


SC 64

SC 64

SC 32

D I G ITA L M ATR IX P R O C E S S O R

D I G ITA L M ATR IX P R O C E S S O R

The SC 64 (System Core) is one of the first

for adding forthcoming high bandwidth audio

The SC 32 (System Core) is one of the first

I/O cards. All of these features are housed in a

offerings in a new family from dbx® Professional

transport I/O cards.

offerings in a new family from dbx® Professional

sleek 2U rack chassis.

With dedicated DSP for common processing

Co-developed and shared by elite engineers from all the brands within the Harman Pro group, HiQnet merges the best features of all previous brandindependent communications protocols and thereby benefits from years of combined experience and is simultaneously optimized for all components of the full professional audio system.

9 Stereo Feedback Elimination with 12 feedback notch filters

With dedicated DSP for common process-

Products. Wizard-driven configuration using

SC 32

9 Dual 28-band Graphic EQ

HiQnet™ System Architect makes unprecedented

functions and insert positions for specialized

HiQnet™ System Architect makes unprecedented

ing functions and insert positions for specialized

DSP power, incredible routing flexibility and a

processing, the SC 64 offers many processing

DSP power, incredible routing flexibility and a

processing, the SC 32 offers many processing

9 Classic dbx® Compressor

rich palette of processing tools accessible with

functions including Advanced Feedback Sup-

rich palette of processing tools accessible with

functions including Advanced Feedback Suppres-

9 120A Sub-harmonic Synthesizer

the minimum of training. The SC 64 represents

pression (AFS ), Ambient Noise Compensation

the minimum of training. The SC 32 represents

sion (AFS™), Ambient Noise Compensation (ANC),

the professional foundation on which to build

(ANC), priority ducking, parametric equalization

the professional foundation on which to build

priority ducking, parametric equalization (PEQ),

even the most demanding integrated system.

(PEQ), delay and dynamics.

even the most demanding integrated system.

delay and dynamics.

9 2x3, 2x4, 2x5, 2x6 Crossover Configurations 9 Stereo Multi-band Parametric EQ

The SC 64 has a diverse range of control

The SC 32 has a total analog I/O count of

64, configurable in banks of eight. The chassis

options including HiQnet™ System Architect

32, configurable in banks of eight. The chassis

tions including HiQnet System Architect custom

9 Stereo Output Limiters

supports up to eight analog input and/or

custom control panels, Ethernet, serial, contact

supports up to four analog input and/or analog

control panels, Ethernet, serial, contact closure,

9 Alignment Delay

analog output cards facilitating nine different

closure, the popular ZC wall controllers and even

output cards facilitating five different fully

the popular Zone Controller wall controllers and

fully loaded configurations. Analog input cards

automatically scheduled events. With so many

loaded configurations. Analog input cards accom-

even automatically scheduled events. With so

accommodate a wide range of sources with mic/

methods of control, an SC system can truly be

modate a wide range of sources with mic/line

many methods of control, an SC system can truly

9 Auto-EQ with 28-band RTA

line switching and phantom power per input.

tailored to suit the needs and technical exper-

switching and phantom power per input. One

be tailored to suit the needs and technical exper-

Two high speed option slots provide facility

tise of the intended user.

high-speed option slot provides facility for add-

tise of even the scrutinizing contractor.

9 JBL® Speaker and Crown Power Amp Tunings with Setup Wizard

The SC 64 has a total analog I/O count of

The SC 32 has a diverse range of control op-

9 Pink Noise Generator

ing forthcoming high-bandwidth audio transport

9 64 channels of analog I/O configurable in banks of 8 9 Mic / Line and Phantom Power per channel on Analog Input Cards 9 Ethernet / Serial Control 9 GPIO 9 Rich Palette of Processing Tools 9 Selectable DSP inserts on all inputs and outputs including Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS™), Automatic Gain Compensation (AGC), Compression, De-Essing and Notch Parametric Equalization

9 Complete routing flexibility

9 32 channels of analog I/O configurable in banks of 8

9 Comprehensive configuration, control and monitoring from HiQnet System Architect

9 Mic / Line and Phantom Power per channel on Analog Input Cards

9 Wizard configuration

9 Ethernet / Serial Control

9 Events Scheduler

9 Selectable DSP inserts on all inputs and outputs including Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS), Automatic Gain Compensation (AGC), Compression, De-Essing and Notch Parametric Equalization

9 GPIO

9 Optional Media Engine for media playback and delayed page

9 Complete routing flexibility

9 Rich Palette of Processing Tools

9 Comprehensive configuration, control and monitoring from HiQnet System Architect

9 Optional ZC wall panel control

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

05

SC 64 Products. Wizard-driven configuration using

HiQnet is a communications protocol or language with which all device-types within the full audio signal path can communicate.

Section:

SC 32

Section:

05

9 25 User Programs/25 Factory Programs

9 Wizard configuration 9 Events Scheduler

9 2 Channel XLR Input and 6 Channel XLR Output

9 Optional Media Engine for media playback and delayed page

9 Front panel RTA-M XLR input with phantom power

9 Optional ZC wall panel controllers

9 24-Bit ADC/24-Bit DAC, >110 dB Dynamic Range 9 Full Graphic LCD Display

Zone Controllers The Zone Controllers offer extended utility to the SC, DriveRack

®

and ZonePro families. The nine Zone Controllers use analog DC voltage to provide logic control ranging from zone source selection, volume and muting, to program or scene selection and fire safety interface. Wired with readily available and affordable CAT5 cable with universally accepted solutions to the contractor. For more information on Zone Controllers, see page 12.

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

Page 264

RJ-45 connectors at distances up to 1000 ft, the ZC Zone Controllers offer simple yet elegant

Page 265


D R I V E R A C DK R I V E R A C K ®

D R I V E R A C DK R I V E R A C K

®

®

®

DriveRack 260 ®

COMPLETE EQUALIZATION AND LOUDSPEAKER CONTROL SYSTEM

M

®

®

Section:

05

®

COMPLETE EQUALIZATION AND LOUDSPEAKER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

processors with a selection of Notch Filter-

state-of-the-art signal processing, while

ing, classic dbx® Compression, Auto Gain

9 2.7 Seconds of Alignment and Zone Delay

maintaining a simple and intuitive control

Control, Sub-Harmonic Synthesis, or our

9 RS-232 PC GUI control

interface. This goal has been realized. From

own patented Advanced Feedback Suppres-

the powerful DSP modules to the multiple

sion (AFS™). The DriveRack 260 also offers a

9 Classic dbx Compression and Limiting

control surfaces, the 260 provides all the

configurable Delay with 2.7 seconds of total

9 Graphic and Parametric EQ 9 Auto-EQ Function

Designed to provide incredible flexibility, sonic

processing path for your application, in ad-

processing and control necessary for both

delay time. The 260 provides full Bandpass

excellence and intuitive control for performance

dition to the standard system processing

installation and live use. Additionally, the

and Crossover filtering and routing including

9 Full Bandpass, Crossover, and Routing Configurations

9 48 and 96 kHz operation with Wordclock input

applications, the DriveRack 4800 is the new

functions all with extremely low latency and

Wizard function enables any user to quickly

Bessel, Butterworth and Linkwitz-Riley topolo-

9 Auto Gain Control

flagship of the hugely successful DriveRack family.

extended frequency response. From Signal

9 Full Color QVGA Display (4800 only)

set up and use the 260 to its full potential by

gies. There is parametric EQ available on

From the powerful 96 kHz DSP engine and stan-

Routing, EQ, and Bandpass Filters, to classic

9 4 analog and AES/EBU inputs

dard analog and digital I/O, to the QVGA display

dbx® Dynamics and AFS® Advanced Feedback

streamlining the setup process and providing

each output as well as dbx PeakStopPlus™

9 Pink Noise Generator and full-time RTA

9 8 analog and AES/EBU outputs

and multiple control surfaces, the 4800 provides

Suppression, all the processing is available and

a menu-based setup procedure that includes

Limiting. The 260 provides a full-time RTA for

9 Optional Jensen® I/O Transformers

all the processing, flexibility and control neces-

with the sonic excellence that you would expect

system setup and configuration, Auto-EQ, and

live sound applications, while contractors will

9 Setup Wizard with JBL speaker and Crown Power Amplifier Tunings

9 Full Bandpass Filter, Crossover and Routing Configurations with Bessel, Butterworth, and LinkwitzRiley filters

sary for both installation and live use.

from the world’s leading system processing

Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS™).

appreciate its control inputs for wall-panel

9 Security Lockout

manufacturer. With all this processing power

The DriveRack 260 is based on the same

of the famous DriveRack family, and like

available, control is of paramount importance.

unparalleled design philosophy as the other

9 31-Band Graphic and 9-band Parametric EQ on every input

its predecessor it is engineered to provide

The DriveRack 4800 provides a full color display

products in the DriveRack family, namely, to

“Everything you need between the mixer and the

to speed manual operation; this combined with

provide “Everything you need between the

9 6-band Parametric EQ on every output

power amps”. In keeping with this philosophy

intuitive front panel controls, an easy to use GUI

mixer and the power amps.” In keeping with

the 4800 includes four inputs and eight outputs

and optional wall panel controllers means that

9 Loudspeaker Cluster and Driver Alignment Delays

with both analog and digital connectivity. The

whether your application is tour sound or installa-

that philosophy, the 260 offers 2 inputs and

96 kHz processing engine is capable of offering

tion, the DriveRack 4800 has what it takes.

The DriveRack 4800 is the next generation

9 Selectable DSP inserts on all inputs and outputs including Classic dbx Compression, PeakStopPlus™, Limiting and AFS® Advanced Feedback Suppression among others

insert processing functions to customize the

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

DriveRack 4800 | DriveRack 4820

The 4820 is based on the same operating system as the DriveRack 4800 without the Full Color QVGA Display Interface

9 Feedback Elimination

The DriveRack 260 was designed to provide

Section:

05

9 Wall Panel Control Inputs

logic and volume control.

9 Optional RTA-M microphone

6 outputs on XLR connectors. Each input channel provides a choice of EQ, either a 9-band Parametric or a

9 Ethernet HiQnet networking and control

28-band Graphic EQ. Each input channel

9 dbx ZC wall panel control

also boasts two

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

Page 266

FULL LINE

selectable insert

Page 267


D R I V E R A C DK R I V E R A C K ®

D R I V E R A C DK R I V E R A C K

®

®

DriveRack 220i

DriveRack PA+

®

®

SYSTEM PROCESSOR WITH ADVANCED FEEDBACK SUPPRESSION system and microphone processing. Featuring the

The best just got even better! The DriveRack

the-art signal processing, the DriveRack 220i is the

new, patented Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS®) algorithm, equalization, dynamics process-

PA, far and away the world’s most popular loud

perfect tool for any fixed-install application. With a full complement of processing features and Mic/

ing, delay, matrix mixing, and bandpass filters,

the DriveRack PA+. Showcasing all the features

Line inputs the DriveRack 220i can provide both

the DriveRack 220i will exceed your expectations.

that users around the world have come to

speaker management system has now become

The DriveRack 220i is piloted from the

expect, including easy set up, rock-solid reli-

intuitive DriveWare GUI that offers

ability and unparalleled sound quality, the new

both Configuration and Control of the

version has gone to great lengths to earn its

processing modules. Modules can be

“plus.” With more settings, more control and

accessed, edited and saved as part

enhanced circuitry, the sound you seek is right

of programs. Processing modules can

at your fingertips.

The optional RTA-M real time audio analyzing mic is the perfect accessory tool for the DriveRack PA and 260. Used in conjunction with the System Setup Wizard, the RTA-M is ideal for optimizing the sound quality of even the most difficult of acoustic environments.

be linked between the channels for

05

true stereo processing. If independent

Although the DriveRack PA+ is loaded with

processing is desired, parameters can

functions and features, it is easy to set up and

be copied from one channel to the

use. The dbx exclusive Set Up Wizard walks you

next to ensure that setup is quick and

through system set up with easy to follow step-

easy. Stored programs can be loaded

by-step instructions. Just pick your speakers

from either the front panel or from

and amps from the built-in list on the PA+

wall mounted Zone Controllers. Zone

and then let the Auto Level™ Wizard fine tune

Controllers can also be used for output

the level settings of each speaker. You can

muting or adjusting output volumes.

then let the Auto EQ™ Wizard help you further optimize your sound. Finish up by using the

9 Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS)

9 Noise Gating

9 1.3 Seconds of Delay

9 Graphic and Parametric EQ

9 De-Esser

9 RS-232 PC GUI control

9 Compressor

9 Ducker

9 Mic/Line Inputs

9 PeakStopPlus™ Limiter

9 Bandpass Filters

9 Wall Panel Control

was tuned by a pro. No experience required!

9 Auto Gain Control

9 2x2 Matrix Mixer

9 Security Lockout

Get the most out of your PA with the DriveRack

Use the DriveRack 260 and 220i with Zone Controllers for control at the flick of a switch!

AFS® Wizard, which automatically sets filters to eliminate any feedback during performances.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

9 Setup Wizard Steps Through Speaker and Amp Selection and Levels 9 Auto EQ™ Wizard with 28-Band RTA 9 Auto Level™ Wizard 9 AFS® Wizard 9 Stereo Feedback Elimination with 12 feedback notch filters 9 dbx 120A Sub-harmonic Synthesizer 9 Classic dbx Input Compression 9 JBL® Speaker and Crown® Power Amp Tunings included 9 USB Firmware and Speaker Tunings Field Updatable With Harman HiQnet® System Architect 9 Full time RTA function 9 Front-Panel Output Mutes 9 Pink Noise Generator (used with Auto EQ and Auto Level Wizards) 9 Linked Stereo DSP Processing for ease of use 9 24-Bit ADC/24-Bit DAC, >113 dB Dynamic Range 9 2-Channel XLR Input and 6-Channel XLR Output 9 2x3, 2x4, 2x5, 2x6 Crossover Configurations 9 Dual 28-band Graphic EQ- Linked or Dual Mono 9 Stereo Multi-band Parametric EQ 9 Stereo Output Limiters 9 Output Alignment Delay 9 Power on/off Mute Circuitry 9 Front-panel RTA-M XLR input with phantom power 9 25 User Programs/25 Factory Programs 9 Full Graphic LCD Display 9 Front Panel Input and Output Meters

COMPLETE EQUALIZATION AND LOUDSPEAKER CONTROL SYSTEM

Designed from the ground up to provide state-of-

Section:

®

Section:

05

Within minutes, your system will sound like it

PA+, the worldwide standard in loudspeaker management.

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

Page 268

FULL LINE

(See page 12 for more details)

Page 269


D R I V E R A C ZK O N E P R O ®

DRIVERACK ZONEPRO

®

ZonePRO 1260/M | ZonePRO 1261/M ™

DriveRack PX ®

DIGITAL ZONE PROCESSORS

POWERED SPEAKER OPTIMIZER Powered speakers are a beautiful thing.

patented Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS)

9 Support stereo speakers and subwoofer(s)

Everything you need bundled into one simple,

kills nasty feedback, allowing problem-free

9 Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS)

portable package. Just grab ‘em and go, right?

operation at higher sound levels, while our

9 Supports JBL® and other popular powered speakers

Well, you may think your powered speaker

patented Subharmonic Synthesizer extends bass

9 Graphic and Parametric EQ

9 Easy-to-use wizards for setup, Auto-EQ™, and AFS®

system is complete, but you’re missing half

response for enhanced bottom end. With all

the picture. DriveRack PX is the other half.

that, you also get classic dbx compression and

9 Limiter

In another dbx industry first, we’ve created

the protection offered by our graceful PeakPlus™

a processor specifically tailored for powered

limiting. Your ears, your audience, and your

9 Auto Gain Control

speakers. Utilizing our highly-acclaimed

powered speakers will forever thank you.

9 dbx® M2 measurement mic included 9 Classic dbx compression with graceful PeakPlus™ limiters

DriveRack technology, the PX picks up where

9 Patented AFS Advanced Feedback Suppression

ZonePRO 640/M | ZonePRO 641/M ™

9 De-Esser

DIGITAL ZONE PROCESSORS

Each of the eight members of the ZonePRO

9 Ducker

system changes at predetermined times.

The DriveRack PX Powered Speaker

of your rig. Our exclusive Setup, Auto-EQ, and

9 Auto-EQ optimizes sound quality for any room

Optimizer has everything you need to get

AFS Wizards, and out-of-the-box support for

family of Digital Zone Processors represents an

The recently-introduced ZonePRO devices, the

9 Bandpass Filters

the most out of your stereo powered speaker

a host of JBL and other popular powered

inexpensive and quickly deployed solution for a

640m, 641m, 1260m and 1261m share the same

9 Patented dbx Type IV™ conversion system

system. It even includes stereo or mono

speakers, make setup a snap. Louder, clearer,

diverse range of commercial audio applications.

total numbers of inputs and outputs as their

subwoofer support. With the included dbx M2

better sound from your powered speakers has

Designed with contractors in mind, the ZonePRO

equivalent siblings but feature additional mic/

measurement mic, Auto-EQ corrects for audible

never been so easy.

devices feature Euroblock connectors for easy

line inputs. This increase in the number of

Advanced 99 2x2 MatrixFeedback Mixer Suppression (AFS™) 9 AutoWarmth® 9 1.3 Seconds of Delay 9 Automatic Gain Control (AGC) 99 RS-232 PC GUI control Notch Filter

termination of balanced signals and RCA con-

available microphone inputs further extends the

nectors for straightforward connection of con-

suitability of the ZonePRO family into applica-

sumer equipment. A simple analog bus allows

tions such as conference rooms and presenta-

sources to be shared among multiple ZonePRO

tion spaces.

9 120A Subharmonic Synthesizer

9 2 channel XLR input 9 2 channel XLR output

deficiencies in the room environment. Our

9 2 Channel XLR subwoofer output

devices, facilitating scalability of outputs for

Ambient Noise Compensation (ANC) is also

9 Bandpass and Crossover Filters 9 Security Lockout

and EQ for all inputs and selectable DSP Inserts

outputs to track the ambient noise level, monitored through a microphone and microphone

9 Wall Panel Control

for microphone channels. Input Insert options include Automatic Gain Control (AGC), Notch

input. This feature is particularly well-suited to

Filter, Compressor, Gate, De-Esser and Advanced

applications such as retail environments where

Feedback Suppression (AFS™).

the volume of the audio system can be matched

The routing section of ZonePRO provides Primary Source Selection, Source Ducking for

ZonePRO devices are configured using ZonePRO Designer, a software application which

tion that maintains full frequency bandwidth

contains a Configuration Wizard, which guides

even when the signal level has dropped. Each

users through the step-by-step configuration

output also offers Crossover, EQ, AGC, Compres-

process.

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

All ZonePRO devices offer a built-in Real

9 Ethernet Control (see table)

their associated noise level.

includes AutoWarmth®, a psychoacoustic func-

Time Clock that can provide programmable

9 RS-232 Control

automatically to the number of shoppers and

Paging and Priority Override. Output processing

sor, Limiter and Delay for system optimization.

05

9 Parametric EQ

processing function allows the level of zone

Input processing features gain control

Section:

Compressor 99 Mic/Line Inputs 9 Gate 9 Wall Panel Control 9 De-Esser 9 Security Lockout 9 Limiter

introduced on the ZonePRO ‘m’ devices. This

larger applications.

Page 270

9 Noise Gating

FULL LINE

05

assured we won’t overcomplicate the simplicity

9 Compressor

FULL LINE

Section:

your powered speakers leave off.

In spite of all that sophistication, rest

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

9 Optimized for powered speakers

Page 271


ZONEPRO BLUE/PURPLE SERIES

B L UZEO/ NP EU PR RP OL E S E R I E S

ZonePRO 640/M | ZonePRO 641/M ™

DIGITAL ZONE PROCESSORS

ZonePRO Product Matrix

160SL

The ZonePRO™ family of Digital Zone Processors consists of eight devices with different functionality (see table below). Each device, with optional control from an extensive range of Zone Controllers, represents

COMPRESSOR/LIMITER

an inexpensive and quickly-deployed solution for a diverse range of commercial audio applications. The

05

The 160SL combines the best features of all the

127dB dynamic range and ultra-low distortion.

requirements to solution in just a few mouse clicks.

great dbx® compressors, past and present, and

Encased in a specially designed aluminum-zinc

9 Patent-pending AutoVelocity™ circuit

gives you more versatile performance than ever

housing for shielding and thermal characteristics,

9 127dB of Dynamic Range

before. In addition to having the auto attack

the V8 maintains its superior performance even

and release as well as the hard knee threshold

in the harshest environments. The 160SL offers

characteristics of the classic dbx 160, the 160SL

a plethora of features which include: variable

now offers AutoVelocity manual mode, in addition

attack and release controls, as well as dbx’s latest

9 High-Drive output transformer circuit drives 1000 ft. of Belden® cable at +30dBu with only .007% THD

to our classic OverEasy® mode. dbx AutoVelocity

limiting algorithm PeakStopPlus™, precision 0.1%

technology allows you to find the exact attack and

and 1% resistors, gold-palladium-nickel contacts,

release effect you are looking for. Still on board

Jensen® transformers, gold plated Neutrik® XLRs,

is the venerable dbx Auto mode. Now you can set

and rare earth magnet signal switching relays

your maximum preferred settings in manual mode,

with gold contacts, housed in a hermetically-

and let the 160SL do the rest. The dbx 160SL

sealed nitrogen environment and mounted on

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

Configuration Wizard guides you through the step-by-step configuration process, ensuring that you go from

features dual proprietary V8 VCA modules. This

military-grade glass epoxy circuit boards. The

Section:

state-of-the-art implementation of dbx’s original

end result is the most technologically advanced

Blackmer decilinear VCA boasts an unheard-of

compressor in the world.

Ethernet

Mix Functionality

ANC*

Q

Inputs

Outputs

Front Panel Control

1260m

12

6

Q

6

Q

Q

Q

1260

12

6

Q

2

Q

Q

Q

1261m

12

6

6

Q

Q

Q

1261

12

6

2

Q

Q

Q

Mic Preamps

S/PDIF

640m

6

4

640

6

4

641m

6

4

4

641

6

4

2

Q

4

Q

2

Q

Q

Q

Q

Q

Q

9 Switchable between Hard-knee and OverEasy® Compression 9 Program-dependent “Auto,” AutoVelocity™ or fully variable attack and release manual modes

05

Q

*Ambient Noise Compensation

Zone Controllers The Zone Controllers use analog DC voltages to provide logic control ranging from Volume and Mute control

accepted RJ-45 connectors, the ZC Zone Controllers offer simple yet elegant solutions to the contractor.

ZC1

ZC2

Programmable Volume Control

Programmable Volume Control

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

Page 272

ZC6

Programmable Volume & Mute

ZC7

ZC3

Programmable Selection

ZC8

Programmable Push-To- Programmable Volume Talk Page Assignment and Source Select

ZC4

Program Selection

ZC9

Source Selection

ZCBOB

“home-run” or parallel wiring

ZCFIRE

Fire Safety Interface

162SL

9 Super fast manual attack and release 9 High-Drive Jensen® output transformers

COMPRESSOR/LIMITER The 162SL combines the best features of all the

original Blackmer decilinear VCA boasts an unheard

great dbx compressors, past and present, and gives

of dynamic range and ultra-low distortion seen only

you more versatile performance than ever before.

previously in the Blue 160SL. With sonic clarity

In addition to having the auto attack and release,

designed for the studio, the 162SL maintains its

and the hard knee threshold characteristics of the

superior performance in harsh environment. Like its

classic dbx 160, the 162SL offers AutoVelocity™

big brother, the 162SL takes full advantage of the

manual mode, along with our classic dbx OverEasy®

best parts available and dbx’s advanced manufac-

mode, made standard by the legendary dbx 165A.

turing, including Jensen® transformers on each

All of the 160SL’s features, including variable

output standard. Following in the footsteps of the

attack and release controls and dbx’s latest limit-

Blue Series® 160SL with the Purple Series 162SL,

ing algorithm PeakStopPlus , are included in the

dbx continues to create to the most technologically

162SL. Its state-of-the-art implementation of dbx’s

advanced compressors in the world.

9 Hard-knee/OverEasy® switchable 9 Ultra-low distortion compression for unheard of clarity even under extreme gain reduction 9 Program-dependent “Auto,”’ Patent-pending AutoVelocity™ Manual, or fully variable attack and release modes

FULL LINE

and 220i, and ZonePRO™ units. Wired with readily available and affordable CAT5 cable with universally

FULL LINE

to Contact Closure Program selection and can be used with SC 64 and 32, the DriveRack® 4800, 4820, 260

Page 273


EQs

EQs

EQs

iEQ

EQs

20 Series

®

DIGITAL GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS W/ AFS

GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS

With an EQ heritage that has produced countless industry standard patents and dates back more

Since their introduction, the 20 Series equalizers have become crucial links in the sound systems of countless

than 30 years, the dbx® iEQs™ easily live up to the dbx legacy of uncompromising sonic integrity.

professionals all over the world. From a value perspective, the 20 Series EQs offer an unequalled feature set. The

In addition to unsurpassed Equalization specs, the iEQ also offers the built-in necessities which

crowning feature of each model in the 20 Series is our patented Type III™ Noise Reduction, which enables you

include patented AFS® Advanced Feedback Suppression (which removes unwanted feedback at the

to increase signal-to-noise ratios by up to 20dB. With Type III, the 20 Series can significantly improve the

push of a button), Type V™ Noise Reduction and PeakStopPlus™ limiting. The iEQ-Series represents

noise specs for almost any sound system. Add our patented PeakPlus™ limiter topology; XLR, ¼", and Barrier

a major step forward in the performance of graphic equalizers. From its amazing 10Hz to 22kHz

strip inputs and outputs; durable 45mm nylon sliders; a +12dB input gain range; and informative, four-step

frequency response, to its 110dB dynamic range the iEQs offer out of this world specifications with a

LED ladders to the mix and you’ve got three powerful tools that will let you use your system with confidence.

down to earth price point. Sure to find a home in the studio, on tour and with installed sound ven-

Harman Professional Group | 2011

ues, the iEQs are destined to take their rightful place in the lineage of great dbx signal processors

The 20 Series can significantly improve the noise specs for almost any sound system.

2215 DUAL 15-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

that are the professionals’ choice.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

iEQ-15 DUAL 15-BAND DIGITAL GRAPHIC EQ/LIMITER

2231 DUAL 31-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

Section:

05

Section:

05

iEQ-31 DUAL 31-BAND DIGITAL GRAPHIC EQ/LIMITER

2031 SINGLE 31-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

9 Dynamic range of greater than 113dB

9 ±12dB input gain range

9 User Power Up Features

9 PeakStopPlus Limiting

9 XLR, TRS and Euroblock Inputs and Outputs

9 1/3-octave Constant Q frequency bands

9 Internal Toroidal Transformer

9 Relay Bypass for Power Failure System Protection

9 Switchable boost/cut ranges of ±6 or ±15dB 9 Frequency Response of 10Hz to 22kHz

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

Page 274

9 Revolutionary instant encode/decode Type III Noise Reduction in-circuit at the push of a button. Increases S/N ratio by up to 20dB

9 An extremely high quality EQ, patented Type III Noise Reduction, and the elegant new PeakPlus Limiter all in one great sounding box

9 Patented PeakPlus Limiter threshold range from 0dBu to +24dBu (off) can transparently tame the wildest hits or the subtlest nuances of any signal

9 Four segment LED bar graphs for BOTH Gain Reduction AND Output Level offers the most comprehensive visual feedback available

9 Status LEDs offer visual feedback for all settings on the front panel

FULL LINE

9 18 dB per octave 40Hz low-cut filter

9 Type V Noise Reduction

FULL LINE

9 Advanced Feedback Suppression (AFS)

Page 275


EQs

EQs

EQs

12 Series

2 Series

GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS

GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS

The dbx® 12 Series Equalizers were designed to make versatile, pro-quality

The dbx® 2 Series equalizers were designed to make versatile, pro-quality sound available to users of all

sound available to users of all levels, while offering the simplicity of straight-

levels, while offering the simplicity of straightforward controls. The 2 Series represents a major step

forward controls and providing years of maintenance-free operation in any ap-

forward in the performance of entry-level graphic equalizers. From its amazing 10Hz to 50kHz frequency

plication. The magnetically-isolated transformer, electronically balanced inputs

response, to its 108dB dynamic range, the 2 Series offers great specifications with, a down-to-earth

and servo balanced outputs, RF-filtered inputs and outputs, and power-off

price point. Sure to find a home in the studio, on tour and with installed sound venues, the 2 Series is

hard-wire relay bypass with 2 second power up delay were steps our engineers

destined to take its rightful place in the lineage of great dbx signal processors that are the professional’s

took to ensure compatibility for all installations. Only the best components

choice in signal processing. With such affordable quality, there’s no longer any excuse for compromising

were utilized, yielding a 10Hz to 50kHz frequency response, greater than 90dB

your sound with a lesser EQ than one from dbx.

EQs

The 2 Series represents a major step forward in the performance of entry-level equalizers.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

SNR (ref +4dBu), less than 0.005% THD +Noise (1kHz at +4dBu), and interdetail is contained in a sturdy steel/aluminum chassis.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

channel crosstalk of less than -80dB from 20Hz to 20kHz. All this attention to

131S SINGLE 31-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

1215 DUAL 15-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

Section:

215S DUAL 15-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

05

Section:

05

1231 DUAL 31-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

231S DUAL 31-BAND GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

9 -12dB/+12dB input gain range

9 Servo balanced/unbalanced outputs

9 18dB/octave 40Hz Bessel low-cut filter

9 Power-off hardwire relay bypass with 2-second power-up delay

9 RF filtered inputs and outputs

9 Chassis/signal ground lift capability

9 Constant Q frequency bands

9 Front panel bypass switch

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

Page 276

9 ±12 dB input gain range

9 Switchable boost/cut ranges of ±6 or ±12 dB 9 4-segment LED ladders for monitoring output levels 9 12dB per octave 40Hz low-cut filter

9 Frequency Repsonse of <10Hz to >50kHz 9 Dynamic range of greater than 108dB

9 XLR and TRS Inpts and Outputs 9 Internal Toroidal Transformer

FULL LINE

9 Internal power supply transformer

9 Electronically balanced/unbalanced inputs

FULL LINE

9 Switchable boost/cut ranges of ±6 or ±15 dB 9 XLR, Barrier Strip, and 1/4” TRS connectors

Page 277


3 SERIES DYNAMICS

S I L V E R S E R I E SD Y N A M I C S

386

160A

MIC PRE

COMPRESSOR/LIMITER

The Silver Series 386 dual channel tube mic preamp puts the best of both worlds into one affordable

The 160A offers such time-tested features as switchable OverEasy® and hard knee compression, ex™

cessing available–from smooth, subtle compression to “brick wall” peak limiting. Its electronically

offers up to 96kHz, 24-Bit digital output capabilities in both AES/EBU, and S/PDIF formats as standard

balanced output stage is an outstanding driver for long cable runs (an output transformer is op-

features.

tional). With its unique “INFINITY +” inverse-compression mode, the 160A actually decreases the audio

9 Two channel tube microphone preamplifier 9 Selectable 96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, or 44.1kHz sampling rate 9 24, 20, and 16-bit wordlengths 9 Selectable dither and noise shaping

Section:

9 Word clock sync input and output

9 Selectable mic/line switch

output level below unity gain when the input exceeds threshold. You can even stereo-couple two

9 Separate analog and digital output control

9 48 volt phantom power

160A’s to process a stereo mix without shifting the left/right image. The dbx 160A is truly the standard for dynamics processing.

9 Type IV™ conversion system

9 20dB pad 9 75Hz low cut filter

9 OverEasy® or classic hard knee compression with dbx’s® ultra-musical program dependent attack and release times

9 Precision dual RMS LED display monitors input or output and gain reduction over a wide range and calibrates for different operating levels

9 Independent balanced and unbalanced outputs can drive 600 loads to +24dBm simultaneously. New floating balanced output stage drives any load

9 Compression ratio variable from 1:1 through infinity :1 to negative compression

9 Over 60dB of gain reduction available

9 Optional output transformer capable

9 Exclusive Infinity+ compression allows negative compression

9 Strappable with another 160A for true RMS stereo summing operation

9 60dB of gain and +/- 15dB of output gain

9 AES/EBU and S/PDIF digital outputs

05

9 Phase reverse 9 Segment LED analog/digital

376 TUBE PREAMP CHANNEL STRIP WITH DIGITAL OUT The 376 has taken the essential tools needed for recording and put them all on a single channel strip. The mic/line section on the 376 provides a 12AU7 vacuum tube and offers +48V phantom power, a phase

With auto attack and release controls and separate precision LED displays for gain reduction, compression threshold, and gate threshold, the 166XS allows for quick and accurate setup. Using our True RMS

output capabilities in both AES/EBU, and S/PDIF formats with selectable sampling rates including 44.1

Power Summing™ feature, the Stereo Couple mode provides you with a rock solid stereo image The 166XS

kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz with selectable dithering and noise shaping as standard features. The

also makes advanced applications a breeze with full sidechain functionality, the ability to use either

LED meters provide a clear and concise visual of the signal processing at a glance. We think you’ll agree

hard knee or OverEasy® compression algorithms, and the venerable PeakStop® limiter. The dbx® 166XS is

that the 376 lives up to the uncompromising standards of dbx Professional Products.

the industry standard compressor/gate at a cost within everyone’s reach.

9 Tube microphone pre-amp

9 Front panel instrument input

9 24, 20 and 16 bit wordlengths

9 200V tube plate voltage

9 Drive meter LEDs

9 AES/EBU and S/PDIF digital outputs

9 Selectable mic/line switch

9 Threshold and De-Esser meters

9 +48 Volt phantom power

9 8 segment analog or digital meter

9 Selectable dither and noise-shaping algorithms

9 Goof proof operation to smooth uneven levels, add sustain to guitars, fatten drums or tighten up mixes

9 3-Band Parametric EQ

9 Type IV™ conversion system

9 Compressor

9 Selectable sampling rate (96, 88.2, 48, 44.1kHz)

9 De-Esser

05

COMPRESSOR/LIMITER/GATE

section offers a 3-Band parametric EQ, a classic dbx Compressor, and De-Esser. The 376 also offers digital

9 Word clock sync input and output

Section:

166XS

invert switch, a high impedance ¼" instrument input, 20 dB pad, and low-cut filtering. The processing

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

Page 278

The 160A also includes true RMS level detection, providing the most transparent dynamics pro-

such as +48V phantom power, phase invert switch, and low-cut filtering. In addition, the 386 also

9 New gate timing algorithms ensure the smoothest release characteristics 9 Program-adaptive expander/gates

9 Great sounding dynamics control for any type of program material

9 Balanced inputs and outputs on 1/4” TRS and XLR

9 Separate precision LED displays for gain reduction, compression threshold and gate threshold allow quick, accurate setup

9 Side Chain insert 9 Classic dbx “Auto” mode ®

9 dbx PeakStop® Limiter

9 Stereo or dual-mode operation FULL LINE

Digital outputs on the 386 and 376 are standard features

tremely wide threshold ranges, and controls for ratio and output gain.

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

conversion system. The 386 boasts many of the same features as other products in the Silver Series,

FULL LINE

package by combining the warmth of the irreplaceable vacuum tube with the proprietary dbx Type IV ®

Page 279


D Y N A M I C SD Y N A M I C S

D Y N A M I C SD Y N A M I C S

10 Series 1066 COMPRESSOR/LIMITER/GATE

1074 QUAD GATE

Whether you’re looking for “heavy” compression or subtle gain leveling, the 1066 stereo compressor/ limiter/gate with selectable hard knee or OverEasy® compression is ideal. The 1066’s compressor section allows you to set attack and release times manually or automatically using our convenient Auto preventing low frequencies from punching holes in the overall mix. The 1066’s gate section enables you to clean up unwanted frequencies or mic bleed using its frequency-dependent gain control and the Side Chain External button. With the Side Chain Monitor button and an equalizer, you can select which frequencies will trigger the gate. For overall speaker

Section:

05

ing with threshold, depth and release controls on each channel. The 1074, like the rest of the products in dbx’s® 10 Series, is based on the legendary dbx V2 VCA and offers XLR inputs and outputs, and ¼" side-chain input. In addition to an external key input per channel, the 1074 also has an internal filter that can be independently activated and controlled on a channel per channel basis. This filter allows the 1074 to not only clean up tracks but gives you frequency selective control on each gate, to open exactly when you want it to.

protection, our innovative PeakStopPlus™ technology prevents unwanted transients from blowing your

9 Four independent channels of gating

drivers and minimizes the distortion common to many other “hard” limiters.

9 Independent key filtering

9 Selectable auto (classic dbx®) or manual (variable Attack and Release) compression

9 PeakStopPlus™ limiting for setting maximum allowable level with minimal distortion

9 True RMS level detection

9 Contour switch removes unwanted low frequency information from detector circuit

9 SC Ext and SC Mon for setting up and monitoring external devices for gating function

9 True stereo or dual mono operation

9 Selectable Overeasy® or Hard Knee compression modes

9 True differentially balanced gold-plated XLR and 1/4” inputs and outputs

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Mode. In addition, our famous Contour switch allows you to smoothly compress entire mixes while

The 1074 Quad Gate is the perfect companion to the 1066 and 1046. The 1074 offers 4 channels of gat-

9 Independent Threshold and Release controls

9 Differentially balanced gold-plated XLR and 1/4” inputs and outputs 9 True RMS level detection

9 Stereo Coupling mode 9 Switchable +4dBu or -10dBv operation per channel

9 Precision metering of input level, output level, and gain reduction

Section:

05

9 Switchable +4dBu or -10dBV operation per channel

1046 QUAD COMPRESSOR/LIMITER

266XS COMPRESSOR/GATE

The 266XS delivers everything from mellow “leveling” to aggressive peak limiting.

The 266XS puts pleasing compression and smooth gating within reach of everyone. The classic dbx® compression delivers everything from mellow “leveling,” to aggressive peak limiting. In addition, the Each of the 1046’s four channels allows you to individually select between our classic OverEasy® or hard

266XS’s AutoDynamic™ circuitry continuously adjusts attack and release settings in real time in order to

knee compression, as well as connect each channel for separate purposes. Additionally, our PeakStop-

optimally match program material. The advanced gating circuitry in the 266XS uses a program-dependent

Plus circuitry is the most comprehensive limiting technology available. For easy interfacing with other

timing algorithm to produce ultra-smooth release characteristics—even with complex signals. Thanks to

devices, each of the 1046’s channels also utilizes balanced, gold-plated XLR and ¼" inputs and outputs

the dynamic range of the dbx® VCA, the 266XS can provide reliable gating for any circumstance.

state-of-the-art manufacturing techniques, and of course, our highly sought-after sound quality.

9 Switchable OverEasy® or Hard Knee compression

9 Precision metering of input level, output level, and gain reduction

9 PeakStopPlus™ limiting control for setting maximum allowable level regardless of compressor settings

9 Classic dbx® compression

9 Dual True stereo or quad mono operation

9 Independent Threshold and Release controls

9 True RMS level detection

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

9 Four independent channels of operation, stereo linkable in two pairs

9 Differentially balanced gold-plated XLR and 1/4” inputs and outputs

9 Switchable +4dBu or -10dBV operation per channel

The 266XS also includes separate LED ladders measuring gain reduction, compression threshold, and gate threshold, making the 266XS intuitive and easy to use.

9 Goof proof operation to smooth uneven levels, add sustain to guitars, fatten drums or tighten up mixes 9 New gate timing algorithms ensure the smoothest release characteristics 9 Program-adaptive expander/gates

9 Great sounding dynamics control for any type of program material 9 Separate precision LED displays for gain reduction, compression threshold and gate threshold allow quick, accurate setup

9 Stereo or dual-mode operation 9 Balanced inputs and outputs on 1/4” TRS and XLR 9 Side Chain insert 9 Classic dbx “Auto” mode ®

FULL LINE

and switchable +4dBu or -10dBV operating levels. The 1046 incorporates our standard-setting designs,

FULL LINE

21

Page 280

Page 281


C R O S S O V EPRRSE M I U M D I R E C T B O X E S

P R CE RMOI SU SMO VD EI R ES C T B O X E S

dB10 Passive | dB12 Active

223S/234S Crossovers

DIRECT BOXES

223XS and 234XS XLR versions

Crossovers may do nothing more than direct frequencies, but the thought that went into the 223S and

To provide you with even more flexibility, the 223S and 234S are also available in the form of the 223XS and 234XS which offer balanced XLR input and output connectors.

ferentially balanced TRS ¼" inputs and outputs. To prevent accidental changes of critical settings during

234S is what really elevates the dbx® crossovers above the rest. The 223S and 234S both feature difperformance (which could be disastrous), several of the 223S and 234S’s controls are located on their rear panels. On the 223S, the first of these selects between stereo two-way or mono three-way operation, while on the 234S it selects between stereo two-way, stereo three-way, or mono four-way operation (the selected mode is always visible via two front panel LEDs). Also located on the back panels are switches that allow you to individually select crossover frequency ranges for both channels (again, the front panels feature LEDs to indicate when the back panel x10 switch is activated). The rear panels also allow you

Harman Professional Group | 2011

to mono-sum the low frequency outs. Both crossovers feature Linkwitz-Riley 24dB/octave filters–the pro-

Harman Professional Group | 2011

fessional standard. Each of the units’ channels has a +12dB input gain control and a recessed 40 Hz lowcut (high-pass) filter for removing low frequency rumble. Both the low and high outputs on each channel have phase reverse switches (reconfigurable to operate as mute switches) and gain controls ranging from

At dbx, when we do something, we do it right. So when we decided to create our new direct injection

9 Premium performance

∞ to +6 dB, allowing level matching and muting of individual outputs. The 223S and 234S give you great

boxes, we didn’t settle for the same old tired approach to direct box design. With our dbx name on the

performance, the features you expect from professional crossovers, and the reassurance that you’re buy-

9 Rugged attractive design

line, how could we? One look at our new dB10 Passive and dB12 Active direct boxes will tell you that

ing from the company that has been making the world’s finest audio gear for over 30 years.

9 Stackable chassis w/durable rubber base

these are clearly different. With their bullet-proof construction, and extraordinary audio performance to

9 Gold-plated Neutrik® XLR connector

rival their looks, finally there’s a direct box worthy of the dbx name.

9 Recessed chrome toggle switches

223S/223 XS STEREO 2-WAY, MONO 3-WAY CROSSOVER

Utilizing custom dbx mu-metal-shielded audio transformers, high-quality Neutrik® connectors, and

Section:

05 9 1/4” TRS (223S) / XLR (223XS) differentially balanced inputs and outputs 9 Mode switch for stereo 2-way or mono 3-way operation 9 Stereo/Mono status LEDs indicate the selected mode

9 x10 range switch on both channels 9 40Hz low-cut (high-pass) filter both channels 9 Phase reverse switch on all outputs 9 Individual level controls on all outputs

9 Low frequency summed (subwoofer) output

9 Transformer isolated

low-noise circuitry preserves the sonic integrity and true characteristics of the signal source. Both boxes include a pad switch that accomodates instrument, line and even speaker level signals. Take even more

9 Premium shielded custom dbx transformer

control of your sound by utilizing the polarity invert switch to set the phase relationship between the

9 Hi-Z 1/4” input jack

direct and mic’d sound.

9 Parallel 1/4” thru jack

®

9 Handles instrument/line/speaker levels 9 Flat/high-cut filter switch

SAMPLE SETUP

9 Output polarity invert switch 9 Ground lift switch

9 CSA NRTL/C approved 9 CE compliant

05

9 Balanced XLR Lo-Z output

9 24dB per octave Linkwitz-Riley filters (the professional standard) 9 dbx 2 year parts and labor as standard

Section:

9 5 year U.S. warranty!

Guitar

1

Output on Rear Panel

234S/234 XS STEREO 2/3-WAY, MONO 4-WAY CROSSOVER INPUT

2

3

4

5

6

Mixer

THRU PAD

9 1/4” TRS (234S) / XLR (234XS) differentially balanced inputs and outputs

9 40Hz low-cut (high-pass) filter both channels

9 Stereo/Mono status LEDs indicate the selected mode

9 Mode switches for mono 4-way or stereo 2-way/3-way operation

9 Phase reverse switch on all outputs

9 dbx 2 year parts and labor as standard

9 Low frequency summed (subwoofer) output

9 24dB per octave Linkwitz-Riley filters (the professional standard)

9 CSA NRTL/C approved 9 CE compliant

Mic

Amplifier

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

Page 282

®

FULL LINE

9 x10 range switch on both channels

9 Individual level controls on all band outputs

0dB 20dB 40dB

Page 283


O T H E R P R O TD HU ECRT SP R O D U C T S

O T H E R P R O TD HU ECRT SP R O D U C T S

AFS 224

286S

ADVANCED FEEDBACK SUPPRESSION PROCESSOR

MIC PREAMP PROCESSOR

®

The AFS 224 Advanced Feedback Suppression pro-

processor that offers up to 24 filters per channel

The dbx® 286S’s Mic Preamp and Five processors

reduce headphone leakage or radically gate noisy

cessor has been designed to provide state-of-the-

with filter Qs as narrow 1/80 of an octave. With

9 dbx® standard internal power supply

9 24 Programmable Filters per Channel

can be used independently or in any combina-

guitar amps.

art feedback elimination processing, while main-

such narrow filter Qs, the AFS 224 is able to

9 Frequency control for De-Esser

9 Stereo or Dual Independent Channel Processing

tion. Why mic up vocals and instruments through

taining a simple and intuitive control interface.

remove unwanted feedback, while preserving the

a noisy, blurry mixer? The dbx 286S’s sonically

and status LEDs visually guide you to achieving

The AFS 224 utilizes a no-nonsense user interface

sonic integrity with precision and accuracy. To

pristine Mic Preamp has all the features you need,

the right sound. The floating balanced XLR mic

providing all the processing and control necessary

achieve these staggering numbers, dbx utilized

including wide-ranging input gain control, switch-

input accepts balanced or unbalanced inputs.

for both installation and live use while the AFS

their patented AFS technology that had previously

able 48V phantom power and an 80Hz high-pass

An additional 1/4” TRS phone jack can accept

is an absolute must for any live sound applica-

only been available in the upper echelon of dbx

filter. Use the 286S’s newly designed and patented

balanced/ unbalanced line signals to process live

tion. Ten and twelve filter-per-channel feedback

products and made it available in this stand-alone

OverEasy® Compressor to transparently smooth

electronic instruments or pre-recorded tracks at

elimination processors have become the de facto

processor. In addition to the plethora of feedback

out uneven acoustic tracks or deliver that classic

mixdown. An insert jack between the 286S’s Mic

standard, but the engineering staff at dbx® have

suppression filters available, the AFS 224 also of-

“in your face” rock vocal. Take out vocal sibilance

Preamp and signal processing sections can be

never been content residing in the neighborhood

fers selectable modes, live filter lift, and multiple

and high frequency distortion in cymbals with the

used to “loop out” to external processors (such as

of the status quo. So, to raise the bar once again,

types of filtration.

286S’s frequency tunable De-Esser. Fine-tune the

EQ) or to mix the Mic Preamp’s signal out to an

Enhancer’s HF Detail control to add sparkle and

external destination.

9 Live and Fixed Filter Modes 9 Selectable Filter Lift Times 9 Application-specific filter types include Speech and Music Low, Med and High 9 Input channel Metering 9 24 LED per Channel Filter Metering 9 XLR and 1/4” TRS Inputs and Outputs

Section:

05

they developed a dedicated feedback suppression

crispness to tracks. LF Detail control adds fullness

The dbx 286S’s full complement of metering

9 Expanded meter to show heavy De-Essing

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

9 dbx’s Patented (Advanced Feedback Suppression) AFS technology

9 Above/Below threshold indicator for gate 9 +48VDC Phantom Power 9 Precision detented controls

Section:

05

The cost and hassle of patching together

and depth to vocals and bass instruments while

multiple processors for use on one track can be

simultaneously cleaning up muddy low midrange

frustrating. The dbx 286S gives you all the tools

frequencies. And, the Expander/Gate’s separate

you’ll need in one box, with the shortest signal

threshold and ratio controls allow you to subtly

path to help keep your music sounding clean.

120A SUBHARMONIC SYNTHESIZER

mum levels. The result is unmatched low-end punch at levels that won’t destroy your system. In fact,

PB-48

the 120A is optimized to allow audio professionals to get the most out of their high-performance, low

PATCH BAY

frequency speaker systems, and includes both a subwoofer output (with its own level control) and main outputs that can be configured as either full-range (including synthesis) or high frequency-only.

9 Individual control for two ranges of subharmonic frequencies

9 Front panel LEDs that show crossover status and synthesis activity

9 Separate Low Frequency Boost Circuit

9 Patented circuitry ensures that mid and high frequencies are not affected

9 Separate Subwoofer Output 9 1/4” Balanced inputs and outputs 9 RCA Input Connectors FULL LINE

FULL LINE

Page 284

9 Built-in crossover with choice of 80Hz or 120Hz crossover point

9 Enhance bass audio material for use in a variety of professional applications such as: - Nightclub and dance mixing - DJ Mixing - Theater and Film Sound - Music Recording - Live Music Performance - Broadcasting

The PB-48 patchbay features 48 front panel and 48 rear panel patch points, with 24 useradjustable board assemblies that can be configured–without soldering or wire cutting–for halfnormalled or de-normalled operation. Rugged and noise-free, the PB-48 is designed to serve all your patchbay needs. Whether you want clear and easy access to your mixer and studio gear, reduced wear on your equipment’s jacks, or the ability to quickly re-route devices within your setup, the PB-48’s balanced TRS and unbalanced TS ¼" plugs pave the way.

FULL LINE

smooth, musical low frequencies that don’t interfere with mid- or high-band information–even at maxi-

FULL LINE

Unlike other attempts at bass synthesis, the 120A’s patented subharmonic synthesis process produces

Page 285


PO RT HO ED RU CPTR POS RDP OUE DC UST SC T S P E C S

O PT RH OE RD UPCRT OPSDRPUOECDCT US C T S P E C S

DriveRack, DriveRack, SC, ZonePRO SC, ZonePRO

120Ω 120Ω

• 110 107

• 110 107

6 • •

8 • •

2 • • •

64 • •

120Ω 120Ω 120Ω

44Ω

• 114 112

• 115 112

• 114 112

113 110

48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 96kHz 48kHz 48kHz

24

24

24

24

24

24

112 110

112 110

112 110

115 112

112 110

113 110

48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 96kHz 48kHz 48kHz

24

24

24

Section:

05

24

24

48 bits

24

32 bits

• • • • • • 0.004 0.002 0.002 0.003 0.002 0.004 • • • • • • • • 28-Band 28-Band 28-Band 31-Band 28-Band 9-Band

• •

N/A

N/A

configurable

680

N/A

5120

10

10

configurable

170

configurable

5120

2.7sec 2.0sec

• •

• •

• •

• • •

4(2)

4 •

4

6 •

3(2) 3(2) •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• •

• • •

• • • •

• •

1.75"x 19"x 5.75"

1.75”x 19”x 5.75”

1.75"x 19"x 7.7"

3.5"x 19"x 12.25"

FULL LINE

Page 286

2.7sec

1.75"x 19"x 5.75"

3.5"x 19"x 15"

19"x 15"

19"x 5.75"

19"x 5.75"

19"x 5.75"

19"x 5.75"

2215

2231

IEQ15

IEQ31

• • • • • •

• • • • • •

• • • • • •

• • • • • •

• • • • • •

• • • • • •

• • •

• • •

19"x6"

19"x6"

Section:

05

19"x6" 19"x7.9" 19"x7.9" 19"x7.9" 19"x7.9" 19"x7.9" 19"x7.9" 19"x7.9"

FULL LINE

4 • •

48V

• • • • • •

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

6 • •

15V DC 48V DC

• • • • • •

INPUTS/OUTPUTS Connectors: 1/4" TRS, XLR (pin 2 hot), and barrier terminal strip Connectors: 1/4" TRS, XLR (pin 2 hot), and Euroblock Connectors: 1/4" TRS, XLR (pin 2 hot) Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered Input Impedance: Balanced 40kΩ, unbalanced 20kΩ +22dBu +22dBu Maximum Input Level: >+21dBu balanced or unbalanced • • CMRR: >40dB, typically >55dB at 1kHz Output Impedance: Electronically balanced 200Ω, unbalanced 100Ω • • Output Impedance: Electronically balanced 120Ω, unbalanced 60Ω Output Impedance: balanced 100Ω, unbalanced 50Ω +21dBu >+21dBu >+21dBu >+21dBu >+21dBu >+21dBu >+21dBu >+21dBu >+20dBu >+20dBu Maximum Output Level SYSTEM PERFORMANCE • • • • • • • • • • Bandwidth: 20Hz to 20kHz, +/-0.5dB • • • • • • • • • • Frequency Response: <10Hz to >50kHz , +0.5/-3dB • • • • • • • THD + Noise: <0.004%, at +4dBu 1kHz • • • THD + Noise: <0.04% , 0.02% typical at +4dBu, 1kHz • • • • • • • • • • Interchannel Crosstalk: <-80dB, 20Hz to 20kHz • • • Dynamic Range: >108dB, unweighted 22kHz measurement bandwidth • • • Signal to Noise Ratio: 90dB • • • • • Dynamic Range: >112dB, unweighted • • • • • Signal to Noise: >94dB, unweighted, ref. : +4dBu, 22kHz measurement bandwidth • • • Dynamic Range: 108dB • • • Signal to Noise Ratio: 90dB • • • Noise Reduction: Up to 20dB of dynamic broadband noise reduction • • Noise Reduction: Up to 10dB of dynamic broadband noise reduction Noise Reduction In (+/-6dB and +/-15dB range) • • • Dynamic Range: >120dB , unweighted • • • Signal to Noise Ratio: >102dB, unweighted , ref: +4dBu, 22kHz measurement bandwidth • • Dynamic Range: 109dB 115dB • • • • • Signal to Noise: >94dB, unweighted, ref. : +4dBu, 22kHz measurement bandwidth • • Digital Resolution: 24 bits • • Sample Frequency: 48kHz • • Latency: 2msec FUNCTION SWITCHES • • AFS: Activates dbx AFS™ Advanced Feedback Suppression • • Type V: Activates dbx Type V™ Noise Reduction • • • Type III: Activates dbx Type III™ Noise Reduction • • • • • • • • • • EQ Bypass: Bypasses the graphic equalizer section in the signal path • • • • • • • Low Cut (recessed): Active the 40Hz 18dB/octave Bessel high-pass filter • • • Low Cut: Active the 50Hz 12dB/octave high-pass filter • • • • • • • Range: (recessed) Selects either +/-6dB or +/- 15dB slider boost/cut range • • • Range: Selects either +/-6dB or +/- 12dB slider boost/cut range INDICATORS • • • • • • • • • • 4-LED bar graph (Green, Green, Yellow, Red) at -10, 0, +10, and +18dBu • • • • • Gain Reduction Meter: 4-LED bar graph (all Red) at 3, 6, and 10dB • • • Type III™ NR Active: Yellow LED • • Type V™ NR Active: Yellow, Green, Red LED • • AFS™ Advanced Feedback Suppression Active: Red LED • • • • • • • • • • EQ Bypass: Red LED • • • • • • • • • • Clip: Red LED • • • • • • • • • • Low Cut Active: Red LED • • • • • +/-6dB range: Red LED • • • +/-12dB range: Red LED • • • • • • • +/-15dB range: Red LED POWER SUPPLY • • • • • • • • Operating Voltage: 100VAC 50/60Hz, 120VAC 60Hz - 230VAC 50/60Hz 12 w 12 w 15 w 24 w 24 w 12 w 24 w 24 w 17 w 17 w Power Consumption: (watts) • • • • • • • • • • Mains Connection: IEC receptacle 1.75"x 1.75"x 3.5"x 3.5"x 5.25"x 3.5"x 3.5"x 5.25"x 3.5"x 5.25"x DIMENSIONS: H x W x D

FULL LINE

15V DC 15V DC

0-48dB

2031 IEQ31

1231 IEQ15

1215 2231

231 2215

6 12 • • 2 4 • •

215 2031

12 • 8 •

Graphic EQsGraphic EQs

131 1231

• •

INPUTS Number of Inputs (RTA Mic Input) Connectors: Female XLR Connectors, Euroblock Connectors, RCA • Type: Electronically bal/RF filtered Impedance, >40K 3.5k >50kΩ >50kΩ >50kΩ >50kΩ Impedance, balanced, Euroblock >75kΩ >25kΩ >25kΩ >25kΩ Impedance, unbalanced, Euroblock (& RCA 1260/1261) Max Input Level: Hardware selectable for +30, +22, +14 dBu • • • • Max Input Line Level: +20dBu Mic/Line, +12dBu RCA • Max Input Line Level: +22dBu • • • • • CMRR: >40dB typical, >55 dB at 1kHz CMRR: >45dB 0-48dB 30-60dB 30-60dB 30-60dB 30-60dB Mic Pre gain • • • • • Mic EIN: <-118dB, 22Hz-22kHz, 150kΩ Input Gain Range RTA: 10dB to 70dB w/60dB typical 48V 15V 15V 15V 15V RTA Mic Phantom Voltage: OUTPUTS 32 4 6 4 6 Number of Outputs Connectors: XLR • • • • • Connectors: Euroblock • • • • • Type: Electronically balanced, RF filtered 44Ω 120/60120/60 120/60 120/60 Impedance Maximum Output Level: +25.5 dBu into 1kΩ, +22 dBu into 600Ω • • • • • Maximum Output Level: +20dBu Maximum Output Level: +22dBu A/D PERFORMANCE • • • • Type: dbx Type IV™ Conversion System 113 113 113 113 113 Dynamic Range: (dB) A-weighted 110 110 110 110 110 Dynamic Range: (dB) Unweighted l l l l Type IV dynamic Range: >119 dB, A-weighted, 22kHz,BW >117 dB, unweighted, 22kHz BW 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz Sample Rate 24 24 24 24 24 A/D Wordlength: (bit) D/A PERFORMANCE 113 112 112 112 112 Dynamic Range: (dB) A-weighted 110 109 109 109 109 Dynamic Range: (dB) unweighted 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz 48kHz Sample Rate 24 A/D Wordlength: (bit) SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 32 bits Internal Wordlength • Dynamic Range: >109 dB A-weighted, >106dB unweighted • • • Dynamic Range: >110 dB A-weighted, >107dB unweighted 0.004 0.003 0.003 0.003 0.003 THD + Noise: % typical at +4dBu, 1kHz, 0dB input gain • • • • • Frequency Response: 20Hz - 20kHz, +/-0.5dB • • • • • Interchannel Crosstalk: >80dB typical • • • • • Crossalk input to output: >80dB typical 0.6 msec 0.6 msec 0.6 msec 0.6 msec Propagation Delay PRE EQ – (Input) 9-Band 4-Band 4-Band Type: Graphic EQ per input channel, or PEQ per input channel • Range: +/-12dB range NOTCH FILTERS Number: 1-5 per input channel not to exceed 10 for all input channels • Number: 6 per input channel • Number: 4 per output channel PRE DELAY – (Input) 5120 Length: ms/channel POST DELAY (DRIVER ALIGNMENT) – (Output) 5120 Length: ms/channel TOTAL DELAY TIME CROSSOVER Type: 1x2, 1x3, 1x4, 1x5, 1x6, 2x3, 2x4, 2x5, 2x6, 2x7, 2x8, 3x4, 3x5, 3x6, 3x7, 3x8, 4x6, 4x8 Filter Type: Butterworth, Bessel, or Linkwitz-Riley - Note: PA+, PX - offer no bessel Slope: 6, 12, 18 or 24 dB/octave for Butterworth or Bessel filters 12, 24, 36 or 48 dB/octave for Linkwitz-Riley filters Note: PA+, PX - offer only 12 and 24 LR Type: 1x1, 1x2, 1x3, 1x4, 2x2, 2x4, 2x6 and 2x8 - Bessel 6, 12, 18 and 24 dB/Octave Butterworth 6, 12, 18 and 24 dB/Octave - Linkwitz-Riley 12 and 24 dB/Octave POST EQ - (Output) 6 6 6 Number: EQ bands per output channel • • • Range: +/-12dB range DYNAMICS • • • • • Type: Compressor/Limiter with PeakStopPlus® • • • • • Type: Compressor/Limiter with PeakPlus® • • Ambient Noise Compensation Pink Noise Generator Position: Pink noise inserted on selected input(s) • Pink/White/Sine Phase Compensation Amount: 0-180 degrees phase shift • • Output Polarity: Reversible MISCELLANEOUS Output Transformers: Optional ROM Upgrade: Flash upgradable through USB GUI: RS-232 for computer display and configuration RTA Microphone: Optional (RTA mic included on PX) • • • • • ROM Upgrade: Flash upgradable through RS-232 Dimensions: H x W x D 3.5"x 1.75"x 1.75"x 1.75"x 1.75"x 6 • 4 •

1215

• •

231

• •

215

• •

®

131

• •

1260M 1261M

• •

640M 641M

1260 1261

• 3.5k

1261M

• •

640 641

• •

SC 32 1260M

• •

1261

• •

SC 64 640M 641M

260 SC 32

• •

1260 220i

PX SC 64

32 •

640 4800/4820 641

PA+ 220i

64 •

260

2 • •

PX

2 (1) 2 (1) 2 (1) 4(1) • • • •

PA+

4800/4820

®

Page 287


XLR • • • •

¼" TRS • • • •

XLR • • • •

¼" TRS •

XLR

¼" TRS •

XLR

• •

• •

• • • •

• • • •

• • •

• • •

• • • • • • • • •

• • • •

• • • •

• • • • • • • •

15 w

15 w

15 w

15 w

1.75"x 19"x 6.9"

1.75"x 19"x 6.9"

1.75"x 19"x 6.9"

1.75"x 19"x 6.9"

19” x 10”

CrossoversCrossovers INPUTS Connectors Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered Impedance: Balanced > 50 kΩ, unbalanced > 25 kΩ Max Input Level: > +21 dBu balanced or unbalanced CMRR: > 40 dB, typically > 55 dB at 1 kHz OUTPUTS Connectors: Impedance: Balanced 200Ω, unbalanced 100Ω Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered Max Output Level: > +21 dBu balanced/unbalanced into 2 kΩ or greater SYSTEM PERFORMANCE Bandwidth: 20 Hz to 20 kHz, +0/-0.5 dB Frequency Response: < 3 Hz to > 90 kHz, +0/-3 dB Signal-to-Noise: Ref: +4 dBu, 22 kHz measurement bandwidth Low Output: > 94 dB (Stereo Mode) > 94 dB (Mono Mode) Low Mid Output: >94 dB (Mono Mode) High-Mid: > 92 dB (Mono Mode) Mid Output: > 93 dB (Mono Mode) High-Mid Output: > 92 dB High Output: > 92 dB (Stereo Mode) > 92 dB (Mono Mode) Dynamic Range: > 114 dB, unweighted, any output THD+Noise: < 0.004% at +4 dBu, 1 kHz, < 0.04% at +20 dBu, 1 kHz Interchannel Crosstalk: < -80 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz CROSSOVER FREQUENCIES Stereo Mode: Low/High: 45 to 960 Hz or 450 Hz to 9.6 kHz (x10 setting) Mono Mode: Low/Mid: 45 to 960 Hz or 450 Hz to 9.6 kHz (x10 setting) Mid/High: 45 to 960 Hz or 450 Hz to 9.6 kHz (x10 setting) Filter Type: Linkwitz-Riley, 24 dB/octave, state-variable POWER Operating Voltage: 100 VAC 50/60 Hz; 120 VAC 60 Hz, 230 VAC50 HZ Power Requirements (watts) DIMENSIONS H x Wx D

FULL LINE

FULL LINE

Page 288

19” x 10”

X,T • • • • •

• • • • • • • 1.75"x 19"x 5.75"

dB12

+20dBu

P

A

1 • • • •

1 • • • •

+33dBu +10dBu +33dBu +30dBu +33dBu +33dBu 80kΩ

1MΩ

65kΩ

65kΩ

70kΩ

70kΩ

• • • •

• • • •

• •

• •

• • • •

• • • •

• •

2.20” x 2.20” x 5.44"x 5.44”x 5.82” 5.82”

Circuit Type: A=Active, P=Passive INPUTS Number of Connectors: Instrument/line/speaker level 1/4” TS Connection (Tip Hot, Sleeve GND) Unbalanced, RF Filtered Attenuation Pad: Switchable 0, 20, 40 dB Filter: Switchable, Low Pass @ 6 kHz (40 dB pad position only) Max Input Level (0 dB Pad) Max Input Level (20 dB Pad) Max Input Level (40 dB Pad) Input Impedance (0 dB) Input Impedance (-20 dB) Input Impedance (-40 dB) OUTPUTS Main Output: Male XLR Balanced, Pin 2 Hot Thru Output: 1/4” Unbalanced, TS (Tip Hot, Sleeve GND) Main Output Impedance: 600Ω Typical, balanced Main Output CMRR: 128 dB typical @ 60 Hz, 104 dB typical @ 1 kHz, 98 dB typical @ 10 Hz Main Output CMRR: 106 dB typical @ 60 Hz, 123 dB typical @ 1 kHz, 108 dB typical @ 10Hz PERFORMANCE Bandwidth: 20 Hz to 20 kHz +/-0.1 dB typical Bandwidth: 20 Hz to 20 kHz +0/-2 typical with 600Ω load Frequency Response: <10 Hz to 80 kHz, -3 dB Frequency Response: 10 Hz to 70 kHz, -3 dB with 2 kΩ or higher load Insertion Loss: 21 dB typical Insertion Loss: 1 dB typical Harmonic Distortion: (THD+N) 0.002% typical @ 1 Hz, 0dBu Harmonic Distortion: (THD+N) 0.003% typical @ 1 Hz, 0dBu Noise Floor: -120 dBu, 22 Hz to 22 kHz, unweighted Noise Floor: -112 dBu, 22 Hz to 22 kHz, unweighted Dynamic Range: 153 dB, 22 Hz to 22 kHz, unweighted Dynamic Range: 122 dB, 22 Hz to 22 kHz, unweighted POWER SUPPLY Voltage: +48 V Phantom Power Current: < 8 mA DIMENSIONS: H x W x D

Section:

05

FULL LINE

234XS

¼" TRS • • • •

19”x 9”

50k/25k

INPUTS Connectors: X=XLR, T=TRS ¼" Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered Impedance: Balanced/Unbalanced (ohms) Max Input Level: balanced or unbalanced CMRR: >40dB at 1kHz, typically >55dB @1kHz OUTPUTS Connectors: X=XLR, T=TRS ¼" Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered Balanced: 120Ω/Unbalanced: 60Ω Max Output Level: +20dBu A/D SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A-D Conversion: 24-Bit dbx Type IV™ Conversion System Converter Dynamic Range: >113dB typical, A-weighted, >110 dB typical, unweighted, 22kHz bandwidth Type IV™ Dynamic Range: Up to 127dB with transient material, A-weighted, 22kHz bandwidth Up to 125dB with transient material, unweighted, 22kHz bandwidth Typically 119dB with program material, A-weighted, 22kHz bandwidth Typically 117 dB with program material, unweighted, 22kHz bandwidth Frequency Response: 20Hz to 20kHz, +0/-0.5dB Interchannel Crosstalk: <-80dB at 1kHz, input gain at 0dB D/A SYSTEM PERFORMANCE D-A Conversion: 24-Bit Dynamic Range: 112dB typical, A-weighted, 22kHz bandwidth, 109dB typical, unweighted, 22kHz bandwidth THD+ Noise: 0.003% typical at +4 dBu, 1 kHz, input gain at 0dB Frequency Response: 20Hz to 20kHz, +0/-0.5dB Interchannel Crosstalk: <-80dB at 1kHz, input gain at 0dB DIMENSIONS: H x W x D

FULL LINE

234S

223XS

05

223S

Section:

19”x 9”

234XS

19"x 9"

234S

19"x 6.5"

223XS

19"x 6.75"

223S

19"x 5.75"

X,T •

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

INPUTS Connectors: X=XLR, T=TRS ¼" Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered >40k >50k/>25k >100k/>50k >50k/>25k >40k/>20k >40k/>20k >20k/>10k >50k/>25k Impedance: Balanced/Unbalanced (ohms) >+20dBu >+24dBu >+24dBu >+22dBu >+22dBu >+22dBu +30dBu/+26 +24dBu Max Input Level: Balanced or Unbalanced >45 >45 >45 >45 >45 >45 >80 >40 CMRR: Typical @ 1kHz V1 V1 V1 V2 V2 V2 V8 V8 VCA TYPE T T T T T T X T SIDECHAIN INSERT Connectors: X=XLR, T=TRS ¼" OUTPUTS X,T X,T X,T X,T X X,T X X,T Connectors: X=XLR, T=TRS ¼" * • • • • • • Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered (*266XL is impedance balanced) • • Type: Transformer balanced/unbalanced, RF filtered >120/>60 >30 >60/>30 >30/>15 >30/>15 >50/>25 >30/>15 Impedance: Balanced/Unbalanced (ohms) >+21 >+21 >+24 >+22 >+22 >+21 >+30 >+24/>+22 Max Output Level: (dBu) SYSTEM PERFORMANCE • • • • • • • • Bandwidth: 20 Hz to 20 kHz, +0/-0.5 dB (162SL=+0/-0. dB) -90 -90 -90 -94 -94 -94 -94 -93 Noise: < (dBu), unweighted, 22 kHz measurement bandwidth • • • • • • • • Stereo Coupling; True RMS Power Summing COMPRESSOR • • • • • • Threshold Range: -40 dBu to +20 dBu • Threshold Range: -40 dBu to +30 dBu • • • • • • • Ratio: 1:1 to ∞:1 • • • • • • • Threshold Characteristic: Selectable OverEasy® or hard knee • • • • • Attack/Release: Selectable manual or auto • • Attack/Release: Auto • • • • • • • • Output Gain: -20 to +20 dB • Output Gain: -25 to +25 dB LIMITER N/A Peakstop N/A N/A Peakstop Peakstop Peakstop Peakstop Type ® ® ® ® Plus Plus Plus Plus (162SL two-stage) OPTIONS • 704X Digital Output System • • • • • • Output Transformer: Jensen® JT-123-dbx or JT-11-dbx, BCI™ RE-123-dbx or RE-11-dbx; Jensen standard on 160SL/162SL 1.75"x 1.75"x 1.75"x 1.75"x 1.75”x 1.75”x 3.5”x 3.5”x DIMENSIONS: H x W x D

Direct Boxes Direct Boxes dB10

X,T •

dB12

1074 162SL

X,T •

dB10

160A 160SL

X,T •

Digital Signal Digital Processors Signal Processors AFS224

166XS 1066

X,T •

AFS224

266XS 1046

X •

162SL

1074

X,T •

160SL

160A

X,T •

1066

166XS

X,T •

P R O D U C T PS RP OE DC US C T S P E C S

Compressors/Limiters/Gates Compressors/Limiters/Gates 1046

266XS

P R O D U C T PS RP OE DC US C T S P E C S

Page 289


PRODUCT SPECS

PRODUCT SPECS

376

286A

• • • • 48V • -120

• • • • 48V • -120

• • • • 48V • -120

• •

• •

20k-40kΩ

100kΩ

• • •

• • •

+21dBu

Section:

05

+18dBu

+21dBu

• •

• •

• •

• • •

>21

>18

>21

TS

• • •

• • • •

• • • •

• • • • • • • • • • • • 107dB 107dB

• • • • •

1.75"x 19"x 7.75"

1.75"x 19"x 7.75"

1.75"x 19"x 5.75"

FULL LINE

Page 290

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

20k-40kΩ

MICROPHONE INPUT Connector: Female XLR Pin 2 Hot Type: Electronically balanced/unbalanced Maximum Input Level: -10dBu or +10 dBu with 20dB pad engaged Maximum Input Level: -9 dBu or +11 dBu with 20 dB pad engaged Gain Adjustment Range: +10dB to +60dB Gain Adjustment Range: +30dB to +60dB Phantom Power Pad: 20dB Equivalent Input Noise: Typically -(dBu) typical with a 150Ω source load "A-weighted" LINE INPUT Connector: TRS ¼" Jack Type: Electronically Balanced/unbalanced Impedance: bal/unbalanced Maximum Input Level: 0 dBu or +20dBu with 20dB pad engaged Maximum Input Level: +21dBu balanced or unbalanced Maximum Input Level: +18dBu balanced or unbalanced INSTRUMENT INPUT (Front Panel) Connector: TS ¼" Jack Type: Unbalanced Impedance: 470 kΩ Maximum Input Level (unbalanced) Insert Connector: TRS ¼" Type: Unbalanced LINE OUTPUT Connector: Male XLR Pin 2 Hot and impedance balanced TRS ¼" Connector: ¼" TRS phone balanced/unbalanced Type: Electronically balanced Type: transformer balanced/unbalanced Maximum Output Level: (XLR) +dBu DIGITAL OUTPUTS Connectors: XLR for AES/EBU, RCA for S/PDIF l = both connector types INSERT Connector: TRS ¼" Ring Impedance: >5kΩ Maximum Level: >+21dBu Word Sync Input/Output Connectors: BNC Input Impedance: 75Ω terminated by internal jumper Input: 96, 88.2, 48, or 44.1kHz word clock Output: 96, 88.2, 48, or 44.1kHz word clock A/D CONVERSION Type: dbx Type IV® A/D Conversion System Sample Rate: 96, 88.2, 48, or 44.1kHz selectable Wordlength: 24, 20, or 16 bit selectable Dither Type: TPDF, SNR2, or none Noise Shape: Shape 1, Shape 2, or none Output Format: S/PDIF or AES/EBU Converter Dynamic Range: typical, A-Weighted, 22kHz Bandwidth D/A CONVERSION D-A Conversion 24-bit Dynamic Range: 103 dB typical, A-weighted, 20 kHz bandwidth, 101 dB typical, unweighted, 20 kHz bandwidth THD+Noise: 0.002% typical at +4 dBu, 1 kHz, output gain at 0 dB Frequency Response: 20 Hz to 20 kHz, +0/-0.5 dB Interchannel Crosstalk: < -85 dB at 1 kHz, output gain at 0 dB DIMENSIONS HxWxD

Section:

05

FULL LINE

386

Mic Preamps & Channel Strips

Page 291


INSTALL

JBL Professional

STUDIO

Harman Professional Group | 2011

TOUR

Harman Professional Group | 2011

JBL is the largest brand within Harman. JBL’s home base is part of the Harman International Business Campus, located in Northridge in the San Fernando Valley of Los Angeles. The 44 acre site comprises the offices of JBL Professional, along with Harman Corporate Engineering activities and other corporate functions. JBL Professional’s transducer design and manufacturing processes including machining, diaphragm forming, wire milling, voice coil winding, finishing, assembly and testing are all carried out by dedicated, quality-oriented personnel. JBL Professional loudspeaker enclosures are constructed from components produced in JBL’s extensive wood mill. Automated equipment is used extensively for uniformity and efficiency. Innovative techniques in enclosure materials, construction and assembly methods are employed.

Section:

05 06

Section:

JBL Professional has the most rigorous standards for system power rating in the professional loudspeaker industry. Power testing of transducers is an ongoing activity at JBL Professional. Samples from all production lots are tested at full rated power to industry standards to ensure that they meet the rigid performance specifications set for them. This is the professional customer’s assurance that JBL loudspeakers will continue to perform as expected in the most rigorous professional applications.

dbx Professional Products

www.dbxpro.com

Page 292

8760 S. Sandy Pkwy. Sandy, Utah 84070

801.568.7660 PHONE 801.568.7662 FAX

801.568.7583 INT’L FAX customer@dbxpro.com

2011

THE JBL STORY: 60 YEARS OF AUDIO INNOVATION

FULL LINE

FU LL LI N E CATALO G

05 06

Celebrating sixty years of success in the speaker industry, this book offers details on the people and products that have made JBL famous. It features full-color photos, historical advertisements, and hundreds of diagrams and images, many taken right from JBL’s archives. Topics include stories behind the development of innovative applications for consumer products, as well as systems installations for stadiums, tour sound, movie theaters, recording studios, and places of worship. In addition to the technical info that explains the innovation, this book covers the brilliant engineers, and colorful record producers, musicians and technicians who had the vision to pursue a “better way.” Available at bookstores and on line.

Page 293


PORTABLE PRODUCTS

Portable Products

EON®

The Next Generation

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

For the past 16 years JBL has led the portable PA market with EON, the best selling powered speaker in professional audio history. Since 2008 this new generation continues the class-leading traditions of design, performance, and quality. Featuring three models in the EON500 series and two models in the EON300 series, EON delivers more power, portability, and versatility than any other speaker in its class, raising the bar dramatically for advanced powered loudspeaker systems, while retaining that signature JBL EON® sound.

06 EON. PRX Series. JRX Series. MRX Series. SRX Series. VRX Series. With nearly one million EON’s shipped and millions more passive and powered speakers delivered worldwide, JBL sets the standards for audio quality, ergonomics and reliability in portable PA. From the cost effectiveness of the JRX line, the simplicity of EON, to the groundbreaking line-array designs of the VRX, JBL’s commitment to performance, value and experience are in full force when it comes to portable audio.

From Concerts to Clubs Our passive system solutions like JRX, MRX, SRX and VRX incorporate the cabinet and driver technology developed specifically for Tour Sound, Cinema and Installed Sound markets. VRX900 and SRX700 Series speakers deliver the power and performance you should expect from the highest quality, professional speaker systems. JBL’s patented Differential Drive® speaker technology has reduced speaker weight dramatically while still maintaining the highest level of performance available from a portable PA speaker. And taking the lead from VRX900 and SRX700 Series speakers, MRX500 delivers extraordinary sound quality, power handling and performance at an affordable price.

The Whole is Greater Than the Sum of the Parts Our powered systems incorporate not only the proprietary JBL driver technologies, but integrate signal processing and amplifier technology from sister companies dbx® and Crown®. PRX600 Series offer stellar performance, tremendous utility and exceptional value in a light-weight, rugged package. VRX powered technology is commonly used in demanding situations where high-output and sonic integrity are critical factors in an audio system. And EON Series is the undisputed leader in portable, light-weight plastic enclosures. With the advent of our new EON210P package PA, JBL moves into a new class of product that brings professional features and performance to the general public in a form factor that is simple to use and easy to handle.

JBL means “Portable Performance.”

Page 294

Versatility

Powered by Crown®

EON’s flexible mounting capability, awesome power and extreme light weight set the new standard as the performance do-it-all system for gigging musicians, entertainers, presenters, touring bands and mobile DJ’s. Main or monitor, pole or stand mounted, and even suspended, EON is right at home regardless of the venue or application. Audience expectations are high, and EON delivers.

JBL and Crown® collaboration results in designs of unmatched integration and efficiency. At the heart of the 515XT’s massive output is a Crown Class-D amplifier that delivers high volume, low distortion and continuous performance with superb headroom and power to spare.

Performance Refined EON offers the highest power-to-weight ratio of anything in its class. Extend the low frequency performance of all EON systems with the EON518S. This subwoofer features an 18" JBL Differential Drive® low frequency driver with a massive 500 Watts of power in a compact package that is nearly half the weight of the competition.

High Quality Drivers JBL’s exclusive Differential Drive® technology ensures EON has more power and less weight. These patented low-frequency drivers use neodymium magnets and dual voice coils to perform better than conventional designs with less distortion and at a fraction of the weight. JBL’s next-generation neodymium compression drivers deliver stunningly accurate high frequencies through a new 1" exit design.

Built-in Mixers The innovative built-in 3 channel mixer on the EON515XT all but eliminates the need for an outboard mixer and is one of the keys to the EON’s unmatched popularity. The professional plug-and-play architecture appeals to any artist that has to set up quickly and deliver professional sound. Line level and direct microphone input capability, user selectable EQ, plus a clever mix/loop function for adding additional EONs or sending sub-mixes, ensure EON delivers unmatched simplicity with plenty of expansion capability.

Coverage JBL is constantly advancing waveguide technology to ensure that consistent, balanced sound reaches all of your audience clearly and intelligibly. The Next Generation EON full-range cabinets feature a new 100º H x 60º V asymmetrical design guaranteeing an exceptionally wide coverage pattern and lower distortion.

Section:

06

Portability EON is synonymous with portability. One person can easily lift, load, and mount an EON system virtually anywhere. Deep-welled, full-size handles feature ergonomically designed grip points, while balanced weight distribution and composite enclosures make EON truly one of the lightest and easiest sound reinforcement systems to transport and setup.

Proven Reliability JBL has drawn from over 60 years of world-class speaker design to develop the latest durable lightweight technologies. In addition to the legendary performance of JBL transducers, the new EON series incorporates special limiter circuitry that will protect the electronic components when driven hard, rigorously tested by the world-famous 100-hour torture test. Covered by a full metal grille with protective backing fitted to a robust composite shell, you can assure EON will stand up to the rigors of road abuse and deliver the performance you need every time.

Page 295


PORTABLE PRODUCTS

EON® 300 Series

EON® 500 Series key features

EON® 300 SERIES

f LIGHT WEIGHT FOR TRUE PORTABILITY f COMFORTABLE GRIPS FOR EASY TRANSPORT f BUILT-IN 3-CHANNEL MIXER (EON 510 & 515)

f DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE® LOW FREQUENCY TRANSDUCERS f EFFICIENT CLASS-D DIGITAL AMPLIFIER TECHNOLOGY

key features

f 15" LOW-FREQUENCY DRIVER WITH A

f 100° H x 60° V ASYMMETRICAL WAVEGUIDE

f LIGHT WEIGHT FOR TRUE PORTABILITY

f EFFICIENT CLASS-D DIGITAL AMPLIFIER TECHNOLOGY (EON315)

64MM 2-1/2") DIAMETER EDGE WOUND RIBBON VOICE COIL

FOR UNIFORM AUDIENCE COVERAGE

EON515XT

06

EON510

EON518S

EON305

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

EON315

Section:

EON515XT

EON510

EON518S

The EON515XT was engineered for durability, high performance and ease of use. We’ve extended the reach of the current EON technology by improving input sensitivity, lowering the noise floor, adding user selectable EQ control and re-voicing the system for peak performance and enhanced audio precision. The sturdy construction and superior ergonomic design will guarantee a lifetime of reliability and simplicity. Put it all together and the EON515XT is the toughest, smartest and most impressive EON ever.

The EON510 is a 10-inch, two-way, powered, portable speaker system. Capable of reproducing full bandwidth sound at high levels it offers the additional utility of a 3 channel built-in mixer. The EON510 is comprised of a 254 mm (10 in) Differential Drive® woofer, a 25.4 mm (1 in) neodymium high frequency compression driver coupled to a 100° H by 60° V waveguide. Both components are driven by the discrete channels of a 280 watt Class-D integrated power amplifier. The input section contains all crossover functions, protection, and mixer functionality.

The EON518S is an 18-inch, direct radiating, high performance powered compact subwoofer system designed to extend low frequency performance of any EON system. It also offers the convenience of an integrated crossover and stereo loop-thru capability. The EON518S is comprised of a 460 mm (18") Differential Drive® woofer driven by a 500 watt Class-D digital amplifier.

specifications SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE (-10dB) COVERAGE PATTERN CROSSOVER FREQUENCY SENSITIVITY MAXIMUM SPL SYSTEM POWER RATING TRANSDUCERS: LF HF CONNECTORS: INPUT 3

INPUT 1 & 2 OUTPUT SUSPENSION/MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each) Page 296

EON510

EON515XT

EON518S

Self-powered 10", two-way, bass-reflex design 58 Hz - 18.5 kHz (EQ in ‘Flat’ position) 100º H x 60º V nominal 1.6 kHz

Self-powered 15", two-way, bass-reflex design 39 Hz -20 kHz 100º H x 60º V nominal 1.7 kHz

Self-powered 18", bass-reflex design 36 Hz -130 Hz

121 dB 280 W continuous, 560 W peak 1 x JBL 261F 254 mm (10 in) 1 x JBL 2414H-1 25.4 mm (1in) Balanced XLR / 1/4 inch TRS combo jack

132 dB Crown Class-D 625 Watts (525 + 100) 1 x JBL 265F-1 380 mm (15 in) 1 x JBL 2414H 25.4 mm (1 in) Balanced XLR / 1/4 inch combo jack with XLR loop through Balanced XLR / 1/4 inch TRS jack Balanced male XLR, +20 dBu (peak) 35 mm pole socket with stabilizing screw 4 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point 673 x 406 x 368 mm 26.5 x 16 x 14.5 in 14.8 kg (32.5 lb)

129 dB 500 W continuous, 1000 W peak 1 x JBL 268G 460 mm (18") (4 ohm )

1/4 inch TRS jack Balanced male XLR, +20 dBu (peak) 35 mm pole socket with stabilizing screw 3 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 490 x 315 x 262 mm 19.3 x 12.4 x 10.3 in 7.7 kg (17 lb)

120 Hz (HPF selectable on outputs)

Balanced XLRs with loop through (stereo) to balanced XLR satellite outputs. 1/4 inch speaker level input 35 mm pole socket on top

595 x 569 x 652 mm 23.4 x 22.4 x 25.7 in 29.5 kg (65 lb)

EON changed the way people looked at portable PA well over ten years ago as the all-purpose solution for instant sound reinforcement no matter where you are. And now, EON300 series speakers puts the next generation of EON systems within reach of an even broader range of users, delivering the fundamental elements that make a speaker system an EON at an even more affordable price.

EON305

EON315

The EON305 is a 15-inch, two-way, passive, portable speaker system. It is a light weight loudspeaker system capable of fullbandwidth reproduction at high levels. The EON315 is comprised of a 380 mm (15 in) JBL woofer, a 25.4 mm (1 in) neodymium high frequency compression driver coupled to a 100° H by 60° V waveguide. The system will handle 250 watts continuously and 1000 watts peak.

The EON315 is a 15-inch, two-way, powered, portable speaker system. It is a complete self contained sound reinforcement system, capable of full-bandwidth reproduction at high levels with the added benefit of a microphone pre-amp enabling the direct connection of a dynamic microphone. The EON315 is comprised of a 380 mm (15 in) JBL woofer, a 25.4 mm (1 in) neodymium high frequency compression driver coupled to a 100° H by 60° V waveguide. Both components are driven by the discrete channels of a 280 watt Class-D integrated power amplifier. The input section contains all cross-over functions, protection, and system EQ functionality.

specifications SYSTEM TYPE

FREQUENCY RANGE (-10dB) COVERAGE PATTERN CROSSOVER FREQUENCY SENSITIVITY MAXIMUM SPL SYSTEM POWER RATING TRANSDUCERS: LF HF CONNECTORS: INPUT OUTPUT SUSPENSION/MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

EON305

EON315

15", two-way, bass-reflex design

Self-powered 15", two-way, bass-reflex design 38 Hz - 20 kHz (EQ in ‘Flat’ position) 100° H x 60° V nominal 1.8 kHz

38 Hz - 20 kHz 100° H x 60° V nominal 1.9 kHz 98 dB (1w/1m) 128 dB 250 W continuous, 500 W program, 1000 W peak 1 x M115-8 380 mm (15 in) woofer 1 x JBL 2414H-1 25.4 mm (1 in) Parallel Neutrik® NL4 /1/4" combo connectors 35 mm pole socket with stabilizing screw 4 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point 685 x 438 x 366 mm 27 x 17.3 x 14.4 in 15 kg (33 lb)

127 dB 280 W continuous, 560 W peak 1 x M115-2 380 mm (15 in) 1 x JBL 2414H-1 25.4 mm (1 in) Balanced XLR / 1/4 inch TRS combo jack Balanced male XLR, +20 dBu (peak) o/p level 35 mm pole socket with stabilizing screw 4 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point 685 x 438 x 366 mm 27 x 17.3 x 14.4 in 15.9 kg (35 lb)

Page 297

06


PORTABLE PRODUCTS

EON® 210P key features

06

specifications

f PLUG-AND-PLAY f BUILT-IN 8-CHANNEL MIXER

We’ve developed an ergonomic system that allows you to easily move through life… in and out of cars, through doorways or up and down stairs. With its light weight and compact profile the EON 210P makes transportation and set-up almost effortless.

EON210P

SYSTEM TYPE: FREQUENCY RESPONSE (±3 dB) COVERAGE PATTERN MAXIMUM SPL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER DESIGN SYSTEM POWER RATING CONNECTORS: INPUT Channels 1-4 Channels 5-6 Channels 7-8 OUTPUT CONNECTORS: AMP MONITOR HEADPHONE PHANTOM POWER EQ SYSTEM LIMITER TRANSDUCERS: LF HF SUSPENSION/MOUNTING HANDLES MOUNTING DIMENSIONS (SHIPPING) (H x W x D): NET WEIGHT:

Page 298

Powered mixer with two (2) two-way bass-reflex enclosures 75-19 kHz 100° x 60° nominal 124dB peak system output (pink noise) Crown® Class D 300 W (2 x 150 W Sine Wave Burst) 8 inputs (4 Mono Mic/Line, 2 X Stereo) XLR / 1/4" jack combo connectors (mic level XLR, line level 1/4") One pair of 1/4" balanced TRS jacks (stereo), one pair of RCA jacks (stereo) 3.5 mm stereo jack 2 X 1/4" TS (unbalanced) Pair of 1/4" balanced TRS jacks (stereo), pair of RCA jacks (stereo) 3.5mm stereo jack 30V Individual channel bass and treble controls, center detent, +/-6db cut and boost On -board DSP limiting and tuning 1 x JBL 328H (10 in) woofer 1 x JBL 2414H-1 37.5 mm (1.5 in) annular polymer diaphragm, neodymium compression driver 36mm pole socket with stabilizing screw One on top 36mm pole socket with stabilizing screw 546 x 660 x 349 mm 21.5 x 26 x 13.75 in 15 kg (33 lb) total Powered mixer: 19 lb; Storage pod: 14 lb

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

Whether you’re making a presentation, teaching aerobics or a math class, performing stand-up comedy or making music with friends, it’s not enough to be heard - you need to be understood. That means your personal PA has to be clear, natural and loud. The EON210P from JBL has all of the features you’ll need to reach your audience and make that meaningful impression.

PRX600 Series

The system’s thoughtful modern design makes it a breeze to enjoy “true stereo” audio in just minutes. The 8 input channels, tone controls and digital effects give you the flexibility to cover any situation while its plug-and-play layout makes the entire experience inviting and fun.

Section:

You can feel confidant that JBL’s 60 year commitment to innovation and reliability ensures that the EON210P’s sound quality is pure and that the product will last a lifetime.

EON210P WITH MIXER POD

06

EON210P WITH STORAGE POD

PRX600 Series

Self-Powered Loudspeakers - compact, ultra-lightweight systems … performance you can trust. The PRX 600 Series represents an evolutionary step in the efficient use of amplifier power, rugged durability and enhanced versatility in a self-powered loudspeaker. The speakers were designed from the ground up to perform in the real world of sound reinforcement where challenging audio environments, high ambient noise levels and loud volumes are the norm. And we’ve built these speakers to last a lifetime using tour tested technology that’s reliable and trustworthy. Knowing you can rely on your system to deliver everything you need gives you the freedom to deliver your best. That’s performance you can trust. With the PRX600 Series, as always, JBL delivers.

Page 299


key features

PRX600 Series

f BUILT-IN MULTI-CHANNEL CROWN® CLASS-D DIGITAL AMPLIFIER f FULLY-FEATURED INPUT SECTION WITH PROPRIETARY DSP f USER SELECTABLE SYSTEM EQ

f EIGHT (8) M10 SUSPENSION POINTS AND ONE (1) PULL-BACK POINT FOR EASY INSTALLATION

PORTABLE PRODUCTS

f JBL DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE® WOOFERS f NEODYMIUM COMPRESSION DRIVERS

The PRX 600 Series is a platform technology that allows you to create the system you need from an intelligent range of models. While each model was designed to excel at a specific application, the PRX Series integrate seamlessly with one another offering a multitude of choices when tailoring a system to fit your specific needs.

06

Whether you need a single speaker on a stand for public address situations, a fullrange stereo set up with two top cabinets and a subwoofer for live performance or DJ applications, or multiple cabinets for a scalable, highly professional sound reinforcement situation, the PRX600 Series offers the solutions. In fact, you can even suspend any of the top cabinets for use in a commercial installation or House of Worship. If versatility, scalability, portability and affordability are what you’re looking for in a system, PRX 600’s are the intelligent choice.

PRX625 PRX635

PRX618S

PRX618S-XLF

PRX615M

Section:

06

PRX612M

PRX 612M

PRX625

PRX618S

12" 2-WAY MULTIPURPOSE SELF-POWERED SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM PRX612M is the most compact and versatile speaker in the PRX600 Series line. It has been designed to deliver superior performance for its weight and size as both a stage monitor and a front of house main PA. Two user selectable EQ settings are provided to optimize the system for either application. With a dual socket pole mount, the PRX612M is a perfect match with either the PRX618S subwoofer or the PRX618SXLF subwoofer. Additionally the PRX612M’s microphone input allows for instantaneous use as convenient, single source PA.

DUAL 15" 2-WAY SELF-POWERED SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM If a simple set-up is required and full bandwidth output at high levels is a must, then the PRX625 is most likely the optimum solution. Dual 15” drivers, coupled with the Crown class D amplifiers offer tremendous punch and depth at heart stopping volume levels – maximum levels are rated at 139 db! As with the entire PRX fullrange models user selectable EQ is provided in addition to a direct microphone input option.

18" SELF POWERED SUBWOOFER SYSTEM Compact and powerful, the PRX618S offers the performance of an 18” subwoofer in a package not much larger than a typical 15” sub. With a pole receptacle (that accepts a SS3-BK) on the top panel and integrated stereo pass-thru, with digital cross-over, this is the perfect compliment to the PRX600 full-range systems. Configured with a PRX612M or PRX615m; the result is a highly transportable, high performance subsatellite system. The addition of a polarity reverse option further enables system optimization.

PRX615M 15" 2-WAY MULTIPURPOSE SELF-POWERED SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM The 2-way 15” is the most recognizable form of a portable PA loudspeaker, the perfect balance between size and performance. Due to the unique shape of the cabinet, the PRX615M can double as a stage monitor or a front of house main speaker and for applications requiring full bandwidth sound reproduction, using only a pair of speakers, the PRX615M delivers the optimum balance. For live music, recorded music playback and speech the user has the option of tailoring the EQ, ‘flat’ for speech intelligibility or use with a sub, and ‘monitor’ for enhanced feedback suppression. As with the PRX612M, a microphone can be directly connected to the speaker input for quick on-the-fly PA applications.

Page 300

PRX615M

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011 Section:

PRX612M

PRX635 15" 3-WAY SELF POWERED SOUND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEM The PRX535 offers the highest level of performance in the PRX500 Series that can be mounted on a pole. It is a 3-way configuration and by design, it is the most accurate in the PRX500 Series. With a horn loaded midrange, pattern control is maintained to a much lower frequency resulting in exceptional clarity and uniform sonic projection over the defined coverage area. Ideally suited to applications where the program material, live or prerecorded, has many subtle nuances that are critical to the success of the performance. As with all the full-range PRX600 Series systems, two EQ selections can be used to optimize the system for the program material and/or environment. The input section also accommodates either Line or Mic/Instrument level inputs.

PRX618S - XLF 18" SELF POWERED EXTENDED LOW FREQUENCY SUBWOOFER SYSTEM Featuring an extended low frequency response, this high performance 18” subwoofer system utilizes a 700 watt Crown® class D amplifier in addition to JBL’s Dual-Bridge Technology™, an 18” 2268FF dual voice coil Differential Drive® woofer – technology you need when want to move serious air! The PRX618S – XLF also features a DSP driven input section with selectable crossover, polarity reverse and loopthrough capability for “smart patching” all housed in a rugged, DuraFlex™ covered plywood enclosure with foam backed steel grille, M20 pole mount and non-skid rubber feet.

specifications SYSTEM TYPE

MAXIMUM SPL OUTPUT FREQ. RANGE (-10 dB) FREQ. RESPONSE (±3 dB) INPUT CONNECTORS COVERAGE PATTERN AMPLIFIER DESIGN SYSTEM POWER RATING LF DRIVER

PRX612M

PRX615M

PRX625

PRX635

PRX618S

PRX618S

Self Powered 12" Two-way Bass-reflex 134 dB (full range) peak 133 dB (monitor) peak 50 Hz - 19.5 kHz 60 Hz - 17.5 kHz Balanced XLR / 1⁄4 in combo jack w/ XLR loop through 90° x 50° nominal Crown Class D 1,000 W (2 x 500) 1 x JBL 262F-1 305 mm (12 in) Differential Drive®

Self Powered 15" Two-way Bass-reflex 135 dB (full range) peak 134 dB (monitor) peak 45 Hz - 19 kHz 54 Hz - 18 kHz Balanced XLR / 1⁄4 in combo jack w/ XLR loop through 90° x 50° nominal Crown Class D 1,000 W (2 x 500) 1 x JBL 265F-1 380 mm (15 in) Differential Drive®

Self Powered dual 15" Two-way Bass-reflex 139 dB peak

Self Powered 15" Three-way Bass-reflex 135 dB peak

Self Powered 18" Bass-reflex 129 dB peak

Self Powered 18" Bass-reflex 133 dB peak

40 Hz - 19.5 kHz 55 Hz - 17.5 kHz Balanced XLR / 1⁄4 in combo jack w/ XLR loop through 90° x 50° nominal Crown Class D 1,500 W (3 x 500) 2 x JBL 265F-1 380 mm (15 in) Differential Drive®

41 Hz - 130 Hz 50 Hz - 100 Hz Balanced XLR w/ XLR loop thru, 1⁄4 in speaker level input (mono)

30 Hz - 105 Hz 39 Hz - 93 Hz Balanced XLR / 1⁄4 in combo jack w/ XLR loop through (stereo)

Crown Class D 600 W 1 x JBL 268G 460 mm (18 in) Differential Drive®

Crown Class D 1,000 W (2 x 500) 1 x JBL 2268FF 460 mm (18 in) Differential Drive®

1 x JBL2408H-1 37.5 mm (1.5 in) Asymmetrical, 18mm plywood Dual 36 mm pole socket 8 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point Obsidian DuraFlex™ 592 x 353 x 340 mm 25.3 x 13.9 x 13.4 in 15.6 kg (34.5 lb) 19.2 kg (42.5 lb)

1 x JBL2408H-1 37.5 mm (1.5 in) Asymmetrical, 18mm plywood Dual 36 mm pole socket 8 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point Obsidian DuraFlex™ 660 x 429 x 414 mm 26 x 16.9 x 16.3 in 19.7 kg (43.5 lb) 24.2 kg (53.5 lb)

1 x JBL2408H-1 37.5 mm (1.5 in) Trapezoidal, 18mm plywood Dual 36 mm pole socket 8 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point Obsidian DuraFlex™ 1053 x 430 x 413 mm 41.47 x 16.9 x 16.27 in 27.2 kg (60 lb) 29.2 kg (64.5 lb)

41 Hz - 19 kHz 53 Hz - 18 kHz Balanced XLR / 1⁄4 in combo jack w/ XLR loop through 90° x 50° nominal Crown Class D 1,500 W (3 x 500) 1 x JBL 265F-1 380 mm (15 in) Differential Drive® 1 x JBL 195H 165 mm (6.5 in) horn loaded midrange transducer 1 x JBL2414H-1 25.4 mm (1 in) Trapezoidal, 18mm plywood Dual 36 mm pole socket 8 x M10 suspension points 1 x M10 pull-back point Obsidian DuraFlex 921 x 429 x 413 mm 36.29 x 16.9 x 16.27 in 27.2 kg (60 lb) 29.2kg (64.5 lb)

Rectangular, 18mm plywood

Rectangular, 18mm plywood

Obsidian DuraFlex 685.8 x 530.9 x 614.7 mm 27 x 20.9 x 24.2 in 32.2 kg (70.5 lb) 37.2 kg (82 lb)

Obsidian DuraFlex 685.8 x 530.9 x 716.3 mm 27 x 20.9 x 28.2 in 37 kg (81.5 lb) 42.3 kg (93 lb)

MID DRIVER HF DRIVER ENCLOSURE SUSPENSION/MOUNTING FINISH DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT GROSS WEIGHT

Page 301


key features

JRX100 Series

f PROGRESSIVE TRANSITION™ WAVEGUIDES FOR WELL-CONTROLLED COVERAGE, LOW DISTORTION, AND SMOOTH RESPONSE

f ACOUSTICALLY SUPERIOR 3⁄4" MDF ENCLOSURE CONSTRUCTION FOR RUGGEDNESS AND BETTER LOW END PERFORMANCE

f SONICGUARD™ HIGH FREQUENCY DRIVER PROTECTION

f TOUGH, NON-RESONANT HANDLES AND 18 GAUGE STEEL GRILLE

PORTABLE PRODUCTS

MRX500 Series

JRX125 JRX115 JRX115i

JRX118S JRX118SP

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

JRX112M JRX112Mi

JRX100 delivers the performance and prestige JBL is known for at an affordable price point. Everything that makes a speaker perform and sound its best is included and the things that don’t were eliminated. JRX100 delivers unprecedented value.

Section:

06

JRX115 and JRX115i*

JRX125

JRX118S

The JRX115 is a trapezoidal, 15" speaker system for use in live sound, dance music, and speech reinforcement. As with all JRX100 speakers, it’s equipped with components built in our Northridge, California factory. The speaker includes a dual-angle, 35 mm pole mount socket as well as Neutrik® SpeakOn® and 1⁄4" input connectors.

The JRX125 is a “quasi three-way” design, with the upper woofer covering both lows and mids. The bottom woofer uses a lower crossover frequency and covers only lows, acting as a builtin subwoofer. It offers the extra low-end of a dual 15" speaker while maintaining the superior midfrequency performance of a single driver system.

The JRX118S subwoofer is driven by a massive JBL 18" woofer with a cast frame and 3" voice coil. We’ve even created settings for the dbx DriveRack® PA Loudspeaker Controller.

* In the JRX115i and JRX112Mi, the installation versions, three M10 eyebolts and threaded brackets replace the feet, pole socket, and handles of the portable JRX115 and JRX112M. All other specifications are the same.

specifications SYSTEM TYPE FREQUENCY RANGE (-10 dB)1 FREQUENCY RESPONSE (±3 dB)1 SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE POWER CAPACITY2 PEAK POWER CAPACITY2 MAXIMUM SPL NOMINAL DISPERSION COMPONENTS

INPUT CONNECTORS OUTPUT CONNECTORS DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

Section:

06

JRX118SP The JRX118SP is a self-powered version of the JRX118S. It includes a specially designed amplifier with 500 watts (peak) and 300 watts (continuous) power output. This subwoofer features dual inputs with balanced XLR connectors, built-in stereo crossover network, and a peak limiter to protect the amplifier and speaker from clipping.

JRX112M and JRX112Mi* The JRX112M is a compact and low-profile stage monitor with optimized performance in the critical mid-range. It also includes JBL‘s dual-angle pole socket for use as a front-of-house speaker.

JRX115 & JRX115i

JRX125

JRX112M & JRX112Mi

JRX118S

JRX118SP

Two-Way Speaker 38 Hz - 16 kHz 50 Hz - 12.5 kHz 98 dB SPL 8 ohms 250 watts 1000 watts 128 dB 90° x 50° LF: JBL M115-8A HF: JBL 2412 1 in exit compression driver on Progressive Transition™ Waveguide Neutrik® Speakon® NL-4 (x1); 1⁄4 in TS phone jack (x1); parallel

Dual-15" Two-Way Speaker 35 Hz - 16 kHz 45 Hz - 12 kHz 100 dB SPL 4 ohms 500 watts 2000 watts 133 dB 90° x 50° LF: JBL M115-8A x 2 HF: JBL 2412 1 in exit compression driver on Progressive Transition Waveguide Neutrik Speakon NL-4 (x1); 1⁄4 in TS phone jack (x1); parallel

Two-Way Stage Monitor 60 Hz - 16 kHz 70 Hz - 12 kHz 99 dB SPL 8 ohms 250 watts 1000 watts 129 dB 90° x 50° LF: JBL M112-8 HF: JBL 2412 1 in exit compression driver on Progressive Transition Waveguide Neutrik Speakon NL-4 (x1); 1⁄4 in TS phone jack (x1); parallel

18" Subwoofer 38 Hz - 300 Hz 55 Hz - 300 Hz 96 dB SPL 4 ohms 350 watts 1400 watts 127 dB

18 " Powered Subwoofer 38 Hz - 300 Hz 55 Hz - 300 Hz

699 x 460 x 432 mm 27.5 x 18.1 x 17 in 27.4 kg (61 lb)

1092 x 464 x 426 mm 43 x 18.3 x 16.8 in 42.6 kg (94 lb)

584 x 399 x 325 mm 23 x 15.7 x 12.8 in 19.5 kg (43 lb)

605 x 508 x 551 mm 23.8 x 20 x 21.7 in 32.2 kg (71 lb)

Internal Power Peak: 500 watts Continuous: 300 watts with < 0.2% THD

LF: JBL 2043-G

LF: JBL 2043-G

Neutrik Speakon NL-4 (x 2); 1⁄4 in TS phone jack (x 1); parallel

XLR/M x 2 (line level, balanced); 1⁄4 in TS phone jack x1 (spkr level) XLR/F x 2 (Selectable, Thru or Hi Pass) 605 x 508 x 592 mm 23.8 x 20 x 23.3 in 40.4 kg (89 lb)

1 “Frequency Range” and “Frequency Response” are based on half-space response. 2 “Power Capacity” and “Peak Power Capacity” ratings are based on the average and peak power handling capacity of product

Constantly pushing the threshold for better, more useful products for the working musician and DJ, JBL Professional once again hits the target with the all new MRX500 Series Loudspeaker System. Compact, lightweight, truly portable, the MRX500 is the ultimate PA system for musicians and DJ’s who need fully professional sound and performance within a budget. Taking a lead from the SRX700 Professional Loudspeaker System, these new components deliver extraordinary sound quality, power handling and performance yet, due to JBL’s advanced engineering, benefit from a significant weight savings over traditional designs. The result is a speaker system that will perform well beyond any other system in its class. Featuring as much as 30% less weight than comparable systems, the MRX was designed from the ground up by JBL engineers utilizing brand new lightweight JBL Differential Drive® transducer technology, engineered for this application. Drawing on the vast engineering excellence established with the industry standard and road proven VERTEC® Professional Loudspeaker Series, the MRX delivers outstanding performance for the DJ and musician where a smaller, lighter, more portable system is required with no sacrifice in sound quality or durability. Specifically engineered for MRX and completing the design, a series of rugged plywood enclosures, covered with JBL’s DuraFlex™ finish, a tough, textured scratch resistant surface, that ensures years of solid performance and professional good looks.

samples subjected to a 100 hour power test of the system design using IEC filtered random noise with a crest factor of 6 dB.

Page 302

Page 303


PORTABLE PRODUCTS

key features

MRX500 Series

f DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE® LF TRANSDUCERS f ANNULAR POLYMER DIAPHRAGM COMPRESSION DRIVERS

MRX500 SERIES

f HEAVY DUTY 16 GAUGE PROTECTIVE SCREENBACKED STEEL GRILLE f TOUGH DURAFLEX™ FINISH

MRX525

MRX528S

Section:

06

The Differential Drive® Transducers are perfectly matched to the annular polymer diaphragm compression driver for superior sound quality and power handling in a lightweight package.

The 16-gauge steel grille, with an acoustically transparent screen for additional driver protection, wraps around the sides of the enclosure. All cabinets are finished in DuraFlex™ for ruggedness.

DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE TRANSDUCERS

MRX512M

MRX518S

JBL Professional designed a brand new range of 400W Differential Drive® transducers in 12" and 15" configurations, perfectly matched to the brand new 1.5" annular polymer diaphragm compression driver producing a transducer engine that weighs significantly less than traditional transducer designs, yet their performance, sound quality and power handling are extraordinary.

The MRX512M is a premium, utility/monitor speaker using a JBL 262H 305 mm (12 in) Differential Drive® woofer and a 2408H 37.5 mm (1.5 in) annular polymer diaphragm, neodymium compression driver for 400 watts (continuous) power capacity. A 70° x 70° horn provides smooth, even coverage whether used in the vertical (mains) or horizontal (monitor) orientation. NL4 connectors are provided on both ends of the speaker. A passive network provides accurate reproduction throughout the cross-over region. JBL’s dual angle pole mount is included.

The MRX518S is a compact, high power subwoofer system containing one 2044G 457 mm (18 in) woofer in a front-loaded, vented enclosure. The enclosure is designed to present a minimum frontal area.

CUSTOM WAVEGUIDES The constant beamwidth and power response of MRX500’s custom designed waveguide is perfectly matched to its direct radiating woofers which ensures superb coverage throughout the frequency range of the system.

ENGINEERED ENCLOSURES Combining mechanical design expertise, new materials and a DuraFlex™ finish, MRX500 enclosures have been optimized for minimum weight and maximum ruggedness.

PROVEN NETWORKS Utilizing years of design experience, MRX networks are built using proven components in the most sophisticated topologies in their class. For maximum reliability, all input and loop-thru connections are made via Neutrik® NL4MP connectors. In addition, the input connections can be easily reconfigured on the subs, for an efficient sub/sat cabling option.

DUAL ANGLE POLE MOUNT The dual angle pole mount on the MRX512M and MRX515 offers much more control than the typical single mount. With a 10º down angle the speaker can be directed down toward your audience, keeping the energy off the back wall enhancing coverage and clarity.

Page 304

MRX515 The MRX515 is high-power, lightweight two-way loudspeaker system offering a very high level of performance from a speaker that can be placed on a pole or standard speaker tripod stand. The MRX515 is comprised of a 380 mm (15 in) 265H Differential Drive® woofer which handles 400 watts (continuous) yet the entire system weighs only 19.5 kg (43 lbs). For the high frequencies, the 2408H 37.5 mm (1.5 in) annular polymer diaphragm, neodymium compression driver is mounted to a 70° x 70° horn. JBL’s dual angle pole mount is included.

MRX525 The MRX525 is comprised of two 380 mm (15 in) 265H Differential Drive® woofers with combined power handling of 800 watts (continuous). For the high frequencies, 2408H 37.5 mm (1.5 in) annular polymer diaphragm, neodymium compression driver is mounted to a 70° x 70° horn. The 70° coverage angle of the MRX525 is wide enough to provide coverage of an audience when used one-per-side yet narrow enough to allow splaying of multiple enclosures without excessive coverage overlap. For simplicity, a pair of MRX525s and a single, high-power amplifier is a complete sound system capable of reinforcing bass and kick drum or playing high-level music in clubs and other venues.

MRX518S

Harman Professional Group | 2011

Harman Professional Group | 2011

The dual angle pole mount allows the speaker to be mounted in a vertical position or with a 10° down tilt for optimum audience coverage.

The system offers complete input connection flexibility for compatibility with a variety of cabling schemes. The input panel incorporates a pair of Neutrik® Speakon® NL-4 connectors wired in parallel. The MRX518S is supplied with pins +1/-1 connected to the woofer. This may be easily reconfigured to work with cabling systems intended to drive subwoofers on pins +2/-2. For “Subwoofer/Satellite” configurations, the MRX518S is equipped with a top-mounted, 35 mm pole mount socket that can receive the optional SS3-BK pole. This can be used to mount speakers equipped with standard 36 mm pole sockets and weighing up to 50 kg (100 lbs).

Section:

06 MRX515 MRX512M MRX512M

MRX528S The MRX528S is a compact, high power subwoofer system containing two 2044H 457 mm (18 in) woofer in a front-loaded, vented enclosure. The enclosure is designed to present a minimum frontal area. It is also configured in an upright format to permit the convenient stacking of fullrange enclosures on top without the need for an additional pole. The system offers complete input connection flexibility for compatibility with a variety of cabling schemes. The input panel incorporates a pair of Neutrik® Speakon® NL-4 connectors wired in parallel. The MRX528S is supplied with pins +1/-1 connected to the woofer. This may be easily reconfigured to work with cabling systems intended to drive subwoofers on pins +2/-2.

specifications SYSTEM TYPE

FREQUENCY RANGE FREQUENCY RESPONSE SENSITIVITY: 1 W, 1 m NOMINAL IMPEDANCE POWER RATING 1 Continuous/Program/Peak MAXIMUM SPL @ 1 m COVERAGE PATTERN TRANSDUCERS: LF HF FINISH INPUT CONNECTORS DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) NET WEIGHT (each)

MRX512M

MRX515

MRX525

MRX518S

MRX528S

12" Two-way Stage Utility/Monitor Speaker 60 Hz - 20 kHz(-10 dB) 90 Hz - 20 kHz (± 3 dB) 94 dB SPL 8 ohms 400 W / 800 W / 1600 W, 2 hrs 350 W/ 700 W/ 1400 W, 100 hrs 123 dB SPL cont /129 dB SPL peak 2 70° x 70° nominal 1 x JBL 262H 305 mm (12 in) 1 x JBL 2408H 37.5 mm (1.5 in) DuraFlex™ Neutrik® NL4MP 645 x 380 x 345 mm 25.25 x 15.0 x 13.5 in 14.9 kg (33.0 lb)

15" Two-way Bass-reflex

Dual 15" Two-way Bass-reflex

18" Bass-reflex Subwoofer

Dual 18" Bass-reflex Subwoofer

52 Hz - 20 kHz (-10 dB) 65 Hz - 20 kHz (± 3 dB) 98 dB SPL 8 ohms 400 W / 800 W / 1600 W, 2hrs 350 W/ 700W/1400 W, 100 hrs 124 dB SPL cont /130 dB SPL peak 2 70° x 70° nominal 1 x JBL 265H 380 mm (15 in) 1 x JBL 2408H 37.5 mm (1.5 in) DuraFlex Neutrik NL4MP 700 x 435x 470 mm 27.25 x 17.5 x 18.5 in 19.5 kg (43 lb)

40 Hz - 20 kHz (-10 dB) 57 Hz - 20 kHz (± 3 dB) 100 dB SPL 4 ohms 800 W / 1600 W / 3200 W, 2 hrs 700 W/ 1400 W/ 2800 W, 100 hrs 129 dB SPL cont /135 dB SPL peak 2 70° x 70° nominal 2 x JBL 265H 380 mm (15 in) 1 x JBL 2408H 37.5 mm (1.5 in) DuraFlex Neutrik NL4MP 1240 x 535 x 460 mm 48.75 x 21 x 18 in 38.2 kg (84 lb)

40 Hz - 200 Hz (-10 dB) 45 Hz - 200 Hz (± 3 dB) 100 dB SPL 3 4 ohms 500 W / 1000 W / 2000 W, 2 hrs 400 W/ 800 W/ 1600 W, 100 hrs 127dB SPL cont /133 dB SPL peak 3

35 Hz - 250 Hz (-10 dB) 40 Hz - 250 Hz (± 3 dB) 103 dB SPL 3 4 ohms 1000 W / 2000 W / 4000 W, 2 hrs 800 W/ 1600 W/ 3200 W, 100 hrs 133 dB SPL cont /139 dB SPL peak 3

1 x JBL 2044G 457 mm (18 in)

2 x JBL 2044H 457 mm (18 in)

DuraFlex Neutrik NL4MP 560 x 535 x 700 mm 22 x 21 x 27.5 in 32.5 kg (72 lb)

DuraFlex Neutrik NL4MP 1095 x 535 x 700 mm 43 x 21 x 27.5 in 55 kg (121 lb)

1 IEC standard, full bandwidth pink noise with 6 dB crest

2 Calculated based on power rating and sensitivity.

3 Calculated on half space condition.

factor for specified period.

Page 305


PORTABLE PRODUCTS

SRX700 SERIES

SRX700® Series

SRX700® Series

SRX715

Harman Professional Group | 2011

SRX725 SRX722

SRX728S SRX718S

Section:

06

SRX712M

For over a decade, JBL SR and SRX series speakers have represented the best performance, highest quality, and most advanced driver technology available to portable PA users. The SRX700 series continues that tradition and moves the bar even higher. The advanced technology of SRX700 series speakers delivers the power and performance you would expect from the highest quality, professional systems. At the same time, JBL innovation and design have reduced system weight so load in and load out are a breeze. All this performance is housed in rugged JBL enclosures for years of superb performance. SRX700 uses JBL’s patented Differential Drive® woofers with neodymium magnets. Neodymium’s magnetic properties allow a few ounces to replace pounds of conventional magnet material. While other speaker manufacturers may use neodymium, JBL engineers created a design that reduces the massive (and heavy) steel top plates, back plates, and pole pieces that complete the ”magnetic circuit“. The JBL Differential Drive design uses two voice coils for greater power handling and actually puts the small neodymium magnets inside the voice coil. This design greatly reduces weight while increasing power capacity, decreasing distortion, and reducing power compression. The SRX700 line consists of seven models, each with distinct characteristics and applications. If your requirement is for high-performance PA, there’s an SRX700 model for you. Page 306

All SRX700 two and three-way models may be operated full-range or bi-amplified. The selection is made by means of a high-current, recessed switch mounted on the input plate. (SRX738 uses internal jumpers.) The same switch arrangement is used on the subwoofer to select ±1 or ±2 operation.

Flying versions of the SRX700 two and three-way models are also available as SRX700F models. These offer you the option of selecting economical, forged eyebolts for fixed installation or the convenience of detachable track fittings for portable applications. Just choose the hardware kit that’s right for your application.

SRX712M – 12" two-way stage monitor

SRX722 – Dual 12" two-way

SRX728S